ATA6614Q-PLQW [MICROCHIP]
RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, 16MHz, CMOS;
| 型号： | ATA6614Q-PLQW |
| 厂家： | 
MICROCHIP |
| 描述： | RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, 16MHz, CMOS 时钟 微控制器 外围集成电路 |
| 文件： | 总311页 (文件大小：7388K) |
| 中文： | 中文翻译 | 下载： | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
ATA6614Q
32K Flash Microcontroller with LIN Transceiver, 5V
Regulator and Watchdog
DATASHEET
General Features
● Single-package fully-integrated AVR® 8-bit microcontroller with LIN transceiver,
5V regulator (85mA current capability) and watchdog
● Very low current consumption in sleep mode
● 32Kbytes flash memory for application program
● Supply voltage up to 40V
● Operating voltage: 5V to 27V
● Temperature range: Tcase –40°C to +125°C
● QFN48, 7mm 7mm package
9240I-AUTO-03/16
1.
Description
Atmel® ATA6614Q is a system-in-package (SiP) product, which is particularly suited for complete LIN-bus slave-node
applications. It consists of two ICs in one package supporting highly integrated solutions for in-vehicle LIN networks. The first
chip is the LIN-system-basis-chip (LIN-SBC) Atmel ATA6630, which has an integrated LIN transceiver, a 5V regulator
(85mA) and a window watchdog. The second chip is an automotive microcontroller from Atmel’s series of AVR® 8-bit
microcontroller with advanced RISC architecture and 32Kbytes of flash (Atmel ATmega328P). All pins of the AVR
microcontroller and almost all pins of the LIN System Basis Chip are bonded out to provide customers the same flexibility for
their applications as they have when using discrete parts.
The Atmel ATA6614Q is pin compatible to the Atmel ATA6612P/ATA6613P.
In Section 2. “Pin Configuration” on page 3 you will find the pin configuration for the complete SiP. In Section 3. “Absolute
Maximum Ratings” on page 5 to Section 5. “Microcontroller Block” on page 30 the LIN SBC is described, and in Section 7.
“Ordering Information” on page 307 the AVR is described in detail.
Figure 1-1. Application Diagram
LIN Bus
Atmel ATA6614Q
MCU
Atmel
ATmega328P
LIN-SBC
Atmel
ATA6630
2
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
2.
Pin Configuration
Figure 2-1. Pinning QFN48, 7mm 7mm
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
36 MCUVCC
PB5
MCUAVCC
ADC6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
35 GND1
34 PD4
33 PD3
32 LIN
31 GND
30 WAKE
29 NTRIG
28 EN
AREF
GND4
ADC7
PC0
PC1
PC2
PC3 10
27 VS
PC4
PC5
26 VCC
25 PVCC
11
12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Table 2-1. Pin Description
Pin
Symbol
Function
Port B 5 I/O line (SCK / PCINT5)
1
PB5
Microcontroller ADC-unit supply voltage (referred to as AVCC pin in Section 5. “Microcontroller
Block” on page 30)
2
MCUAVCC
3
4
ADC6
AREF
GND
ADC7
PC0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
PC5
PC6
PD0
PD1
PD2
RXD
INH
ADC input channel 6
Analog reference voltage input
Ground
5
6
ADC input channel 7
7
Port C 0 I/O line (ADC0/PCINT8)
Port C 1 I/O line (ADC1/PCINT9)
Port C 2 I/O line (ADC2/PCINT10)
Port C 3 I/O line (ADC3/PCINT11)
Port C 4 I/O line (ADC4/SDA/PCINT12)
Port C 5 I/O line (ADC5/SCL/PCINT13)
Port C 6 I/O line (RESET/PCINT14)
Port D 0 I/O line (RXD/PCINT16)
Port D 1 I/O line (TXD/PCINT17)
Port D 2 I/O line (INT0/PCINT18)
Receive data output
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17(1)
18(1)
High side switch output for controlling an external voltage regulator
Note:
1. This identifies the pins of the LIN SBC ATA6630
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
3
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 2-1. Pin Description (Continued)
Pin
19(1)
20(1)
21(1)
22(1)
23(1)
24(1)
25(1)
26(1)
27(1)
28(1)
29(1)
30(1)
31(1)
32(1)
33
Symbol
TXD
Function
Transmit data input, active low output (strong pull down)
Watchdog and undervoltage reset output (open drain)
NRES
WD_OSC External resistor for adjustable watchdog timing
TM
MODE
KL_15
PVCC
VCC
Tie to Ground – for factory use only
Connect to GND for normal watchdog operation or connect to VCC for disabling the watchdog
Ignition detection (edge sensitive)
Voltage regulator sense input
Voltage regulator output
VS
Battery supply voltage
EN
Enables the device into normal mode
Watchdog trigger input (negative edge)
High voltage input for local wake-up request
Analog system GND
NTRIG
WAKE
AGND
LIN
LIN bus input/output
PD3
Port D 3 I/O line (INT1 OC2B/PCINT19)
Port D 4 I/O line (T0/XCK/PCINT20)
Ground
34
PD4
35
GND1
Microcontroller supply voltage (referred to as VCC pin in Section 5. “Microcontroller Block” on
page 30)
36
37
38
MCUVCC
GND2
Ground
Microcontroller supply voltage (referred to as VCC pin in Section 5. “Microcontroller Block” on
page 30)
MCUVCC
39
40
PB6
PB7
PD5
PD6
PD7
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
Port B 6 I/O line (TOSC1/XTAL1/PCINT6)
Port B 7 I/O line (TOSC2/XTAL2/PCINT7)
Port D 5 I/O line (T1/OC0B/PCINT21)
Port D 6 I/O line (AIN0/OC0A PCINT22)
Port D 7 I/O line (AIN1/PCINT23)
41
42
43
44
Port B 0 I/O line (ICP1/CLKO/PCINT0)
Port B 1 I/O line (OC1A/PCINT1)
45
46
Port B 2 I/O line (OC1B/SS/PCINT2)
Port B 3 I/O line (MOSI/OC2A/PCINT3)
Port B 4 I/O line (MISO/PCINT4)
47
48
Backside
Heat slug is connected to GND
Note:
1. This identifies the pins of the LIN SBC ATA6630
4
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
3.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 3-1. Maximum Ratings of the SiP
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating
only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational sections of this
specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Parameters
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
HBM ESD
ANSI/ESD-STM5.1
JESD22-A114
AEC-Q100 (002)
±2
KV
CDM ESD STM 5.3.1
±750
±100
V
V
Machine Model ESD AEC-Q100-Rev.F (003)
ESD according to IBEE LIN EMC
Test Spec. 1.0 following IEC 61000-4-2
- Pin VS, LIN to GND
±8
KV
- Pin WAKE (2.7k serial resistor) to GND
- KL_15 (47k/100nF) to GND
ESD HBM following STM5.1 with 1.5k 100pF
- Pin VS, LIN, KL_15, WAKE to GND
±6
KV
Storage temperature
Operating temperature(1)
Ts
–55
–40
+150
+125
°C
°C
Tcase
Rthjc
Rthja
Thermal resistance junction to heat slug
Thermal resistance junction to ambient
Thermal shutdown of VCC regulator
Thermal shutdown of LIN output
Thermal shutdown hysteresis
5
K/W
K/W
°C
25
150
150
165
165
10
170
170
°C
°C
Note:
1. Tcase means the temperature of the heat slug (backside). It is mandatory that this backside temperature is ≤ 125°C in
the application.
Table 3-2. Maximum Ratings of the LIN-SBC
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating
only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational sections of this
specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Parameters
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Supply voltage VS
VS
–0.3
+40
V
Pulse time ≤ 500ms; Ta = 25°C
Output current IVCC ≤ 85mA
VS
VS
+40
27
V
V
Pulse time ≤ 2min; Ta = 25°C
Output current IVCC ≤ 85mA
WAKE (with 2.7k serial resistor)
KL_15 (with 47k/100nF)
DC voltage
–1
–150
+40
+100
V
V
Transient voltage due to ISO7637 (coupling 1nF)
INH
- DC voltage
–0.3
–27
VS + 0.3
+40
V
V
LIN
- DC voltage
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
5
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 3-2. Maximum Ratings of the LIN-SBC (Continued)
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating
only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational sections of this
specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Parameters
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
VCC + 0.5
+2
Unit
V
Logic pins (RXD, TXD, EN, NRES, NTRIG,
WD_OSC, MODE, TM)
–0.3
Output current NRES
INRES
mA
PVCC DC voltage
VCC DC voltage
–0.3
–0.3
+5.5
+6.5
V
V
Table 3-3. Maximum Ratings of the Microcontroller
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating
only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational sections of this
specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Parameters
Symbol
Min.
–0.5
–0.5
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Voltage on any Pin except RESET with respect to
Ground
MCUVCC +
0.5
V
Voltage on RESET with respect to Ground
Maximum Operating Voltage
13.0
6.0
V
V
DC Current per I/O Pin
40.0
200.0
±5.0
±1.0
mA
mA
mA
mA
DC Current MCUVCC and GND Pins
Injection Current at MCUVCC = 0V(1)
Injection Current at MCUVCC = 5V
Note:
1. Maximum current per port = ±30mA
6
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.
LIN System-basis-chip Block
4.1
Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
Master and slave operation possible
Supply voltage up to 40V
Operating voltage VS = 5V to 27V
Typically 10µA supply current during sleep mode
Typically 35µA supply current in silent mode
Linear low-drop voltage regulator, 85mA current capability:
●
Normal, fail-safe, and silent mode
CC = 5.0V ±2%
In sleep mode VCC is switched off
●
V
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
VCC undervoltage detection (4ms reset time) and watchdog reset logical combined at open drain output NRES
Negative trigger input for watchdog
Adjustable watchdog time via external resistor
Boosting the voltage regulator possible with an external NPN transistor
LIN physical layer according to LIN 2.0, 2.1 and SAEJ2602-2
Wake-up capability via LIN-bus, wake pin, or Kl_15 pin
INH output to control an external voltage regulator or to switch off the master pull up resistor
TXD time-out timer
Bus pin is overtemperature and short-circuit protected versus GND and battery
Advanced EMC and ESD performance
Fulfills the OEM “Hardware Requirements for LIN in Automotive Applications Rev.1.1”
Interference and damage protection according to ISO7637
4.2
Description
The Atmel® ATA6630 is a fully integrated LIN transceiver, which complies with the LIN 2.0, 2.1 and SAEJ2602-2
specifications. It has a low-drop voltage regulator for 5V/85mA output and a window watchdog. The voltage regulator is able
to source up to 85mA, but the output current can be boosted by using an external NPN transistor. The Atmel ATA6630 is
designed to handle the low-speed data communication in vehicles, e.g., in convenience electronics. Improved slope control
at the LIN-driver ensures secure data communication up to 20kBaud. Sleep Mode and Silent Mode guarantee very low
current consumption.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
7
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 4-1. Block Diagram SBC
VS
Normal and
Fail-safe
Mode
INH
PVCC
Normal
Mode
Receiver
-
RXD
+
RF Filter
LIN
WAKE
KL_15
Edge
Detection
Wake-up
Bus Timer
Short Circuit and
PVCC
Overtemperature
Protection
Slew Rate Control
TXD
Time-out
Timer
TXD
EN
Control Unit
Mode Select
Normal/Silent/
Fail-safe Mode
5V
VCC
PVCC
Debounce
Time
Undervoltage
Reset
NRES
OUT
Watchdog
Adjustable
Watchdog
Oscillator
Internal Testing
WD_OSC
Unit
GND
PVCC
MODE TM
NTRIG
8
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.3
Functional Description
4.3.1 Physical Layer Compatibility
Since the LIN physical layer is independent from higher LIN layers (e.g., the LIN protocol layer), all nodes with a LIN physical
layer according to revision 2.x can be mixed with LIN physical layer nodes, which are, according to older versions (i.e., LIN
1.0, LIN 1.1, LIN 1.2, LIN 1.3), without any restrictions.
4.3.2 Supply Pin (VS)
The LIN operating voltage is VS = 5V to 27V. An undervoltage detection is implemented to disable data transmission if VS
falls below VSth in order to avoid false bus messages. After switching on VS, the IC starts in fail-safe mode, and the voltage
regulator is switched on (5V/85mA output capability).
The supply current is typically 10µA in sleep mode and 35µA in silent mode.
4.3.3 Ground Pin (GND)
The IC does not affect the LIN Bus in the event of GND disconnection. It is able to handle a ground shift up to 11.5% of
versus The mandatory system ground is pin 5.
4.3.4 Voltage Regulator Output Pin (VCC)
The internal 3.3V/5V voltage regulator is capable of driving loads up to 50mA. It is able to supply the microcontroller and
other ICs on the PCB and is protected against overloads by means of current limitation and overtemperature shut-down.
Furthermore, the output voltage is monitored and will cause a reset signal at the NRES output pin if it drops below a defined
threshold Vthun. To boost up the maximum load current, an external NPN transistor may be used, with its base connected to
the VCC pin and its emitter connected to PVCC.
4.3.5 Voltage Regulator Sense Pin (PVCC)
The PVCC is the sense input pin of the 5V voltage regulator. For normal applications (i.e., when only using the internal
output transistor), this pin must be connected to the VCC pin. If an external boosting transistor is used, the PVCC pin must
be connected to the output of this transistor, i.e., its emitter terminal.
4.3.6 Bus Pin (LIN)
A low-side driver with internal current limitation and thermal shutdown and an internal pull-up resistor compliant with the LIN
2.x specification are implemented. The allowed voltage range is between –27V and +40V. Reverse currents from the LIN
bus to VS are suppressed, even in the event of GND shifts or battery disconnection. LIN receiver thresholds are compatible
with the LIN protocol specification. The fall time from recessive to dominant bus state and the rise time from dominant to
recessive bus state are slope controlled.
4.3.7 Input/Output Pin (TXD)
In normal mode the TXD pin is the microcontroller interface used to control the state of the LIN output. TXD must be pulled to
ground in order to have a low LIN-bus. If TXD is high or not connected (internal pull-up resistor), the LIN output transistor is
turned off, and the bus is in recessive state. During Fail-safe Mode, this pin is used as output and is signalling the fail-safe
source (together with the RXD output). It is current-limited to < 8mA.
4.3.8 TXD Dominant Time-out Function
The TXD input has an internal pull-up resistor. An internal timer prevents the bus line from being driven permanently in
dominant state. If TXD is forced to low for longer than tDOM > 27ms, the LIN-bus driver is switched to recessive state.
Nevertheless, when switching to sleep mode, the actual level at the TXD pin is relevant.
To reactivate the LIN bus driver, switch TXD to high (> 10µs).
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.3.9 Output Pin (RXD)
This output pin reports the state of the LIN-bus to the microcontroller. LIN high (recessive state) is reported by a high level at
RXD; LIN low (dominant state) is reported by a low level at RXD. The output has an internal pull-up resistor with typically
5k to PVCC. The AC characteristics can be defined with an external load capacitor of 20pF.
The output is short-circuit protected. RXD is switched off in Unpowered Mode (i.e., VS = 0V).
During Fail-safe Mode it is signalling the fail-safe source (together with the TXD- pin).
4.3.10 Enable Input Pin (EN)
The Enable Input pin controls the operation mode of the device. If EN is high, the circuit is in Normal Mode, with transmission
paths from TXD to LIN and from LIN to RXD both active. The VCC voltage regulator operates with 5V/85mA output
capability.
If EN is switched to low while TXD is still high, the device is forced to Silent Mode. No data transmission is then possible, and
the current consumption is reduced to IVSsilent typ. 35µA. The VCC regulator has its full functionality.
If EN is switched to low while TXD is low, the device is forced to Sleep Mode. No data transmission is possible, and the
voltage regulator is switched off.
4.3.11 Wake Input Pin (WAKE)
The WAKE Input pin is a high-voltage input used to wake up the device from Sleep Mode or Silent Mode. It is usually
connected to an external switch in the application to generate a local wake-up. A pull-up current source, typically 10µA, is
implemented.
If a local wake-up is not needed in the application, connect the WAKE pin directly to the VS pin.
4.3.12 Mode Input Pin (MODE)
Connect the MODE pin directly or via an external resistor to GND for normal watchdog operation. To debug the software of
the connected microcontroller, connect the MODE pin to VCC and the watchdog is switched off.
4.3.13 TM Input Pin
The TM pin is used for final production measurements at Atmel®. In normal application, it has to be always connected to
GND.
4.3.14 KL_15 Pin
The KL_15 pin is a high-voltage input used to wake up the device from Sleep or Silent Mode. It is an edge-sensitive pin (low-
to-high transition). It is usually connected to ignition to generate a local wake-up in the application when the ignition is
switched on. Although KL_15 pin is at high voltage (VBatt), it is possible to switch the IC into Sleep or Silent Mode. Connect
the KL_15 pin directly to GND if you do not need it. A debounce timer with a typical TdbKl_15 of 160µs is implemented.
The input voltage threshold can be adjusted by varying the external resistor due to the input current IKL_15. To protect this pin
against voltage transients, a serial resistor of 47k and a ceramic capacitor of 100nF are recommended. With this RC
combination you can increase the wake-up time TwKL_15 and, therefore, the sensitivity against transients on the ignition
KL_15.
The wake-up time can also be increased by using external capacitors with higher values.
4.3.15 INH Output Pin
The INH Output pin is used to switch on an external voltage regulator during Normal and Fail-safe Mode. The INH Output is
a high-side switch, which is switched-off in Sleep and Silent Mode. It is possible to switch off the external 1k master resistor
via the INH pin for master node applications.
4.3.16 Wake-up Events from Sleep or Silent Mode
●
●
●
●
LIN-bus
WAKE pin
EN pin
KL_15
10
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.3.17
Reset Output Pin (NRES)
The Reset Output pin, an open drain output, switches to low during VCC undervoltage or a watchdog failure.
4.3.18 WD_OSC Output Pin
The WD_OSC Output pin provides a typical voltage of 1.2V, which supplies an external resistor with values between 34k
and 120k to adjust the watchdog oscillator time.
4.3.19 NTRIG Input Pin
The NTRIG Input pin is the trigger input for the window watchdog. A pull-up resistor is implemented.
A negative edge triggers the watchdog. The trigger signal (low) must exceed a minimum time ttrigmin to generate a watchdog
trigger.
4.4
Modes of Operation
Figure 4-2. Modes of Operation
a: VS > 5V
b: VS < 4V
Unpowered Mode
V
Batt = 0V
c: Bus wake-up event
d: Wake up from WAKE or KL_15 pin
e: NRES switches to low
b
a
b
Fail-safe Mode
VCC: 5V
b
b
With undervoltage monitoring
Communication: OFF
Watchdog: ON
c + d + e
e
EN = 1
EN = 1
c + d
Go to silent command
Local wake-up event
EN = 0
TXD = 1
Silent Mode
VCC: 5V
With undervoltage monitoring
Communication: OFF
Watchdog: OFF
Normal Mode
EN = 1
VCC: 5V
With undervoltage
monitoring
Go to sleep command
EN = 0
TXD = 0
Sleep Mode
Communication: ON
Watchdog: ON
VCC: switched off
Communication: OFF
Watchdog: OFF
Table 4-1. Table of Modes
Mode of
Operation
Unpowered
Fail-safe
Normal
Transceiver
Pin LIN
Recessive
VCC
On
5V
Pin Mode
Watchdog
Pin WD_OSC
Pin INH
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
1.23V
1.23V
0V
Recessive
TXD depending
Recessive
On
5V
On
Silent
5V
Off
Sleep
Recessive
0V
0V
Off
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
11
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.4.1 Normal Mode
This is the normal transmitting and receiving mode. The voltage regulator is active and can source up to 85mA. The
undervoltage detection is activated. The watchdog needs a trigger signal from NTRIG to avoid resets at NRES. If NRES is
switched to low, the IC changes its state to Fail-safe Mode.
4.4.2 Silent Mode
A falling edge at EN when TXD is high switches the IC into Silent Mode. The TXD Signal has to be logic high during the
Mode Select window (see Figure 4-3 on page 12). The transmission path is disabled in Silent Mode. The INH output is
switched off and the voltage divider is enabled. The overall supply current from VBatt is a combination of the IVSsi = 35µA plus
the VCC regulator output current IVCC
.
The 5V regulator with 2% tolerance can source up to 85mA. The internal slave termination between the LIN pin and the VS
pin is disabled in Silent Mode to minimize the current consumption in the event that the LIN pin is short-circuited to GND.
Only a weak pull-up current (typically 10µA) between the LIN pin and the VS pin is present. Silent Mode can be activated
independently from the actual level on the LIN, WAKE, or KL_15 pins. If an undervoltage condition occurs, NRES is switched
to low and the IC changes its state to Fail-safe Mode.
A voltage lower than the LIN Pre_Wake detection VLINL at the LIN pin activates the internal LIN receiver and starts the
wake-up detection timer.
Figure 4-3. Switch to Silent Mode
Normal Mode
Silent Mode
EN
Mode select window
TXD
td = 3.2μs
NRES
VCC
Delay time silent mode
td_sleep = maximum 20μs
LIN
LIN switches directly to recessive mode
12
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
A falling edge at the LIN pin followed by a dominant bus level maintained for a certain time period (>tbus) and followed by a
rising edge at the LIN pin (see Figure 4-4 on page 13) result in a remote wake-up request which is only possible if TXD is
high. The device switches from Silent Mode to Fail-safe Mode. The internal LIN slave termination resistor is switched on. The
remote wake-up request is indicated by a low level at the RXD pin to interrupt the microcontroller (see Figure 4-4 on page
13). EN high can be used to switch directly to Normal Mode.
Figure 4-4. LIN Wake Up from Silent Mode
Bus wake-up filtering time
tbus
Fail-safe mode
Normal mode
LIN bus
RXD
Node in silent mode
High
Low
High
TXD
Watchdog off
Start watchdog lead time td
Fail safe mode 5V
Watchdog
VCC
voltage
regulator
Silent mode 5V
Normal mode
EN High
EN
Undervoltage detection active
NRES
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
13
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.4.3 Sleep Mode
A falling edge at EN when TXD is low switches the IC into Sleep Mode. The TXD Signal has to be logic low during the Mode
Select window (Figure 4-5 on page 14). In order to avoid any influence to the LIN-pin during switching into sleep mode it is
possible to switch the EN up to 3.2µs earlier to Low than the TXD. Therefore, the best an easiest way are two falling edges
at TXD and EN at the same time. The transmission path is disabled in Sleep Mode. The supply current IVSsleep from VBatt is
typically 10µA.
The INH output and the VCC regulator are switched off. NRES and RXD are low. The internal slave termination between the
LIN pin and VS pin is disabled to minimize the current consumption in the event that the LIN pin is short-circuited to GND.
Only a weak pull-up current (typically 10µA) between the LIN pin and the VS pin is present. Sleep Mode can be activated
independently from the current level on the LIN, WAKE, or KL_15 pin.
A voltage lower than the LIN Pre_Wake detection VLINL at the LIN pin activates the internal LIN receiver and starts the
wake-up detection timer.
Figure 4-5. Switch to Sleep Mode
Normal Mode
Sleep Mode
EN
Mode select window
TXD
t
d = 3.2μs
NRES
VCC
Delay time sleep mode
d_sleep = maximum 20μs
t
LIN
LIN switches directly to recessive mode
14
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
A falling edge at the LIN pin followed by a dominant bus level maintained for a certain time period (>tbus) and a rising edge at
pin LIN result in a remote wake-up request. The device switches from Sleep Mode to Fail-safe Mode.
The VCC regulator is activated, and the internal LIN slave termination resistor is switched on. The remote wake-up re-quest
is indicated by a low level at the RXD pin to interrupt the microcontroller (see Figure 4-6 on page 15).
EN high can be used to switch directly from Sleep/Silent to Fail-safe Mode. If EN is still high after VCC ramp up and
undervoltage reset time, the IC switches to the Normal Mode.
Figure 4-6. LIN Wake Up from Sleep Mode
Bus wake-up filtering time
tbus
Fail-safe Mode
Normal Mode
LIN bus
RXD
Low
TXD
On state
VCC
voltage
regulator
Off state
Regulator wake-up time
EN High
EN
Reset
time
NRES
Microcontroller
start-up time delay
Watchdog off
Start watchdog lead time td
Watchdog
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
15
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.4.4 Sleep or Silent Mode: Behavior at a Floating LIN-bus or a Short Circuited LIN to GND
In Sleep or in Silent Mode the device has a very low current consumption even during short-circuits or floating conditions on
the bus. A floating bus can arise if the Master pull-up resistor is missing, e.g., if it is switched off when the LIN-Master is in
sleep mode or even if the power supply of the Master node is switched off.
In order to minimize the current consumption IVS in sleep or silent mode during voltage levels at the LIN-pin below the LIN
pre-wake threshold, the receiver is activated only for a specific time tmon. If tmon elapses while the voltage at the bus is lower
than the Pre-wake detection low (VLINL) and higher than the LIN dominant level, the receiver is switched off again and the
circuit changes back to sleep respectively Silent Mode. The current consumption is then IVSsleep_short or IVSsilent_short (typ. 10µA
more than IVSsleep respectively IVSsilent). If a dominant state is reached on the bus no wake-up will occur. Even if the voltage
rises above the Pre-wake detection high (VLINH), the IC will stay in sleep respectively silent mode (see Figure 4-7).
This means the LIN-bus must be above the Pre-wake detection threshold VLINH for a few microseconds before a new LIN
wake-up is possible.
Figure 4-7. Floating LIN-bus During Sleep or Silent Mode
LIN Pre-wake
VLINL
LIN BUS
LIN dominant state
VBUSdom
tmon
IVSsleep_short
IVSsilent_short
/
IVSfail
I
VS
IVSsleep/silent
IVSsleep / IVSsilent
Mode of
Sleep/Silent Mode
Wake-up Detection Phase
off (disabled)
Sleep/Silent Mode
operation
Int. Pull-up
Resistor
RLIN
16
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
If the Atmel® ATA6630 is in Sleep or Silent Mode and the voltage level at the LIN-bus is in dominant state (VLIN < VBUSdom) for
a time period exceeding tmon (during a short circuit at LIN, for example), the IC switches back to Sleep Mode respectively
Silent Mode. The VS current consumption then is IVSsleep_short or IVSsilent_short (typ. 10µA more than IVSsleep respectively IVSsilent).
After a positive edge at pin LIN the IC switches directly to Fail-safe Mode (see Figure 4-8 on page 17).
Figure 4-8. Short Circuit to GND on the LIN bus During Sleep- or Silent Mode
LIN Pre-wake
VLINL
LIN BUS
LIN dominant state
VBUSdom
tmon
tmon
IVSfail
IVSsleep_short
IVSsilent_short
/
I
VS
IVSsleep/silent
Mode of
Sleep/Silent Mode
Wake-up Detection Phase
off (disabled)
Fail-Safe Mode
on (enabled)
Sleep/Silent
Mode
operation
Int. Pull-up
Resistor
RLIN
4.4.5 Fail-safe Mode
The device automatically switches to Fail-safe Mode at system power-up. The voltage regulator is switched on (see Figure
4-12 on page 21). The NRES output switches to low for tres = 4ms and gives a reset to the microcontroller. The LIN
communication is switched off. The IC stays in this mode until EN is switched to high. The IC then changes to Normal Mode.
A power down of VBatt (VS < VSthU) during Silent or Sleep Mode switches the IC into Fail-safe Mode after power up. A low
level at NRES switches into Fail-safe Mode directly. During Fail-safe Mode, the TXD pin is an output and signals the fail-safe
source (together with the RXD output).
The LIN SBC can operate in different Modes, like Normal, Silent, or Sleep Mode. The functionality of these modes is
described in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2. TXD, RXD Depending from Operation Modes
Different Modes
Fail-safe Mode
Normal Mode
Silent Mode
TXD
Signalling fail-safe sources (see Table 4-3)
Follows data transmission
RXD
High
High
A wake-up event from either Silent or Sleep Mode will be signalled to the microcontroller using the two pins RXD and TXD.
The coding is shown in Table 4-3 on page 18.
A wake-up event will lead the IC to the Fail-safe Mode.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
17
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 4-3. Signalling Fail-safe Sources
Fail-safe Sources
TXD
Low
Low
High
RXD
Low
High
Low
LIN wake-up (pin LIN)
Local wake-up (at pin WAKE, pin KL_15)
VSth (battery) undervoltage detection
Table 4-4. Signalling in Fail-safe Mode after a Reset (NRES was Low), shows the Reset Source at TXD and RXD
Pins
Fail-safe Source
VCC undervoltage
Watchdog reset
TXD
High
High
RXD
Low
High
4.4.6 Unpowered Mode
After the battery voltage has been connected to the application circuit, the voltage at the VS pin increases according to the
block capacitor (see Figure 4-11 on page 21). After VS is higher than the VS undervoltage threshold VSthF, the IC mode
changes from Unpowered Mode to Fail-safe Mode. The VCC output voltage reaches its nominal value after tVCC. This time,
t
t
VCC, depends on the externally applied VCC capacitor and the load. The NRES is low for the reset time delay
reset. During this time, treset, no mode change is possible.
The behavior of VCC, NRES and VS is shown in Figure 4-9 (ramp up):
Figure 4-9. VCC and NRES versus VS (Ramp Up)
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
VS
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
NRES
0.5
0
VCC
0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0
VS (V)
Unpowered Mode
18
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 4-10. VCC and NRES versus VS (Ramp Down)
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
VS
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
NRES
1.0
0.5
0
VCC
7.0 6.5 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
0
VS (V)
Unpowered Mode
Please note that the upper graphs are only valid if the VS ramp up and ramp down-time is much slower than the VCC ramp
up time tVcc and the NRES delay time treset
.
If during sleep or silent mode the voltage level of VS drops below the undervoltage detection threshold VSthU, the IC switches
into Unpowered Mode.
If during Normal Mode the voltage level of VS drops below the undervoltage detection threshold VSthU, the IC switches into
Fail-safe Mode, this means the LIN transceiver is disabled in order to avoid malfunctions or false bus messages.
4.5
Wake-up Scenarios from Silent or Sleep Mode
4.5.1 Remote Wake-up via Dominant Bus State
A voltage lower than the LIN Pre_Wake detection VLINL at the LIN pin activates the internal LIN receiver and starts the wake-
up detection timer.
A falling edge at the LIN pin followed by a dominant bus level VBUSdom maintained for a certain time period (>tBUS) and
followed by a rising edge at pin LIN result in a remote wake-up request. A remote wake-up from Silent Mode is only possible
if TXD is high. The device switches from Silent or Sleep Mode to Fail-safe Mode. The VCC voltage regulator is/remains
activated, the INH pin is switched to high, and the internal slave termination resistor is switched on. The remote wake-up
request is indicated by a low level at the RXD pin to generate an interrupt for the microcontroller and a strong pull down at
TXD.
4.5.2 Local Wake-up via Pin WAKE
A falling edge at the WAKE pin followed by a low level maintained for a certain time period (>tWAKE) results in a local wake-up
request. The device switches to Fail-safe Mode. The internal slave termination resistor is switched on. The local wake-up
request is indicated by a low level at the TXD pin to generate an interrupt for the microcontroller. When the Wake pin is low,
it is possible to switch to Silent or Sleep Mode via pin EN. In this case, the wake-up signal has to be switched to high > 10µs
before the negative edge at WAKE starts a new local wake-up request.
4.5.3 Local Wake-up via Pin KL_15
A positive edge at pin KL_15 followed by a high voltage level for a certain time period (> tKL_15) results in a local wake-up
request. The device switches into the Fail-safe Mode. The internal slave termination resistor is switched on. The extra long
wake-up time ensures that no transients at KL_15 create a wake-up. The local wake-up request is indicated by a low level at
the TXD pin to generate an interrupt for the microcontroller. During high-level voltage at pin KL_15, it is possible to switch to
Silent or Sleep Mode via pin EN. In this case, the wake-up signal has to be switched to low > 250µs before the positive edge
at KL_15 starts a new local wake-up request. With external RC combination, the time is even longer.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
19
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.5.4 Wake-up Source Recognition
The device can distinguish between different wake-up sources.
The wake-up source can be read on the TXD and RXD pin in Fail-safe Mode. These flags are immediately reset if the
microcontroller sets the EN pin to high (see Figure 4-4 on page 13 and Figure 4-6 on page 15) and the IC is in Normal mode.
4.5.5 Fail-safe Features
●
During a short-circuit at LIN to VBattery, the output limits the output current to IBUS_lim. Due to the power dissipation, the
chip temperature exceeds TLINoff, and the LIN output is switched off. The chip cools down and after a hysteresis of
T
hys, switches the output on again. RXD stays on high because LIN is high. During LIN overtemperature switch-off,
the VCC regulator works independently.
●
●
During a short-circuit from LIN to GND the IC can be switched into Sleep or Silent Mode and even in this case the
current consumption is lower than 30µA in Sleep Mode and lower than 70µA in Silent Mode. If the short-circuit
disappears, the IC starts with a remote wake-up.
Sleep or Silent Mode: During a floating condition on the bus the IC switches back to
Sleep Mode/Silent Mode automatically and thereby the current consumption is lower
than 30µA/70µA.
●
●
The reverse current is < 2µA at the LIN pin during loss of VBatt. This is optimal behavior for bus systems where some
slave nodes are supplied from battery or ignition.
During a short circuit at VCC, the output limits the output current to IVCClim. Because of undervoltage, NRES switches
to low and the IC switches into Fail-safe Mode. If the chip temperature exceeds the value TVCCoff, the VCC output
switches off. The chip cools down and after a hysteresis of Thys, switches the output on again. Because of the Fail-
safe Mode, the VCC voltage will switch on again although EN is switched off from the microcontroller. The
microcontroller can start with its normal operation.
●
●
●
●
●
EN pin provides a pull-down resistor to force the transceiver into recessive mode if EN is disconnected.
RXD pin is set floating if VBatt is disconnected.
TXD pin provides a pull-up resistor to force the transceiver into recessive mode if TXD is disconnected.
If TXD is short-circuited to GND, it is possible to switch to Sleep Mode via ENABLE.
After switching the LIN transceiver into Normal Mode the TXD pin must be pulled to high longer than 10µs in order to
activate the LIN driver. This feature prevents the bus from being driven into dominant state when the IC is switched
into Normal Mode and TXD is low.
●
●
If the WD_OSC pin has a short-circuit to GND and the NTRIG Signal has a period time > 27ms a reset is guaranteed.
If the resistor at the WD_OSC pin is disconnected and the NTRIG Signal has a period time < 46ms a reset is
guaranteed.
●
If there is no NTRIG signal and a short-circuit at WD_OSC to GND the NRES switches to low after 90ms. For an open
circuit (no resistor) at WD_OSC it switches to low after 390ms.
20
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.6
Voltage Regulator
The voltage regulator needs an external capacitor for compensation and for smoothing the disturbances from the
microcontroller. It is recommended to use an electrolythic capacitor with C ≥ 1.8µF and a ceramic capacitor with C = 100nF.
The values of these capacitors can be varied by the customer, depending on the application.
The main power dissipation of the IC is created from the VCC output current IVCC, which is needed for the application.
Figure 4-11. VCC Voltage Regulator: Ramp-up and Undervoltage Detection
VS
12V
5.5V
t
VCC
5V
Vthun
t
tres_f
tVCC
tReset
NRES
5V
t
Figure 4-12. Power Dissipation: Safe Operating Area: VCC Output Current versus Supply Voltage VS at Different
Ambient Temperatures
90
80
Tamb = 100°C
70
60
Tamb = 105°C
50
T
amb = 110°C
amb = 115°C
40
30
T
20
10
0
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
VS (V)
For programming purposes of the microcontroller it is potentially necessary to supply the VCC output via an external power
supply while the VS Pin of the system basis chip is disconnected. This behavior will not affect the system basis chip.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
21
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.7
Watchdog
The watchdog anticipates a trigger signal from the microcontroller at the NTRIG (negative edge) input within a time window
of Twd. The trigger signal must exceed a minimum time ttrigmin > 200ns. If a triggering signal is not received, a reset signal will
be generated at output NRES. After a watchdog reset the IC starts with the lead time. The timing basis of the watchdog is
provided by the internal oscillator. Its time period, Tosc, is adjustable via the external resistor Rwd_osc (34k to 120k).
During Silent or Sleep Mode the watchdog is switched off to reduce current consumption.
The minimum time for the first watchdog pulse is required after the undervoltage reset at NRES disappears. It is defined as
lead time td. After wake up from Sleep or Silent Mode, the lead time td starts with the negative edge of the RXD output.
4.7.1 Typical Timing Sequence with RWO_OSC = 51k
The trigger signal Twd is adjustable between 20ms and 64ms using the external resistor RWD_OSC
.
For example, with an external resistor of RWD_OSC = 51k ±1%, the typical parameters of the watchdog are as follows:
tosc = 0.405 × RWD_OSC – 0.0004 × (RWD_OSC)2 (RWD_OSC in k ; tosc in μs)
t
OSC = 19.6μs due to 51k
td = 7895 × 19.6μs = 155ms
t1 = 1053 × 19.6μs = 20.6ms
t2 = 1105 × 19.6μs = 21.6ms
tnres = constant = 4ms
After ramping up the battery voltage, the 5V regulator is switched on. The reset output NRES stays low for the time treset
(typically 4ms), then it switches to high, and the watchdog waits for the trigger sequence from the microcontroller. The lead
time, td, follows the reset and is td = 155ms. In this time, the first watchdog pulse from the microcontroller is required. If the
trigger pulse NTRIG occurs during this time, the time t1 starts immediately. If no trigger signal occurs during the time td, a
watchdog reset with tNRES = 4ms will reset the microcontroller after td = 155ms. The times t1 and t2 have a fixed relationship.
A triggering signal from the microcontroller is anticipated within the time frame of t2 = 21.6ms. To avoid false triggering from
glitches, the trigger pulse must be longer than tTRIG,min > 200ns. This slope serves to restart the watchdog sequence. If the
triggering signal fails in this open window t2, the NRES output will be drawn to ground. A triggering signal during the closed
window t1 immediately switches NRES to low.
Figure 4-13. Timing Sequence with RWD_OSC=51k
VCC
5V
Undervoltage Reset
reset = 4ms
Watchdog Reset
tnres = 4ms
t
NRES
td = 155ms
t1 = 20.6ms
t1
t2
t2 = 21ms
twd
NTRIG
t
trig > 200ns
22
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.7.2 Worst Case Calculation with RWO_OSC = 51k
The internal oscillator has a tolerance of 20%. This means that t1 and t2 can also vary by 20%.
The worst case calculation for the watchdog period twd is calculated as follows.
The ideal watchdog time twd is between the maximum t1 and the minimum t1 plus the minimum t2.
t1,min = 0.8 × t1 = 16.5ms, t1,max = 1.2 × t1 = 24.8ms
t2,min = 0.8 × t2 = 17.3ms, t2,max = 1.2 × t2 = 26ms
t
wdmax = t1min + t2min = 16.5ms + 17.3ms = 33.8ms
twdmin = t1max = 24.8ms
twd = 29.3ms ±4.5ms (±15%)
A microcontroller with an oscillator tolerance of ±15% is sufficient to supply the trigger inputs correctly.
Table 4-5. Typical Watchdog Timings
ROSC/k
tOSC /µs
13.3
td /ms
105
t1 /ms
14.0
t2/ms
14.7
twd /ms
19.9
tnres /ms
34
4
4
4
4
51
19.61
33.54
42.84
154.80
264.80
338.22
20.64
35.32
45.32
21.67
37.06
47.34
29.32
50.14
64.05
91
120
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
23
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.8
Electrical Characteristics
5V < VS < 27V, –40°C < Tj < 150°C, unless otherwise specified. All values refer to GND pins
No. Parameters
VS Pin
Test Conditions
Pin
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit Type*
1
1.1 Nominal DC voltage range
VS
VS
VS
5
3
27
14
V
A
A
Sleep Mode
VLIN > VS – 0.5V
VS < 14V
IVSsleep
10
20
35
µA
Supply current in Sleep
1.2
Mode
Sleep Mode, VLIN = 0V
Bus shorted to GND
VS < 14V
VS
VS
IVSsleep_short
6
30
50
µA
µA
A
A
Bus recessive
VS < 14V
IVSsilent
20
Without load at VCC
Supply current in Silent
Mode
1.3
Silent Mode
VS < 14V
VS
IVSsilent_short
25
45
70
µA
A
Bus shorted to GND
Without load at VCC
Bus recessive
VS < 14V
Without load at VCC
Supply current in Normal
Mode
1.4
VS
VS
VS
IVSrec
IVSdom
IVSfail
0.3
50
0.8
53
mA
mA
mA
A
A
A
Bus recessive
VS < 14V
VCC load current 50mA
Supply current in Normal
Mode
1.5
Bus recessive, RXD is low
VS < 14V
Without load at VCC
Supply current in Fail-safe
Mode
1.6
1.5
2.0
Switch to Unpowered Mode
Switch to Fail-safe Mode
VS
VS
VSthU
VSthF
3.7
4.0
4.2
4.5
4.7
5.0
V
V
A
A
1.7 VS undervoltage threshold
VS undervoltage threshold
hysteresis
1.8
VS
VSth_hys
0.3
V
A
2
RXD Output Pin
Normal Mode
VLIN = 0V
VRXD = 0.4V
Low-level output sink
current
2.1
RXD
IRXD
1.3
3
2.5
5
8
mA
A
2.2 Low-level output voltage IRXD = 1mA
2.3 Internal resistor to PVCC
RXD
RXD
VRXDL
RRXD
0.4
7
V
A
A
k
3
TXD Input/Output Pin
3.1 Low-level voltage input
3.2 High-level voltage input
3.3 Pull-up resistor
TXD
TXD
VTXDL
VTXDH
–0.3
2
+0.8
V
V
A
A
VCC
+
0.3V
400
+3
VTXD = 0V
TXD
TXD
RTXD
ITXD
125
–3
250
2.5
k
A
A
3.4 High-level leakage current VTXD = VCC
Fail-safe Mode, wake up
VLIN = VS
µA
Low-level output sink
current
3.5
TXD
ITXDwake
2
8
mA
A
VWAKE = 0V
VTXD = 0.4V
*) Type means: A = 100% tested, B = 100% correlation tested, C = Characterized on samples, D = Design parameter
24
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.8
Electrical Characteristics (Continued)
5V < VS < 27V, –40°C < Tj < 150°C, unless otherwise specified. All values refer to GND pins
No. Parameters
EN Input Pin
Test Conditions
Pin
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit Type*
4
4.1 Low-level voltage input
EN
EN
VENL
VENH
–0.3
2
+0.8
V
V
A
A
VCC
+
4.2 High-level voltage input
0.3V
200
+3
4.3 Pull-down resistor
VEN = VCC
VEN = 0V
EN
EN
REN
IEN
50
–3
125
k
A
A
4.4 Low-level input current
µA
5
NTRIG Watchdog Input Pin
5.1 Low-level voltage input
5.2 High-level voltage input
5.3 Pull-up resistor
NTRIG
NTRIG
VNTRIGL
VNTRIGH
-0.3
2
+0.8
V
V
A
A
VCC
+
0.3V
VNTRIG = 0V
NTRIG
NTRIG
RNTRIG
INTRIG
125
-3
250
400
+3
k
A
A
5.4 High-level leakage current VNTRIG = VCC
Mode Input Pin
µA
6
6.1 Low-level voltage input
MODE
MODE
VMODEL
VMODEH
–0.3
2
+0.8
V
V
A
A
VCC
+
6.2 High-level voltage input
0.3V
VMODE = VCC or
VMODE = 0V
6.3 High-level leakage current
MODE
IMODE
–3
+3
µA
A
7
INH Output Pin
7.1 High-level voltage
IINH = –15mA
INH
INH
VINHH
RINH
VS – 0.75
VS
50
V
A
A
Switch-on resistance
7.2
30
between VS and INH
Sleep Mode
VINH = 0V/27V, VS = 27V
7.3 Leakage current
INH
IINHL
–3
+3
µA
A
8
LIN Bus Driver
Driver recessive output
voltage
8.1
Load1/Load2
LIN
LIN
LIN
LIN
LIN
LIN
LIN
LIN
VBUSrec
V_LoSUP
V_HiSUP
V_LoSUP_1k
V_HiSUP_1k
RLIN
0.9 VS
VS
1.2
2
V
V
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
A
VVS = 7V
Rload = 500
8.2 Driver dominant voltage
8.3 Driver dominant voltage
8.4 Driver dominant voltage
8.5 Driver dominant voltage
8.6 Pull-up resistor to VS
VVS = 18V
Rload = 500
V
VVS = 7.0V
Rload = 1000
0.6
0.8
20
V
VVS = 18V
Rload = 1000
V
The serial diode is
mandatory
30
47
1.0
200
k
V
Voltage drop at the serial In pull-up path with Rslave
diodes
8.7
8.8
VSerDiode
IBUS_LIM
0.4
70
ISerDiode = 10mA
LIN current limitation
VBUS = VBatt_max
120
mA
*) Type means: A = 100% tested, B = 100% correlation tested, C = Characterized on samples, D = Design parameter
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
25
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.8
Electrical Characteristics (Continued)
5V < VS < 27V, –40°C < Tj < 150°C, unless otherwise specified. All values refer to GND pins
No. Parameters
Test Conditions
Pin
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit Type*
Input leakage current
Driver off
VBUS = 0V
Input leakage current at
8.9 the receiver including pull-
up resistor as specified
IBUS_PAS_do
LIN
–1
–0.35
mA
µA
A
A
m
VBatt = 12V
Driver off
Leakage current LIN
recessive
8V < VBatt < 18V
8V < VBUS < 18V
VBUS VBatt
8.10
LIN
LIN
IBUS_PAS_rec
10
20
Leakage current at GND
loss, control unit
disconnected from ground.
Loss of local ground must
not affect communication
in the residual network.
GNDDevice = VS
VBatt = 12V
0V < VBUS < 18V
8.11
IBUS_NO_gnd
–10
+0.5
+10
µA
µA
A
A
Leakage current at loss of
battery. Node has to
sustain the current that
8.12 can flow under this
condition. Bus must
VBatt disconnected
VSUP_Device = GND
0V < VBUS < 18V
LIN
IBUS_NO_bat
0.1
2
remain operational under
this condition.
Capacitance on pin LIN to
GND
8.13
LIN
LIN
CLIN
20
pF
V
D
A
9
LIN Bus Receiver
Center of receiver
threshold
VBUS_CNT
(Vth_dom + Vth_rec)/2
=
0.475
VS
9.1
VBUS_CNT
0.5 VS 0.525 VS
0.4 VS
9.2 Receiver dominant state VEN = VCC
9.3 Receiver recessive state VEN = VCC
LIN
LIN
VBUSdom
VBUSrec
V
V
A
A
0.6 VS
0.028
VS
9.4 Receiver input hysteresis Vhys = Vth_rec – Vth_dom
LIN
LIN
LIN
VBUShys
VLINH
0.1 VS 0.175 VS
VS + 0.3V
V
V
V
A
A
A
Pre_Wake detection LIN
9.5
VS – 2V
–27
High-level input voltage
Pre_Wake detection LIN
9.6
Activates the LIN receiver
VLIN = 0V
VLINL
VS – 3.3V
Low-level input voltage
10 Internal Timers
Dominant time for wake-up
10.1
LIN
EN
tbus
30
5
90
15
150
20
µs
µs
A
A
via LIN bus
Time delay for mode
10.2 change from Fail-safe into VEN = VCC
Normal Mode via EN pin
tnorm
Time delay for mode
10.3 change from Normal Mode VEN = 0V
to Sleep Mode via EN pin
EN
TXD
EN
tsleep
tdom
ts_n
2
27
5
7
12
70
40
µs
ms
µs
A
A
A
TXD dominant time-out
time
10.4
VTXD = 0V
55
15
Time delay for mode
10.5 change from Silent Mode VEN = VCC
into Normal Mode via EN
*) Type means: A = 100% tested, B = 100% correlation tested, C = Characterized on samples, D = Design parameter
26
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.8
Electrical Characteristics (Continued)
5V < VS < 27V, –40°C < Tj < 150°C, unless otherwise specified. All values refer to GND pins
No. Parameters
Monitoring time for wake-
Test Conditions
Pin
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit Type*
ms
10.6
LIN
tmon
6
10
15
A
up over LIN bus
LIN Bus Driver AC Parameter with Different Bus Loads
Load 1 (small): 1nF, 1k ; Load 2 (large): 10nF, 500 ; RRXD = 5k; CRXD = 20pF;
Load 3 (medium): 6.8nF, 660 characterized on samples; 10.7 and 10.8 specifies the timing parameters for proper operation
at 20Kbit/s, 10.9 and 10.10 at 10.4Kbit/s
THRec(max) = 0.744 VS
THDom(max) = 0.581 VS
10.7 Duty cycle 1
10.8 Duty cycle 2
10.9 Duty cycle 3
10.10 Duty cycle 4
VS = 7.0V to 18V
tBit = 50µs
D1 = tbus_rec(min)/(2 tBit)
LIN
LIN
LIN
D1
D2
D3
D4
0.396
A
A
A
THRec(min) = 0.422 VS
THDom(min) = 0.284 VS
VS = 7.6V to 18V
tBit = 50µs
D2 = tbus_rec(max)/(2 tBit)
0.581
THRec(max) = 0.778 VS
THDom(max) = 0.616 VS
VS = 7.0V to 18V
tBit = 96µs
D3 = tbus_rec(min)/(2 tBit)
0.417
THRec(min) = 0.389 VS
THDom(min) = 0.251 VS
VS = 7.6V to 18V
tBit = 96µs
D4 = tbus_rec(max)/(2 tBit)
LIN
LIN
0.590
22.5
A
A
Slope time falling and
tSLOPE_fall
tSLOPE_rise
10.11
11
VS = 7.0V to 18V
3.5
µs
rising edge at LIN
Receiver Electrical AC Parameters of the LIN Physical Layer
LIN Receiver, RXD Load Conditions (CRXD): 20pF
Propagation delay of
VS = 7.0V to 18V
11.1 receiver (Figure 4-14 on
page 29)
RXD
RXD
trx_pd
6
µs
µs
A
A
trx_pd = max(trx_pdr , trx_pdf
)
Symmetry of receiver
11.2 propagation delay rising
edge minus falling edge
VS = 7.0V to 18V
trx_sym = trx_pdr – trx_pdf
trx_sym
–2
+2
12 NRES Open Drain Output Pin
VS 5.5V
INRES = 1mA
12.1 Low-level output voltage
12.2 Low-level output low
12.3 Undervoltage reset time
NRES
NRES
NRES
VNRESL
0.14
0.14
6
V
V
A
A
A
10k to 5V
VCC = 0V
VNRESLL
VS 5.5V
CNRES = 20pF
2
4
ms
Reset debounce time for VS 5.5V
12.4
NRES
NRES
tres_f
1.5
–3
10
+3
µs
A
A
falling edge
CNRES = 20pF
12.5 Switch off leakage current VNRES = 5.5V
µA
*) Type means: A = 100% tested, B = 100% correlation tested, C = Characterized on samples, D = Design parameter
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
27
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.8
Electrical Characteristics (Continued)
5V < VS < 27V, –40°C < Tj < 150°C, unless otherwise specified. All values refer to GND pins
No. Parameters
Test Conditions
Pin
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit Type*
13 Watchdog Oscillator
Voltage at WD_OSC in
13.1
IWD_OSC = –200µA
Normal or Fail-safe Mode VVS 4V
WD_OS
C
VWD_OSC
ROSC
1.13
34
1.23
1.33
120
V
A
A
WD_OS
C
13.2 Possible values of resistor Resistor ±1%
k
13.3 Oscillator period
13.4 Oscillator period
13.5 Oscillator period
13.6 Oscillator period
ROSC = 34k
ROSC = 51k
ROSC = 91k
ROSC = 120k
tOSC
tOSC
tOSC
tOSC
10.65
15.68
26.83
34.2
13.3
19.6
33.5
42.8
15.97
23.52
40.24
51.4
µs
µs
µs
µs
A
A
A
A
NRES
14 Watchdog Timing Relative to tOSC
Watchdog lead time after
Reset
14.1
td
7895
cycles
A
14.2 Watchdog closed window
14.3 Watchdog open window
t1
t2
1053
1105
cycles
cycles
A
A
Watchdog reset time
NRES
14.4
tnres
3.2
4
4.8
ms
A
15 KL_15 Pin
High-level input voltage
RV = 47k
Positive edge initializes a
wake-up
15.1
15.2
KL_15
KL_15
KL_15
VKL_15H
VKL_15L
IKL_15
4
VS + 0.3V
V
V
A
A
A
Low-level input voltage
RV = 47k
–1
+2
60
VS < 27V
VKL_15 = 27V
15.3 KL_15 pull-down current
50
µA
15.4 Internal debounce time
15.5 KL_15 wake-up time
16 WAKE Pin
Without external capacitor
KL_15 TdbKL_15
80
160
2
250
4.5
µs
A
C
RV = 47k , C = 100nF
KL_15
TwKL_15
0.4
ms
16.1 High-level input voltage
16.2 Low-level input voltage
16.3 WAKE pull-up current
WAKE
WAKE
WAKE
WAKE
VWAKEH
VWAKEL
IWAKE
VS – 1V
–1
VS + 0.3V
VS – 3.3V
V
V
A
A
A
A
Initializes a wake-up signal
VS < 27V, VWAKE = 0V
–30
–10
70
µA
µA
16.4 High-level leakage current VS = 27V, VWAKE = 27V
Time of low pulse for
IWAKEL
–5
+5
16.5
VWAKE = 0V
WAKE
IWAKEL
30
150
µs
A
wake-up via WAKE pin
17 VCC Voltage Regulator in Normal/ Fail-safe and Silent Mode, VCC and PVCC Shortcircuited
5.5V < VS < 18V
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCCnor
VCCnor
VCClow
4.9
5.1
5.1
5.1
V
V
V
A
C
A
(0mA to 50mA)
17.1 Output voltage VCC
5.5V < VS < 18V
(0mA to 85mA)
4.9
Output voltage VCC at
low VS
17.2
4V < VS < 5.5V
VS – VD
17.3 Regulator drop voltage
17.4 Regulator drop voltage
17.5 Regulator drop voltage
17.6 Line regulation
VS > 4V, IVCC = –20mA
VS > 4V, IVCC = –50mA
VS > 3.3V, IVCC = –15mA
5.5V < VS < 18V
VS, VCC
VS, VCC
VS, VCC
VCC
VD1
VD2
250
600
200
0.2
mV
mV
mV
%
A
A
A
A
400
0.1
VD3
VCCline
*) Type means: A = 100% tested, B = 100% correlation tested, C = Characterized on samples, D = Design parameter
28
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
4.8
Electrical Characteristics (Continued)
5V < VS < 27V, –40°C < Tj < 150°C, unless otherwise specified. All values refer to GND pins
No. Parameters
Test Conditions
Pin
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit Type*
5mA < IVCC < 50mA at
100kHz
17.7 Load regulation
VCC
VCCload
0.1
0.5
%
A
10Hz to 100kHz
CVCC = 10µF
VS = 14V, IVCC = –15mA
Power supply ripple
rejection
17.8
VCC
VCC
50
dB
D
A
17.9 Output current limitation VS > 5.5V
IVCClim
–240
–130
10
–85
mA
0.2 < ESR < 5 at
100kHz for phase margin
60°
17.10 External Load capacity
VCC
Cload
1.8
4.2
µF
D
ESR < 0.2 at 100kHz for
phase margin 30°
VCC undervoltage
17.11
Referred to VCC
VS > 5.5V
VCC
VCC
VCC
VthunN
Vhysthun
tVCC
4.8
V
A
A
A
threshold
Hysteresis of undervoltage Referred to VCC
17.12
17.13
250
370
mV
µs
threshold
Ramp-up time VS > 5.5V to CVCC = 2.2µF
VCC = 5V Iload = –5mA at VCC
VS > 5.5V
600
*) Type means: A = 100% tested, B = 100% correlation tested, C = Characterized on samples, D = Design parameter
Figure 4-14. Definition of Bus Timing Characteristics
tBit
tBit
tBit
TXD
(Input to transmitting node)
tBus_dom(max)
tBus_rec(min)
Thresholds of
receiving node1
THRec(max)
VS
THDom(max)
(Transceiver supply
of transmitting node)
LIN Bus Signal
Thresholds of
receiving node2
THRec(min)
THDom(min)
tBus_dom(min)
tBus_rec(max)
RXD
(Output of receiving node1)
trx_pdf(1)
trx_pdr(1)
RXD
(Output of receiving node2)
trx_pdr(2)
trx_pdf(2)
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
29
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.
Microcontroller Block
5.1
Features
●
●
High performance, low power AVR® 8-Bit microcontroller
Advanced RISC architecture
●
●
●
●
●
131 powerful instructions – most single clock cycle execution
32 x 8 general purpose working registers
Fully static operation
Up to 20MIPS throughput at 20MHz
On-chip 2-cycle multiplier
●
High endurance non-volatile memory segments
●
●
●
●
●
32Kbytes of in-system self-programmable flash program memory
1Kbyte EEPROM
2Kbytes internal SRAM
Write/erase cycles: 10,000 flash/100,000 EEPROM
Optional boot code section with independent lock bits
●
●
In-system programming by on-chip boot program
True read-while-write operation
●
Programming lock for software security
●
Peripheral features
●
●
●
●
●
Two 8-bit timer/counters with separate prescaler and compare mode
One 16-bit timer/counter with separate prescaler, compare mode, and capture mode
Real time counter with separate oscillator
Six PWM channels
8-channel 10-bit ADC
●
Temperature measurement
●
●
●
●
●
●
Programmable serial USART
Master/slave SPI serial interface
Byte-oriented 2-wire serial interface (Philips I2C compatible)
Programmable watchdog timer with separate on-chip oscillator
On-chip analog comparator
Interrupt and wake-up on pin change
●
Special microcontroller features
●
●
●
●
Power-on reset and programmable brown-out detection
Internal calibrated oscillator
External and internal interrupt sources
Six sleep modes: idle, ADC noise reduction, power-save, power-down, standby, and extended standby
●
●
●
●
I/O
●
23 programmable I/O lines
Operating voltage:
●
2.7V - 5.5V for ATmega328P
Temperature range:
●
Automotive temperature range: -40°C to +125°C
Speed grade:
●
●
0 - 8MHz at 2.7 - 5.5V (automotive temp. range: -40°C to +125°C)
0 - 16MHz at 4.5 - 5.5V (automotive temp. range: -40°C to +125°C)
30
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
●
Low-power consumption
●
●
Active mode: 1.5mA at 3V - 4MHz
Power-down mode: 1µA at 3V
5.2
Overview
The ATmega328P is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR® enhanced RISC architecture. By
executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the ATmega328P achieves throughputs approaching 1 MIPS per MHz
allowing the system designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed.
5.2.1 Block Diagram
Figure 5-1. Block Diagram
GND
VCC
Watchdog
Timer
Power
debugWIRE
Supervision
POR/BOD
and
Watchdog
Oscillator
Program
Logic
RESET
Oscillator
Circuits/
Clock
Flash
SRAM
Generation
AVR CPU
EEPROM
AVCC
AREF
GND
2
8-bit T/C 0
8-bit T/C 2
16-bit T/C 1
A/D Conv.
Analog
Comparator
Internal
Bandgap
6
USART 0
SPI
TWI
PORT D (8)
PORT B (8)
PORT C (7)
RESET
XTAL[1..2]
PD[0..7]
PB[0..7]
PC[0..6]
ADC[6..7]
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
31
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The AVR® core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All the 32 registers are directly
connected to the arithmetic logic unit (ALU), allowing two independent registers to be accessed in one single instruction
executed in one clock cycle. The resulting architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times
faster than conventional CISC microcontrollers.
The ATmega328P provides the following features: 32Kbytes of in-system programmable flash with read-while-write
capabilities, 1Kbyte EEPROM, 2Kbytes SRAM, 23 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers, three
flexible timer/counters with compare modes, internal and external interrupts, a serial programmable USART, a byte-oriented
2-wire serial Interface, an SPI serial port, a 8-channel 10-bit ADC, a programmable watchdog timer with internal oscillator,
and five software selectable power saving modes. The Idle mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counters,
USART,
2-wire serial interface, SPI port, and interrupt system to continue functioning. The power-down mode saves the register
contents but freezes the oscillator, disabling all other chip functions until the next interrupt or hardware reset. In power-save
mode, the asynchronous timer continues to run, allowing the user to maintain a timer base while the rest of the device is
sleeping. The ADC noise reduction mode stops the CPU and all I/O modules except asynchronous timer and ADC, to
minimize switching noise during ADC conversions. In standby mode, the crystal/resonator oscillator is running while the rest
of the device is sleeping. This allows very fast start-up combined with low power consumption.
The device is manufactured using Atmel®’s high density non-volatile memory technology. The on-chip ISP flash allows the
program memory to be reprogrammed in-system through an SPI serial interface, by a conventional non-volatile memory
programmer, or by an on-chip boot program running on the AVR core. The Boot program can use any interface to download
the application program in the application flash memory. Software in the boot flash section will continue to run while the
application flash section is updated, providing true read-while-write operation. By combining an 8-bit RISC CPU with in-
system
self-programmable flash on a monolithic chip, the Atmel ATmega328P is a powerful microcontroller that provides a highly
flexible and cost effective solution to many embedded control applications.
The ATmega328P AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development tools including: C compilers,
macro assemblers, program debugger/simulators, in-circuit emulators, and evaluation kits.
5.3
5.4
5.5
Resources
A comprehensive set of development tools, application notes and datasheets are available for download on
http://www.atmel.com/avr.
Data Retention
Reliability Qualification results show that the projected data retention failure rate is much less than 1 PPM over 20 years at
85°C or 100 years at 25°C.
About Code Examples
This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of the device. These code
examples assume that the part specific header file is included before compilation. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors
include bit definitions in the header files and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent. Please confirm with the C
compiler documentation for more details.
For I/O registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI” instructions must be replaced
with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically “LDS” and “STS” combined with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and
“CBR”.
32
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.6
AVR CPU Core
5.6.1 Overview
This section discusses the AVR® core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core is to ensure correct
program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories, perform calculations, control peripherals, and
handle interrupts.
Figure 5-2. Block Diagram of the AVR Architecture
Data Bus 8-bit
Program
Counter
Status and
Control
Flash
Program
Memory
Interrupt
Unit
32 x 8
General
Purpose
Registers
Instruction
Register
SPI
Unit
Instruction
Decoder
Watchdog
Timer
ALU
Analog
Comparator
Control Lines
I/O Module 1
I/O Module 2
I/O Module n
Data
SRAM
EEPROM
I/O Lines
In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard architecture – with separate memories and
buses for program and data. Instructions in the program memory are executed with a single level pipelining. While one
instruction is being executed, the next instruction is pre-fetched from the program memory. This concept enables instructions
to be executed in every clock cycle. The program memory is in-system reprogrammable flash memory.
The fast-access register file contains 32 x 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single clock cycle access time. This
allows single-cycle arithmetic logic unit (ALU) operation. In a typical ALU operation, two operands are output from the
register file, the operation is executed, and the result is stored back in the register file – in one clock cycle.
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for data space addressing – enabling
efficient address calculations. One of the these address pointers can also be used as an address pointer for look up tables in
flash program memory. These added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register, described later in this section.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
33
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and a register. Single register
operations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic operation, the Status Register is updated to reflect
information about the result of the operation.
Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions, able to directly address the whole
address space. Most AVR® instructions have a single 16-bit word format. Every program memory address contains a 16- or
32-bit instruction.
Program flash memory space is divided in two sections, the boot program section and the application program section. Both
sections have dedicated lock bits for write and read/write protection. The SPM instruction that writes into the application flash
memory section must reside in the boot program section.
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address program counter (PC) is stored on the stack. The stack is
effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the stack size is only limited by the total SRAM size and
the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must initialize the SP in the reset routine (before subroutines or interrupts are
executed). The stack pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data SRAM can easily be accessed through
the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture.
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional global interrupt enable bit in the status
register. All interrupts have a separate interrupt vector in the interrupt vector table. The interrupts have priority in accordance
with their interrupt vector position. The lower the interrupt vector address, the higher the priority.
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as control registers, SPI, and other I/O functions.
The I/O memory can be accessed directly, or as the data space locations following those of the register File, 0x20 - 0x5F. In
addition, the ATmega328P has extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM where only the ST/STS/STD and
LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
5.6.2 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose working registers. Within a
single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose registers or between a register and an immediate are
executed. The ALU operations are divided into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit-functions. Some
implementations of the architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication and
fractional format. See the “Instruction Set” section for a detailed description.
5.6.3 Status Register
The status register contains information about the result of the most recently executed arithmetic instruction. This
information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform conditional operations. Note that the status register is
updated after all ALU operations, as specified in the instruction set reference. This will in many cases remove the need for
using the dedicated compare instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code.
The status register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored when returning from an
interrupt. This must be handled by software.
5.6.3.1 SREG – AVR Status Register
The AVR Status Register – SREG – is defined as:
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
V
2
N
1
Z
0
C
0x3F (0x5F)
Read/Write
Initial Value
I
T
H
S
SREG
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable
The global interrupt enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual interrupt enable control is then
performed in separate control registers. If the global interrupt enable register is cleared, none of the interrupts are enabled
independent of the individual interrupt enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has occurred, and is
set by the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set and cleared by the application with the
SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the instruction set reference.
34
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
• Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage
The bit copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source or destination for the operated bit. A bit
from a register in the register file can be copied into T by the BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a
register in the register file by the BLD instruction.
• Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag
The half carry flag H indicates a half carry in some arithmetic operations. Half carry Is useful in BCD arithmetic. See the
“Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N V
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the negative flag N and the two’s complement overflow flag V. See the
“Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag
The two’s complement overflow flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See the “Instruction Set Description” for
detailed information.
• Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag
The negative flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set Description” for
detailed information.
• Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag
The zero flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed
information.
• Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag
The carry flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed
information.
5.6.4 General Purpose Register File
The register file is optimized for the AVR® enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to achieve the required performance and
flexibility, the following input/output schemes are supported by the register file:
●
●
●
●
One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input
Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input
Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input
One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
35
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-3 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.
Figure 5-3. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers
7
0
Addr.
0x00
0x01
0x02
R0
R1
R2
…
R13
R14
R15
R16
R17
…
0x0D
0x0E
0x0F
0x10
0x11
General
Purpose
Working
Registers
R26
R27
R28
R29
R30
R31
0x1A
0x1B
0x1C
0x1D
0x1E
0x1F
X-register Low Byte
X-register High Byte
Y-register Low Byte
Y-register High Byte
Z-register Low Byte
Z-register High Byte
Most of the instructions operating on the register file have direct access to all registers, and most of them are single cycle
instructions.
As shown in Figure 5-3, each register is also assigned a data memory address, mapping them directly into the first 32
locations of the user data space. Although not being physically implemented as SRAM locations, this memory organization
provides great flexibility in access of the registers, as the X-, Y- and Z-pointer registers can be set to index any register in the
file.
5.6.4.1 The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register
The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These registers are 16-bit address
pointers for indirect addressing of the data space. The three indirect address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as described
in
Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers
15
XH
XL
0
X-register
7
0
7
0
R27 (0x1B)
R26 (0x1A)
15
YH
YL
0
Y-register
Z-register
7
0
7
0
R29 (0x1D)
R31 (0x1F)
R28 (0x1C)
R30 (0x1E)
15
ZH
ZL
0
7
0
7
0
In the different addressing modes these address registers have functions as fixed displacement, automatic increment, and
automatic decrement (see the instruction set reference for details).
36
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.6.5 Stack Pointer
The stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing return addresses after
interrupts and subroutine calls. Note that the stack is implemented as growing from higher to lower memory locations. The
stack pointer register always points to the top of the stack. The stack pointer points to the data SRAM stack area where the
subroutine and interrupt stacks are located. A stack PUSH command will decrease the stack pointer.
The stack in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts are
enabled. Initial stack pointer value equals the last address of the internal SRAM and the stack pointer must be set to point
above start of the SRAM, see Figure 5-8 on page 41.
See Table 5-1 for stack pointer details.
Table 5-1. Stack Pointer Instructions
Instruction
Stack pointer
Description
PUSH
Decremented by 1
Data is pushed onto the stack
CALL
ICALL
RCALL
Decremented by 2
Return address is pushed onto the stack with a subroutine call or interrupt
POP
Incremented by 1
Incremented by 2
Data is popped from the stack
RET
RETI
Return address is popped from the stack with return from subroutine or return
from interrupt
The AVR® stack pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of bits actually used is
implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some implementations of the AVR architecture is so small that only
SPL is needed. In this case, the SPH register will not be present.
5.6.5.1 SPH and SPL – Stack Pointer High and Stack Pointer Low Register
Bit
15
SP15
SP7
7
14
SP14
SP6
6
13
SP13
SP5
5
12
SP12
SP4
4
11
SP11
SP3
3
10
SP10
SP2
2
9
8
0x3E (0x5E)
0x3D (0x5D)
SP9
SP1
1
SP8
SP0
0
SPH
SPL
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial Value RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND
RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
37
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.6.6 Instruction Execution Timing
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The AVR® CPU is driven by the CPU
clock clkCPU, directly generated from the selected clock source for the chip. No internal clock division is used.
Figure 5-5 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by the Harvard architecture and the fast-
access register file concept. This is the basic pipelining concept to obtain up to 1MIPS per MHz with the corresponding
unique results for functions per cost, functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.
Figure 5-5. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions
T1
T2
T3
T4
clkCPU
1st Instruction Fetch
1st Instruction Execute
2nd Instruction Fetch
2nd Instruction Execute
3rd Instruction Fetch
3rd Instruction Execute
4th Instruction Fetch
Figure 5-6 shows the internal timing concept for the register file. In a single clock cycle an ALU operation using two register
operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the destination register.
Figure 5-6. Single Cycle ALU Operation
T1
T2
T3
T4
clkCPU
Total Execution Time
Register Operands Fetch
ALU Operation Execute
Result Write Back
38
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.6.7 Reset and Interrupt Handling
The AVR® provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset Vector each have a
separate program vector in the program memory space. All interrupts are assigned individual enable bits which must be
written logic one together with the global interrupt enable bit in the status register in order to enable the interrupt. Depending
on the program counter value, interrupts may be automatically disabled when boot lock bits BLB02 or BLB12 are
programmed. This feature improves software security. See Section 5.27 “Memory Programming” on page 262 for details.
The lowest addresses in the program memory space are by default defined as the reset and interrupt vectors. The complete
list of vectors is shown in Section 5.11 “Interrupts” on page 73. The list also determines the priority levels of the different
interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 – the
external interrupt request 0. The interrupt vectors can be moved to the start of the boot flash section by setting the IVSEL bit
in the MCU control register (MCUCR). Refer to Section 5.11 “Interrupts” on page 73 for more information. The reset vector
can also be moved to the start of the boot flash section by programming the BOOTRST fuse, see Section 5.26 “Boot Loader
Support – Read-while-write Self-programming” on page 250.
When an interrupt occurs, the global interrupt enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are disabled. The user software can
write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All enabled interrupts can then interrupt the current interrupt routine.
The I-bit is automatically set when a return from interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.
There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the interrupt flag. For these
interrupts, the program counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt Vector in order to execute the interrupt handling routine,
and hardware clears the corresponding interrupt flag. Interrupt flags can also be cleared by writing a logic one to the flag bit
position(s) to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding interrupt enable bit is cleared, the interrupt
flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more
interrupt conditions occur while the global interrupt enable bit is cleared, the corresponding interrupt flag(s) will be set and
remembered until the global interrupt enable bit is set, and will then be executed by order of priority.
The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. These interrupts do not necessarily
have interrupt flags. If the interrupt condition disappears before the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will not be triggered.
When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one more instruction before any
pending interrupt is served.
Note that the status register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor restored when returning from
an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.
When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled. No interrupt will be executed
after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the CLI instruction. The following example shows how this can
be used to avoid interrupts during the timed EEPROM write sequence.
Assembly Code Example
in
r16, SREG
; store SREG value
cli
sbi
sbi
out
; disable interrupts during timed sequence
EECR, EEMPE
EECR, EEPE
SREG, r16
; start EEPROM write
; restore SREG value (I-bit)
C Code Example
char cSREG;
cSREG = SREG;
/* store SREG value */
/* disable interrupts during timed sequence */
_CLI();
EECR |= (1<<EEMPE); /* start EEPROM write */
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);
SREG = cSREG; /* restore SREG value (I-bit) */
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
39
9240I–AUTO–03/16
When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be executed before any pending
interrupts, as shown in this example.
Assembly Code Example
sei
; set Global Interrupt Enable
sleep
; enter sleep, waiting for interrupt
; note: will enter sleep before any pending interrupt(s)
C Code Example
__enable_interrupt(); /* set Global Interrupt Enable */
__sleep(); /* enter sleep, waiting for interrupt */
/* note: will enter sleep before any pending interrupt(s) */
5.6.7.1 Interrupt Response Time
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR® interrupts is four clock cycles minimum. After four clock cycles the
program vector address for the actual interrupt handling routine is executed. During this four clock cycle period, the program
counter is pushed onto the stack. The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and this jump takes three clock
cycles. If an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction is completed before the interrupt is
served. If an interrupt occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode, the interrupt execution response time is increased by four
clock cycles. This increase comes in addition to the start-up time from the selected sleep mode.
A return from an interrupt handling routine takes four clock cycles. During these four clock cycles, the program counter (two
bytes) is popped back from the stack, the stack pointer is incremented by two, and the I-bit in SREG is set.
5.7
AVR Memories
5.7.1 Overview
This section describes the different memories in the ATmega328P. The AVR architecture has two main memory spaces, the
Data Memory and the Program Memory space. In addition, the ATmega328P features an EEPROM Memory for data
storage. All three memory spaces are linear and regular.
5.7.2 In-system Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory
The ATmega328P contains 32Kbytes on-chip in-system reprogrammable flash memory for program storage. Since all AVR
instructions are 16 or 32 bits wide, the flash is organized as 16K x 16. For software security, the flash program memory
space is divided into two sections, boot loader section and application program section in ATmega328P. See SELFPRGEN
description in Section 5.25.3.1 “SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register” on page 249 and 261 for
more details.
The flash memory has an endurance of at least 10,000 write/erase cycles. The ATmega328P Program Counter (PC) is 14
bits wide, thus addressing the 16K program memory locations. The operation of boot program section and associated boot
lock bits for software protection are described in detail in Section 5.25 “Self-programming the Flash, ATmega328P” on page
243 and Section 5.26 “Boot Loader Support – Read-while-write Self-programming” on page 250. Section 5.27 “Memory
Programming” on page 262 contains a detailed description on flash programming in SPI or parallel programming mode.
Constant tables can be allocated within the entire program memory address space (see the LPM – Load Program Memory
instruction description).
Timing diagrams for instruction fetch and execution are presented in Section 5.6.6 “Instruction Execution Timing” on page
38.
40
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-7. Program Memory Map ATmega328P
Program Memory
0x0000
Application Flash Section
Boot Flash Section
0x3FFF
5.7.3 SRAM Data Memory
Figure 5-8 shows how the ATmega328P SRAM Memory is organized.
The ATmega328P is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 locations
reserved in the Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the
ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
The lower 2303 data memory locations address both the register file, the I/O memory, extended I/O memory, and the
internal data SRAM. The first 32 locations address the register file, the next 64 location the standard I/O memory, then 160
locations of extended I/O memory, and the next 2048 locations address the internal data SRAM.
The five different addressing modes for the data memory cover: Direct, Indirect with displacement, indirect, indirect with pre-
decrement, and Indirect with post-increment. In the register file, registers R26 to R31 feature the indirect addressing pointer
registers.
The direct addressing reaches the entire data space.
The indirect with displacement mode reaches 63 address locations from the base address given by the Y- or Z-register.
When using register indirect addressing modes with automatic pre-decrement and post-increment, the address registers X,
Y, and Z are decremented or incremented.
The 32 general purpose working registers, 64 I/O registers, 160 extended I/O registers, and the 2048 bytes of internal data
SRAM in the ATmega328P are all accessible through all these addressing modes. The register file is described in Section
5.6.4 “General Purpose Register File” on page 35.
Figure 5-8. Data Memory Map
Data Memory
32 Registers
64 I/O Registers
0x0000 - 0x001F
0x0020 - 0x005F
160 Ext I/O Registers 0x0060 - 0x00FF
0x0100
Internal SRAM
(2048 x 8)
0x08FF
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
41
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.7.3.1 Data Memory Access Times
This section describes the general access timing concepts for internal memory access. The internal data SRAM access is
performed in two clkCPU cycles as described in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9. On-chip Data SRAM Access Cycles
T1
T2
T3
clkCPU
Address
Data
Compute Address
Address valid
Write
Read
WR
Data
RD
Memory Access Instruction
Next Instruction
5.7.4 EEPROM Data Memory
The ATmega328P contains 1K byte of data EEPROM memory. It is organized as a separate data space, in which single
bytes can be read and written. The EEPROM has an endurance of at least 100,000 write/erase cycles. The access between
the EEPROM and the CPU is described in the following, specifying the EEPROM address registers, the EEPROM data
register, and the EEPROM control register.
Section 5.27 “Memory Programming” on page 262 contains a detailed description on EEPROM programming in SPI or
parallel programming mode.
5.7.4.1 EEPROM Read/Write Access
The EEPROM access registers are accessible in the I/O space.
The write access time for the EEPROM is given in Table 5-3. A self-timing function, however, lets the user software detect
when the next byte can be written. If the user code contains instructions that write the EEPROM, some precautions must be
taken. In heavily filtered power supplies, VCC is likely to rise or fall slowly on power-up/down. This causes the device for
some period of time to run at a voltage lower than specified as minimum for the clock frequency used. See Section 5.7.4.2
“Preventing EEPROM Corruption” on page 42 for details on how to avoid problems in these situations.
In order to prevent unintentional EEPROM writes, a specific write procedure must be followed. Refer to the description of the
EEPROM control register for details on this.
When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four clock cycles before the next instruction is executed. When the
EEPROM is written, the CPU is halted for two clock cycles before the next instruction is executed.
5.7.4.2 Preventing EEPROM Corruption
During periods of low VCC, the EEPROM data can be corrupted because the supply voltage is too low for the CPU and the
EEPROM to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board level systems using EEPROM, and the same design
solutions should be applied.
An EEPROM data corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a regular write sequence to
the EEPROM requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly,
if the supply voltage is too low.
42
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
EEPROM data corruption can easily be avoided by following this design recommendation:
Keep the AVR® RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can be done by enabling the
internal brown-out Detector (BOD). If the detection level of the internal BOD does not match the needed detection level, an
external low VCC reset protection circuit can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write
operation will be completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.
5.7.5 I/O Memory
The I/O space definition of the ATmega328P is shown in Section 5.30 “Register Summary” on page 294.
All ATmega328P I/Os and peripherals are placed in the I/O space. All I/O locations may be accessed by the LD/LDS/LDD
and ST/STS/STD instructions, transferring data between the 32 general purpose working registers and the I/O space. I/O
registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. Refer to the instruction set
section for more details. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used.
When addressing I/O Registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The
ATmega328P is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved
in Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD
and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses
should never be written.
Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and SBI
instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such status flags. The
CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
The I/O and peripherals control registers are explained in later sections.
5.7.5.1 General Purpose I/O Registers
The ATmega328P contains three general purpose I/O registers. These registers can be used for storing any information,
and they are particularly useful for storing global variables and status flags. General purpose I/O registers within the address
range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI, CBI, SBIS, and SBIC instructions.
5.7.6 Register Description
5.7.6.1 EEARH and EEARL – The EEPROM Address Register
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
EEAR8
EEAR0
0
0x22 (0x42)
0x21 (0x41)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
EEARH
EEARL
EEAR7
EEAR6
EEAR5
EEAR4
EEAR3
EEAR2
EEAR1
7
R
6
R
5
R
4
R
3
R
2
R
1
R
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
R/W
X
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
• Bits 15..9 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega328P and will always read as zero.
• Bits 8..0 – EEAR8..0: EEPROM Address
The EEPROM address registers – EEARH and EEARL specify the EEPROM address in the 256/512/512/1K bytes
EEPROM space. The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly between 0 and 255/511/511/1023. The initial value of
EEAR is undefined. A proper value must be written before the EEPROM may be accessed.
EEAR8 is an unused bit in ATmega328P and must always be written to zero.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
43
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.7.6.2 EEDR – The EEPROM Data Register
Bit
7
MSB
R/W
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x20 (0x40)
Read/Write
Initial Value
LSB
R/W
0
EEDR
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bits 7..0 – EEDR7.0: EEPROM Data
For the EEPROM write operation, the EEDR register contains the data to be written to the EEPROM in the address given by
the EEAR register. For the EEPROM read operation, the EEDR contains the data read out from the EEPROM at the address
given by EEAR.
5.7.6.3 EECR – The EEPROM Control Register
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
EEPM1
R/W
X
4
EEPM0
R/W
X
3
EERIE
R/W
0
2
EEMPE
R/W
0
1
EEPE
R/W
X
0
EERE
R/W
0
0x1F (0x3F)
Read/Write
Initial Value
EECR
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7..6 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega328P and will always read as zero.
• Bits 5, 4 – EEPM1 and EEPM0: EEPROM Programming Mode Bits
The EEPROM programming mode bit setting defines which programming action that will be triggered when writing EEPE. It
is possible to program data in one atomic operation (erase the old value and program the new value) or to split the Erase
and Write operations in two different operations. The programming times for the different modes are shown in Table 5-2.
While EEPE is set, any write to EEPMn will be ignored. During reset, the EEPMn bits will be reset to 0b00 unless the
EEPROM is busy programming.
Table 5-2. EEPROM Mode Bits
EEPM1
EEPM0
Programming Time Operation
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
3.4ms
1.8ms
1.8ms
–
Erase and Write in one operation (Atomic Operation)
Erase Only
Write Only
Reserved for future use
• Bit 3 – EERIE: EEPROM Ready Interrupt Enable
Writing EERIE to one enables the EEPROM ready interrupt if the I bit in SREG is set. Writing EERIE to zero disables the
interrupt. The EEPROM ready interrupt generates a constant interrupt when EEPE is cleared. The interrupt will not be
generated during EEPROM write or SPM.
• Bit 2 – EEMPE: EEPROM Master Write Enable
The EEMPE bit determines whether setting EEPE to one causes the EEPROM to be written. When EEMPE is set, setting
EEPE within four clock cycles will write data to the EEPROM at the selected address If EEMPE is zero, setting EEPE will
have no effect. When EEMPE has been written to one by software, hardware clears the bit to zero after four clock cycles.
See the description of the EEPE bit for an EEPROM write procedure.
44
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
• Bit 1 – EEPE: EEPROM Write Enable
The EEPROM write enable signal EEPE is the write strobe to the EEPROM. When address and data are correctly set up,
the EEPE bit must be written to one to write the value into the EEPROM. The EEMPE bit must be written to one before a
logical one is written to EEPE, otherwise no EEPROM write takes place. The following procedure should be followed when
writing the EEPROM (the order of steps 3 and 4 is not essential):
1. Wait until EEPE becomes zero.
2. Wait until SELFPRGEN in SPMCSR becomes zero.
3. Write new EEPROM address to EEAR (optional).
4. Write new EEPROM data to EEDR (optional).
5. Write a logical one to the EEMPE bit while writing a zero to EEPE in EECR.
6. Within four clock cycles after setting EEMPE, write a logical one to EEPE.
The EEPROM can not be programmed during a CPU write to the flash memory. The software must check that the flash
programming is completed before initiating a new EEPROM write. Step 2 is only relevant if the software contains a boot
loader allowing the CPU to program the flash. If the flash is never being updated by the CPU, step 2 can be omitted. See
Section 5.26 “Boot Loader Support – Read-while-write Self-programming” on page 250 for details about boot programming.
Caution: An interrupt between step 5 and step 6 will make the write cycle fail, since the EEPROM master write enable will
time-out. If an interrupt routine accessing the EEPROM is interrupting another EEPROM access, the EEAR or EEDR
register will be modified, causing the interrupted EEPROM access to fail. It is recommended to have the global interrupt flag
cleared during all the steps to avoid these problems.
When the write access time has elapsed, the EEPE bit is cleared by hardware. The user software can poll this bit and wait
for a zero before writing the next byte. When EEPE has been set, the CPU is halted for two cycles before the next instruction
is executed.
• Bit 0 – EERE: EEPROM Read Enable
The EEPROM read enable signal EERE is the read strobe to the EEPROM. When the correct address is set up in the EEAR
register, the EERE bit must be written to a logic one to trigger the EEPROM read. The EEPROM read access takes one
instruction, and the requested data is available immediately. When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four cycles
before the next instruction is executed.
The user should poll the EEPE bit before starting the read operation. If a write operation is in progress, it is neither possible
to read the EEPROM, nor to change the EEAR register.
The calibrated oscillator is used to time the EEPROM accesses. Table 5-3 lists the typical programming time for EEPROM
access from the CPU.
Table 5-3. EEPROM Programming Time
Symbol
Number of Calibrated RC Oscillator Cycles
Typ Programming Time
EEPROM write (from
CPU)
26.368
3.3ms
The following code examples show one assembly and one C function for writing to the EEPROM. The examples assume
that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these
functions. The examples also assume that no flash boot loader is present in the software. If such code is present, the
EEPROM write function must also wait for any ongoing SPM command to finish.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
45
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Assembly Code Example
EEPROM_write:
; Wait for completion of previous write
sbic
rjmp
EECR,EEPE
EEPROM_write
; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register
out
out
EEARH, r18
EEARL, r17
; Write data (r16) to Data Register
out EEDR,r16
; Write logical one to EEMPE
sbi EECR,EEMPE
; Start eeprom write by setting EEPE
sbi
ret
EECR,EEPE
C Code Example
void EEPROM_write(unsigned int uiAddress, unsigned char ucData)
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))
;
/* Set up address and Data Registers */
EEAR = uiAddress;
EEDR = ucData;
/* Write logical one to EEMPE */
EECR |= (1<<EEMPE);
/* Start eeprom write by setting EEPE */
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);
}
46
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The next code examples show assembly and C functions for reading the EEPROM. The examples assume that interrupts
are controlled so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions.
Assembly Code Example
EEPROM_read:
; Wait for completion of previous write
sbic
rjmp
EECR,EEPE
EEPROM_read
; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register
out
out
EEARH, r18
EEARL, r17
; Start eeprom read by writing EERE
sbi EECR,EERE
; Read data from Data Register
in
r16,EEDR
ret
C Code Example
unsigned char EEPROM_read(unsigned int uiAddress)
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))
;
/* Set up address register */
EEAR = uiAddress;
/* Start eeprom read by writing EERE */
EECR |= (1<<EERE);
/* Return data from Data Register */
return EEDR;
}
5.7.6.4 GPIOR2 – General Purpose I/O Register 2
Bit
7
MSB
R/W
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x2B (0x4B)
Read/Write
Initial Value
LSB
R/W
0
GPIOR2
GPIOR1
GPIOR0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
5.7.6.5 GPIOR1 – General Purpose I/O Register 1
Bit
7
MSB
R/W
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x2A (0x4A)
Read/Write
Initial Value
LSB
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
5.7.6.6 GPIOR0 – General Purpose I/O Register 0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x1E (0x3E)
Read/Write
Initial Value
MSB
R/W
0
LSB
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
47
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.8
System Clock and Clock Options
5.8.1 Clock Systems and their Distribution
Figure 5-10 presents the principal clock systems in the AVR® and their distribution. All of the clocks need not be active at a
given time. In order to reduce power consumption, the clocks to modules not being used can be halted by using different
sleep modes, as described in Section 5.9 “Power Management and Sleep Modes” on page 58. The clock systems are
detailed below.
Figure 5-10. Clock Distribution
Asynchronous
Timer/Counter
General I/O
Modules
Flash and
EEPROM
ADC
CPU Core
RAM
clkADC
clkI/O
clkCPU
AVR Clock
Control Unit
clkASY
clkFLASH
System Clock
Prescaler
Reset Logic
Watchdog Timer
Source clock
Watchdog clock
Watchdog
Oscillator
Clock
Multiplexer
Timer/Counter
Oscillator
Crystal
Oscillator
Low-frequency
Crystal Oscillator
Calibrated RC
Oscillator
External Clock
5.8.1.1 CPU Clock – clkCPU
The CPU clock is routed to parts of the system concerned with operation of the AVR core. Examples of such modules are
the general purpose register File, the status register and the data memory holding the stack pointer. Halting the CPU clock
inhibits the core from performing general operations and calculations.
5.8.1.2 I/O Clock – clkI/O
The I/O clock is used by the majority of the I/O modules, like Timer/Counters, SPI, and USART. The I/O clock is also used by
the External Interrupt module, but note that some external interrupts are detected by asynchronous logic, allowing such
interrupts to be detected even if the I/O clock is halted. Also note that start condition detection in the USI module is carried
out asynchronously when clkI/O is halted, TWI address recognition in all sleep modes.
5.8.1.3 Flash Clock – clkFLASH
The flash clock controls operation of the flash interface. The flash clock is usually active simultaneously with the CPU clock.
5.8.1.4 Asynchronous Timer Clock – clkASY
The asynchronous timer clock allows the asynchronous Timer/Counter to be clocked directly from an external clock or an
external 32 kHz clock crystal. The dedicated clock domain allows using this Timer/Counter as a real-time counter even when
the device is in sleep mode.
48
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.8.1.5 ADC Clock – clkADC
The ADC is provided with a dedicated clock domain. This allows halting the CPU and I/O clocks in order to reduce noise
generated by digital circuitry. This gives more accurate ADC conversion results.
5.8.2 Clock Sources
The device has the following clock source options, selectable by flash fuse bits as shown below. The clock from the selected
source is input to the AVR® clock generator, and routed to the appropriate modules.
Table 5-4. Device Clocking Options Select(1)
Device Clocking Option
Low power crystal oscillator
Full swing crystal oscillator
Low frequency crystal oscillator
Internal 128kHz RC oscillator
Calibrated internal RC oscillator
External clock
CKSEL3..0
1111 - 1000
0111 - 0110
0101 - 0100
0011
0010
0000
Reserved
0001
Note:
1. For all fuses “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed.
5.8.2.1 Default Clock Source
The device is shipped with internal RC oscillator at 8.0MHz and with the fuse CKDIV8 programmed, resulting in 1.0MHz
system clock. The startup time is set to maximum and time-out period enabled. (CKSEL = “0010”, SUT = “10”, CKDIV8 =
“0”). The default setting ensures that all users can make their desired clock source setting using any available programming
interface.
5.8.2.2 Clock Startup Sequence
Any clock source needs a sufficient VCC to start oscillating and a minimum number of oscillating cycles before it can be
considered stable.
To ensure sufficient VCC, the device issues an internal reset with a time-out delay (tTOUT) after the device reset is released by
all other reset sources. Section 5.10 “System Control and Reset” on page 63 describes the start conditions for the internal
reset. The delay (tTOUT) is timed from the watchdog oscillator and the number of cycles in the delay is set by the SUTx and
CKSELx fuse bits. The selectable delays are shown in Table 5-5. The frequency of the watchdog oscillator is voltage
dependent as shown in Section 5.29 “Typical Characteristics” on page 287.
Table 5-5. Number of Watchdog Oscillator Cycles
Typ Time-out (VCC = 5.0V)
Typ Time-out (VCC = 3.0V)
Number of Cycles
0ms
4.1ms
65ms
0ms
4.3ms
69ms
0
512
8K (8,192)
Main purpose of the delay is to keep the AVR in reset until it is supplied with minimum VCC. The delay will not monitor the
actual voltage and it will be required to select a delay longer than the VCC rise time. If this is not possible, an internal or
external brown-out detection circuit should be used. A BOD circuit will ensure sufficient VCC before it releases the reset, and
the time-out delay can be disabled. Disabling the time-out delay without utilizing a brown-out detection circuit is not
recommended.
The oscillator is required to oscillate for a minimum number of cycles before the clock is considered stable. An internal ripple
counter monitors the oscillator output clock, and keeps the internal reset active for a given number of clock cycles. The reset
is then released and the device will start to execute. The recommended oscillator start-up time is dependent on the clock
type, and varies from 6 cycles for an externally applied clock to 32K cycles for a low frequency crystal.
The start-up sequence for the clock includes both the time-out delay and the start-up time when the device starts up from
reset. When starting up from power-save or power-down mode, VCC is assumed to be at a sufficient level and only the start-
up time is included.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
49
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.8.3 Low Power Crystal Oscillator
Pins XTAL1 and XTAL2 are input and output, respectively, of an inverting amplifier which can be configured for use as an
on-chip Oscillator, as shown in Figure 5-11 on page 50. Either a quartz crystal or a ceramic resonator may be used.
This crystal oscillator is a low power oscillator, with reduced voltage swing on the XTAL2 output. It gives the lowest power
consumption, but is not capable of driving other clock inputs, and may be more susceptible to noise in noisy environments. In
these cases, refer to the Section 5.8.4 “Full Swing Crystal Oscillator” on page 51.
C1 and C2 should always be equal for both crystals and resonators. The optimal value of the capacitors depends on the
crystal or resonator in use, the amount of stray capacitance, and the electromagnetic noise of the environment. Some initial
guidelines for choosing capacitors for use with crystals are given in Table 5-6. For ceramic resonators, the capacitor values
given by the manufacturer should be used.
Figure 5-11. Crystal Oscillator Connections
C2
XTAL2 (TOSC2)
C1
XTAL1 (TOSC1)
GND
The low power oscillator can operate in three different modes, each optimized for a specific frequency range. The operating
mode is selected by the fuses CKSEL3..1 as shown in Table 5-6.
Table 5-6. Low Power Crystal Oscillator Operating Modes(2)
Frequency Range
(MHz)
Recommended Range for
Capacitors C1 and C2 (pF)
CKSEL3..1
100(1)
101
0.4 - 0.9
0.9 - 3.0
3.0 - 8.0
8.0 - 16.0
–
12 - 22
12 - 22
12 - 22
110
111
Notes: 1. This option should not be used with crystals, only with ceramic resonators.
2. If 8MHz frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on VCC), the CKDIV8 fuse can be pro-
grammed in order to divide the internal frequency by 8. It must be ensured that the resulting divided clock
meets the frequency specification of the device.
50
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The CKSEL0 Fuse together with the SUT1..0 fuses select the start-up times as shown in Table 5-7.
Table 5-7. Start-up Times for the Low Power Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection
Additional Delay from
Oscillator Source / Power
Conditions
Start-up Time from Power-
down and Power-save
Reset
(VCC = 5.0V)
CKSEL0
SUT1..0
Ceramic resonator, fast rising
power
258 CK
258 CK
1K CK
1K CK
14CK + 4.1ms(1)
14CK + 65ms(1)
14CK(2)
0
00
Ceramic resonator, slowly rising
power
0
0
0
01
10
11
Ceramic resonator, BOD
enabled
Ceramic resonator, fast rising
power
14CK + 4.1ms(2)
Ceramic resonator, slowly rising
power
1K CK
16K CK
16K CK
14CK + 65ms(2)
14CK
1
1
1
00
01
10
Crystal Oscillator, BOD enabled
Crystal Oscillator, fast rising
power
14CK + 4.1ms
Crystal Oscillator, slowly rising
power
16K CK
14CK + 65ms
1
11
Notes: 1. These options should only be used when not operating close to the maximum frequency of the device, and
only if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application. These options are not suitable for
crystals.
2. These options are intended for use with ceramic resonators and will ensure frequency stability at start-up. They
can also be used with crystals when not operating close to the maximum frequency of the device, and if fre-
quency stability at start-up is not important for the application.
5.8.4 Full Swing Crystal Oscillator
Pins XTAL1 and XTAL2 are input and output, respectively, of an inverting amplifier which can be configured for use as an
on-chip Oscillator, as shown in Figure 5-11 on page 50. Either a quartz crystal or a ceramic resonator may be used.
This crystal oscillator is a full swing oscillator, with rail-to-rail swing on the XTAL2 output. This is useful for driving other clock
inputs and in noisy environments. The current consumption is higher than the Section 5.8.3 “Low Power Crystal Oscillator”
on page 50. Note that the full swing crystal oscillator will only operate for VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V.
C1 and C2 should always be equal for both crystals and resonators. The optimal value of the capacitors depends on the
crystal or resonator in use, the amount of stray capacitance, and the electromagnetic noise of the environment. Some initial
guidelines for choosing capacitors for use with crystals are given in Table 5-9 on page 52. For ceramic resonators, the
capacitor values given by the manufacturer should be used.
The operating mode is selected by the fuses CKSEL3..1 as shown in Table 5-8.
Table 5-8. Full Swing Crystal Oscillator Operating Modes(1)
Recommended Range for
Frequency Range(1) (MHz)
Capacitors C1 and C2 (pF)
CKSEL3..1
0.4 - 16
12 - 22
011
Notes: 1. The frequency ranges are preliminary values. Actual values are TBD.
2. If 8MHz frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on VCC), the CKDIV8 fuse can be pro-
grammed in order to divide the internal frequency by 8. It must be ensured that the resulting divided clock
meets the frequency specification of the device.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
51
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-12. Crystal Oscillator Connections
C2
C1
XTAL2 (TOSC2)
XTAL1 (TOSC1)
GND
Table 5-9. Start-up Times for the Full Swing Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection
Additional Delay from
Oscillator Source / Power
Conditions
Start-up Time from Power-
down and Power-save
Reset
(VCC = 5.0V)
CKSEL0
SUT1..0
Ceramic resonator, fast rising
power
258 CK
258 CK
1K CK
1K CK
14CK + 4.1ms(1)
14CK + 65ms(1)
14CK(2)
0
00
Ceramic resonator, slowly rising
power
0
0
0
01
10
11
Ceramic resonator, BOD
enabled
Ceramic resonator, fast rising
power
14CK + 4.1ms(2)
Ceramic resonator, slowly rising
power
1K CK
16K CK
16K CK
14CK + 65ms(2)
14CK
1
1
1
00
01
10
Crystal oscillator, BOD enabled
Crystal oscillator, fast rising
power
14CK + 4.1ms
Crystal oscillator, slowly rising
power
16K CK
14CK + 65ms
1
11
Notes: 1. These options should only be used when not operating close to the maximum frequency of the device, and
only if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application. These options are not suitable for
crystals.
2. These options are intended for use with ceramic resonators and will ensure frequency stability at start-up. They
can also be used with crystals when not operating close to the maximum frequency of the device, and if fre-
quency stability at start-up is not important for the application.
52
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.8.5 Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator
The low-frequency crystal oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768kHz watch crystal. When selecting crystals, load
capacitance and crystal’s equivalent series resistance, ESR must be taken into consideration. Both values are specified by
the crystal vendor. ATmega328P oscillator is optimized for very low power consumption, and thus when selecting crystals,
see Table 5-10 for maximum ESR recommendations on 6.5pF, 9.0pF and 12.5pF crystals.
Table 5-10. Maximum ESR Recommendation for 32.768kHz Crystal
Crystal CL (pF)
Max ESR [k](1)
6.5
75
65
30
9.0
12.5
Note:
1. Maximum ESR is typical value based on characterization
The low-frequency crystal oscillator provides an internal load capacitance of typical 6pF at each TOSC pin. The external
capacitance (C) needed at each TOSC pin can be calculated by using:
C = 2 CL – CS
where CL is the load capacitance for a 32.768kHz crystal specified by the crystal vendor and CS is the total stray
capacitance for one TOSC pin.
Crystals specifying load capacitance (CL) higher than 6pF, require external capacitors applied as described in Figure 5-11
on page 50.
The low-frequency crystal oscillator must be selected by setting the CKSEL Fuses to “0110” or “0111”, as shown in Table 5-
12. Start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in Table 5-11.
Table 5-11. Start-up Times for the Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection
SUT1..0
00
Additional Delay from Reset (VCC = 5.0V)
Recommended Usage
4 CK
Fast rising power or BOD enabled
Slowly rising power
01
4 CK + 4.1ms
4 CK + 65ms
10
Stable frequency at start-up
11
Reserved
Table 5-12. Start-up Times for the Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection
Start-up Time from
CKSEL3..0
0100(1)
Power-down and Power-save
Recommended Usage
1K CK
0101
32K CK
Stable frequency at start-up
Note:
1. This option should only be used if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
53
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.8.6 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator
By default, the Internal RC oscillator provides an approximate 8.0MHz clock. Though voltage and temperature dependent,
this clock can be very accurately calibrated by the user. See Table 5-128 on page 279 for more details. The device is
shipped with the CKDIV8 fuse programmed. See Section 5.8.11 “System Clock Prescaler” on page 56 for more details.
This clock may be selected as the system clock by programming the CKSEL fuses as shown in Table 5-13. If selected, it will
operate with no external components. During reset, hardware loads the pre-programmed calibration value into the OSCCAL
register and thereby automatically calibrates the RC oscillator. The accuracy of this calibration is shown as factory calibration
in Table 5-128 on page 279.
By changing the OSCCAL register from SW, see Section 5.8.12.1 “OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register” on page 57, it
is possible to get a higher calibration accuracy than by using the factory calibration. The accuracy of this calibration is shown
as User calibration in Table 5-128 on page 279.
When this oscillator is used as the chip clock, the watchdog oscillator will still be used for the watchdog Timer and for the
reset time-out. For more information on the pre-programmed calibration value, see the section Section 5.27.4 “Calibration
Byte” on page 265.
Table 5-13. Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Operating Modes(1)(2)
Nominal Frequency (MHz)
CKSEL3..0
8
0010
Notes: 1. The device is shipped with this option selected.
2. If 8MHz frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on VCC), the CKDIV8 Fuse can be pro-
grammed in order to divide the internal frequency by 8.
When this oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT fuses as shown in Table 5-14 on page 54.
Table 5-14. Start-up times for the internal calibrated RC Oscillator clock selection
Start-up Time from Power-down and
Power-save
Additional Delay from Reset
(VCC = 5.0V)
Power Conditions
BOD enabled
SUT1..0
00
6 CK
6 CK
14CK(1)
Fast rising power
Slowly rising power
14CK + 4.1ms
14CK + 65 ms(2)
01
6 CK
10
Reserved
11
Note:
1. If the RSTDISBL fuse is programmed, this start-up time will be increased to 14CK + 4.1 ms to ensure program-
ming mode can be entered.
2. The device is shipped with this option selected.
54
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.8.7 128 kHz Internal Oscillator
The 128 kHz internal oscillator is a low power oscillator providing a clock of 128kHz. The frequency is nominal at 3V and
25°C. This clock may be select as the system clock by programming the CKSEL fuses to “11” as shown in Table 5-15.
.
Table 5-15. 128 kHz Internal Oscillator Operating Modes
Nominal Frequency
CKSEL3..0
128kHz
0011
When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in Table 5-16.
Table 5-16. Start-up Times for the 128 kHz Internal Oscillator
Start-up Time from Power-down and
Power Conditions
Power-save
Additional Delay from Reset
14CK(1)
SUT1..0
00
BOD enabled
6 CK
Fast rising power
Slowly rising power
6 CK
14CK + 4ms
01
6 CK
14CK + 64ms
10
Reserved
11
Note:
1. If the RSTDISBL fuse is programmed, this start-up time will be increased to 14CK + 4.1ms to ensure program-
ming mode can be entered.
5.8.8 External Clock
To drive the device from an external clock source, XTAL1 should be driven as shown in Figure 5-13. To run the device on an
external clock, the CKSEL fuses must be programmed to “0000” (see Table 5-17).
Table 5-17. Crystal Oscillator Clock Frequency
Frequency
CKSEL3..0
0 - 20MHz
0000
Figure 5-13. External Clock Drive Configuration
XTAL2
NC
External
XTAL1
Clock
Signal
GND
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
55
9240I–AUTO–03/16
When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in Table 5-18.
Table 5-18. Start-up Times for the External Clock Selection
Start-up Time from Power-down and
Power-save
Additional Delay from Reset
(VCC = 5.0V)
Power Conditions
BOD enabled
SUT1..0
00
6 CK
6 CK
14CK
Fast rising power
14CK + 4.1ms
14CK + 65ms
01
Slowly rising power
6 CK
10
Reserved
11
When applying an external clock, it is required to avoid sudden changes in the applied clock frequency to ensure stable
operation of the MCU. A variation in frequency of more than 2% from one clock cycle to the next can lead to unpredictable
behavior. If changes of more than 2% is required, ensure that the MCU is kept in reset during the changes.
Note that the System Clock Prescaler can be used to implement run-time changes of the internal clock frequency while still
ensuring stable operation. Refer to Section 5.8.11 “System Clock Prescaler” on page 56 for details.
5.8.9 Clock Output Buffer
The device can output the system clock on the CLKO pin. To enable the output, the CKOUT Fuse has to be programmed.
This mode is suitable when the chip clock is used to drive other circuits on the system. The clock also will be output during
reset, and the normal operation of I/O pin will be overridden when the fuse is programmed. Any clock source, including the
internal RC oscillator, can be selected when the clock is output on CLKO. If the system clock prescaler is used, it is the
divided system clock that is output.
5.8.10 Timer/Counter Oscillator
ATmega328P uses the same crystal oscillator for low-frequency oscillator and Timer/Counter oscillator. See Section 5.8.5
“Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 53 for details on the oscillator and crystal requirements.
ATmega328P share the Timer/Counter oscillator pins (TOSC1 and TOSC2) with XTAL1 and XTAL2. When using the
Timer/Counter oscillator, the system clock needs to be four times the oscillator frequency. Due to this and the pin sharing,
the Timer/Counter oscillator can only be used when the calibrated Internal RC oscillator is selected as system clock source.
Applying an external clock source to TOSC1 can be done if EXTCLK in the ASSR register is written to logic one. See Section
5.17.9 “Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2” on page 148 for further description on selecting external clock as input
instead of a 32.768kHz watch crystal.
5.8.11 System Clock Prescaler
The ATmega328P has a system clock prescaler, and the system clock can be divided by setting the Section 5.8.12.2
“CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register” on page 57. This feature can be used to decrease the system clock frequency and the
power consumption when the requirement for processing power is low. This can be used with all clock source options, and it
will affect the clock frequency of the CPU and all synchronous peripherals. clkI/O, clkADC, clkCPU, and clkFLASH are divided by
a factor as shown in Table 5-131 on page 280.
When switching between prescaler settings, the system clock prescaler ensures that no glitches occurs in the clock system.
It also ensures that no intermediate frequency is higher than neither the clock frequency corresponding to the previous
setting, nor the clock frequency corresponding to the new setting. The ripple counter that implements the prescaler runs at
the frequency of the undivided clock, which may be faster than the CPU's clock frequency. Hence, it is not possible to
determine the state of the prescaler - even if it were readable, and the exact time it takes to switch from one clock division to
the other cannot be exactly predicted. From the time the CLKPS values are written, it takes between T1 + T2 and T1 + 2 * T2
before the new clock frequency is active. In this interval, 2 active clock edges are produced. Here, T1 is the previous clock
period, and T2 is the period corresponding to the new prescaler setting.
To avoid unintentional changes of clock frequency, a special write procedure must be followed to change the CLKPS bits:
1. Write the clock prescaler change enable (CLKPCE) bit to one and all other bits in CLKPR to zero.
2. Within four cycles, write the desired value to CLKPS while writing a zero to CLKPCE.
Interrupts must be disabled when changing prescaler setting to make sure the write procedure is not interrupted.
56
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.8.12 Register Description
5.8.12.1 OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0x66)
CAL7
R/W
CAL6
R/W
CAL5
R/W
CAL4
R/W
CAL3
R/W
CAL2
R/W
CAL1
R/W
CAL0
R/W
OSCCAL
Read/Write
Initial Value
Device Specific Calibration Value
• Bits 7..0 – CAL7..0: Oscillator Calibration Value
The oscillator calibration register is used to trim the calibrated internal RC oscillator to remove process variations from the
oscillator frequency. A pre-programmed calibration value is automatically written to this register during chip reset, giving the
factory calibrated frequency as specified in Table 5-128 on page 279. The application software can write this register to
change the oscillator frequency. The oscillator can be calibrated to frequencies as specified in Table 5-128 on page 279.
Calibration outside that range is not guaranteed.
Note that this oscillator is used to time EEPROM and flash write accesses, and these write times will be affected accordingly.
If the EEPROM or flash are written, do not calibrate to more than 8.8 MHz. Otherwise, the EEPROM or flash write may fail.
The CAL7 bit determines the range of operation for the oscillator. Setting this bit to 0 gives the lowest frequency range,
setting this bit to 1 gives the highest frequency range. The two frequency ranges are overlapping, in other words a setting of
OSCCAL = 0x7F gives a higher frequency than OSCCAL = 0x80.
The CAL6..0 bits are used to tune the frequency within the selected range. A setting of 0x00 gives the lowest frequency in
that range, and a setting of 0x7F gives the highest frequency in the range.
5.8.12.2 CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register
Bit
7
CLKPCE
R/W
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
2
1
0
(0x61)
CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0
R/W R/W R/W R/W
See Bit Description
CLKPR
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
• Bit 7 – CLKPCE: Clock Prescaler Change Enable
The CLKPCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the CLKPS bits. The CLKPCE bit is only updated when the
other bits in CLKPR are simultaneously written to zero. CLKPCE is cleared by hardware four cycles after it is written or when
CLKPS bits are written. Rewriting the CLKPCE bit within this time-out period does neither extend the time-out period, nor
clear the CLKPCE bit.
• Bits 3..0 – CLKPS3..0: Clock Prescaler Select Bits 3 - 0
These bits define the division factor between the selected clock source and the internal system clock. These bits can be
written run-time to vary the clock frequency to suit the application requirements. As the divider divides the master clock input
to the MCU, the speed of all synchronous peripherals is reduced when a division factor is used. The division factors are
given in Table 5-19 on page 58.
The CKDIV8 Fuse determines the initial value of the CLKPS bits. If CKDIV8 is unprogrammed, the CLKPS bits will be reset
to “0000”. If CKDIV8 is programmed, CLKPS bits are reset to “0011”, giving a division factor of 8 at start up. This feature
should be used if the selected clock source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of the device at the present
operating conditions. Note that any value can be written to the CLKPS bits regardless of the CKDIV8 fuse setting. The
application software must ensure that a sufficient division factor is chosen if the selected clock source has a higher
frequency than the maximum frequency of the device at the present operating conditions. The device is shipped with the
CKDIV8 fuse programmed.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
57
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-19. Clock Prescaler Select
CLKPS3
CLKPS2
CLKPS1
CLKPS0
Clock Division Factor
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
5.9
Power Management and Sleep Modes
Sleep modes enable the application to shut down unused modules in the MCU, thereby saving power. The AVR® provides
various sleep modes allowing the user to tailor the power consumption to the application’s requirements.
When enabled, the Brown-out Detector (BOD) actively monitors the power supply voltage during the sleep periods. To
further save power, it is possible to disable the BOD in some sleep modes. See “BOD Disable” on page 59 for more details.
5.9.1 Sleep Modes
Figure 5-10 on page 48 presents the different clock systems in the ATmega328P, and their distribution. The figure is helpful
in selecting an appropriate sleep mode. Table 5-20 shows the different sleep modes, their wake up sources BOD disable
ability.
Table 5-20. Active Clock Domains and Wake-up Sources in the Different Sleep Modes.
Active Clock Domains
Oscillators
Wake-up Sources
Sleep Mode
Idle
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(2)
X(2)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(2)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ADC noise reduction
Power-down
Power-save
Standby(1)
X(3)
X(3)
X(3)
X(3)
X(3)
X
X
X
X
X
X(2)
X(2)
X
X
X
X
Extended standby
X(2)
Notes: 1. Only recommended with external crystal or resonator selected as clock source.
2. If Timer/Counter2 is running in asynchronous mode.
3. For INT1 and INT0, only level interrupt.
58
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
To enter any of the six sleep modes, the SE bit in SMCR must be written to logic one and a SLEEP instruction must be
executed. The SM2, SM1, and SM0 bits in the SMCR register select which sleep mode (Idle, ADC noise reduction,
power-down, power-save, standby, or extended standby) will be activated by the SLEEP instruction. See Table 5-21 on page
62 for a summary.
If an enabled interrupt occurs while the MCU is in a sleep mode, the MCU wakes up. The MCU is then halted for four cycles
in addition to the start-up time, executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction following SLEEP.
The contents of the register File and SRAM are unaltered when the device wakes up from sleep. If a reset occurs during
sleep mode, the MCU wakes up and executes from the reset vector.
5.9.2 BOD Disable
When the brown-out detector (BOD) is enabled by BODLEVEL fuses, Table 5-117 on page 265, the BOD is actively
monitoring the power supply voltage during a sleep period. To save power, it is possible to disable the BOD by software for
some of the sleep modes, see Table 5-20 on page 58. The sleep mode power consumption will then be at the same level as
when BOD is globally disabled by fuses. If BOD is disabled in software, the BOD function is turned off immediately after
entering the sleep mode. Upon wake-up from sleep, BOD is automatically enabled again. This ensures safe operation in
case the VCC level has dropped during the sleep period.
When the BOD has been disabled, the wake-up time from sleep mode will be approximately 60 µs to ensure that the BOD is
working correctly before the MCU continues executing code.
BOD disable is controlled by bit 6, BODS (BOD sleep) in the control register MCUCR, see Section 5.9.11.2 “MCUCR – MCU
Control Register” on page 62. Writing this bit to one turns off the BOD in relevant sleep modes, while a zero in this bit keeps
BOD active. Default setting keeps BOD active, i.e. BODS set to zero.
Writing to the BODS bit is controlled by a timed sequence and an enable bit, see Section 5.9.11.2 “MCUCR – MCU Control
Register” on page 62.
5.9.3 Idle Mode
When the SM2..0 bits are written to 000, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Idle mode, stopping the CPU but
allowing the SPI, USART, analog comparator, ADC, 2-wire serial interface, Timer/Counters, watchdog, and the interrupt
system to continue operating. This sleep mode basically halts clkCPU and clkFLASH, while allowing the other clocks to run.
Idle mode enables the MCU to wake up from external triggered interrupts as well as internal ones like the timer overflow and
USART transmit complete interrupts. If wake-up from the analog comparator interrupt is not required, the analog comparator
can be powered down by setting the ACD bit in the analog comparator control and status register – ACSR. This will reduce
power consumption in Idle mode. If the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered.
5.9.4 ADC Noise Reduction Mode
When the SM2..0 bits are written to 001, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter ADC noise reduction mode, stopping
the CPU but allowing the ADC, the external interrupts, the 2-wire Serial Interface address watch, Timer/Counter2(1), and the
watchdog to continue operating (if enabled). This sleep mode basically halts clkI/O, clkCPU, and clkFLASH, while allowing the
other clocks to run.
This improves the noise environment for the ADC, enabling higher resolution measurements. If the ADC is enabled, a
conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered. Apart from the ADC conversion complete interrupt, only an
external reset, a watchdog system reset, a watchdog interrupt, a brown-out reset, a 2-wire serial interface address match, a
Timer/Counter2 interrupt, an SPM/EEPROM ready interrupt, an external level interrupt on INT0 or INT1 or a pin change
interrupt can wake up the MCU from ADC noise reduction mode.
Note:
1. Timer/Counter2 will only keep running in asynchronous mode, see Section 5.17 “8-bit Timer/Counter2 with
PWM and Asynchronous Operation” on page 139 for details.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
59
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.9.5 Power-down Mode
When the SM2..0 bits are written to 010, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter power-down mode. In this mode, the
external oscillator is stopped, while the external interrupts, the 2-wire serial interface address watch, and the watchdog
continue operating (if enabled). Only an external reset, a watchdog system reset, a watchdog interrupt, a brown-out reset, a
2-wire serial Interface address match, an external level interrupt on INT0 or INT1, or a pin change interrupt can wake up the
MCU. This sleep mode basically halts all generated clocks, allowing operation of asynchronous modules only.
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from power-down mode, the changed level must be held for some
time to wake up the MCU. Refer to Section 5.12 “External Interrupts” on page 77 for details.
When waking up from power-down mode, there is a delay from the wake-up condition occurs until the wake-up becomes
effective. This allows the clock to restart and become stable after having been stopped. The wake-up period is defined by the
same CKSEL Fuses that define the reset time-out period, as described in Section 5.8.2 “Clock Sources” on page 49.
5.9.6 Power-save Mode
When the SM2..0 bits are written to 011, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter power-save mode. This mode is
identical to power-down, with one exception:
If Timer/Counter2 is enabled, it will keep running during sleep. The device can wake up from either timer overflow or output
compare event from Timer/Counter2 if the corresponding Timer/Counter2 interrupt enable bits are set in TIMSK2, and the
Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is set.
If Timer/Counter2 is not running, Power-down mode is recommended instead of power-save mode.
The Timer/Counter2 can be clocked both synchronously and asynchronously in power-save mode. If Timer/Counter2 is not
using the asynchronous clock, the Timer/Counter oscillator is stopped during sleep. If Timer/Counter2 is not using the
synchronous clock, the clock source is stopped during sleep. Note that even if the synchronous clock is running in power-
save, this clock is only available for Timer/Counter2.
5.9.7 Standby Mode
When the SM2..0 bits are 110 and an external crystal/resonator clock option is selected, the SLEEP instruction makes the
MCU enter standby mode. This mode is identical to power-down with the exception that the oscillator is kept running. From
standby mode, the device wakes up in six clock cycles.
5.9.8 Extended Standby Mode
When the SM2..0 bits are 111 and an external crystal/resonator clock option is selected, the SLEEP instruction makes the
MCU enter extended standby mode. This mode is identical to power-save with the exception that the oscillator is kept
running. From extended standby mode, the device wakes up in six clock cycles.
5.9.9 Power Reduction Register
The power reduction register (PRR), see Section 5.9.11.3 “PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 63, provides a
method to stop the clock to individual peripherals to reduce power consumption. The current state of the peripheral is frozen
and the I/O registers can not be read or written. Resources used by the peripheral when stopping the clock will remain
occupied, hence the peripheral should in most cases be disabled before stopping the clock. Waking up a module, which is
done by clearing the bit in PRR, puts the module in the same state as before shutdown.
Module shutdown can be used in idle mode and active mode to significantly reduce the overall power consumption. In all
other sleep modes, the clock is already stopped.
5.9.10 Minimizing Power Consumption
There are several possibilities to consider when trying to minimize the power consumption in an AVR® controlled system. In
general, sleep modes should be used as much as possible, and the sleep mode should be selected so that as few as
possible of the device’s functions are operating. All functions not needed should be disabled. In particular, the following
modules may need special consideration when trying to achieve the lowest possible power consumption.
5.9.10.1 Analog to Digital Converter
If enabled, the ADC will be enabled in all sleep modes. To save power, the ADC should be disabled before entering any
sleep mode. When the ADC is turned off and on again, the next conversion will be an extended conversion. Refer to Section
5.23 “Analog-to-Digital Converter” on page 226 for details on ADC operation.
60
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.9.10.2 Analog Comparator
When entering Idle mode, the analog comparator should be disabled if not used. When entering ADC noise reduction mode,
the analog comparator should be disabled. In other sleep modes, the analog comparator is automatically disabled. However,
if the analog comparator is set up to use the internal voltage reference as input, the analog comparator should be disabled in
all sleep modes. Otherwise, the internal voltage reference will be enabled, independent of sleep mode. Refer to Section 5.22
“Analog Comparator” on page 223 for details on how to configure the analog comparator.
5.9.10.3 Brown-out Detector
If the brown-out detector is not needed by the application, this module should be turned off. If the brown-out detector is
enabled by the BODLEVEL Fuses, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence, always consume power. In the deeper
sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current consumption. Refer to Section 5.10.5 “Brown-out Detection”
on page 66 for details on how to configure the brown-out detector.
5.9.10.4 Internal Voltage Reference
The internal voltage reference will be enabled when needed by the brown-out detection, the analog comparator or the ADC.
If these modules are disabled as described in the sections above, the internal voltage reference will be disabled and it will
not be consuming power. When turned on again, the user must allow the reference to start up before the output is used. If
the reference is kept on in sleep mode, the output can be used immediately. Refer to Section 5.10.7 “Internal Voltage
Reference” on page 67 for details on the start-up time.
5.9.10.5 Watchdog Timer
If the watchdog timer is not needed in the application, the module should be turned off. If the watchdog Timer is enabled, it
will be enabled in all sleep modes and hence always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute
significantly to the total current consumption. Refer to Section 5.10.8 “Watchdog Timer” on page 68 for details on how to
configure the watchdog timer.
5.9.10.6 Port Pins
When entering a sleep mode, all port pins should be configured to use minimum power. The most important is then to ensure
that no pins drive resistive loads. In sleep modes where both the I/O clock (clkI/O) and the ADC clock (clkADC) are stopped,
the input buffers of the device will be disabled. This ensures that no power is consumed by the input logic when not needed.
In some cases, the input logic is needed for detecting wake-up conditions, and it will then be enabled. Refer to Section
5.13.2.5 “Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes” on page 86 for details on which pins are enabled. If the input buffer is
enabled and the input signal is left floating or have an analog signal level close to VCC/2, the input buffer will use excessive
power.
For analog input pins, the digital input buffer should be disabled at all times. An analog signal level close to VCC/2 on an input
pin can cause significant current even in active mode. Digital input buffers can be disabled by writing to the digital input
disable registers (DIDR1 and DIDR0). Refer to Section 5.22.3.3 “DIDR1 – Digital Input Disable Register 1” on page 225 and
Section 5.23.9.7 “DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0” on page 241 for details.
5.9.10.7 On-chip Debug System
If the on-chip debug system is enabled by the DWEN fuse and the chip enters sleep mode, the main clock source is enabled
and hence always consumes power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current
consumption.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
61
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.9.11 Register Description
5.9.11.1 SMCR – Sleep Mode Control Register
The Sleep Mode Control Register contains control bits for power management.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SE
R/W
0
0x33 (0x53)
Read/Write
Initial Value
–
–
–
–
SM2
R/W
0
SM1
R/W
0
SM0
R/W
0
SMCR
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7..4 Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bits 3..1 – SM2..0: Sleep Mode Select Bits 2, 1, and 0
These bits select between the five available sleep modes as shown in Table 5-21.
Table 5-21. Sleep Mode Select
SM2
0
SM1
0
SM0
Sleep Mode
Idle
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
ADC noise reduction
Power-down
Power-save
Reserved
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
Reserved
Standby(1)
External standby(1)
1
1
1
1
Note:
1. Standby mode is only recommended for use with external crystals or resonators.
• Bit 0 – SE: Sleep Enable
The SE bit must be written to logic one to make the MCU enter the sleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed. To
avoid the MCU entering the sleep mode unless it is the programmer’s purpose, it is recommended to write the sleep enable
(SE) bit to one just before the execution of the SLEEP instruction and to clear it immediately after waking up.
5.9.11.2 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
Bit
7
–
6
BODS
R
5
4
3
–
2
–
1
IVSEL
R/W
0
0
IVCE
R/W
0
0x35 (0x55)
Read/Write
Initial Value
BODSE
PUD
R/W
0
MCUCR
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
• Bit 6 – BODS: BOD Sleep
The BODS bit must be written to logic one in order to turn off BOD during sleep, see Table 5-20 on page 58. Writing to the
BODS bit is controlled by a timed sequence and an enable bit, BODSE in MCUCR. To disable BOD in relevant sleep modes,
both BODS and BODSE must first be set to one. Then, to set the BODS bit, BODS must be set to one and BODSE must be
set to zero within four clock cycles.
The BODS bit is active three clock cycles after it is set. A sleep instruction must be executed while BODS is active in order to
turn off the BOD for the actual sleep mode. The BODS bit is automatically cleared after three clock cycles.
• Bit 5 – BODSE: BOD Sleep Enable
BODSE enables setting of BODS control bit, as explained in BODS bit description. BOD disable is controlled by a timed
sequence.
62
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.9.11.3 PRR – Power Reduction Register
Bit
7
PRTWI
R/W
0
6
5
4
–
3
PRTIM1
R/W
0
2
PRSPI
R/W
0
1
0
(0x64)
PRTIM2 PRTIM0
PRUSART0 PRADC
PRR
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 7 - PRTWI: Power Reduction TWI
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the TWI by stopping the clock to the module. When waking up the TWI again, the
TWI should be re initialized to ensure proper operation.
• Bit 6 - PRTIM2: Power Reduction Timer/Counter2
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter2 module in synchronous mode (AS2 is 0). When the
Timer/Counter2 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown.
• Bit 5 - PRTIM0: Power Reduction Timer/Counter0
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter0 module. When the Timer/Counter0 is enabled, operation will
continue like before the shutdown.
• Bit 4 - Res: Reserved bit
This bit is reserved in ATmega328P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 - PRTIM1: Power Reduction Timer/Counter1
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter1 module. When the Timer/Counter1 is enabled, operation will
continue like before the shutdown.
• Bit 2 - PRSPI: Power Reduction Serial Peripheral Interface
If using debugWIRE on-chip debug system, this bit should not be written to one.
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the serial peripheral interface by stopping the clock to the module. When waking up
the SPI again, the SPI should be re initialized to ensure proper operation.
• Bit 1 - PRUSART0: Power Reduction USART0
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the USART by stopping the clock to the module. When waking up the USART
again, the USART should be re initialized to ensure proper operation.
• Bit 0 - PRADC: Power Reduction ADC
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the ADC. The ADC must be disabled before shut down. The analog comparator
cannot use the ADC input MUX when the ADC is shut down.
5.10 System Control and Reset
5.10.1 Resetting the AVR
During reset, all I/O registers are set to their initial values, and the program starts execution from the reset vector. For the
ATmega328P, the instruction placed at the reset vector must be an RJMP – relative jump – instruction to the reset handling
routine. If the program never enables an interrupt source, the interrupt vectors are not used, and regular program code can
be placed at these locations. This is also the case if the reset vector is in the application section while the interrupt vectors
are in the boot section. The circuit diagram in Figure 5-14 on page 64 shows the reset logic. Table 5-131 on page 280
defines the electrical parameters of the reset circuitry.
The I/O ports of the AVR® are immediately reset to their initial state when a reset source goes active. This does not require
any clock source to be running.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
63
9240I–AUTO–03/16
After all reset sources have gone inactive, a delay counter is invoked, stretching the internal reset. This allows the power to
reach a stable level before normal operation starts. The time-out period of the delay counter is defined by the user through
the SUT and CKSEL Fuses. The different selections for the delay period are presented in Section 5.8.2 “Clock Sources” on
page 49.
5.10.2 Reset Sources
The ATmega328P has four sources of reset:
●
●
Power-on reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the power-on reset threshold (VPOT).
External reset. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RESET pin for longer than the minimum pulse
length.
●
●
Watchdog system reset. The MCU is reset when the watchdog timer period expires and the watchdog system reset
mode is enabled.
Brown-out reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage VCC is below the brown-out reset threshold (VBOT) and the
brown-out detector is enabled.
Figure 5-14. Reset Logic
DATA BUS
MCU Status
Register (MCUSR)
Power-on Reset
Circuit
VCC
Brown-out
Reset Circuit
BODLEVEL[2..0]
Pull-up Resistor
Q
Reset Circuit
S
R
Spike
Filter
Watchdog
Timer
RESET
RSTDISBL
Watchdog
Oscillator
Delay Counters
CK
Clock
Generator
TIMEOUT
CKSEL[3..0]
SUT[1..0]
64
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.10.3 Power-on Reset
A power-on Reset (POR) pulse is generated by an on-chip detection circuit. The detection level is defined in Section 5.28.5
“System and Reset Characteristics” on page 280. The POR is activated whenever VCC is below the detection level. The POR
circuit can be used to trigger the start-up reset, as well as to detect a failure in supply voltage.
A power-on reset (POR) circuit ensures that the device is reset from power-on. Reaching the power-on reset threshold
voltage invokes the delay counter, which determines how long the device is kept in RESET after VCC rise. The RESET signal
is activated again, without any delay, when VCC decreases below the detection level.
Figure 5-15. MCU Start-up, RESET Tied to VCC
VPOT
VCC
VRST
RESET
tTOUT
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
Figure 5-16. . MCU Start-up, RESET Extended Externally
VPOT
VCC
VRST
RESET
tTOUT
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
Table 5-22. Power On Reset Specifications
Parameter
Symbol
Min
Typ
1.4
1.3
Max
Units
Power-on reset threshold voltage (rising)
Power-on reset threshold voltage (falling)(1)
V
V
VPOT
1.0
1.6
0.4
VCC Max. start voltage to ensure internal power-on reset
signal
VPORMAX
V
VCC Min. start voltage to ensure internal power-on reset
signal
VPORMIN
VCCRR
-0.1
V
VCC rise rate to ensure power-on reset
0.01
V/ms
Note:
1. Before rising, the supply has to be between VPORMIN and VPORMAX to ensure a reset
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
65
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.10.4 External Reset
An external reset is generated by a low level on the RESET pin. Reset pulses longer than the minimum pulse width (see
Section 5.28.5 “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 280) will generate a reset, even if the clock is not running.
Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset. When the applied signal reaches the reset threshold voltage – VRST
–
on its positive edge, the delay counter starts the MCU after the time-out period – tTOUT – has expired. The external reset can
be disabled by the RSTDISBL fuse, see Table 5-117 on page 265.
Figure 5-17. External Reset During Operation
VCC
RESET
VRST
tTOUT
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
5.10.5 Brown-out Detection
ATmega328P has an on-chip brown-out detection (BOD) circuit for monitoring the VCC level during operation by comparing it
to a fixed trigger level. The trigger level for the BOD can be selected by the BODLEVEL fuses. The trigger level has a
hysteresis to ensure spike free brown-out detection. The hysteresis on the detection level should be interpreted as VBOT+
BOT + VHYST/2 and VBOT- = VBOT - VHYST/2.When the BOD is enabled, and VCC decreases to a value below the trigger level
(VBOT- in
=
V
Figure 5-18 on page 66), the brown-out reset is immediately activated. When VCC increases above the trigger level (VBOT+ in
Figure 5-18 on page 66), the delay counter starts the MCU after the time-out period tTOUT has expired.
The BOD circuit will only detect a drop in VCC if the voltage stays below the trigger level for longer than tBOD given in Section
5.28.5 “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 280.
Figure 5-18. Brown-out Reset During Operation
VCC
VBOT+
VBOT-
RESET
tTOUT
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
66
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.10.6 Watchdog System Reset
When the watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of one CK cycle duration. On the falling edge of this pulse,
the delay timer starts counting the Time-out period tTOUT. Refer to Section 5.10.8 “Watchdog Timer” on page 68 for details on
operation of the watchdog timer.
Figure 5-19. Watchdog System Reset During Operation
VCC
RESET
1 CK Cycle
WDT
TIME-OUT
tTOUT
RESET
Time-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
5.10.7 Internal Voltage Reference
ATmega328P features an internal bandgap reference. This reference is used for brown-out detection, and it can be used as
an input to the analog comparator or the ADC.
5.10.7.1 Voltage Reference Enable Signals and Start-up Time
The voltage reference has a start-up time that may influence the way it should be used. The start-up time is given in Section
5.28.5 “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 280. To save power, the reference is not always turned on. The
reference is on during the following situations:
1. When the BOD is enabled (by programming the BODLEVEL [2:0] fuses).
2. When the bandgap reference is connected to the analog comparator (by setting the ACBG bit in ACSR).
3. When the ADC is enabled.
Thus, when the BOD is not enabled, after setting the ACBG bit or enabling the ADC, the user must always allow the
reference to start up before the output from the analog comparator or ADC is used. To reduce power consumption in power-
down mode, the user can avoid the three conditions above to ensure that the reference is turned off before entering power-
down mode.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
67
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.10.8 Watchdog Timer
5.10.8.1 Features
●
●
Clocked from separate on-chip oscillator
3 operating modes
●
●
●
Interrupt
System reset
Interrupt and system reset
●
●
Selectable time-out period from 16ms to 8s
Possible hardware fuse watchdog always on (WDTON) for fail-safe mode
5.10.8.2 Overview
ATmega328P has an enhanced watchdog timer (WDT). The WDT is a timer counting cycles of a separate on-chip 128kHz
oscillator. The WDT gives an interrupt or a system reset when the counter reaches a given time-out value. In normal
operation mode, it is required that the system uses the WDR - watchdog timer reset - instruction to restart the counter before
the time-out value is reached. If the system doesn't restart the counter, an interrupt or system reset will be issued.
Figure 5-20. Watchdog Timer
Watchdog
128kHz
Prescaler
Oscillator
WDP0
WDP1
WDP2
WDP3
WATCHDOG
RESET
WDE
MCU RESET
WDIF
INTERRUPT
WDIE
In interrupt mode, the WDT gives an interrupt when the timer expires. This interrupt can be used to wake the device from
sleep-modes, and also as a general system timer. One example is to limit the maximum time allowed for certain operations,
giving an interrupt when the operation has run longer than expected. In system reset mode, the WDT gives a reset when the
timer expires. This is typically used to prevent system hang-up in case of runaway code. The third mode, interrupt and
system reset mode, combines the other two modes by first giving an interrupt and then switch to system reset mode. This
mode will for instance allow a safe shutdown by saving critical parameters before a system reset.
The watchdog always on (WDTON) fuse, if programmed, will force the watchdog timer to system reset mode. With the fuse
programmed the system reset mode bit (WDE) and Interrupt mode bit (WDIE) are locked to 1 and 0 respectively. To further
ensure program security, alterations to the watchdog set-up must follow timed sequences.
The sequence for clearing WDE and changing time-out configuration is as follows:
1. In the same operation, write a logic one to the watchdog change enable bit (WDCE) and WDE. A logic one must
be written to WDE regardless of the previous value of the WDE bit.
2. Within the next four clock cycles, write the WDE and watchdog prescaler bits (WDP) as desired, but with the
WDCE bit cleared. This must be done in one operation.
68
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for turning off the watchdog timer. The example
assumes that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during the
execution of these functions.
Assembly Code Example(1)
WDT_off:
; Turn off global interrupt
cli
; Reset Watchdog Timer
wdr
; Clear WDRF in MCUSR
in
andi r16, (0xff & (0<<WDRF))
out MCUSR, r16
r16, MCUSR
; Write logical one to WDCE and WDE
; Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional time-out
lds r16, WDTCSR
ori
r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; Turn off WDT
ldi
r16, (0<<WDE)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; Turn on global interrupt
sei
ret
C Code Example(1)
void WDT_off(void)
{
__disable_interrupt();
__watchdog_reset();
/* Clear WDRF in MCUSR */
MCUSR &= ~(1<<WDRF);
/* Write logical one to WDCE and WDE */
/* Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional time-out */
WDTCSR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);
/* Turn off WDT */
WDTCSR = 0x00;
__enable_interrupt();
}
Notes: 1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
2. If the watchdog is accidentally enabled, for example by a runaway pointer or brown-out condition, the device
will be reset and the watchdog timer will stay enabled. If the code is not set up to handle the watchdog, this
might lead to an eternal loop of time-out resets. To avoid this situation, the application software should always
clear the watchdog system reset flag (WDRF) and the WDE control bit in the initialization routine, even if the
watchdog is not in use.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
69
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for changing the time-out value of the watchdog timer.
Assembly Code Example(1)
WDT_Prescaler_Change:
; Turn off global interrupt
cli
; Reset Watchdog Timer
wdr
; Start timed sequence
lds r16, WDTCSR
ori
r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; -- Got four cycles to set the new values from here -
; Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5 s)
ldi
r16, (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; -- Finished setting new values, used 2 cycles -
; Turn on global interrupt
sei
ret
C Code Example(1)
void WDT_Prescaler_Change(void)
{
__disable_interrupt();
__watchdog_reset();
/* Start timed equence */
WDTCSR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);
/* Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5 s) */
WDTCSR = (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0);
__enable_interrupt();
}
Notes: 1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
2. The watchdog timer should be reset before any change of the WDP bits, since a change in the WDP bits can
result in a time-out when switching to a shorter time-out period.
70
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.10.9 Register Description
5.10.9.1 MCUSR – MCU Status Register
The MCU status register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU reset.
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
2
1
0
0x35 (0x55)
Read/Write
Initial Value
WDRF
R/W
BORF
R/W
EXTRF
R/W
PORF
R/W
MCUSR
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
See Bit Description
• Bit 7..4: Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – WDRF: Watchdog System Reset Flag
This bit is set if a watchdog system reset occurs. The bit is reset by a power-on reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag.
• Bit 2 – BORF: Brown-out Reset Flag
This bit is set if a brown-out reset occurs. The bit is reset by a power-on reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag.
• Bit 1 – EXTRF: External Reset Flag
This bit is set if an external reset occurs. The bit is reset by a power-on reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag.
• Bit 0 – PORF: Power-on Reset Flag
This bit is set if a power-on reset occurs. The bit is reset only by writing a logic zero to the flag.
To make use of the reset flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read and then reset the MCUSR as early as
possible in the program. If the register is cleared before another reset occurs, the source of the reset can be found by
examining the reset flags.
5.10.9.2 WDTCSR – Watchdog Timer Control Register
Bit
7
WDIF
R/W
0
6
WDIE
R/W
0
5
WDP3
R/W
0
4
WDCE
R/W
0
3
2
WDP2
R/W
0
1
WDP1
R/W
0
0
WDP0
R/W
0
(0x60)
WDE
R/W
X
WDTCSR
Read/Write
Initial Value
• Bit 7 - WDIF: Watchdog Interrupt Flag
This bit is set when a time-out occurs in the watchdog timer and the watchdog timer is configured for interrupt. WDIF is
cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, WDIF is cleared by writing a
logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG and WDIE are set, the watchdog time-out Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 6 - WDIE: Watchdog Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in the status register is set, the watchdog interrupt is enabled. If WDE is cleared in
combination with this setting, the watchdog timer is in interrupt mode, and the corresponding interrupt is executed if time-out
in the watchdog timer occurs. If WDE is set, the watchdog timer is in interrupt and system reset mode. The first time-out in
the watchdog timer will set WDIF.
Executing the corresponding interrupt vector will clear WDIE and WDIF automatically by hardware (the watchdog goes to
system reset mode). This is useful for keeping the watchdog timer security while using the interrupt. To stay in Interrupt and
system reset mode, WDIE must be set after each interrupt. This should however not be done within the interrupt service
routine itself, as this might compromise the safety-function of the watchdog system reset mode. If the interrupt is not
executed before the next time-out, a system reset will be applied.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
71
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-23. Watchdog Timer Configuration
WDTON(1)
WDE
WDIE
Mode
Action on Time-out
None
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
Stopped
Interrupt mode
System reset mode
Interrupt
Reset
Interrupt, then go to system reset
mode
1
0
1
x
1
x
Interrupt and system reset mode
System reset mode
Reset
Note:
1. WDTON fuse set to “0” means programmed and “1” means unprogrammed.
• Bit 4 - WDCE: Watchdog Change Enable
This bit is used in timed sequences for changing WDE and prescaler bits. To clear the WDE bit, and/or change the prescaler
bits, WDCE must be set.
Once written to one, hardware will clear WDCE after four clock cycles.
• Bit 3 - WDE: Watchdog System Reset Enable
WDE is overridden by WDRF in MCUSR. This means that WDE is always set when WDRF is set. To clear WDE, WDRF
must be cleared first. This feature ensures multiple resets during conditions causing failure, and a safe start-up after the
failure.
• Bit 5, 2..0 - WDP3..0: Watchdog Timer Prescaler 3, 2, 1 and 0
The WDP3..0 bits determine the watchdog timer prescaling when the watchdog timer is running. The different prescaling
values and their corresponding time-out periods are shown in Table 5-24.
Table 5-24. Watchdog Timer Prescale Select
Typical Time-out at
WDP3
WDP2
WDP1
WDP0
Number of WDT Oscillator Cycles
2K (2048) cycles
VCC = 5.0V
16ms
32ms
64ms
0.125s
0.25s
0.5s
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
4K (4096) cycles
8K (8192) cycles
16K (16384) cycles
32K (32768) cycles
64K (65536) cycles
128K (131072) cycles
256K (262144) cycles
512K (524288) cycles
1024K (1048576) cycles
1.0s
2.0s
4.0s
8.0s
Reserved
72
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.11 Interrupts
This section describes the specifics of the interrupt handling as performed in ATmega328P. For a general explanation of the
AVR® interrupt handling, refer to Section 5.6.7 “Reset and Interrupt Handling” on page 39.
●
●
Each interrupt vector occupies two instruction words in ATmega328P.
In ATmega328P, the reset vector is affected by the BOOTRST fuse, and the interrupt vector start address is affected
by the IVSEL bit in MCUCR.
5.11.1 Interrupt Vectors in ATmega328P
Table 5-25. Reset and Interrupt Vectors in ATmega328P
Vector No. Program Address Source
Interrupt Definition
External pin, power-on reset, brown-out reset and watchdog
system reset
1
0x0000
RESET
2
0x002
0x0004
0x0006
0x0008
0x000A
0x000C
0x000E
0x0010
0x0012
0x0014
0x0016
0x0018
0x001A
0x001C
0x001E
0x0020
0x0022
0x0024
0x0026
0x0028
0x002A
0x002C
0x002E
0x0030
0x0032
INT0
External interrupt request 0
External interrupt request 1
Pin change interrupt request 0
Pin change interrupt request 1
Pin change interrupt request 2
Watchdog time-out interrupt
Timer/Counter2 compare match A
Timer/Counter2 compare match B
Timer/Counter2 overflow
3
INT1
4
PCINT0
5
PCINT1
6
PCINT2
7
WDT
8
TIMER2 COMPA
TIMER2 COMPB
TIMER2 OVF
TIMER1 CAPT
TIMER1 COMPA
TIMER1 COMPB
TIMER1 OVF
TIMER0 COMPA
TIMER0 COMPB
TIMER0 OVF
SPI, STC
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Timer/Counter1 capture event
Timer/Counter1 compare match A
Timer/Counter1 compare match B
Timer/Counter1 overflow
Timer/Counter0 compare match A
Timer/Counter0 compare match B
Timer/Counter0 overflow
SPI serial transfer complete
USART Rx complete
USART, RX
USART, UDRE
USART, TX
ADC
USART, data register empty
USART, Tx complete
ADC conversion complete
EEPROM ready
EE READY
ANALOG COMP
TWI
Analog comparator
2-wire serial interface
SPM READY
Store program memory ready
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
73
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-26 on page 74 shows reset and interrupt vectors placement for the various combinations of BOOTRST and IVSEL
settings. If the program never enables an interrupt source, the interrupt vectors are not used, and regular program code can
be placed at these locations. This is also the case if the reset vector is in the application section while the interrupt vectors
are in the boot section or vice versa.
Table 5-26. Reset and Interrupt Vectors Placement in ATmega328P(1)
BOOTRST
IVSEL
Reset Address
0x000
Interrupt Vectors Start Address
0x002
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0x000
Boot Reset Address + 0x0002
0x002
Boot Reset Address
Boot Reset Address
Boot Reset Address + 0x0002
Note:
1. For the BOOTRST Fuse “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed.
The most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in ATmega328P is:
Address
0x0000
0x0002
0x0004
0x0006
0x0008
0x000A
0x000C
0x000E
0x0010
0x0012
0x0014
0x0016
0x0018
0x001A
0x001C
0x001E
0x0020
0x0022
0x0024
0x0026
0x0028
0x002A
0x002C
0x002E
0x0030
0x0032
;
Labels Code
Comments
; Reset Handler
; IRQ0 Handler
; IRQ1 Handler
; PCINT0 Handler
; PCINT1 Handler
; PCINT2 Handler
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
RESET
EXT_INT0
EXT_INT1
PCINT0
PCINT1
PCINT2
WDT
; Watchdog Timer Handler
; Timer2 Compare A Handler
; Timer2 Compare B Handler
; Timer2 Overflow Handler
; Timer1 Capture Handler
; Timer1 Compare A Handler
; Timer1 Compare B Handler
; Timer1 Overflow Handler
; Timer0 Compare A Handler
; Timer0 Compare B Handler
; Timer0 Overflow Handler
; SPI Transfer Complete Handler
; USART, RX Complete Handler
; USART, UDR Empty Handler
; USART, TX Complete Handler
; ADC Conversion Complete Handler
; EEPROM Ready Handler
; Analog Comparator Handler
; 2-wire Serial Interface Handler
; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
TIM2_COMPA
TIM2_COMPB
TIM2_OVF
TIM1_CAPT
TIM1_COMPA
TIM1_COMPB
TIM1_OVF
TIM0_COMPA
TIM0_COMPB
TIM0_OVF
SPI_STC
USART_RXC
USART_UDRE
USART_TXC
ADC
EE_RDY
ANA_COMP
TWI
SPM_RDY
0x0033 RESET:ldi
r16, high(RAMEND)
SPH,r16
r16, low(RAMEND)
SPL,r16
; Main program start
; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x0034
0x0035
0x0036
0x0037
0x0038
...
out
ldi
out
sei
<instr> xxx
... ...
; Enable interrupts
...
74
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
When the BOOTRST fuse is unprogrammed, the boot section size set to 2Kbytes and the IVSEL bit in the MCUCR register
is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and general program setup for the reset and interrupt vector
addresses in ATmega328P is:
Address
Labels Code
Comments
0x0000 RESET: ldi
r16,high(RAMEND)
SPH,r16
r16,low(RAMEND)
SPL,r16
; Main program start
; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x0001
0x0002
0x0003
0x0004
0x0005
;
out
ldi
out
sei
; Enable interrupts
<instr> xxx
.org 0x3C02
0x3C02
0x3C04
...
jmp
jmp
...
jmp
EXT_INT0
EXT_INT1
...
; IRQ0 Handler
; IRQ1 Handler
;
0x3C32
SPM_RDY
; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
When the BOOTRST fuse is programmed and the boot section size set to 2Kbytes, the most typical and general program
setup for the reset and interrupt vector addresses in ATmega328P is:
Address
.org 0x0002
0x0002
0x0004
...
Labels Code
Comments
jmp
jmp
...
jmp
EXT_INT0
EXT_INT1
...
; IRQ0 Handler
; IRQ1 Handler
;
0x0032
;
SPM_RDY
; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
.org 0x3C00
0x3C00 RESET: ldi
r16,high(RAMEND)
SPH,r16
r16,low(RAMEND)
SPL,r16
; Main program start
; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x3C01
0x3C02
0x3C03
0x3C04
0x3C05
out
ldi
out
sei
; Enable interrupts
<instr> xxx
When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed, the boot section size set to 2Kbytes and the IVSEL bit in the MCUCR register is
set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and general program setup for the reset and interrupt vector
addresses in ATmega328P is:
Address
;
Labels Code
Comments
.org 0x3C00
0x3C00
0x3C02
0x3C04
...
jmp
jmp
jmp
...
jmp
RESET
; Reset handler
; IRQ0 Handler
; IRQ1 Handler
;
EXT_INT0
EXT_INT1
...
0x3C32
;
SPM_RDY
; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
0x3C33 RESET: ldi
r16,high(RAMEND)
SPH,r16
r16,low(RAMEND)
SPL,r16
; Main program start
; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x3C34
0x3C35
0x3C36
0x3C37
0x3C38
out
ldi
out
sei
; Enable interrupts
<instr> xxx
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
75
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.11.2 Register Description
5.11.2.1 Moving Interrupts Between Application and Boot Space
The MCU control register controls the placement of the interrupt vector table.
5.11.2.2 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
Bit
7
–
6
BODS
R
5
4
3
–
2
–
1
IVSEL
R/W
0
0
IVCE
R/W
0
0x35 (0x55)
Read/Write
Initial Value
BODSE
PUD
R/W
0
MCUCR
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
• Bit 1 – IVSEL: Interrupt Vector Select
When the IVSEL bit is cleared (zero), the interrupt vectors are placed at the start of the Flash memory. When this bit is set
(one), the interrupt vectors are moved to the beginning of the boot loader section of the flash. The actual address of the start
of the boot flash section is determined by the BOOTSZ fuses. Refer to Section 5.26 “Boot Loader Support – Read-while-
write Self-programming” on page 250 for details. To avoid unintentional changes of interrupt vector tables, a special write
procedure must be followed to change the IVSEL bit:
a. Write the interrupt vector change enable (IVCE) bit to one.
b. Within four cycles, write the desired value to IVSEL while writing a zero to IVCE.
Interrupts will automatically be disabled while this sequence is executed. Interrupts are disabled in the cycle IVCE is set, and
they remain disabled until after the instruction following the write to IVSEL. If IVSEL is not written, interrupts remain disabled
for four cycles. The I-bit in the status register is unaffected by the automatic disabling.
Note:
If interrupt vectors are placed in the boot loader section and boot lock bit BLB02 is programmed, interrupts are
disabled while executing from the application section. If interrupt vectors are placed in the application section
and boot lock bit BLB12 is programed, interrupts are disabled while executing from the boot loader section.
Refer to Section 5.26 “Boot Loader Support – Read-while-write Self-programming” on page 250 for details on
boot lock bits.
This bit is not available in ATmega328P.
• Bit 0 – IVCE: Interrupt Vector Change Enable
The IVCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the IVSEL bit. IVCE is cleared by hardware four cycles after it
is written or when IVSEL is written. Setting the IVCE bit will disable interrupts, as explained in the IVSEL description above.
See code example below.
Assembly Code Example
Move_interrupts:
; Enable change of Interrupt Vectors
ldi
out
r16, (1<<IVCE)
MCUCR, r16
; Move interrupts to Boot Flash section
ldi
out
ret
r16, (1<<IVSEL)
MCUCR, r16
C Code Example
void Move_interrupts(void)
{
/* Enable change of Interrupt Vectors */
MCUCR = (1<<IVCE);
/* Move interrupts to Boot Flash section */
MCUCR = (1<<IVSEL);
}
This bit is not available in ATmega328P.
76
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.12 External Interrupts
The external interrupts are triggered by the INT0 and INT1 pins or any of the PCINT23..0 pins. Observe that, if enabled, the
interrupts will trigger even if the INT0 and INT1 or PCINT23..0 pins are configured as outputs. This feature provides a way of
generating a software interrupt. The pin change interrupt PCI2 will trigger if any enabled PCINT23..16 pin toggles. The pin
change interrupt PCI1 will trigger if any enabled PCINT14..8 pin toggles. The pin change interrupt PCI0 will trigger if any
enabled PCINT7..0 pin toggles. The PCMSK2, PCMSK1 and PCMSK0 registers control which pins contribute to the pin
change interrupts. Pin change interrupts on PCINT23..0 are detected asynchronously. This implies that these interrupts can
be used for waking the part also from sleep modes other than Idle mode.
The INT0 and INT1 interrupts can be triggered by a falling or rising edge or a low level. This is set up as indicated in the
specification for the external interrupt control register A – EICRA. When the INT0 or INT1 interrupts are enabled and are
configured as level triggered, the interrupts will trigger as long as the pin is held low. Note that recognition of falling or rising
edge interrupts on INT0 or INT1 requires the presence of an I/O clock, described in Section 5.8.1 “Clock Systems and their
Distribution” on page 48. Low level interrupt on INT0 and INT1 is detected asynchronously. This implies that this interrupt
can be used for waking the part also from sleep modes other than Idle mode. The I/O clock is halted in all sleep modes
except Idle mode.
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from power-down, the required level must be held long enough for
the MCU to complete the wake-up to trigger the level interrupt. If the level disappears before the end of the start-up time, the
MCU will still wake up, but no interrupt will be generated. The start-up time is defined by the SUT and CKSEL Fuses as
described in Section 5.8 “System Clock and Clock Options” on page 48.
5.12.1 Pin Change Interrupt Timing
An example of timing of a pin change interrupt is shown in Figure 5-21.
Figure 5-21. Timing of Pin Change Interrupts
0
pcint_sync
pcint_set/flag
D
pin_lat
pin_sync
pcint_in(0)
PCINT(0)
pin
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
Q
PCIF
LE
x
PCINT(0) in PCMSK(x)
clk
clk
clk
PCINT(0)
pin_lat
pin_sync
pcint_in(0)
pcint_sync
pcint_set/flag
PCIF
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
77
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.12.2 Register Description
5.12.2.1 EICRA – External Interrupt Control Register A
The external interrupt control register A contains control bits for interrupt sense control.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
ISC11
R/W
0
2
ISC10
R/W
0
1
ISC01
R/W
0
0
ISC00
R/W
0
(0x69)
–
–
–
–
EICRA
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7..4 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3, 2 – ISC11, ISC10: Interrupt Sense Control 1 Bit 1 and Bit 0
The external interrupt 1 is activated by the external pin INT1 if the SREG I-flag and the corresponding interrupt mask are set.
The level and edges on the external INT1 pin that activate the interrupt are defined in Table 5-27. The value on the INT1 pin
is sampled before detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer than one clock period will
generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If low level interrupt is selected, the low
level must be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an interrupt.
Table 5-27. Interrupt 1 Sense Control
ISC11
ISC10
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The low level of INT1 generates an interrupt request.
Any logical change on INT1 generates an interrupt request.
The falling edge of INT1 generates an interrupt request.
The rising edge of INT1 generates an interrupt request.
• Bit 1, 0 – ISC01, ISC00: Interrupt Sense Control 0 Bit 1 and Bit 0
The external interrupt 0 is activated by the external pin INT0 if the SREG I-flag and the corresponding interrupt mask are set.
The level and edges on the external INT0 pin that activate the interrupt are defined in Table 5-28. The value on the INT0 pin
is sampled before detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer than one clock period will
generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If low level interrupt is selected, the low
level must be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an interrupt.
Table 5-28. Interrupt 0 Sense Control
ISC01
ISC00
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The low level of INT0 generates an interrupt request.
Any logical change on INT0 generates an interrupt request.
The falling edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.
The rising edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.
78
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.12.2.2 EIMSK – External Interrupt Mask Register
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
0
0x1D (0x3D)
Read/Write
Initial Value
INT1
R/W
0
INT0
R/W
0
EIMSK
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7..2 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 1 – INT1: External Interrupt Request 1 Enable
When the INT1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the status register (SREG) is set (one), the external pin interrupt is enabled.
The interrupt sense control1 bits 1/0 (ISC11 and ISC10) in the external interrupt control register A (EICRA) define whether
the external interrupt is activated on rising and/or falling edge of the INT1 pin or level sensed. Activity on the pin will cause an
interrupt request even if INT1 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of external interrupt request 1 is
executed from the INT1 interrupt vector.
• Bit 0 – INT0: External Interrupt Request 0 Enable
When the INT0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the status register (SREG) is set (one), the external pin interrupt is enabled.
The interrupt sense control0 bits 1/0 (ISC01 and ISC00) in the external interrupt control register A (EICRA) define whether
the external interrupt is activated on rising and/or falling edge of the INT0 pin or level sensed. Activity on the pin will cause an
interrupt request even if INT0 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of external interrupt request 0 is
executed from the INT0 interrupt vector.
5.12.2.3 EIFR – External Interrupt Flag Register
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
INTF1
R/W
0
0
INTF0
R/W
0
0x1C (0x3C)
Read/Write
Initial Value
EIFR
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7..2 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 1 – INTF1: External Interrupt Flag 1
When an edge or logic change on the INT1 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF1 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG
and the INT1 bit in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding interrupt vector. The flag is cleared when
the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. This flag is always cleared
when INT1 is configured as a level interrupt.
• Bit 0 – INTF0: External Interrupt Flag 0
When an edge or logic change on the INT0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF0 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG
and the INT0 bit in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding interrupt vector. The flag is cleared when
the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. This flag is always cleared
when INT0 is configured as a level interrupt.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
79
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.12.2.4 PCICR – Pin Change Interrupt Control Register
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
PCIE2
R/W
0
1
PCIE1
R/W
0
0
PCIE0
R/W
0
(0x68)
PCICR
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7..3 - Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 - PCIE2: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 2
When the PCIE2 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the status register (SREG) is set (one), pin change interrupt 2 is enabled. Any
change on any enabled PCINT23..16 pin will cause an interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of pin change interrupt request
is executed from the PCI2 interrupt vector. PCINT23..16 pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK2 register.
• Bit 1 - PCIE1: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 1
When the PCIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the status register (SREG) is set (one), pin change interrupt 1 is enabled. Any
change on any enabled PCINT14..8 pin will cause an interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of pin change interrupt request is
executed from the PCI1 Interrupt Vector. PCINT14..8 pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK1 register.
• Bit 0 - PCIE0: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 0
When the PCIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the status register (SREG) is set (one), pin change interrupt 0 is enabled. Any
change on any enabled PCINT7..0 pin will cause an interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of pin change interrupt request is
executed from the PCI0 Interrupt vector. PCINT7..0 pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK0 register.
5.12.2.5 PCIFR – Pin Change Interrupt Flag Register
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
PCIF2
R/W
0
1
PCIF1
R/W
0
0
PCIF0
R/W
0
0x1B (0x3B)
Read/Write
Initial Value
PCIFR
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7..3 - Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 - PCIF2: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 2
When a logic change on any PCINT23..16 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF2 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG
and the PCIE2 bit in PCICR are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt vector. The flag is cleared when
the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.
• Bit 1 - PCIF1: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 1
When a logic change on any PCINT14..8 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF1 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and
the PCIE1 bit in PCICR are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding interrupt vector. The flag is cleared when the
interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.
• Bit 0 - PCIF0: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 0
When a logic change on any PCINT7..0 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF0 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and
the PCIE0 bit in PCICR are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding interrupt vector. The flag is cleared when the
interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.
80
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.12.2.6 PCMSK2 – Pin Change Mask Register 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0x6D)
PCINT23 PCINT22 PCINT21 PCINT20 PCINT19 PCINT18 PCINT17 PCINT16 PCMSK2
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 7..0 – PCINT23..16: Pin Change Enable Mask 23..16
Each PCINT23..16-bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT23..16 is set
and the PCIE2 bit in PCICR is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT23..16 is cleared,
pin change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled.
5.12.2.7 PCMSK1 – Pin Change Mask Register 1
Bit
7
–
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0x6C)
PCINT14 PCINT13 PCINT12 PCINT11 PCINT10 PCINT9 PCINT8 PCMSK1
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is an unused bit in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 6..0 – PCINT14..8: Pin Change Enable Mask 14..8
Each PCINT14..8-bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT14..8 is set and
the PCIE1 bit in PCICR is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT14..8 is cleared, pin
change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled.
5.12.2.8 PCMSK0 – Pin Change Mask Register 0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0x6B)
PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 PCMSK0
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 7..0 – PCINT7..0: Pin Change Enable Mask 7..0
Each PCINT7..0 bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT7..0 is set and the
PCIE0 bit in PCICR is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT7..0 is cleared, pin change
interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
81
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.13 I/O-Ports
5.13.1 Overview
All AVR® ports have true read-modify-write functionality when used as general digital I/O ports. This means that the direction
of one port pin can be changed without unintentionally changing the direction of any other pin with the SBI and CBI
instructions. The same applies when changing drive value (if configured as output) or enabling/disabling of pull-up resistors
(if configured as input). Each output buffer has symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability.
The pin driver is strong enough to drive LED displays directly. All port pins have individually selectable pull-up resistors with
a supply-voltage invariant resistance. All I/O pins have protection diodes to both VCC and Ground as indicated in Figure 5-22.
Refer to Section 5.28 “Electrical Characteristics” on page 278 for a complete list of parameters.
Figure 5-22. I/O Pin Equivalent Schematic
Rpu
Pxn
Logic
See Figure
”General Digital I/O”
for Details
Cpin
All registers and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “x” represents the numbering letter for
the port, and a lower case “n” represents the bit number. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the
precise form must be used. For example, PORTB3 for bit no. 3 in Port B, here documented generally as PORTxn. The
physical I/O Registers and bit locations are listed in Section 5.13.4 “Register Description” on page 96.
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for each port, one each for the data register – PORTx, data direction
register – DDRx, and the port input pins – PINx. The port input pins I/O location is read only, while the data register and the
data direction register are read/write. However, writing a logic one to a bit in the PINx register, will result in a toggle in the
corresponding bit in the data register. In addition, the pull-up disable – PUD bit in MCUCR disables the pull-up function for all
pins in all ports when set.
Using the I/O port as General Digital I/O is described in Section 5.13.2 “Ports as General Digital I/O” on page 83. Most port
pins are multiplexed with alternate functions for the peripheral features on the device. How each alternate function interferes
with the port pin is described in Section 5.13.3 “Alternate Port Functions” on page 87. Refer to the individual module sections
for a full description of the alternate functions. Note that enabling the alternate function of some of the port pins does not
affect the use of the other pins in the port as general digital I/O.
82
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.13.2 Ports as General Digital I/O
The ports are bi-directional I/O ports with optional internal pull-ups. Figure 5-23 shows a functional description of one I/O-
port pin, here generically called Pxn.
Figure 5-23. General Digital I/O(1)
PUD
Q
Q
D
DDxn
CLR
WDx
RDx
RESET
1
Pnx
Q
D
0
PORTxn
Q
CLR
WPx
RESET
WRx
SLEEP
RRx
RPx
Synchronizer
D
L
Q
Q
D
Q
Q
PINxn
CLKI/O
PUD:
SLEEP:
CLKI/O
PULLUP DISABLE
SLEEP CONTROL
I/O CLOCK
WDx:
RDx:
WRx:
RRx:
RPx:
WPx:
WRITE DDRx
READ DDRx
WRITE PORTx
READ PORTx REGISTER
READ PORTx PIN
:
WRITE PINx REGISTER
Note:
1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, SLEEP, and PUD
are common to all ports.
5.13.2.1 Configuring the Pin
Each port pin consists of three register bits: DDxn, PORTxn, and PINxn. As shown in Section 5.13.4 “Register Description”
on page 96, the DDxn bits are accessed at the DDRx I/O address, the PORTxn bits at the PORTx I/O address, and the
PINxn bits at the PINx I/O address.
The DDxn bit in the DDRx Register selects the direction of this pin. If DDxn is written logic one, Pxn is configured as an
output pin. If DDxn is written logic zero, Pxn is configured as an input pin.
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an input pin, the pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-
up resistor off, PORTxn has to be written logic zero or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The port pins are tri-
stated when reset condition becomes active, even if no clocks are running.
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven high (one). If PORTxn is
written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven low (zero).
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
83
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.13.2.2 Toggling the Pin
Writing a logic one to PINxn toggles the value of PORTxn, independent on the value of DDRxn. Note that the SBI instruction
can be used to toggle one single bit in a port.
5.13.2.3 Switching Between Input and Output
When switching between tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) and output high ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b11), an intermediate
state with either pull-up enabled {DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01) or output low ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) must occur. Normally, the
pull-up enabled state is fully acceptable, as a high-impedance environment will not notice the difference between a strong
high driver and a pull-up. If this is not the case, the PUD bit in the MCUCR Register can be set to disable all pull-ups in all
ports.
Switching between input with pull-up and output low generates the same problem. The user must use either the tri-state
({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) or the output high state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b11) as an intermediate step.
Table 5-29 summarizes the control signals for the pin value.
Table 5-29. Port Pin Configurations
PUD
DDxn
PORTxn
(in MCUCR)
I/O
Pull-up
No
Comment
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
X
0
Input
Tri-state (Hi-Z)
Input
Yes
No
Pxn will source current if ext. pulled low.
Tri-state (Hi-Z)
1
Input
X
X
Output
Output
No
Output low (sink)
No
Output high (source)
5.13.2.4 Reading the Pin Value
Independent of the setting of data direction bit DDxn, the port pin can be read through the PINxn register bit. As shown in
Figure 5-23 on page 83, the PINxn register bit and the preceding latch constitute a synchronizer. This is needed to avoid
metastability if the physical pin changes value near the edge of the internal clock, but it also introduces a delay. Figure 5-24
shows a timing diagram of the synchronization when reading an externally applied pin value. The maximum and minimum
propagation delays are denoted tpd,max and tpd,min respectively.
Figure 5-24. Synchronization when Reading an Externally Applied Pin Value
SYSTEM CLK
INSTRUCTIONS
SYNC LATCH
PINxn
XXX
XXX
in r17, PINx
r17
0x00
0xFF
tpd, max
tpd, min
Consider the clock period starting shortly after the first falling edge of the system clock. The latch is closed when the clock is
low, and goes transparent when the clock is high, as indicated by the shaded region of the “SYNC LATCH” signal. The signal
value is latched when the system clock goes low. It is clocked into the PINxn register at the succeeding positive clock edge.
As indicated by the two arrows tpd,max and tpd,min, a single signal transition on the pin will be delayed between ½ and 1½
system clock period depending upon the time of assertion.
When reading back a software assigned pin value, a nop instruction must be inserted as indicated in Figure 5-25. The out
instruction sets the “SYNC LATCH” signal at the positive edge of the clock. In this case, the delay tpd through the
synchronizer is 1 system clock period.
84
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-25. Synchronization when Reading a Software Assigned Pin Value
SYSTEM CLK
r16
INSTRUCTIONS
SYNC LATCH
PINxn
0xFF
nop
out PORTx, r16
in r17, PINx
r17
0x00
0xFF
tpd
The following code example shows how to set port B pins 0 and 1 high, 2 and 3 low, and define the port pins from 4 to 7 as
input with pull-ups assigned to port pins 6 and 7. The resulting pin values are read back again, but as previously discussed,
a nop instruction is included to be able to read back the value recently assigned to some of the pins.
Assembly Code Example(1)
...
; Define pull-ups and set outputs high
; Define directions for port pins
ldi
ldi
out
out
r16,(1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0)
r17,(1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0)
PORTB,r16
DDRB,r17
; Insert nop for synchronization
nop
; Read port pins
in
r16,PINB
...
C Code Example
unsigned char i;
...
/* Define pull-ups and set outputs high */
/* Define directions for port pins */
PORTB = (1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0);
DDRB = (1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0);
/* Insert nop for synchronization*/
__no_operation();
/* Read port pins */
i = PINB;
...
Note:
1. For the assembly program, two temporary registers are used to minimize the time from pull-ups are set on pins
0, 1, 6, and 7, until the direction bits are correctly set, defining bit 2 and 3 as low and redefining bits 0 and 1 as
strong high drivers.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
85
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.13.2.5 Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes
As shown in Figure 5-23 on page 83, the digital input signal can be clamped to ground at the input of the Schmitt Trigger.
The signal denoted SLEEP in the figure, is set by the MCU sleep controller in power-down mode, power-save mode, and
standby mode to avoid high power consumption if some input signals are left floating, or have an analog signal level close to
VCC/2.
SLEEP is overridden for port pins enabled as external interrupt pins. If the external interrupt request is not enabled, SLEEP
is active also for these pins. SLEEP is also overridden by various other alternate functions as described in Section 5.13.3
“Alternate Port Functions” on page 87.
If a logic high level (“one”) is present on an asynchronous external interrupt pin configured as “Interrupt on Rising Edge,
Falling Edge, or Any Logic Change on Pin” while the external interrupt is not enabled, the corresponding external interrupt
flag will be set when resuming from the above mentioned sleep mode, as the clamping in these sleep mode produces the
requested logic change.
5.13.2.6 Unconnected Pins
If some pins are unused, it is recommended to ensure that these pins have a defined level. Even though most of the digital
inputs are disabled in the deep sleep modes as described above, floating inputs should be avoided to reduce current
consumption in all other modes where the digital inputs are enabled (reset, active mode and idle mode).
The simplest method to ensure a defined level of an unused pin, is to enable the internal pull-up. In this case, the pull-up will
be disabled during reset. If low power consumption during reset is important, it is recommended to use an external pull-up or
pull-down. Connecting unused pins directly to VCC or GND is not recommended, since this may cause excessive currents if
the pin is accidentally configured as an output.
86
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.13.3 Alternate Port Functions
Most port pins have alternate functions in addition to being general digital I/Os. Figure 5-26 shows how the port pin control
signals from the simplified Figure 5-23 on page 83 can be overridden by alternate functions. The overriding signals may not
be present in all port pins, but the figure serves as a generic description applicable to all port pins in the AVR®
microcontroller family.
Figure 5-26. Alternate Port Functions(1)
PUOExn
1
0
PUOVxn
PUD
DDOExn
DDOVxn
1
0
Q
Q
D
DDxn
CLR
WDx
RDx
RESET
PVOExn
PVOVxn
1
0
Pxn
1
Q
D
0
PORTxn
PTOExn
Q
DIEOExn
DIEOVxn
CLR
1
0
RESET
WRx
WPx
RRx
RPx
SLEEP
Synchronizer
SET
D
Q
Q
D
L
Q
Q
PINxn
CLR
CLR
CLKI/O
DIxn
AIOxn
PUOExn:
Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE ENABLE
Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE VALUE
Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE ENABLE
Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE VALUE
Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE ENABLE
Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE VALUE
Pxn DIGITAL INPUT ENABLE OVERRIDE ENABLE
Pxn DIGITAL INPUT ENABLE OVERRIDE VALUE
SLEEP CONTROL
PUD:
WDx:
RDx:
RRx:
WRx:
RPx:
WPx:
CLK:I/O
DIxn:
AIOxn:
PULL-UP DISABLE
WRITE DDRx
READ DDRx
READ PORTx REGISTER
WRITE PORTx
READ PORTx PIN
WRITE PINx
I/O CLOCK
DIGITAL INPUT PIN n ON PORTx
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT PIN n ON PORTx
PUOVxn:
DDOExn:
DDOVxn:
PVOExn:
PVOVxn:
DIEOExn:
DIEOVxn:
SLEEP:
PTOExn:
Pxn, PORT TOGGLE OVERRIDE ENABLE
Note:
1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, SLEEP, and PUD
are common to all ports. All other signals are unique for each pin.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
87
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-30 summarizes the function of the overriding signals. The pin and port indexes from Figure 5-26 on page 87 are not
shown in the succeeding tables. The overriding signals are generated internally in the modules having the alternate function.
Table 5-30. Generic Description of Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions
Signal Name
Full Name
Description
If this signal is set, the pull-up enable is controlled by the PUOV signal. If
PUOE
Pull-up override enable this signal is cleared, the pull-up is enabled when
{DDxn, PORTxn, PUD} = 0b010.
If PUOE is set, the pull-up is enabled/disabled when PUOV is set/cleared,
regardless of the setting of the DDxn, PORTxn, and PUD register bits.
PUOV
DDOE
DDOV
PVOE
Pull-up override value
If this signal is set, the output driver enable is controlled by the DDOV
signal. If this signal is cleared, the output driver is enabled by the DDxn
register bit.
Data direction override
enable
Data direction override If DDOE is set, the output driver is enabled/disabled when DDOV is
value
set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn register bit.
If this signal is set and the output driver is enabled, the port value is
controlled by the PVOV signal. If PVOE is cleared, and the output driver is
enabled, the port value is controlled by the PORTxn register bit.
Port value override
enable
Port value override
value
If PVOE is set, the port value is set to PVOV, regardless of the setting of
the PORTxn Register bit.
PVOV
PTOE
Port toggle override
enable
If PTOE is set, the PORTxn register bit is inverted.
If this bit is set, the digital input enable is controlled by the DIEOV signal. If
this signal is cleared, the digital input enable is determined by MCU state
(normal mode, sleep mode).
Digital input enable
override enable
DIEOE
DIEOV
Digital input enable
override value
If DIEOE is set, the digital input is enabled/disabled when DIEOV is
set/cleared, regardless of the MCU state (normal mode, sleep mode).
This is the digital Input to alternate functions. In the figure, the signal is
connected to the output of the Schmitt Trigger but before the synchronizer.
Unless the digital input is used as a clock source, the module with the
alternate function will use its own synchronizer.
DI
Digital input
This is the analog input/output to/from alternate functions. The signal is
connected directly to the pad, and can be used bi-directionally.
AIO
Analog input/output
The following subsections shortly describe the alternate functions for each port, and relate the overriding signals to the
alternate function. Refer to the alternate function description for further details.
88
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.13.3.1 Alternate Functions of Port B
The Port B pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 5-31
Table 5-31. Port B Pins Alternate Functions
Port Pin
Alternate Functions
XTAL2 (chip clock oscillator pin 2)
TOSC2 (timer oscillator pin 2)
PCINT7 (pin change interrupt 7)
PB7
XTAL1 (chip clock oscillator pin 1 or external clock input)
TOSC1 (timer oscillator pin 1)
PB6
PCINT6 (pin change interrupt 6)
SCK (SPI bus master clock Input)
PCINT5 (pin change interrupt 5)
PB5
PB4
MISO (SPI bus master input/slave output)
PCINT4 (pin change interrupt 4)
MOSI (SPI bus master output/slave input)
OC2A (Timer/Counter2 output compare match A output)
PCINT3 (pin change interrupt 3)
PB3
SS (SPI bus master slave select)
PB2
PB1
PB0
OC1B (Timer/Counter1 output compare match B output)
PCINT2 (pin change interrupt 2)
OC1A (Timer/Counter1 output compare match A output)
PCINT1 (pin change interrupt 1)
ICP1 (Timer/Counter1 input capture input)
CLKO (divided system clock output)
PCINT0 (pin change interrupt 0)
The alternate pin configuration is as follows:
• XTAL2/TOSC2/PCINT7 – Port B, Bit 7
XTAL2: Chip clock oscillator pin 2. Used as clock pin for crystal oscillator or low-frequency crystal oscillator. When used as a
clock pin, the pin can not be used as an I/O pin.
TOSC2: Timer oscillator pin 2. Used only if internal calibrated RC oscillator is selected as chip clock source, and the
asynchronous timer is enabled by the correct setting in ASSR. When the AS2 bit in ASSR is set (one) and the EXCLK bit is
cleared (zero) to enable asynchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2 using the crystal oscillator, pin PB7 is disconnected from
the port, and becomes the inverting output of the oscillator amplifier. In this mode, a crystal oscillator is connected to this pin,
and the pin cannot be used as an I/O pin.
PCINT7: Pin change interrupt source 7. The PB7 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
If PB7 is used as a clock pin, DDB7, PORTB7 and PINB7 will all read 0.
• XTAL1/TOSC1/PCINT6 – Port B, Bit 6
XTAL1: Chip clock oscillator pin 1. Used for all chip clock sources except internal calibrated RC oscillator. When used as a
clock pin, the pin can not be used as an I/O pin.
TOSC1: Timer oscillator pin 1. Used only if internal calibrated RC oscillator is selected as chip clock source, and the
asynchronous timer is enabled by the correct setting in ASSR. When the AS2 bit in ASSR is set (one) to enable
asynchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2, pin PB6 is disconnected from the port, and becomes the input of the inverting
oscillator amplifier. In this mode, a crystal oscillator is connected to this pin, and the pin can not be used as an I/O pin.
PCINT6: Pin change interrupt source 6. The PB6 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
If PB6 is used as a clock pin, DDB6, PORTB6 and PINB6 will all read 0.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
89
9240I–AUTO–03/16
• SCK/PCINT5 – Port B, Bit 5
SCK: Master clock output, slave clock input pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is configured as
an input regardless of the setting of DDB5. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is controlled
by DDB5. When the pin is forced by the SPI to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB5 bit.
PCINT5: Pin change interrupt source 5. The PB5 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• MISO/PCINT4 – Port B, Bit 4
MISO: Master data input, slave data output pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a master, this pin is configured
as an input regardless of the setting of DDB4. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, the data direction of this pin is controlled
by DDB4. When the pin is forced by the SPI to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB4 bit.
PCINT4: Pin change interrupt source 4. The PB4 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• MOSI/OC2/PCINT3 – Port B, Bit 3
MOSI: SPI master data output, slave data input for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a Slave, this pin is configured
as an input regardless of the setting of DDB3. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is
controlled by DDB3. When the pin is forced by the SPI to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB3 bit.
OC2, output compare match output: The PB3 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter2 compare match.
The PB3 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB3 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC2 pin is also the output pin for
the PWM mode timer function.
PCINT3: Pin change interrupt source 3. The PB3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• SS/OC1B/PCINT2 – Port B, Bit 2
SS: Slave select input. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of
DDB2. As a slave, the SPI is activated when this pin is driven low. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction
of this pin is controlled by DDB2. When the pin is forced by the SPI to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the
PORTB2 bit.
OC1B, Output compare match output: The PB2 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter1 compare match
B. The PB2 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB2 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC1B pin is also the output
pin for the PWM mode timer function.
PCINT2: Pin change interrupt source 2. The PB2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• OC1A/PCINT1 – Port B, Bit 1
OC1A, Output compare match output: The PB1 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter1 compare match
A. The PB1 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB1 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC1A pin is also the output
pin for the PWM mode timer function.
PCINT1: Pin change interrupt source 1. The PB1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• ICP1/CLKO/PCINT0 – Port B, Bit 0
ICP1, input capture pin: The PB0 pin can act as an input capture pin for Timer/Counter1.
CLKO, divided system clock: The divided system clock can be output on the PB0 pin. The divided system clock will be output
if the CKOUT Fuse is programmed, regardless of the PORTB0 and DDB0 settings. It will also be output during reset.
PCINT0: Pin change interrupt source 0. The PB0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
Table 5-32 and Table 5-33 on page 91 relate the alternate functions of Port B to the overriding signals shown in Figure 5-26
on page 87. SPI MSTR INPUT and SPI SLAVE OUTPUT constitute the MISO signal, while MOSI is divided into SPI MSTR
OUTPUT and SPI SLAVE INPUT.
90
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-32. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB7..PB4
Signal
Name
PB7/XTAL2/
PB6/XTAL1/
PB5/SCK/
PCINT5
PB4/MISO/
PCINT4
TOSC2/PCINT7(1)
TOSC1/PCINT6(1)
PUOE
PUOV
DDOE
DDOV
PVOE
PVOV
INTRC EXTCK+ AS2
INTRC + AS2
SPE MSTR
PORTB5 PUD
SPE MSTR
0
SPE MSTR
PORTB4 PUD
SPE MSTR
0
0
0
INTRC EXTCK+ AS2
INTRC + AS2
0
0
0
0
0
0
SPE MSTR
SCK OUTPUT
SPE MSTR
SPI SLAVE OUTPUT
INTRC EXTCK + AS2 INTRC + AS2 + PCINT6
DIEOE
DIEOV
PCINT5 PCIE0
PCINT4 PCIE0
+ PCINT7 PCIE0
PCIE0
(INTRC + EXTCK) AS2
INTRC AS2
1
1
PCINT5 INPUT
SCK INPUT
–
PCINT4 INPUT
SPI MSTR INPUT
–
DI
PCINT7 INPUT
Oscillator output
PCINT6 INPUT
AIO
Oscillator/clock input
Notes: 1. INTRC means that one of the internal RC oscillators are selected (by the CKSEL fuses), EXTCK means that
external clock is selected (by the CKSEL fuses)
Table 5-33. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB3..PB0
Signal
Name
PB3/MOSI/
OC2/PCINT3
PB2/SS/
OC1B/PCINT2
PB1/OC1A/
PCINT1
PB0/ICP1/
PCINT0
PUOE
PUOV
DDOE
DDOV
SPE MSTR
PORTB3 PUD
SPE MSTR
0
SPE MSTR
PORTB2 PUD
SPE MSTR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SPE MSTR +
OC2A ENABLE
PVOE
PVOV
OC1B ENABLE
OC1B
OC1A ENABLE
OC1A
0
0
SPI MSTR OUTPUT +
OC2A
DIEOE
DIEOV
PCINT3 PCIE0
PCINT2 PCIE0
PCINT1 PCIE0
PCINT0 PCIE0
1
1
PCINT2 INPUT
SPI SS
1
1
PCINT3 INPUT
SPI SLAVE INPUT
–
PCINT0 INPUT
ICP1 INPUT
–
DI
PCINT1 INPUT
–
AIO
–
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
91
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.13.3.2 Alternate Functions of Port C
The Port C pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 5-34.
Table 5-34. Port C Pins Alternate Functions
Port Pin
Alternate Function
RESET (reset pin)
PCINT14 (pin change interrupt 14)
PC6
ADC5 (ADC input channel 5)
PC5
PC4
SCL (2-wire serial bus clock line)
PCINT13 (pin change interrupt 13)
ADC4 (ADC input channel 4)
SDA (2-wire serial bus data input/output line)
PCINT12 (pin change interrupt 12)
ADC3 (ADC input channel 3)
PCINT11 (pin change interrupt 11)
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
ADC2 (ADC input channel 2)
PCINT10 (pin change interrupt 10)
ADC1 (ADC input channel 1)
PCINT9 (pin change interrupt 9)
ADC0 (ADC input channel 0)
PCINT8 (pin change interrupt 8)
The alternate pin configuration is as follows:
• RESET/PCINT14 – Port C, Bit 6
RESET, Reset pin: When the RSTDISBL Fuse is programmed, this pin functions as an input pin, and the part will have to
rely on power-on reset and brown-out reset as its reset sources. When the RSTDISBL Fuse is unprogrammed, the reset
circuitry is connected to the pin, and the pin can not be used as an input pin.
If PC6 is used as a reset pin, DDC6, PORTC6 and PINC6 will all read 0.
PCINT14: Pin Change Interrupt source 14. The PC6 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• SCL/ADC5/PCINT13 – Port C, Bit 5
SCL, 2-wire serial interface clock: When the TWEN bit in TWCR is set (one) to enable the 2-wire serial interface, pin PC5 is
disconnected from the port and becomes the serial clock I/O pin for the 2-wire serial interface. In this mode, there is a spike
filter on the pin to suppress spikes shorter than 50 ns on the input signal, and the pin is driven by an open drain driver with
slew-rate limitation.
PC5 can also be used as ADC input channel 5. Note that ADC input channel 5 uses digital power.
PCINT13: Pin change interrupt source 13. The PC5 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• SDA/ADC4/PCINT12 – Port C, Bit 4
SDA, 2-wire serial interface data: When the TWEN bit in TWCR is set (one) to enable the 2-wire serial interface, pin PC4 is
disconnected from the port and becomes the serial data I/O pin for the 2-wire serial interface. In this mode, there is a spike
filter on the pin to suppress spikes shorter than 50ns on the input signal, and the pin is driven by an open drain driver with
slew-rate limitation.
PC4 can also be used as ADC input channel 4. Note that ADC input channel 4 uses digital power.
PCINT12: Pin change interrupt source 12. The PC4 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• ADC3/PCINT11 – Port C, Bit 3
PC3 can also be used as ADC input channel 3. Note that ADC input channel 3 uses analog power.
PCINT11: Pin change interrupt source 11. The PC3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
92
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
• ADC2/PCINT10 – Port C, Bit 2
PC2 can also be used as ADC input channel 2. Note that ADC input channel 2 uses analog power.
PCINT10: Pin change interrupt source 10. The PC2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• ADC1/PCINT9 – Port C, Bit 1
PC1 can also be used as ADC input Channel 1. Note that ADC input channel 1 uses analog power.
PCINT9: Pin change interrupt source 9. The PC1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• ADC0/PCINT8 – Port C, Bit 0
PC0 can also be used as ADC input channel 0. Note that ADC input channel 0 uses analog power.
PCINT8: Pin change interrupt source 8. The PC0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
Table 5-35 and Table 5-36 relate the alternate functions of Port C to the overriding signals shown in Figure 5-26 on page 87.
Table 5-35. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PC6..PC4(1)
Signal
Name
PUOE
PUOV
DDOE
DDOV
PVOE
PVOV
DIEOE
DIEOV
DI
PC6/RESET/PCINT14
PC5/SCL/ADC5/PCINT13
PC4/SDA/ADC4/PCINT12
TWEN
RSTDISBL
TWEN
1
PORTC5 PUD
TWEN
PORTC4 PUD
TWEN
RSTDISBL
0
SCL_OUT
SDA_OUT
0
0
TWEN
TWEN
0
0
RSTDISBL + PCINT14 PCIE1
RSTDISBL
PCINT13 PCIE1 + ADC5D
PCINT13 PCIE1
PCINT13 INPUT
ADC5 INPUT / SCL INPUT
PCINT12 PCIE1 + ADC4D
PCINT12 PCIE1
PCINT12 INPUT
ADC4 INPUT / SDA INPUT
PCINT14 INPUT
RESET INPUT
AIO
Note:
1. When enabled, the 2-wire serial Interface enables slew-rate controls on the output pins PC4 and PC5. This is
not shown in the figure. In addition, spike filters are connected between the AIO outputs shown in the port fig-
ure and the digital logic of the TWI module.
Table 5-36. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PC3..PC0
Signal
Name
PC3/ADC3/
PCINT11
PC2/ADC2/
PCINT10
PC1/ADC1/
PCINT9
PC0/ADC0/
PCINT8
PUOE
PUOV
DDOE
DDOV
PVOE
PVOV
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PCINT11 PCIE1 +
PCINT10 PCIE1 +
PCINT9 PCIE1 +
PCINT8 PCIE1 +
DIEOE
ADC3D
ADC2D
ADC1D
ADC0D
DIEOV
DI
PCINT11 PCIE1
PCINT11 INPUT
ADC3 INPUT
PCINT10 PCIE1
PCINT10 INPUT
ADC2 INPUT
PCINT9 PCIE1
PCINT9 INPUT
ADC1 INPUT
PCINT8 PCIE1
PCINT8 INPUT
ADC0 INPUT
AIO
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
93
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.13.3.3 Alternate Functions of Port D
The Port D pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 5-37.
Table 5-37. Port D Pins Alternate Functions
Port Pin
Alternate Function
AIN1 (analog comparator negative input)
PCINT23 (pin change interrupt 23)
PD7
AIN0 (analog comparator positive input)
OC0A (Timer/Counter0 output compare match A output)
PCINT22 (pin change interrupt 22)
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
T1 (Timer/Counter 1 external counter input)
OC0B (Timer/Counter0 output compare match B output)
PCINT21 (pin change interrupt 21)
XCK (USART external clock input/output)
T0 (Timer/Counter 0 external counter input)
PCINT20 (pin change interrupt 20)
INT1 (external interrupt 1 input)
OC2B (Timer/Counter2 output compare match B output)
PCINT19 (pin change interrupt 19)
INT0 (external interrupt 0 input)
PCINT18 (pin change interrupt 18)
PD2
PD1
PD0
TXD (USART output pin)
PCINT17 (pin change interrupt 17)
RXD (USART input pin)
PCINT16 (pin change interrupt 16)
The alternate pin configuration is as follows:
• AIN1/OC2B/PCINT23 – Port D, Bit 7
AIN1, analog comparator negative input. Configure the port pin as input with the internal pull-up switched off to avoid the
digital port function from interfering with the function of the analog comparator.
PCINT23: Pin change interrupt source 23. The PD7 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• AIN0/OC0A/PCINT22 – Port D, Bit 6
AIN0, analog comparator positive input. Configure the port pin as input with the internal pull-up switched off to avoid the
digital port function from interfering with the function of the analog comparator.
OC0A, output compare match output: The PD6 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter0 compare match
A. The PD6 pin has to be configured as an output (DDD6 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC0A pin is also the output
pin for the PWM mode timer function.
PCINT22: Pin change interrupt source 22. The PD6 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• T1/OC0B/PCINT21 – Port D, Bit 5
T1, Timer/Counter1 counter source.
OC0B, output compare match output: The PD5 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter0 compare match
B. The PD5 pin has to be configured as an output (DDD5 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC0B pin is also the output
pin for the PWM mode timer function.
PCINT21: Pin change interrupt source 21. The PD5 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
94
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
• XCK/T0/PCINT20 – Port D, Bit 4
XCK, USART external clock.
T0, Timer/Counter0 counter source.
PCINT20: Pin change interrupt source 20. The PD4 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• INT1/OC2B/PCINT19 – Port D, Bit 3
INT1, external interrupt source 1: The PD3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
OC2B, output compare match output: The PD3 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter0 compare match
B. The PD3 pin has to be configured as an output (DDD3 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC2B pin is also the output
pin for the PWM mode timer function.
PCINT19: Pin change interrupt source 19. The PD3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• INT0/PCINT18 – Port D, Bit 2
INT0, external interrupt source 0: The PD2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
PCINT18: Pin change interrupt source 18. The PD2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• TXD/PCINT17 – Port D, Bit 1
TXD, transmit data (data output pin for the USART). When the USART transmitter is enabled, this pin is configured as an
output regardless of the value of DDD1.
PCINT17: Pin change interrupt source 17. The PD1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• RXD/PCINT16 – Port D, Bit 0
RXD, receive data (data input pin for the USART). When the USART Receiver is enabled this pin is configured as an input
regardless of the value of DDD0. When the USART forces this pin to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the
PORTD0 bit.
PCINT16: Pin change interrupt source 16. The PD0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
Table 5-38 and Table 5-39 relate the alternate functions of Port D to the overriding signals shown in Figure 5-26 on page 87.
Table 5-38. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PD7..PD4
Signal
Name
PD7/AIN1
/PCINT23
PD6/AIN0/
OC0A/PCINT22
PD5/T1/OC0B/
PCINT21
PD4/XCK/
T0/PCINT20
PUOE
PUO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DDOE
DDOV
PVOE
PVOV
DIEOE
DIEOV
0
0
0
0
0
0
OC0A ENABLE
OC0A
0
OC0B ENABLE
OC0B
0
UMSEL
0
0
XCK OUTPUT
PCINT20 PCIE2
1
PCINT23 PCIE2
PCINT22 PCIE2
1
PCINT21 PCIE2
1
1
PCINT20 INPUT
XCK INPUT
T0 INPUT
PCINT21 INPUT
T1 INPUT
DI
PCINT23 INPUT
AIN1 INPUT
PCINT22 INPUT
AIN0 INPUT
AIO
–
–
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
95
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-39. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PD3..PD0
Signal
Name
PD3/OC2B/INT1/
PCINT19
PD2/INT0/
PCINT18
PD1/TXD/
PCINT17
PD0/RXD/
PCINT16
PUOE
PUO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TXEN
0
RXEN
0
PORTD0 PUD
DDOE
DDOV
PVOE
PVOV
0
TXEN
1
RXEN
0
0
0
0
OC2B ENABLE
OC2B
TXEN
TXD
INT1 ENABLE +
PCINT19 PCIE2
INT0 ENABLE +
PCINT18 PCIE1
DIEOE
DIEOV
DI
PCINT17 PCIE2
PCINT16 PCIE2
1
1
1
1
PCINT19 INPUT
INT1 INPUT
PCINT18 INPUT
INT0 INPUT
PCINT16 INPUT
RXD
PCINT17 INPUT
–
AIO
–
–
–
5.13.4 Register Description
5.13.4.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
Bit
7
–
6
BODS
R
5
4
3
–
2
–
1
IVSEL
R/W
0
0
0x35 (0x55)
Read/Write
Initial Value
BODSE
PUD
R/W
0
IVCE
R/W
0
MCUCR
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
• Bit 4 – PUD: Pull-up Disable
When this bit is written to one, the pull-ups in the I/O ports are disabled even if the DDxn and PORTxn registers are
configured to enable the pull-ups ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01). See Section 5.13.2.1 “Configuring the Pin” on page 83 for more
details about this feature.
5.13.4.2 PORTB – The Port B Data Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x05 (0x25) PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 PORTB
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
5.13.4.3 DDRB – The Port B Data Direction Register
Bit
7
DDB7
R/W
0
6
DDB6
R/W
0
5
DDB5
R/W
0
4
DDB4
R/W
0
3
DDB3
R/W
0
2
DDB2
R/W
0
1
DDB1
R/W
0
0
DDB0
R/W
0
0x04 (0x24)
Read/Write
Initial Value
DDRB
96
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.13.4.4 PINB – The Port B Input Pins Address
Bit
7
PINB7
R
6
PINB6
R
5
PINB5
R
4
PINB4
R
3
PINB3
R
2
PINB2
R
1
PINB1
R
0
PINB0
R
0x03 (0x23)
Read/Write
Initial Value
PINB
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5.13.4.5 PORTC – The Port C Data Register
Bit
7
–
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x08 (0x28)
Read/Write
Initial Value
PORTC6 PORTC5 PORTC4 PORTC3 PORTC2 PORTC1 PORTC0 PORTC
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
5.13.4.6 DDRC – The Port C Data Direction Register
Bit
7
–
6
DDC6
R/W
0
5
DDC5
R/W
0
4
DDC4
R/W
0
3
DDC3
R/W
0
2
DDC2
R/W
0
1
DDC1
R/W
0
0
DDC0
R/W
0
0x07 (0x27)
Read/Write
Initial Value
DDRC
R
0
5.13.4.7 PINC – The Port C Input Pins Address
Bit
7
–
6
PINC6
R
5
PINC5
R
4
PINC4
R
3
PINC3
R
2
PINC2
R
1
PINC1
R
0
PINC0
R
0x06 (0x26)
Read/Write
Initial Value
PINC
R
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5.13.4.8 PORTD – The Port D Data Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x0B (0x2B) PORTD7 PORTD6 PORTD5 PORTD4 PORTD3 PORTD2 PORTD1 PORTD0 PORTD
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
5.13.4.9 DDRD – The Port D Data Direction Register
Bit
7
DDD7
R/W
0
6
DDD6
R/W
0
5
DDD5
R/W
0
4
DDD4
R/W
0
3
DDD3
R/W
0
2
DDD2
R/W
0
1
DDD1
R/W
0
0
DDD0
R/W
0
0x0A (0x2A)
Read/Write
Initial Value
DDRD
5.13.4.10 PIND – The Port D Input Pins Address
Bit
7
PIND7
R
6
PIND6
R
5
PIND5
R
4
PIND4
R
3
PIND3
R
2
PIND2
R
1
PIND1
R
0
PIND0
R
0x09 (0x29)
Read/Write
Initial Value
PIND
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
97
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.14 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM
5.14.1 Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Two independent output compare units
Double buffered output compare registers
Clear timer on compare match (auto reload)
Glitch free, phase correct pulse width modulator (PWM)
Variable PWM period
Frequency generator
Three independent interrupt sources (TOV0, OCF0A, and OCF0B)
5.14.2 Overview
Timer/Counter0 is a general purpose 8-bit Timer/Counter module, with two independent output compare Units, and with
PWM support. It allows accurate program execution timing (event management) and wave generation.
A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 5-27. The device-specific I/O register and bit
locations are listed in Section 5.14.9 “Register Description” on page 107.
The PRTIM0 bit in Section 5.9.10 “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 60 must be written to zero to enable
Timer/Counter0 module.
Figure 5-27. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn (Int. Req.)
Control Logic
clkTn
Clock Select
Edge
Detector
Tn
TOP
BOTTOM
(from Prescaler)
Timer/Counter
TCNTn
=
= 0
OCnA (Int. Req.)
Waveform
Generation
OCnA
=
OCRnA
Fixed
TOP
Value
OCnB (Int. Req.)
Waveform
Generation
OCnB
=
OCRnB
TCCRnA
TCCRnB
98
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.14.2.1 Definitions
Many register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n” replaces the Timer/Counter
number, in this case 0. A lower case “x” replaces the output compare unit, in this case compare unit A or compare unit B.
However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT0 for accessing
Timer/Counter0 counter value and so on.
The definitions in Table 5-40 are also used extensively throughout the document.
Table 5-40. Definitions
Case
BOTTOM
MAX
Definition
The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x00.
The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).
The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count sequence. The
TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF (MAX) or the value stored in the OCR0A register.
The assignment is dependent on the mode of operation.
TOP
5.14.2.2 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT0) and output compare registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are 8-bit registers. Interrupt request
(abbreviated to int.req. in the figure) signals are all visible in the timer interrupt flag register (TIFR0). All interrupts are
individually masked with the timer interrupt mask register (TIMSK0). TIFR0 and TIMSK0 are not shown in the figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on the T0 pin. The clock select
logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The
Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the clock select logic is referred to as the timer
clock (clkT0).
The double buffered output compare registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are compared with the Timer/Counter value at all
times. The result of the compare can be used by the waveform generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on
the output compare pins (OC0A and OC0B). See Section 5.15.7.3 “Using the Output Compare Unit” on page 122 for details.
The compare match event will also set the compare flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) which can be used to generate an output
compare interrupt request.
5.14.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source is selected by the clock
select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CS02:0) bits located in the Timer/Counter control register (TCCR0B). For
details on clock sources and prescaler, see Section 5.16 “Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 Prescalers” on page 137.
5.14.4 Counter Unit
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure 5-28 shows a block diagram
of the counter and its surroundings.
Figure 5-28. Counter Unit Block Diagram
TOVn
(Int. Req.)
DATA BUS
Clock Select
count
Edge
Detector
Tn
clkTn
clear
TCNTn
Control Logic
direction
(from Prescaler)
bottom
top
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
99
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Signal description (internal signals):
count
direction
clear
Increment or decrement TCNT0 by 1.
Select between increment and decrement.
Clear TCNT0 (set all bits to zero).
clkTn
Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT0 in the following.
Signalize that TCNT0 has reached maximum value.
Signalize that TCNT0 has reached minimum value (zero).
top
bottom
Depending of the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer clock (clkT0).
clkT0 can be generated from an external or internal clock source, selected by the clock select bits (CS02:0). When no clock
source is selected (CS02:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT0 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of
whether clkT0 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM01 and WGM00 bits located in the Timer/Counter control
register (TCCR0A) and the WGM02 bit located in the Timer/Counter control register B (TCCR0B). There are close
connections between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the output compare outputs
OC0A and OC0B. For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see Section 5.14.7
“Modes of Operation” on page 102.
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV0) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGM02:0 bits. TOV0 can
be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
5.14.5 Output Compare Unit
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT0 with the output compare registers (OCR0A and OCR0B). Whenever
TCNT0 equals OCR0A or OCR0B, the comparator signals a match. A match will set the output compare flag (OCF0A or
OCF0B) at the next timer clock cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the output compare flag generates an output
compare interrupt. The output compare flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively, the flag
can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The waveform generator uses the match signal to
generate an output according to operating mode set by the WGM02:0 bits and compare output mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The
max and bottom signals are used by the waveform generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in some
modes of operation (Section 5.14.7 “Modes of Operation” on page 102).
Figure 5-29 shows a block diagram of the output compare unit.
Figure 5-29. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram
DATA BUS
OCRnx
TCNTn
= (8-bit Comparator)
OCFnx (Int. Req.)
OCnx
top
bottom
FOCn
Waveform Generator
WGMn[1:0]
COMnX[1:0]
100
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The OCR0x registers are double buffered when using any of the pulse width modulation (PWM) modes. For the normal and
clear timer on compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the
update of the OCR0x compare registers to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the
occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.
The OCR0x register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering is enabled, the CPU has
access to the OCR0x buffer register, and if double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR0x directly.
5.14.5.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to the force
output compare (FOC0x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the OCF0x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC0x pin
will be updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COM0x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC0x pin is set,
cleared or toggled).
5.14.5.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT0 Write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT0 Register will block any compare match that occur in the next timer clock cycle, even
when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR0x to be initialized to the same value as TCNT0 without triggering an
interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled.
5.14.5.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNT0 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock cycle, there are risks
involved when changing TCNT0 when using the output compare unit, independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running
or not. If the value written to TCNT0 equals the OCR0x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect
waveform generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT0 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is downcounting.
The setup of the OC0x should be performed before setting the data direction register for the port pin to output. The easiest
way of setting the OC0x value is to use the force output compare (FOC0x) strobe bits in normal mode. The OC0x registers
keep their values even when changing between waveform generation modes.
Be aware that the COM0x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the COM0x1:0 bits will
take effect immediately.
5.14.6 Compare Match Output Unit
The compare output mode (COM0x1:0) bits have two functions. The waveform generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits for
defining the output compare (OC0x) state at the next compare match. Also, the COM0x1:0 bits control the OC0x pin output
source. Figure 5-30 on page 102 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM0x1:0 bit setting. The I/O
Registers, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O port control registers (DDR
and PORT) that are affected by the COM0x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC0x state, the reference is for the
internal OC0x Register, not the OC0x pin. If a system reset occur, the OC0x register is reset to “0”.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
101
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-30. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic
COMnx1
COMnx0
FOCn
Waveform
Generator
D
D
Q
Q
1
0
OCnx
Pin
OCnx
PORT
D
Q
DDR
clkI/O
The general I/O port function is overridden by the output compare (OC0x) from the waveform generator if either of the
COM0x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC0x pin direction (input or output) is still controlled by the data direction register
(DDR) for the port pin. The data direction register bit for the OC0x pin (DDR_OC0x) must be set as output before the OC0x
value is visible on the pin. The port override function is independent of the waveform generation mode.
The design of the output compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC0x state before the output is enabled. Note that
some COM0x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation. See Section 5.14.9 “Register Description” on page
107.
5.14.6.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The waveform generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits differently in Normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes, setting the
COM0x1:0 = 0 tells the waveform generator that no action on the OC0x register is to be performed on the next compare
match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 5-41 on page 108. For fast PWM mode, refer to
Table 5-42 on page 108, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 5-43 on page 108.
A change of the COM0x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are written. For non-PWM
modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the FOC0x strobe bits.
5.14.7 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the output compare pins, is defined by the combination of
the waveform generation mode (WGM02:0) and compare output mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The compare output mode bits do
not affect the counting sequence, while the waveform generation mode bits do. The COM0x1:0 bits control whether the
PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM0x1:0 bits
control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a compare match (See Section 5.14.6 “Compare Match
Output Unit” on page 101).
For detailed timing information refer to Section 5.14.8 “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 106.
102
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.14.7.1 Normal Mode
The simplest mode of operation is the normal mode (WGM02:0 = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always up
(incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply OverRuns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value
(TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bottom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV0) will be
set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT0 becomes zero. The TOV0 flag in this case behaves like a ninth bit, except
that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOV0 flag,
the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new
counter value can be written anytime.
The output compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the output compare to generate
waveforms in normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time.
5.14.7.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In clear timer on compare or CTC mode (WGM02:0 = 2), the OCR0A register is used to manipulate the counter resolution. In
CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNT0) matches the OCR0A. The OCR0A defines the top
value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It
also simplifies the operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 5-31. The counter value (TCNT0) increases until a compare match
occurs between TCNT0 and OCR0A, and then counter (TCNT0) is cleared.
Figure 5-31. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram
OCnx Interrupt
Flag Set
TCNTn
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 1)
(Toggle)
1
2
3
4
Period
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the OCF0A Flag. If the interrupt
is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to
BOTTOM when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does
not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR0A is lower than the current value of TCNT0, the
counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around
starting at 0x00 before the compare match can occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC0A output can be set to toggle its logical level on each compare
match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode (COM0A1:0 = 1). The OC0A value will not be visible on the
port pin unless the data direction for the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0
= fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following equation:
f
clk_I/O
------------------------------------------------
f
=
OCnx
2 N 1 + OCRnx
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV0 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts from MAX to
0x00.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
103
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.14.7.3 Fast PWM Mode
The fast pulse width modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high frequency PWM waveform
generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from
BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 7.
In non-inverting compare output mode, the output compare (OC0x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT0 and
OCR0x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting compare output mode, the output is set on compare match and cleared at
BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the
phase correct PWM mode that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited for
power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components
(coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost.
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value. The counter is then cleared at
the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 5-32. The TCNT0 value is in
the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and
inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent compare matches between OCR0x
and TCNT0.
Figure 5-32. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
OCRnx Interrupt
Flag Set
OCRnx Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
TCNTn
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Period
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt
handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins. Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to
two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to three:
Setting the COM0A1:0 bits to one allows the OC0A pin to toggle on compare matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is
not available for the OC0B pin (see Table 5-45 on page 109). The actual OC0x value will only be visible on the port pin if the
data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC0x register at
the compare match between OCR0x and TCNT0, and clearing (or setting) the OC0x register at the timer clock cycle the
counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
f
clk_I/O
----------------
f
=
OCnxPWM
N 256
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR0A register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the fast
PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle.
Setting the OCR0A equal to MAX will result in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by
the COM0A1:0 bits.)
104
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting OC0x to toggle its logical
level on each compare match (COM0x1:0 = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0 = fclk_I/O/2
when OCR0A is set to zero. This feature is similar to the OC0A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the
output compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
5.14.7.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation
option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to
TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 1, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 5. In non-
inverting compare output mode, the output compare (OC0x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT0 and OCR0x
while upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting. In inverting output compare mode, the operation is
inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to
the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP. When the counter reaches
TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT0 value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for
the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 5-33. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for
illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line
marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent compare matches between OCR0x and TCNT0.
Figure 5-33. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
OCnx Interrupt
Flag Set
OCRnx Update
TOVn Interrupt
Flag Set
TCNTn
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
1
2
3
Period
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The interrupt flag can be used to
generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM value.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins. Setting the
COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the
COM0x1:0 to three: Setting the COM0A0 bits to one allows the OC0A pin to toggle on compare matches if the WGM02 bit is
set. This option is not available for the OC0B pin (see Table 5-46 on page 109). The actual OC0x value will only be visible on
the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the
OC0x register at the compare match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the
OC0x register at compare match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the
output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation:
f
clk_I/O
----------------
f
=
OCnxPCPWM
N 510
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
105
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The extreme values for the OCR0A register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase
correct PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the
output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic
values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 5-33 OCnx has a transition from high to low even though there is no compare match.
The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without
compare match.
●
OCRnx changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 5-33. When the OCR0A value is MAX the OCn pin value is the
same as the result of a down-counting compare match. To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCnx value at
MAX must correspond to the result of an up-counting compare match.
●
The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCRnx, and for that reason misses the compare match
and hence the OCnx change that would have happened on the way up.
5.14.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT0) is therefore shown as a clock enable signal in the
following figures. The figures include information on when interrupt flags are set. Figure 5-34 contains timing data for basic
Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase
correct PWM mode.
Figure 5-34. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TCNTn
TOVn
MAX - 1
MAX
BOTTOM
BOTTOM + 1
Figure 5-35 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 5-35. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
TCNTn
TOVn
MAX - 1
MAX
BOTTOM
BOTTOM + 1
106
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-36 shows the setting of OCF0B in all modes and OCF0A in all modes except CTC mode and PWM mode, where
OCR0A is TOP.
Figure 5-36. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF0x, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
TCNTn
OCRnx - 1
OCRnx
OCRnx + 1
OCRnx + 2
OCRnx
OCFnx
OCRnx Value
Figure 5-37 shows the setting of OCF0A and the clearing of TCNT0 in CTC mode and fast PWM mode where OCR0A is
TOP.
Figure 5-37. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP - 1
TOP
BOTTOM
BOTTOM + 1
OCRnx
TOP
OCFnx
5.14.9 Register Description
5.14.9.1 TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x24 (0x44) COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0
–
R
0
–
R
0
WGM01 WGM00 TCCR0A
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bits 7:6 – COM0A1:0: Compare Match Output A Mode
These bits control the output compare pin (OC0A) behavior. If one or both of the COM0A1:0 bits are set, the OC0A output
overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the data direction register (DDR)
bit corresponding to the OC0A pin must be set in order to enable the output driver.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
107
9240I–AUTO–03/16
When OC0A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0A1:0 bits depends on the WGM02:0 bit setting. Table 5-41
shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 5-41. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM0A1
COM0A0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
Toggle OC0A on compare match
Clear OC0A on compare match
Set OC0A on compare match
Table 5-42 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM01:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode.
Table 5-42. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)
COM0A1
COM0A0
Description
0
0
Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
WGM02 = 0: Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on compare match.
0
1
1
1
0
1
Clear OC0A on compare match, set OC0A at BOTTOM, (non-inverting mode).
Set OC0A on compare match, clear OC0A at BOTTOM, (inverting mode).
Note:
1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the compare match is
ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See Section 5.14.7.3 “Fast PWM Mode” on page 104 for
more details.
Table 5-43 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase correct PWM mode.
Table 5-43. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM0A1
COM0A0
Description
0
0
Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
WGM02 = 0: Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on compare match.
0
1
1
1
0
1
Clear OC0A on compare match when up-counting. Set OC0A on compare match when
down-counting.
Set OC0A on compare match when up-counting. Clear OC0A on compare match when
down-counting.
Note:
1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the compare match is
ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See Section 5.15.9.4 “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 126 for
more details.
• Bits 5:4 – COM0B1:0: Compare Match Output B Mode
These bits control the output compare pin (OC0B) behavior. If one or both of the COM0B1:0 bits are set, the OC0B output
overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the data direction register (DDR)
bit corresponding to the OC0B pin must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC0B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0B1:0 bits depends on the WGM02:0 bit setting. Table 5-44
shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 5-44. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM0B1
COM0B0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.
Toggle OC0B on compare match
Clear OC0B on compare match
Set OC0B on compare match
108
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-45 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode.
Table 5-45. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)
COM0B1
COM0B0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.
Reserved
Clear OC0B on compare match, set OC0B at BOTTOM, (non-inverting mode)
Set OC0B on compare match, clear OC0B at BOTTOM, (inverting mode).
Note:
1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the compare match is
ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See Section 5.14.7.3 “Fast PWM Mode” on page 104 for more
details.
Table 5-46 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase correct PWM mode.
Table 5-46. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM0B1
COM0B0
Description
0
0
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.
Reserved
Clear OC0B on compare match when up-counting. Set OC0B on compare match
when down-counting.
1
1
0
1
Set OC0B on compare match when up-counting. Clear OC0B on compare match
when down-counting.
Note:
1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the compare match is
ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See Section 5.14.7.4 “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 105 for
more details.
• Bits 3, 2 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega328P and will always read as zero.
• Bits 1:0 – WGM01:0: Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM02 bit found in the TCCR0B register, these bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the
source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used, see Table 5-47. Modes of
operation supported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), clear timer on compare match (CTC) mode, and
two types of pulse width modulation (PWM) modes (see Section 5.14.7 “Modes of Operation” on page 102).
Table 5-47. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description
Timer/Counter
Mode of Operation
Update of
OCRx at
TOV Flag
Set on(1)(2)
Mode
WGM02
WGM01
WGM00
TOP
0
0
0
0
Normal
0xFF
Immediate
MAX
PWM, Phase
Correct
1
0
0
1
0xFF
TOP
BOTTOM
2
3
4
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
CTC
OCRA
0xFF
–
Immediate
BOTTOM
–
MAX
MAX
–
Fast PWM
Reserved
PWM, Phase
Correct
5
1
0
1
OCRA
TOP
BOTTOM
6
7
1
1
1
1
0
1
Reserved
Fast PWM
–
–
–
OCRA
BOTTOM
TOP
Notes: 1. MAX = 0xFF
2. BOTTOM = 0x00
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
109
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.14.9.2 TCCR0B – Timer/Counter Control Register B
Bit
7
FOC0A
W
6
FOC0B
W
5
–
4
–
3
WGM02
R/W
0
2
CS02
R/W
0
1
CS01
R/W
0
0
CS00
R/W
0
0x25 (0x45)
Read/Write
Initial Value
TCCR0B
R
0
R
0
0
0
• Bit 7 – FOC0A: Force Output Compare A
The FOC0A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR0B is written when operating
in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0A bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the waveform
generation unit. The OC0A output is changed according to its COM0A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0A bit is
implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced
compare.
A FOC0A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR0A as TOP.
The FOC0A bit is always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC0B: Force Output Compare B
The FOC0B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR0B is written when operating
in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0B bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the waveform
generation unit. The OC0B output is changed according to its COM0B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0B bit is
implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced
compare.
A FOC0B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR0B as TOP.
The FOC0B bit is always read as zero.
• Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega328P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – WGM02: Waveform Generation Mode
See the description in the Section 5.14.9.1 “TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 107.
• Bits 2:0 – CS02:0: Clock Select
The three clock select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter.
Table 5-48. Clock Select Bit Description
CS02
CS01
CS00
Description
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)
clkI/O/(no prescaling)
clkI/O/8 (from prescaler)
clkI/O/64 (from prescaler)
clkI/O/256 (from prescaler)
clkI/O/1024 (from prescaler)
External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on falling edge.
External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on rising edge.
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the counter even if the pin is
configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the counting.
110
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.14.9.3 TCNT0 – Timer/Counter Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x26 (0x46)
Read/Write
Initial Value
TCNT0[7:0]
R/W R/W
TCNT0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
0
0
The Timer/Counter register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter.
Writing to the TCNT0 register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter
(TCNT0) while the counter is running, introduces a risk of missing a compare match between TCNT0 and the OCR0x
registers.
5.14.9.4 OCR0A – Output Compare Register A
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x27 (0x47)
Read/Write
Initial Value
OCR0A[7:0]
R/W R/W
OCR0A
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
0
0
The output compare register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT0). A
match can be used to generate an output compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC0A pin.
5.14.9.5 OCR0B – Output Compare Register B
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x28 (0x48)
Read/Write
Initial Value
OCR0B[7:0]
R/W R/W
OCR0B
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
0
0
The output compare register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT0). A
match can be used to generate an output compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC0B pin.
5.14.9.6 TIMSK0 – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
1
0
TOIE0
R/W
0
(0x6E)
OCIE0B OCIE0A
TIMSK0
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bits 7..3 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega328P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – OCIE0B: Timer/Counter Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0B bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the status register is set, the Timer/Counter compare match B interrupt
is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter occurs, i.e., when the OCF0B bit is
set in the Timer/Counter interrupt flag register – TIFR0.
• Bit 1 – OCIE0A: Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0A bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the status register is set, the Timer/Counter0 compare match A
interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the
OCF0A bit is set in the Timer/Counter 0 interrupt flag register – TIFR0.
• Bit 0 – TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE0 bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the status register is set, the Timer/Counter0 overflow interrupt is
enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the TOV0 bit is set in
the Timer/Counter 0 interrupt flag register – TIFR0.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
111
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.14.9.7 TIFR0 – Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
OCF0B
R/W
0
1
OCF0A
R/W
0
0
TOV0
R/W
0
0x15 (0x35)
Read/Write
Initial Value
TIFR0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7..3 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega328P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – OCF0B: Timer/Counter 0 Output Compare B Match Flag
The OCF0B bit is set when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter and the data in OCR0B – output compare
register0 B. OCF0B is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively,
OCF0B is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0B (Timer/Counter compare B match
interrupt Enable), and OCF0B are set, the Timer/Counter compare match interrupt is executed.
• Bit 1 – OCF0A: Timer/Counter 0 Output Compare A Match Flag
The OCF0A bit is set when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and the data in OCR0A – output compare
register0. OCF0A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0A
is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0A (Timer/Counter0 compare match interrupt
enable), and OCF0A are set, the Timer/Counter0 compare match interrupt is executed.
• Bit 0 – TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag
The bit TOV0 is set when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by hardware when executing the
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV0 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-
bit, TOIE0 (Timer/Counter0 overflow interrupt enable), and TOV0 are set, the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is executed.
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM02:0 bit setting. Refer to Table 5-47 on page 109.
112
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.15 16-bit Timer/Counter1 with PWM
5.15.1 Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
True 16-bit design (i.e., allows 16-bit PWM)
Two independent output compare units
Double buffered output compare registers
One input capture unit
Input capture noise canceler
Clear timer on compare match (auto reload)
Glitch-free, phase correct pulse width modulator (PWM)
Variable PWM period
Frequency generator
External event counter
Four independent interrupt sources (TOV1, OCF1A, OCF1B, and ICF1)
5.15.2 Overview
The 16-bit Timer/Counter unit allows accurate program execution timing (event management), wave generation, and signal
timing measurement.
Most register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n” replaces the Timer/Counter
number, and a lower case “x” replaces the output compare unit channel. However, when using the register or bit defines in a
program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT1 for accessing Timer/Counter1 counter value and so on.
A simplified block diagram of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 5-38. The device-specific I/O register and bit
locations are listed in the Section 5.15.11 “Register Description” on page 131.
The PRTIM1 bit in Section 5.9.11.3 “PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 63 must be written to zero to enable
Timer/Counter1 module.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
113
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-38. 16-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram(1)
TOVn (Int. Req.)
Clock Select
Count
Clear
Direction
Control Logic
Edge
Detector
Tn
clkTn
(From Prescaler)
TOP
BOTTOM
Timer/Counter
TCNTn
=
= 0
OCnA (Int. Req.)
Waveform
Generation
OCnA
OCnB
=
OCRnA
Fixed
TOP
Value
OCnB (Int. Req.)
Waveform
Generation
=
OCRnB
(From Analog
Comparator Output)
ICPn
ICFn (Int. Req.)
Edge
Detector
Noise
Canceler
ICRn
TCCRnA
TCCRnB
Note:
5.15.2.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT1), Output Compare Registers (OCR1A/B), and Input Capture Register (ICR1) are all 16-bit
1. Refer to Table 5-31 on page 89 and Table 5-37 on page 94 for Timer/Counter1 pin placement and description.
registers. Special procedures must be followed when accessing the 16-bit registers. These procedures are described in
Section 5.15.3 “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 115. The Timer/Counter Control Registers (TCCR1A/B) are 8-bit
registers and have no CPU access restrictions. Interrupt requests (abbreviated to Int.Req. in the figure) signals are all visible
in the Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR1). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register
(TIMSK1). TIFR1 and TIMSK1 are not shown in the figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on the T1 pin. The clock select
logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The
Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the clock select logic is referred to as the timer
clock (clkT1).
The double buffered output compare registers (OCR1A/B) are compared with the Timer/Counter value at all time. The result
of the compare can be used by the waveform generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the output
compare pin (OC1A/B). See Section 5.15.7 “Output Compare Units” on page 120. The compare match event will also set the
compare match flag (OCF1A/B) which can be used to generate an output compare interrupt request.
The input capture register can capture the Timer/Counter value at a given external (edge triggered) event on either the input
capture pin (ICP1) or on the analog comparator pins (see Section 5.22 “Analog Comparator” on page 223).
114
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The input capture unit includes a digital filtering unit (noise canceler) for reducing the chance of capturing noise spikes. The
TOP value, or maximum Timer/Counter value, can in some modes of operation be defined by either the OCR1A register, the
ICR1 register, or by a set of fixed values. When using OCR1A as TOP value in a PWM mode, the OCR1A register can not be
used for generating a PWM output. However, the TOP value will in this case be double buffered allowing the TOP value to
be changed in run time. If a fixed TOP value is required, the ICR1 register can be used as an alternative, freeing the OCR1A
to be used as PWM output.
5.15.2.2 Definitions
The definitions in Table 5-49 are also used extensively throughout the section.
Table 5-49. Definitions
Case
BOTTOM
MAX
Definition
The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x0000.
The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFFFF (decimal 65535).
The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count sequence. The
TOP value can be assigned to be one of the fixed values: 0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF, or to the value
stored in the OCR1A or ICR1 register. The assignment is dependent of the mode of operation.
TOP
5.15.3 Accessing 16-bit Registers
The TCNT1, OCR1A/B, and ICR1 are 16-bit registers that can be accessed by the AVR® CPU via the 8-bit data bus. The 16-
bit register must be byte accessed using two read or write operations. Each 16-bit timer has a single 8-bit register for
temporary storing of the high byte of the 16-bit access. The same temporary register is shared between all 16-bit registers
within each 16-bit timer. Accessing the low byte triggers the 16-bit read or write operation. When the low byte of a 16-bit
register is written by the CPU, the high byte stored in the temporary register, and the low byte written are both copied into the
16-bit register in the same clock cycle. When the low byte of a 16-bit register is read by the CPU, the high byte of the 16-bit
register is copied into the temporary register in the same clock cycle as the low byte is read.
Not all 16-bit accesses uses the temporary register for the high byte. Reading the OCR1A/B 16-bit registers does not involve
using the temporary register. To do a 16-bit write, the high byte must be written before the low byte. For a 16-bit read, the low
byte must be read before the high byte.
The following code examples show how to access the 16-bit timer registers assuming that no interrupts updates the
temporary register. The same principle can be used directly for accessing the OCR1A/B and ICR1 Registers. Note that when
using “C”, the compiler handles the 16-bit access.
Assembly Code Examples(1)
...
; Set TCNT1 to 0x01FF
ldi
ldi
out
out
r17,0x01
r16,0xFF
TCNT1H,r17
TCNT1L,r16
; Read TCNT1 into r17:r16
in
in
r16,TCNT1L
r17,TCNT1H
...
C Code Examples(1)
unsigned int i;
...
/* Set TCNT1 to 0x01FF */
TCNT1 = 0x1FF;
/* Read TCNT1 into i */
i = TCNT1;
...
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32. For I/O registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”,
“OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI” instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to
extended I/O. Typically “LDS” and “STS” combined with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
115
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The assembly code example returns the TCNT1 value in the r17:r16 register pair.
It is important to notice that accessing 16-bit registers are atomic operations. If an interrupt occurs between the two
instructions accessing the 16-bit register, and the interrupt code updates the temporary register by accessing the same or
any other of the 16-bit timer registers, then the result of the access outside the interrupt will be corrupted. Therefore, when
both the main code and the interrupt code update the temporary register, the main code must disable the interrupts during
the 16-bit access.
The following code examples show how to do an atomic read of the TCNT1 register contents. Reading any of the OCR1A/B
or ICR1 registers can be done by using the same principle.
Assembly Code Example(1)
TIM16_ReadTCNT1:
; Save global interrupt flag
in
r18,SREG
; Disable interrupts
cli
; Read TCNT1 into r17:r16
in
in
r16,TCNT1L
r17,TCNT1H
; Restore global interrupt flag
out
ret
SREG,r18
C Code Example(1)
unsigned int TIM16_ReadTCNT1( void )
{
unsigned char sreg;
unsigned int i;
/* Save global interrupt flag */
sreg = SREG;
/* Disable interrupts */
_CLI();
/* Read TCNT1 into i */
i = TCNT1;
/* Restore global interrupt flag */
SREG = sreg;
return i;
}
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
For I/O registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI” instructions must
be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically “LDS” and “STS” combined with
“SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
The assembly code example returns the TCNT1 value in the r17:r16 register pair.
116
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The following code examples show how to do an atomic write of the TCNT1 register contents. Writing any of the OCR1A/B
or ICR1 Registers can be done by using the same principle.
Assembly Code Example(1)
TIM16_WriteTCNT1:
; Save global interrupt flag
in
r18,SREG
; Disable interrupts
cli
; Set TCNT1 to r17:r16
out
out
TCNT1H,r17
TCNT1L,r16
; Restore global interrupt flag
out
ret
SREG,r18
C Code Example(1)
void TIM16_WriteTCNT1( unsigned int i )
{
unsigned char sreg;
unsigned int i;
/* Save global interrupt flag */
sreg = SREG;
/* Disable interrupts */
_CLI();
/* Set TCNT1 to i */
TCNT1 = i;
/* Restore global interrupt flag */
SREG = sreg;
}
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
For I/O registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI” instructions must
be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically “LDS” and “STS” combined with
“SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
The assembly code example requires that the r17:r16 register pair contains the value to be written to TCNT1.
5.15.3.1 Reusing the Temporary High Byte Register
If writing to more than one 16-bit register where the high byte is the same for all registers written, then the high byte only
needs to be written once. However, note that the same rule of atomic operation described previously also applies in this
case.
5.15.4 Timer/Counter Clock Sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source is selected by the clock
select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CS12:0) bits located in the Timer/Counter control Register B (TCCR1B).
For details on clock sources and prescaler, see Section 5.16 “Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 Prescalers” on page 137.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
117
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.15.5 Counter Unit
The main part of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable 16-bit bi-directional counter unit. Figure 5-39 shows a block
diagram of the counter and its surroundings.
Figure 5-39. Counter Unit Block Diagram
DATA BUS (8-bit)
TOVn
(Int. Req.)
TEMP (8-bit)
Clock Select
Count
Clear
Edge
Tn
TCNTnH (8-bit)
TCNTnL (8-bit)
clkTn
Detector
Control Logic
Direction
TCNTnH (16-bit Counter)
(From Prescaler)
TOP
BOTTOM
Signal description (internal signals):
Count
Direction
Clear
Increment or decrement TCNT1 by 1.
Select between increment and decrement.
Clear TCNT1 (set all bits to zero).
clkT1
Timer/Counter clock.
TOP
Signalize that TCNT1 has reached maximum value.
BOTTOM
Signalize that TCNT1 has reached minimum value (zero).
The 16-bit counter is mapped into two 8-bit I/O memory locations: Counter High (TCNT1H) containing the upper eight bits of
the counter, and Counter Low (TCNT1L) containing the lower eight bits. The TCNT1H register can only be indirectly
accessed by the CPU. When the CPU does an access to the TCNT1H I/O location, the CPU accesses the high byte
temporary register (TEMP). The temporary register is updated with the TCNT1H value when the TCNT1L is read, and
TCNT1H is updated with the temporary register value when TCNT1L is written. This allows the CPU to read or write the
entire 16-bit counter value within one clock cycle via the 8-bit data bus. It is important to notice that there are special cases
of writing to the TCNT1 register when the counter is counting that will give unpredictable results. The special cases are
described in the sections where they are of importance.
Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer clock (clkT1).
The clkT1 can be generated from an external or internal clock source, selected by the Clock Select bits (CS12:0). When no
clock source is selected (CS12:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT1 value can be accessed by the CPU,
independent of whether clkT1 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the Waveform Generation mode bits (WGM13:0) located in the
Timer/Counter Control Registers A and B (TCCR1A and TCCR1B). There are close connections between how the counter
behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the output compare outputs OC1x. For more details about
advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see Section 5.15.9 “Modes of Operation” on page 123.
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV1) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGM13:0 bits. TOV1 can
be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
5.15.6 Input Capture Unit
The Timer/Counter incorporates an input capture unit that can capture external events and give them a time-stamp
indicating time of occurrence. The external signal indicating an event, or multiple events, can be applied via the ICP1 pin or
alternatively, via the analog-comparator unit. The time-stamps can then be used to calculate frequency, duty-cycle, and
other features of the signal applied. Alternatively the time-stamps can be used for creating a log of the events.
The input capture unit is illustrated by the block diagram shown in Figure 5-40. The elements of the block diagram that are
not directly a part of the input capture unit are gray shaded. The small “n” in register and bit names indicates the
Timer/Counter number.
118
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-40. Input Capture Unit Block Diagram
DATA BUS (8-bit)
TEMP (8-bit)
ICRnH (8-bit)
ICRnL (8-bit)
TCNTnH (8-bit)
TCNTnL (8-bit)
ICRn (16-bit Register)
TCNTn (16-bit Counter)
WRITE
ACO*
ACIC*
ICNC
ICES
+
-
Analog
Comparator
Noise
Canceler
Edge
Detector
ICFn (Int. Req.)
ICPn
When a change of the logic level (an event) occurs on the input capture pin (ICP1), alternatively on the analog comparator
output (ACO), and this change confirms to the setting of the edge detector, a capture will be triggered. When a capture is
triggered, the 16-bit value of the counter (TCNT1) is written to the input capture register (ICR1). The input capture flag (ICF1)
is set at the same system clock as the TCNT1 value is copied into ICR1 register. If enabled (ICIE1 = 1), the input capture flag
generates an input capture interrupt. The ICF1 flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the
ICF1 flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location.
Reading the 16-bit value in the input capture register (ICR1) is done by first reading the low byte (ICR1L) and then the high
byte (ICR1H). When the low byte is read the high byte is copied into the high byte temporary register (TEMP). When the
CPU reads the ICR1H I/O location it will access the TEMP register.
The ICR1 register can only be written when using a waveform generation mode that utilizes the ICR1 register for defining the
counter’s TOP value. In these cases the waveform generation mode (WGM13:0) bits must be set before the TOP value can
be written to the ICR1 register. When writing the ICR1 register the high byte must be written to the ICR1H I/O location before
the low byte is written to ICR1L.
For more information on how to access the 16-bit registers refer to Section 5.15.3 “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 115.
5.15.6.1 Input Capture Trigger Source
The main trigger source for the input capture unit is the input capture pin (ICP1). Timer/Counter1 can alternatively use the
analog comparator output as trigger source for the input capture unit. The analog comparator is selected as trigger source by
setting the analog comparator input capture (ACIC) bit in the analog comparator control and status register (ACSR). Be
aware that changing trigger source can trigger a capture. The input capture flag must therefore be cleared after the change.
Both the input capture pin (ICP1) and the analog comparator output (ACO) inputs are sampled using the same technique as
for the T1 pin (Figure 5-51 on page 137). The edge detector is also identical. However, when the noise canceler is enabled,
additional logic is inserted before the edge detector, which increases the delay by four system clock cycles. Note that the
input of the noise canceler and edge detector is always enabled unless the Timer/Counter is set in a waveform generation
mode that uses ICR1 to define TOP.
An input capture can be triggered by software by controlling the port of the ICP1 pin.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
119
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.15.6.2 Noise Canceler
The noise canceler improves noise immunity by using a simple digital filtering scheme. The noise canceler input is monitored
over four samples, and all four must be equal for changing the output that in turn is used by the edge detector.
The noise canceler is enabled by setting the input capture noise canceler (ICNC1) bit in Timer/Counter control register B
(TCCR1B). When enabled the noise canceler introduces additional four system clock cycles of delay from a change applied
to the input, to the update of the ICR1 register. The noise canceler uses the system clock and is therefore not affected by the
prescaler.
5.15.6.3 Using the Input Capture Unit
The main challenge when using the input capture unit is to assign enough processor capacity for handling the incoming
events. The time between two events is critical. If the processor has not read the captured value in the ICR1 register before
the next event occurs, the ICR1 will be overwritten with a new value. In this case the result of the capture will be incorrect.
When using the input capture interrupt, the ICR1 register should be read as early in the interrupt handler routine as possible.
Even though the input capture interrupt has relatively high priority, the maximum interrupt response time is dependent on the
maximum number of clock cycles it takes to handle any of the other interrupt requests.
Using the input capture unit in any mode of operation when the TOP value (resolution) is actively changed during operation,
is not recommended.
Measurement of an external signal’s duty cycle requires that the trigger edge is changed after each capture. Changing the
edge sensing must be done as early as possible after the ICR1 register has been read. After a change of the edge, the input
capture flag (ICF1) must be cleared by software (writing a logical one to the I/O bit location). For measuring frequency only,
the clearing of the ICF1 flag is not required (if an interrupt handler is used).
5.15.7 Output Compare Units
The 16-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT1 with the output compare register (OCR1x). If TCNT equals OCR1x
the comparator signals a match. A match will set the output compare flag (OCF1x) at the next timer clock cycle. If enabled
(OCIE1x = 1), the output compare flag generates an output compare interrupt. The OCF1x Flag is automatically cleared
when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the OCF1x flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit
location. The waveform generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to operating mode set by the
waveform generation mode (WGM13:0) bits and compare output mode (COM1x1:0) bits. The TOP and BOTTOM signals
are used by the waveform generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (see
Section 5.15.9 “Modes of Operation” on page 123).
A special feature of output compare unit A allows it to define the Timer/Counter TOP value (i.e., counter resolution). In
addition to the counter resolution, the TOP value defines the period time for waveforms generated by the waveform
generator.
Figure 5-41 shows a block diagram of the output compare unit. The small “n” in the register and bit names indicates the
device number (n = 1 for Timer/Counter 1), and the “x” indicates output compare unit (A/B). The elements of the block
diagram that are not directly a part of the output compare unit are gray shaded.
120
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-41. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram
DATA BUS (8-bit)
TEMP (8-bit)
OCRnxH Buf. (8-bit)
OCRnxL Buf. (8-bit)
TCNTnH (8-bit)
TCNTnL (8-bit)
OCRnx Buffer (16-bit Register)
TCNTn (16-bit Counter)
OCRnxH (8-bit)
OCRnxL (8-bit)
OCRnx (16-bit Register)
(16-bit Comparator)
=
OCFnx (Int. Req.)
TOP
Waveform Generator
OCnx
BOTTOM
WGMn3:0
COMnx1:0
The OCR1x register is double buffered when using any of the twelve pulse width modulation (PWM) modes. For the normal
and clear timer on compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes
the update of the OCR1x compare register to either TOP or BOTTOM of the counting sequence. The synchronization
prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.
The OCR1x register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering is enabled, the CPU has
access to the OCR1x buffer register, and if double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR1x directly. The content
of the OCR1x (buffer or compare) register is only changed by a write operation (the Timer/Counter does not update this
register automatically as the TCNT1 and ICR1 register). Therefore OCR1x is not read via the high byte temporary register
(TEMP). However, it is a good practice to read the low byte first as when accessing other 16-bit registers. Writing the OCR1x
registers must be done via the TEMP register since the compare of all 16 bits is done continuously. The high byte (OCR1xH)
has to be written first. When the high byte I/O location is written by the CPU, the TEMP register will be updated by the value
written. Then when the low byte (OCR1xL) is written to the lower eight bits, the high byte will be copied into the upper 8-bits
of either the OCR1x buffer or OCR1x compare register in the same system clock cycle.
For more information of how to access the 16-bit registers refer to Section 5.15.3 “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 115.
5.15.7.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to the force
output compare (FOC1x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the OCF1x flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC1x pin
will be updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COM11:0 bits settings define whether the OC1x pin is set,
cleared or toggled).
5.15.7.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT1 Write
All CPU writes to the TCNT1 register will block any compare match that occurs in the next timer clock cycle, even when the
timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR1x to be initialized to the same value as TCNT1 without triggering an interrupt
when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
121
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.15.7.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNT1 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock cycle, there are risks
involved when changing TCNT1 when using any of the output compare channels, independent of whether the Timer/Counter
is running or not. If the value written to TCNT1 equals the OCR1x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in
incorrect waveform generation. Do not write the TCNT1 equal to TOP in PWM modes with variable TOP values. The
compare match for the TOP will be ignored and the counter will continue to 0xFFFF. Similarly, do not write the TCNT1 value
equal to BOTTOM when the counter is downcounting.
The setup of the OC1x should be performed before setting the data direction register for the port pin to output. The easiest
way of setting the OC1x value is to use the force output compare (FOC1x) strobe bits in normal mode. The OC1x register
keeps its value even when changing between waveform generation modes.
Be aware that the COM1x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the COM1x1:0 bits will
take effect immediately.
5.15.8 Compare Match Output Unit
The compare output mode (COM1x1:0) bits have two functions. The waveform generator uses the COM1x1:0 bits for
defining the output compare (OC1x) state at the next compare match. Secondly the COM1x1:0 bits control the OC1x pin
output source. Figure 5-42 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM1x1:0 bit setting. The I/O registers,
I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O port control registers (DDR and PORT)
that are affected by the COM1x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC1x state, the reference is for the internal OC1x
register, not the OC1x pin. If a system reset occur, the OC1x register is reset to “0”.
Figure 5-42. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic
COMnx1
COMnx0
FOCnx
Waveform
Generator
D
D
Q
Q
1
0
OCnx
Pin
OCnx
PORT
D
Q
DDR
clkI/O
The general I/O port function is overridden by the output compare (OC1x) from the waveform generator if either of the
COM1x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC1x pin direction (input or output) is still controlled by the data direction register
(DDR) for the port pin. The data direction register bit for the OC1x pin (DDR_OC1x) must be set as output before the OC1x
value is visible on the pin. The port override function is generally independent of the waveform generation mode, but there
are some exceptions. Refer to Table 5-50, Table 5-51 and Table 5-52 for details.
The design of the output compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC1x state before the output is enabled. Note that
some COM1x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation. See Section 5.15.11 “Register Description” on
page 131.
The COM1x1:0 bits have no effect on the input capture unit.
122
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.15.8.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The waveform generator uses the COM1x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes, setting the
COM1x1:0 = 0 tells the waveform generator that no action on the OC1x register is to be performed on the next compare
match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 5-50 on page 131. For fast PWM mode refer to
Table 5-51 on page 131, and for phase correct and phase and frequency correct PWM refer to Table 5-52 on page 132.
A change of the COM1x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are written. For non-PWM
modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the FOC1x strobe bits.
5.15.9 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the output compare pins, is defined by the combination of
the waveform generation mode (WGM13:0) and compare output mode (COM1x1:0) bits. The compare output mode bits do
not affect the counting sequence, while the waveform generation mode bits do. The COM1x1:0 bits control whether the
PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM1x1:0 bits
control whether the output should be set, cleared or toggle at a compare match (see Section 5.15.8 “Compare Match Output
Unit” on page 122).
For detailed timing information refer to Section 5.15.10 “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 129.
5.15.9.1 Normal Mode
The simplest mode of operation is the normal mode (WGM13:0 = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always up
(incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply OverRuns when it passes its maximum 16-bit value
(MAX = 0xFFFF) and then restarts from the BOTTOM (0x0000). In normal operation the Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV1)
will be set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT1 becomes zero. The TOV1 flag in this case behaves like a 17th bit,
except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOV1
flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no special cases to consider in the normal mode, a new
counter value can be written anytime.
The input capture unit is easy to use in normal mode. However, observe that the maximum interval between the external
events must not exceed the resolution of the counter. If the interval between events are too long, the timer overflow interrupt
or the prescaler must be used to extend the resolution for the capture unit.
The output compare units can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the output compare to generate
waveforms in normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time.
5.15.9.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In clear timer on compare or CTC mode (WGM13:0 = 4 or 12), the OCR1A or ICR1 register are used to manipulate the
counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNT1) matches either the OCR1A
(WGM13:0 = 4) or the ICR1 (WGM13:0 = 12). The OCR1A or ICR1 define the top value for the counter, hence also its
resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It also simplifies the operation of
counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 5-43. The counter value (TCNT1) increases until a compare match
occurs with either OCR1A or ICR1, and then counter (TCNT1) is cleared.
Figure 5-43. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
TCNTn
OCnA
(COMnA1:0 = 1)
(Toggle)
1
2
3
4
Period
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
123
9240I–AUTO–03/16
An interrupt can be generated at each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by either using the OCF1A or ICF1 flag
according to the register used to define the TOP value. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used
for updating the TOP value. However, changing the TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running with none
or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not have the double buffering feature. If the new
value written to OCR1A or ICR1 is lower than the current value of TCNT1, the counter will miss the compare match. The
counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare
match can occur. In many cases this feature is not desirable. An alternative will then be to use the fast PWM mode using
OCR1A for defining TOP (WGM13:0 = 15) since the OCR1A then will be double buffered.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC1A output can be set to toggle its logical level on each compare
match by setting the compare output mode bits to toggle mode (COM1A1:0 = 1). The OC1A value will not be visible on the
port pin unless the data direction for the pin is set to output (DDR_OC1A = 1). The waveform generated will have a
maximum frequency of fOC1A = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR1A is set to zero (0x0000). The waveform frequency is defined by the
following equation:
f
clk_I/O
-------------------------------------------------
f
=
OCnA
2 N 1 + OCRnA
The N variable represents the prescaler factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
As for the normal mode of operation, the TOV1 flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts from MAX to
0x0000.
5.15.9.3 Fast PWM Mode
The fast pulse width modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM13:0 = 5, 6, 7, 14, or 15) provides a high frequency PWM
waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM options by its single-slope operation. The counter
counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM. In non-inverting compare output mode, the output compare
(OC1x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT1 and OCR1x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting compare output
mode output is set on compare match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating frequency
of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct and phase and frequency correct PWM modes that use
dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited for power regulation, rectification, and DAC
applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils, capacitors), hence reduces total
system cost.
The PWM resolution for fast PWM can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined by either ICR1 or OCR1A. The minimum
resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to 0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to
MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be calculated by using the following equation:
logTOP + 1
---------------------------------
=
R
FPWM
log2
In fast PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either one of the fixed values 0x00FF,
0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGM13:0 = 5, 6, or 7), the value in ICR1 (WGM13:0 = 14), or the value in OCR1A (WGM13:0 = 15).
The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure
5-44. The figure shows fast PWM mode when OCR1A or ICR1 is used to define TOP. The TCNT1 value is in the timing
diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted
PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT1 slopes represent compare matches between OCR1x and
TCNT1. The OC1x interrupt flag will be set when a compare match occurs.
124
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-44. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
OCRnx/TOP Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set and
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
TCNTn
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Period
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV1) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. In addition the OC1A or ICF1 Flag is set
at the same timer clock cycle as TOV1 is set when either OCR1A or ICR1 is used for defining the TOP value. If one of the
interrupts are enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP and compare values.
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of all of the
compare registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the compare registers, a compare match will never occur between
the TCNT1 and the OCR1x. Note that when using fixed TOP values the unused bits are masked to zero when any of the
OCR1x registers are written.
The procedure for updating ICR1 differs from updating OCR1A when used for defining the TOP value. The ICR1 register is
not double buffered. This means that if ICR1 is changed to a low value when the counter is running with none or a low
prescaler value, there is a risk that the new ICR1 value written is lower than the current value of TCNT1. The result will then
be that the counter will miss the compare match at the TOP value. The counter will then have to count to the MAX value
(0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can occur. The OCR1A register however, is double
buffered. This feature allows the OCR1A I/O location to be written anytime. When the OCR1A I/O location is written the
value written will be put into the OCR1A buffer register. The OCR1A compare register will then be updated with the value in
the buffer register at the next timer clock cycle the TCNT1 matches TOP. The update is done at the same timer clock cycle
as the TCNT1 is cleared and the TOV1 flag is set.
Using the ICR1 register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using ICR1, the OCR1A register is
free to be used for generating a PWM output on OC1A. However, if the base PWM frequency is actively changed (by
changing the TOP value), using the OCR1A as TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer feature.
In fast PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OC1x pins. Setting the COM1x1:0 bits to
two will produce a inverted PWM and an non-inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM1x1:0 to three (see
Table on page 131). The actual OC1x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as
output (DDR_OC1x). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC1x register at the compare match
between OCR1x and TCNT1, and clearing (or setting) the OC1x register at the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared
(changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
f
clk_I/O
----------------------------------
f
=
OCnxPWM
N 1 + TOP
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR1x register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the fast
PWM mode. If the OCR1x is set equal to BOTTOM (0x0000) the output will be a narrow spike for each TOP+1 timer clock
cycle. Setting the OCR1x equal to TOP will result in a constant high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set
by the COM1x1:0 bits.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
125
9240I–AUTO–03/16
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting OC1A to toggle its logical
level on each compare match (COM1A1:0 = 1). This applies only if OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 =
15). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC1A = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR1A is set to zero (0x0000). This
feature is similar to the OC1A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the output compare unit is enabled in
the fast PWM mode.
5.15.9.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct pulse width modulation or phase correct PWM mode (WGM13:0 = 1, 2, 3, 10, or 11) provides a high
resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is, like the phase and frequency
correct PWM mode, based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP and
then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting compare output mode, the output compare (OC1x) is cleared on the compare
match between TCNT1 and OCR1x while upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting. In inverting output
compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single
slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor
control applications.
The PWM resolution for the phase correct PWM mode can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined by either ICR1 or OCR1A.
The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to 0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICR1 or
OCR1A set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be calculated by using the following equation:
logTOP + 1
---------------------------------
=
R
PCPWM
log2
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either one of the fixed values
0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGM13:0 = 1, 2, or 3), the value in ICR1 (WGM13:0 = 10), or the value in OCR1A (WGM13:0
= 11). The counter has then reached the TOP and changes the count direction. The TCNT1 value will be equal to TOP for
one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 5-45. The figure shows
phase correct PWM mode when OCR1A or ICR1 is used to define TOP. The TCNT1 value is in the timing diagram shown as
a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The
small horizontal line marks on the TCNT1 slopes represent compare matches between OCR1x and TCNT1. The OC1x
interrupt flag will be set when a compare match occurs.
Figure 5-45. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
OCRnx/TOP Update and
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on Bottom)
TCNTn
OCnx
OCnx
Period
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
1
2
3
4
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV1) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. When either OCR1A or ICR1 is
used for defining the TOP value, the OC1A or ICF1 flag is set accordingly at the same timer clock cycle as the OCR1x
registers are updated with the double buffer value (at TOP). The interrupt flags can be used to generate an interrupt each
time the counter reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value.
126
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of all of the
compare registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the compare registers, a compare match will never occur between
the TCNT1 and the OCR1x. Note that when using fixed TOP values, the unused bits are masked to zero when any of the
OCR1x registers are written. As the third period shown in Figure 5-45 illustrates, changing the TOP actively while the
Timer/Counter is running in the phase correct mode can result in an unsymmetrical output. The reason for this can be found
in the time of update of the OCR1x register. Since the OCR1x update occurs at TOP, the PWM period starts and ends at
TOP. This implies that the length of the falling slope is determined by the previous TOP value, while the length of the rising
slope is determined by the new TOP value. When these two values differ the two slopes of the period will differ in length. The
difference in length gives the unsymmetrical result on the output.
It is recommended to use the phase and frequency correct mode instead of the phase correct mode when changing the TOP
value while the Timer/Counter is running. When using a static TOP value there are practically no differences between the
two modes of operation.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OC1x pins. Setting the
COM1x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the
COM1x1:0 to three (See Table on page 132). The actual OC1x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction
for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OC1x). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC1x register at
the compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1 when the counter increments, and clearing (or setting) the OC1x register at
compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using
phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation:
f
clk_I/O
---------------------------
f
=
OCnxPCPWM
2 N TOP
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR1x register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase
correct PWM mode. If the OCR1x is set equal to BOTTOM the output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the
output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic
values. If OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 11) and COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output will toggle with a
50% duty cycle.
5.15.9.5 Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode
The phase and frequency correct pulse width modulation, or phase and frequency correct PWM mode (WGM13:0 = 8 or 9)
provides a high resolution phase and frequency correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase and frequency correct
PWM mode is, like the phase correct PWM mode, based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from
BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting compare output mode, the output compare
(OC1x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT1 and OCR1x while upcounting, and set on the compare match
while downcounting. In inverting compare output mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation gives a lower
maximum operation frequency compared to the single-slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-
slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications.
The main difference between the phase correct, and the phase and frequency correct PWM mode is the time the OCR1x
register is updated by the OCR1x buffer register, (see Figure 5-45 and Figure 5-46).
The PWM resolution for the phase and frequency correct PWM mode can be defined by either ICR1 or OCR1A. The
minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to 0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A
set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be calculated using the following equation:
logTOP + 1
---------------------------------
=
R
PFCPWM
log2
In phase and frequency correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either the value in
ICR1 (WGM13:0 = 8), or the value in OCR1A (WGM13:0 = 9). The counter has then reached the TOP and changes the
count direction. The TCNT1 value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct
and frequency correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 5-46. The figure shows phase and frequency correct PWM mode
when OCR1A or ICR1 is used to define TOP. The TCNT1 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating
the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on
the TCNT1 slopes represent compare matches between OCR1x and TCNT1. The OC1x Interrupt Flag will be set when a
compare match occurs.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
127
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-46. Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
OCRnx/ TOP Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on Bottom)
TCNTn
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
1
2
3
4
Period
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV1) is set at the same timer clock cycle as the OCR1x registers are updated with the
double buffer value (at BOTTOM). When either OCR1A or ICR1 is used for defining the TOP value, the OC1A or ICF1 flag
set when TCNT1 has reached TOP. The interrupt flags can then be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter
reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value.
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of all of the
compare registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the compare registers, a compare match will never occur between
the TCNT1 and the OCR1x.
As Figure 5-46 shows the output generated is, in contrast to the phase correct mode, symmetrical in all periods. Since the
OCR1x registers are updated at BOTTOM, the length of the rising and the falling slopes will always be equal. This gives
symmetrical output pulses and is therefore frequency correct.
Using the ICR1 register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using ICR1, the OCR1A register is
free to be used for generating a PWM output on OC1A. However, if the base PWM frequency is actively changed by
changing the TOP value, using the OCR1A as TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer feature.
In phase and frequency correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OC1x pins.
Setting the COM1x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting
the COM1x1:0 to three (see Table on page 132). The actual OC1x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data
direction for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OC1x). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC1x
register at the compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1 when the counter increments, and clearing (or setting) the OC1x
register at compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output
when using phase and frequency correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation:
f
clk_I/O
---------------------------
f
=
OCnxPFCPWM
2 N TOP
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR1x register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase
correct PWM mode. If the OCR1x is set equal to BOTTOM the output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the
output will be set to high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. If
OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 9) and COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output will toggle with a 50% duty
cycle.
128
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.15.10 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT1) is therefore shown as a clock enable signal in the
following figures. The figures include information on when Interrupt flags are set, and when the OCR1x register is updated
with the OCR1x buffer value (only for modes utilizing double buffering). Figure 5-47 shows a timing diagram for the setting of
OCF1x.
Figure 5-47. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF1x, no Prescaling
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TCNTn
OCRnx
OCFnx
OCRnx - 1
OCRnx
OCRnx + 1
OCRnx + 2
OCRnx Value
Figure 5-48 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 5-48. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF1x, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
TCNTn
OCRnx - 1
OCRnx
OCRnx + 1
OCRnx + 2
OCRnx
OCFnx
OCRnx Value
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
129
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-49 shows the count sequence close to TOP in various modes. When using phase and frequency correct PWM
mode the OCR1x register is updated at BOTTOM. The timing diagrams will be the same, but TOP should be replaced by
BOTTOM, TOP-1 by BOTTOM+1 and so on. The same renaming applies for modes that set the TOV1 Flag at BOTTOM.
Figure 5-49. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TCNTn
TOP - 1
TOP - 1
TOP
TOP
BOTTOM
TOP - 1
BOTTOM + 1
TOP - 2
(CTC and FPWM)
TCNTn
(PC and PFC PWM)
TOVn (FPWM)
and ICFn
(if used as TOP)
OCRnx
(Update at TOP)
Old OCRnx Value
New OCRnx Value
Figure 5-50 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 5-50. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
TCNTn
TOP - 1
TOP - 1
TOP
TOP
BOTTOM
TOP - 1
BOTTOM + 1
TOP - 2
(CTC and FPWM)
TCNTn
(PC and PFC PWM)
TOVn (FPWM)
and ICFn
(if used as TOP)
OCRnx
(Update at TOP)
Old OCRnx Value
New OCRnx Value
130
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.15.11 Register Description
5.15.11.1 TCCR1A – Timer/Counter1 Control Register A
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
–
2
–
1
0
(0x80)
COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0
WGM11 WGM10 TCCR1A
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R
0
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 7:6 – COM1A1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel A
• Bit 5:4 – COM1B1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel B
The COM1A1:0 and COM1B1:0 control the output compare pins (OC1A and OC1B respectively) behavior. If one or both of
the COM1A1:0 bits are written to one, the OC1A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. If one or both of the COM1B1:0 bit are written to one, the OC1B output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O
pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC1A or OC1B pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When the OC1A or OC1B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM1x1:0 bits is dependent of the WGM13:0 bits
setting. Table 5-50 shows the COM1x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM13:0 bits are set to a Normal or a CTC mode (non-
PWM).
Table 5-50. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM
COM1A1/COM1B1
COM1A0/COM1B0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected.
Toggle OC1A/OC1B on compare match.
Clear OC1A/OC1B on compare match (set output to low level).
Set OC1A/OC1B on compare match (set output to high level).
Table 5-51 shows the COM1x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM13:0 bits are set to the fast PWM mode.
Table 5-51. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM(1)
COM1A1/COM1B1
COM1A0/COM1B0
Description
0
0
Normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected.
WGM13:0 = 14 or 15: Toggle OC1A on compare match, OC1B
disconnected (normal port operation). For all other WGM1
settings, normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected.
0
1
Clear OC1A/OC1B on compare match, set OC1A/OC1B at
BOTTOM (non-inverting mode)
1
1
0
1
Set OC1A/OC1B on compare match, clear OC1A/OC1B at
BOTTOM (inverting mode)
Note:
1. A special case occurs when OCR1A/OCR1B equals TOP and COM1A1/COM1B1 is set. In this case the com-
pare match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See Section 5.15.9.3 “Fast PWM Mode” on
page 124 for more details.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
131
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-52 shows the COM1x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM13:0 bits are set to the phase correct or the phase and
frequency correct, PWM mode.
Table 5-52. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct and Phase and Frequency Correct PWM(1)
COM1A1/COM1B1
COM1A0/COM1B0
Description
0
0
Normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected.
WGM13:0 = 9 or 11: Toggle OC1A on compare match, OC1B
disconnected (normal port operation). For all other WGM1
settings, normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected.
0
1
Clear OC1A/OC1B on compare match when up-counting. Set
OC1A/OC1B on compare match when downcounting.
1
1
0
1
Set OC1A/OC1B on compare match when up-counting. Clear
OC1A/OC1B on compare match when downcounting.
Note:
1. A special case occurs when OCR1A/OCR1B equals TOP and COM1A1/COM1B1 is set. See Section 5.15.9.4
“Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 126 for more details.
• Bit 1:0 – WGM11:0: Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM13:2 bits found in the TCCR1B register, these bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the
source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used, see Table 5-53. Modes of
operation supported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), clear timer on compare match (CTC) mode, and
three types of pulse width modulation (PWM) modes (see Section 5.15.9 “Modes of Operation” on page 123).
Table 5-53. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description(1)
WGM12
(CTC1)
WGM11
WGM10 Timer/Counter Mode of
Update of
OCR1x at
TOV1 Flag
Set on
Mode
WGM13
(PWM11) (PWM10) Operation
TOP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Normal
0xFFFF
0x00FF
0x01FF
0x03FF
OCR1A
0x00FF
0x01FF
0x03FF
Immediate
TOP
MAX
PWM, phase correct, 8-bit
PWM, phase correct, 9-bit
PWM, phase correct, 10-bit
CTC
BOTTOM
BOTTOM
BOTTOM
MAX
TOP
TOP
Immediate
BOTTOM
BOTTOM
BOTTOM
Fast PWM, 8-bit
Fast PWM, 9-bit
Fast PWM, 10-bit
TOP
TOP
TOP
PWM, phase and frequency
correct
8
9
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
ICR1
BOTTOM
BOTTOM
BOTTOM
BOTTOM
PWM, phase and frequency
correct
OCR1A
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
PWM, phase correct
PWM, phase correct
CTC
ICR1
OCR1A
ICR1
–
TOP
BOTTOM
BOTTOM
MAX
TOP
Immediate
–
(Reserved)
–
Fast PWM
ICR1
OCR1A
BOTTOM
BOTTOM
TOP
Fast PWM
TOP
Note:
1. The CTC1 and PWM11:0 bit definition names are obsolete. Use the WGM12:0 definitions. However, the functionality
and location of these bits are compatible with previous versions of the timer.
132
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.15.11.2 TCCR1B – Timer/Counter1 Control Register B
Bit
7
ICNC1
R/W
0
6
ICES1
R/W
0
5
–
4
3
2
CS12
R/W
0
1
CS11
R/W
0
0
CS10
R/W
0
(0x81)
WGM13 WGM12
TCCR1B
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 7 – ICNC1: Input Capture Noise Canceler
Setting this bit (to one) activates the input capture noise canceler. When the noise canceler is activated, the input from the
input capture pin (ICP1) is filtered. The filter function requires four successive equal valued samples of the ICP1 pin for
changing its output. The input capture is therefore delayed by four oscillator cycles when the noise canceler is enabled.
• Bit 6 – ICES1: Input Capture Edge Select
This bit selects which edge on the input capture pin (ICP1) that is used to trigger a capture event. When the ICES1 bit is
written to zero, a falling (negative) edge is used as trigger, and when the ICES1 bit is written to one, a rising (positive) edge
will trigger the capture.
When a capture is triggered according to the ICES1 setting, the counter value is copied into the input capture register
(ICR1). The event will also set the input capture flag (ICF1), and this can be used to cause an input capture interrupt, if this
interrupt is enabled.
When the ICR1 is used as TOP value (see description of the WGM13:0 bits located in the TCCR1A and the TCCR1B
register), the ICP1 is disconnected and consequently the Input capture function is disabled.
• Bit 5 – Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be written to zero when
TCCR1B is written.
• Bit 4:3 – WGM13:2: Waveform Generation Mode
See TCCR1A register description.
• Bit 2:0 – CS12:0: Clock Select
The three clock select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Figure 5-47 and Figure 5-48.
Table 5-54. Clock Select Bit Description
CS12
CS11
CS10
Description
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped).
clkI/O/1 (no prescaling)
clkI/O/8 (from prescaler)
clkI/O/64 (from prescaler)
clkI/O/256 (from prescaler)
clkI/O/1024 (from prescaler)
External clock source on T1 pin. Clock on falling edge.
External clock source on T1 pin. Clock on rising edge.
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter1, transitions on the T1 pin will clock the counter even if the pin is
configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the counting.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
133
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.15.11.3 TCCR1C – Timer/Counter1 Control Register C
Bit
7
FOC1A
R/W
0
6
FOC1B
R/W
0
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
(0x82)
TCCR1C
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – FOC1A: Force Output Compare for Channel A
• Bit 6 – FOC1B: Force Output Compare for Channel B
The FOC1A/FOC1B bits are only active when the WGM13:0 bits specifies a non-PWM mode. When writing a logical one to
the FOC1A/FOC1B bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the waveform generation unit. The OC1A/OC1B output is
changed according to its COM1x1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC1A/FOC1B bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it
is the value present in the COM1x1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare.
A FOC1A/FOC1B strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in clear timer on compare match (CTC)
mode using OCR1A as TOP. The FOC1A/FOC1B bits are always read as zero.
5.15.11.4 TCNT1H and TCNT1L – Timer/Counter1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0x85)
TCNT1[15:8]
TCNT1[7:0]
TCNT1H
TCNT1L
(0x84)
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
0
0
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT1H and TCNT1L, combined TCNT1) give direct access, both for read and for
write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written
simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary high byte register
(TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers (see Section 5.15.3 “Accessing 16-bit Registers”
on page 115).
Modifying the counter (TCNT1) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare match between TCNT1
and one of the OCR1x registers.
Writing to the TCNT1 register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all compare units.
5.15.11.5 OCR1AH and OCR1AL – Output Compare Register 1 A
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0x89)
OCR1A[15:8]
OCR1A[7:0]
OCR1AH
OCR1AL
(0x88)
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
5.15.11.6 OCR1BH and OCR1BL – Output Compare Register 1 B
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0x8B)
OCR1B[15:8]
OCR1B[7:0]
OCR1BH
OCR1BL
(0x8A)
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
The Output compare registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT1). A match
can be used to generate an output compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC1x pin.
The output compare registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written simultaneously when
the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary high byte register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers (see Section 5.15.3 “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 115).
134
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.15.11.7 ICR1H and ICR1L – Input Capture Register 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0x87)
ICR1[15:8]
ICR1[7:0]
ICR1H
ICR1L
(0x86)
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
0
The input capture is updated with the counter (TCNT1) value each time an event occurs on the ICP1 pin (or optionally on the
analog comparator output for Timer/Counter1). The input capture can be used for defining the counter TOP value.
The input capture register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read simultaneously when the
CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary high byte register (TEMP). This temporary
register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers (see Section 5.15.3 “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 115).
5.15.11.8 TIMSK1 – Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Mask Register
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
ICIE1
R/W
0
4
–
3
–
2
1
0
TOIE1
R/W
0
(0x6F)
OCIE1B OCIE1A
TIMSK1
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 7, 6 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 5 – ICIE1: Timer/Counter1, Input Capture Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the status register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1
input capture interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt vector (see Section 5.11 “Interrupts” on page 73) is executed
when the ICF1 Flag, located in TIFR1, is set.
• Bit 4, 3 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – OCIE1B: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare B Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the status register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1
output compare B match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt vector (see Section 5.11 “Interrupts” on page 73)
is executed when the OCF1B Flag, located in TIFR1, is set.
• Bit 1 – OCIE1A: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare A Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the status register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1
output compare A match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt vector (see Section 5.11 “Interrupts” on page 73)
is executed when the OCF1A flag, located in TIFR1, is set.
• Bit 0 – TOIE1: Timer/Counter1, Overflow Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the status register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1
overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt vector (see Section 5.11 “Interrupts” on page 73) is executed when
the TOV1 flag, located in TIFR1, is set.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
135
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.15.11.9 TIFR1 – Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Flag Register
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
4
–
3
–
2
OCF1B
R/W
0
1
OCF1A
R/W
0
0
TOV1
R/W
0
0x16 (0x36)
Read/Write
Initial Value
ICF1
R/W
0
TIFR1
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7, 6 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 5 – ICF1: Timer/Counter1, Input Capture Flag
This flag is set when a capture event occurs on the ICP1 pin. When the input capture register (ICR1) is set by the WGM13:0
to be used as the TOP value, the ICF1 flag is set when the counter reaches the TOP value.
ICF1 is automatically cleared when the input capture interrupt vector is executed. Alternatively, ICF1 can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 4, 3 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – OCF1B: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare B Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT1) value matches the output compare register B (OCR1B).
Note that a forced output compare (FOC1B) strobe will not set the OCF1B flag.
OCF1B is automatically cleared when the output compare match B Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF1B can
be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 1 – OCF1A: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare A Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT1) value matches the output compare register A (OCR1A).
Note that a forced output compare (FOC1A) strobe will not set the OCF1A flag.
OCF1A is automatically cleared when the output compare match A interrupt vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF1A can be
cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 0 – TOV1: Timer/Counter1, Overflow Flag
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM13:0 bits setting. In normal and CTC modes, the TOV1 flag is set when the
timer overflows. Refer to Table 5-53 on page 132 for the TOV1 flag behavior when using another WGM13:0 bit setting.
TOV1 is automatically cleared when the Timer/Counter1 overflow interrupt vector is executed. Alternatively, TOV1 can be
cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.
136
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.16 Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 Prescalers
Section 5.14 “8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM” on page 98 and Section 5.15 “16-bit Timer/Counter1 with PWM” on page 113
share the same prescaler module, but the Timer/Counters can have different prescaler settings. The description below
applies to both Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0.
5.16.1 Internal Clock Source
The Timer/Counter can be clocked directly by the system clock (by setting the CSn2:0 = 1). This provides the fastest
operation, with a maximum Timer/Counter clock frequency equal to system clock frequency (fCLK_I/O). Alternatively, one of
four taps from the prescaler can be used as a clock source. The prescaled clock has a frequency of either fCLK_I/O/8,
f
CLK_I/O/64, fCLK_I/O/256, or fCLK_I/O/1024.
5.16.2 Prescaler Reset
The prescaler is free running, i.e., operates independently of the clock select logic of the Timer/Counter, and it is shared by
Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0. Since the prescaler is not affected by the Timer/Counter’s clock select, the state of the
prescaler will have implications for situations where a prescaled clock is used. One example of prescaling artifacts occurs
when the timer is enabled and clocked by the prescaler (6 > CSn2:0 > 1). The number of system clock cycles from when the
timer is enabled to the first count occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system clock cycles, where N equals the prescaler divisor (8,
64, 256, or 1024).
It is possible to use the prescaler reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program execution. However, care must be
taken if the other Timer/Counter that shares the same prescaler also uses prescaling. A prescaler reset will affect the
prescaler period for all Timer/Counters it is connected to.
5.16.3 External Clock Source
An external clock source applied to the T1/T0 pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock (clkT1/clkT0). The T1/T0 pin is sampled
once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization logic. The synchronized (sampled) signal is then passed through
the edge detector. Figure 5-51 shows a functional equivalent block diagram of the T1/T0 synchronization and edge detector
logic. The registers are clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clkI/O). The latch is transparent in the high
period of the internal system clock.
The edge detector generates one clkT1/clkT0 pulse for each positive (CSn2:0 = 7) or negative (CSn2:0 = 6) edge it detects.
Figure 5-51. T1/T0 Pin Sampling
Tn_sync
Tn
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
(To Clock
Select Logic)
LE
clkI/O
Synchronization
Edge Detector
The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles from an edge has been
applied to the T1/T0 pin to the counter is updated.
Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when T1/T0 has been stable for at least one system clock cycle,
otherwise it is a risk that a false Timer/Counter clock pulse is generated.
Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to ensure correct sampling. The
external clock must be guaranteed to have less than half the system clock frequency (fExtClk < fclk_I/O/2) given a 50/50% duty
cycle. Since the edge detector uses sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it can detect is half the sampling
frequency (Nyquist sampling theorem). However, due to variation of the system clock frequency and duty cycle caused by
Oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances, it is recommended that maximum frequency of an external
clock source is less than fclk_I/O/2.5.
An external clock source can not be prescaled.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
137
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-52. Prescaler for Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1(1)
clkI/O
10-bit T/C Prescaler
Clear
PSRSYNC
T0
T1
Synchronization
Synchronization
0
0
CS10
CS11
CS12
CS00
CS01
CS02
Timer/Counter1 Clock Source
clkT1
Timer/Counter0 Clock Source
clkT0
Note:
1. The synchronization logic on the input pins (T1/T0) is shown in Figure 5-51 on page 137.
5.16.4 Register Description
5.16.4.1 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
Bit
7
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
0
0x23 (0x43)
Read/Write
Initial Value
TSM
R/W
0
PSRASY PSRSYNC GTCCR
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter synchronization mode. In this mode, the value that is written to the
PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits is kept, hence keeping the corresponding prescaler reset signals asserted. This ensures that
the corresponding Timer/Counters are halted and can be configured to the same value without the risk of one of them
advancing during configuration. When the TSM bit is written to zero, the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits are cleared by
hardware, and the Timer/Counters start counting simultaneously.
• Bit 0 – PSRSYNC: Prescaler Reset
When this bit is one, Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally cleared immediately by
hardware, except if the TSM bit is set. Note that Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 share the same prescaler and a reset
of this prescaler will affect both timers.
138
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.17 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation
5.17.1 Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Single channel counter
Clear timer on compare match (auto reload)
Glitch-free, phase correct pulse width modulator (PWM)
Frequency generator
10-bit clock prescaler
Overflow and compare match interrupt sources (TOV2, OCF2A and OCF2B)
Allows clocking from external 32kHz watch crystal independent of the I/O clock
5.17.2 Overview
Timer/Counter2 is a general purpose, single channel, 8-bit Timer/Counter module. A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit
Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 5-53. The device-specific I/O register and bit locations are listed in Section 5.17.11
“Register Description” on page 150.
The PRTIM2 bit in Section 5.9.10 “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 60 must be written to zero to enable
Timer/Counter2 module.
Figure 5-53. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn (Int. Req.)
Control Logic
clkTn
Clock Select
Edge
Detector
Tn
TOP
BOTTOM
(from Prescaler)
Timer/Counter
TCNTn
=
= 0
OCnA (Int. Req.)
Waveform
Generation
OCnA
=
OCRnA
Fixed
TOP
Value
OCnB (Int. Req.)
Waveform
Generation
OCnB
=
OCRnB
TCCRnA
TCCRnB
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
139
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.17.2.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT2) and output compare register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are 8-bit registers. interrupt request
(shorten as Int.Req.) signals are all visible in the timer interrupt flag register (TIFR2). All interrupts are individually masked
with the timer interrupt mask register (TIMSK2). TIFR2 and TIMSK2 are not shown in the figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or asynchronously clocked from the TOSC1/2 pins, as
detailed later in this section. The asynchronous operation is controlled by the asynchronous status register (ASSR). The
clock select logic block controls which clock source he Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The
Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the clock select logic is referred to as the timer
clock (clkT2).
The double buffered output compare register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are compared with the Timer/Counter value at all times.
The result of the compare can be used by the waveform generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the
output compare pins (OC2A and OC2B). See Section 5.17.5 “Output Compare Unit” on page 141 for details. The compare
match event will also set the compare flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) which can be used to generate an output compare interrupt
request.
5.17.2.2 Definitions
Many register and bit references in this document are written in general form. A lower case “n” replaces the Timer/Counter
number, in this case 2. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e.,
TCNT2 for accessing Timer/Counter2 counter value and so on.
The definitions in Table 5-55 are also used extensively throughout the section.
Table 5-55. Definitions
Case
BOTTOM
MAX
Definition
The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes zero (0x00).
The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).
The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count sequence. The
TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF (MAX) or the value stored in the OCR2A register.
The assignment is dependent on the mode of operation.
TOP
5.17.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal synchronous or an external asynchronous clock source. The clock source
clkT2 is by default equal to the MCU clock, clkI/O. When the AS2 bit in the ASSR register is written to logic one, the clock
source is taken from the Timer/Counter oscillator connected to TOSC1 and TOSC2. For details on asynchronous operation,
see Section 5.17.11.8 “ASSR – Asynchronous Status Register” on page 155. For details on clock sources and prescaler, see
Section 5.17.10 “Timer/Counter Prescaler” on page 150.
5.17.4 Counter Unit
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure 5-54 on page 140 shows a
block diagram of the counter and its surrounding environment.
Figure 5-54. Counter Unit Block Diagram
TOVn
(Int. Req.)
DATA BUS
TOSC1
count
T/C
Oscillator
clkTn
clear
TCNTn
Control Logic
Prescaler
direction
TOSC2
clkI/O
bottom
top
140
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Signal description (internal signals):
count
direction
clear
Increment or decrement TCNT2 by 1.
Selects between increment and decrement.
Clear TCNT2 (set all bits to zero).
clkTn
Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT2 in the following.
Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached maximum value.
Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached minimum value (zero).
top
bottom
Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer clock (clkT2).
clkT2 can be generated from an external or internal clock source, selected by the clock select bits (CS22:0). When no clock
source is selected (CS22:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT2 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of
whether clkT2 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM21 and WGM20 bits located in the Timer/Counter control
register (TCCR2A) and the WGM22 located in the Timer/Counter control register B (TCCR2B). There are close connections
between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the output compare outputs OC2A and
OC2B. For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see Section 5.17.7 “Modes of
Operation” on page 143.
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV2) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGM22:0 bits. TOV2 can
be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
5.17.5 Output Compare Unit
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT2 with the output compare register (OCR2A and OCR2B). Whenever
TCNT2 equals OCR2A or OCR2B, the comparator signals a match. A match will set the output compare flag (OCF2A or
OCF2B) at the next timer clock cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the output compare flag generates an output
compare interrupt. The output compare flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively, the output
compare flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The waveform generator uses the
match signal to generate an output according to operating mode set by the WGM22:0 bits and compare output mode
(COM2x1:0) bits. The max and bottom signals are used by the waveform generator for handling the special cases of the
extreme values in some modes of operation (see Section 5.17.7 “Modes of Operation” on page 143).
Figure 5-55 shows a block diagram of the output compare unit.
Figure 5-55. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram
DATA BUS
OCRnx
TCNTn
= (8-bit Comparator)
OCFnx (Int. Req.)
OCnx
top
bottom
FOCn
Waveform Generator
WGMn[1:0]
COMnX[1:0]
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
141
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The OCR2x register is double buffered when using any of the pulse width modulation (PWM) modes. For the normal and
clear timer on compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the
update of the OCR2x compare register to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the
occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.
The OCR2x register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering is enabled, the CPU has
access to the OCR2x buffer register, and if double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR2x directly.
5.17.5.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to the force
output compare (FOC2x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the OCF2x flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC2x pin
will be updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COM2x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC2x pin is set,
cleared or toggled).
5.17.5.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT2 Write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT2 Register will block any compare match that occurs in the next timer clock cycle, even
when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR2x to be initialized to the same value as TCNT2 without triggering an
interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled.
5.17.5.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNT2 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock cycle, there are risks
involved when changing TCNT2 when using the output compare channel, independently of whether the Timer/Counter is
running or not. If the value written to TCNT2 equals the OCR2x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in
incorrect waveform generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT2 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is
downcounting. The setup of the OC2x should be performed before setting the data direction register for the port pin to
output. The easiest way of setting the OC2x value is to use the force output compare (FOC2x) strobe bit in normal mode.
The OC2x register keeps its value even when changing between waveform generation modes.
Be aware that the COM2x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the COM2x1:0 bits will
take effect immediately.
5.17.6 Compare Match Output Unit
The compare output mode (COM2x1:0) bits have two functions. The waveform generator uses the COM2x1:0 bits for
defining the output compare (OC2x) state at the next compare match. Also, the COM2x1:0 bits control the OC2x pin output
source. Figure 5-56 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM2x1:0 bit setting. The I/O registers, I/O
bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O port control registers (DDR and PORT)
that are affected by the COM2x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC2x state, the reference is for the internal OC2x
Register, not the OC2x pin.
142
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-56. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic
COMnx1
COMnx0
FOCnx
Waveform
Generator
D
D
Q
Q
1
0
OCnx
Pin
OCnx
PORT
D
Q
DDR
clkI/O
The general I/O port function is overridden by the output compare (OC2x) from the waveform generator if either of the
COM2x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC2x pin direction (input or output) is still controlled by the data direction register
(DDR) for the port pin. The data direction register bit for the OC2x pin (DDR_OC2x) must be set as output before the OC2x
value is visible on the pin. The port override function is independent of the waveform generation mode.
The design of the output compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC2x state before the output is enabled. Note that
some COM2x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation (see Section 5.17.11 “Register Description” on
page 150).
5.17.6.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The waveform generator uses the COM2x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes, setting the
COM2x1:0 = 0 tells the waveform generator that no action on the OC2x register is to be performed on the next compare
match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 5-59 on page 151. For fast PWM mode, refer to
Table 5-60 on page 152, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 5-61 on page 152.
A change of the COM2x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are written. For non-PWM
modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the FOC2x strobe bits.
5.17.7 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the output compare pins, is defined by the combination of
the waveform generation mode (WGM22:0) and compare output mode (COM2x1:0) bits. The compare output mode bits do
not affect the counting sequence, while the waveform generation mode bits do. The COM2x1:0 bits control whether the
PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM2x1:0 bits
control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a compare match (see Section 5.17.6 “Compare Match
Output Unit” on page 142).
For detailed timing information refer to Section 5.17.8 “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 147.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
143
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.17.7.1 Normal Mode
The simplest mode of operation is the normal mode (WGM22:0 = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always up
(incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply OverRuns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value
(TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bottom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV2) will be
set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT2 becomes zero. The TOV2 flag in this case behaves like a ninth bit, except
that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOV2 flag,
the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no special cases to consider in the normal mode, a new counter
value can be written anytime.
The output compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the output compare to generate
waveforms in normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time.
5.17.7.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In clear timer on compare or CTC mode (WGM22:0 = 2), the OCR2A register is used to manipulate the counter resolution. In
CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNT2) matches the OCR2A. The OCR2A defines the top
value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It
also simplifies the operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 5-57. The counter value (TCNT2) increases until a compare match
occurs between TCNT2 and OCR2A, and then counter (TCNT2) is cleared.
Figure 5-57. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram
OCnx Interrupt
Flag Set
TCNTn
OCnx
(COMnx[1:0] = 1)
(Toggle)
1
2
3
4
Period
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the OCF2A flag. If the interrupt
is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to
BOTTOM when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does
not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR2A is lower than the current value of TCNT2, the
counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around
starting at 0x00 before the compare match can occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC2A output can be set to toggle its logical level on each compare
match by setting the compare output mode bits to toggle mode (COM2A1:0 = 1). The OC2A value will not be visible on the
port pin unless the data direction for the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of
f
OC2A = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following equation:
f
clk_I/O
------------------------------------------------
f
=
OCnx
2 N 1 + OCRnx
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
As for the normal mode of operation, the TOV2 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts from MAX to
0x00.
144
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.17.7.3 Fast PWM Mode
The fast pulse width modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high frequency PWM waveform
generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from
BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7.
In non-inverting compare output mode, the output compare (OC2x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT2 and
OCR2x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting compare output mode, the output is set on compare match and cleared at
BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the
phase correct PWM mode that uses dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited for
power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components
(coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost.
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value. The counter is then cleared at
the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 5-58. The TCNT2 value is in
the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and
inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare matches between OCR2x
and TCNT2.
Figure 5-58. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
OCRnx Interrupt
Flag Set
OCRnx Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
TCNTn
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Period
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt
handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC2x pin. Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to
two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP
is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7. (See Table 5-57 on page 151). The actual OC2x
value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated
by setting (or clearing) the OC2x Register at the compare match between OCR2x and TCNT2, and clearing (or setting) the
OC2x register at the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
f
clk_I/O
----------------
f
=
OCnxPWM
N 256
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the fast
PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle.
Setting the OCR2A equal to MAX will result in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by
the COM2A1:0 bits).
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
145
9240I–AUTO–03/16
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting OC2x to toggle its logical
level on each compare match (COM2x1:0 = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of foc2 = fclk_I/O/2
when OCR2A is set to zero. This feature is similar to the OC2A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the
output compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
5.17.7.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation
option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to
TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7. In non-
inverting compare output mode, the output compare (OC2x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT2 and OCR2x
while upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting. In inverting output compare mode, the operation is
inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to
the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP. When the counter reaches
TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT2 value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for
the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 5-59. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for
illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line
marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare matches between OCR2x and TCNT2.
Figure 5-59. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
OCnx Interrupt
Flag Set
OCRnx Update
TOVn Interrupt
Flag Set
TCNTn
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
1
2
3
Period
The Timer/Counter Overflow flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The Interrupt Flag can be used to
generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM value.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC2x pin. Setting the
COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the
COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7 (See Table 5-58 on page
151). The actual OC2x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM
waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the OC2x register at the compare match between OCR2x and TCNT2 when
the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC2x register at compare match between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the
counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following
equation:
f
clk_I/O
----------------
f
=
OCnxPCPWM
N 510
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
146
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The extreme values for the OCR2A register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase
correct PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the
output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic
values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 5-59 OCnx has a transition from high to low even though there is no compare match.
The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without
compare match.
●
OCR2A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 5-59. When the OCR2A value is MAX the OCn pin value is the
same as the result of a down-counting compare match. To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX
must correspond to the result of an up-counting compare match.
●
The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR2A, and for that reason misses the compare match
and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the way up.
5.17.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The following figures show the Timer/Counter in synchronous mode, and the timer clock (clkT2) is therefore shown as a clock
enable signal. In asynchronous mode, clkI/O should be replaced by the Timer/Counter oscillator clock. The figures include
information on when interrupt flags are set. Figure 5-60 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure
shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase correct PWM mode.
Figure 5-60. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TCNTn
TOVn
MAX - 1
MAX
BOTTOM
BOTTOM + 1
Figure 5-61 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 5-61. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
TCNTn
TOVn
MAX - 1
MAX
BOTTOM
BOTTOM + 1
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
147
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-62 shows the setting of OCF2A in all modes except CTC mode.
Figure 5-62. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF2A, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
TCNTn
OCRnx - 1
OCRnx
OCRnx + 1
OCRnx + 2
OCRnx
OCFnx
OCRnx Value
Figure 5-63 shows the setting of OCF2A and the clearing of TCNT2 in CTC mode.
Figure 5-63. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP - 1
TOP
BOTTOM
BOTTOM + 1
OCRnx
TOP
OCFnx
5.17.9 Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously, some considerations must be taken.
●
Warning: When switching between asynchronous and synchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2, the timer registers
TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x might be corrupted. A safe procedure for switching clock source is:
a. Disable the Timer/Counter2 interrupts by clearing OCIE2x and TOIE2.
b. Select clock source by setting AS2 as appropriate.
c. Write new values to TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x.
d. To switch to asynchronous operation: Wait for TCN2xUB, OCR2xUB, and TCR2xUB.
e. Clear the Timer/Counter2 interrupt flags.
f. Enable interrupts, if needed.
●
●
The CPU main clock frequency must be more than four times the oscillator frequency.
When writing to one of the registers TCNT2, OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the value is transferred to a temporary register, and
latched after two positive edges on TOSC1. The user should not write a new value before the contents of the
temporary register have been transferred to its destination. Each of the five mentioned registers have their individual
temporary register, which means that e.g. writing to TCNT2 does not disturb an OCR2x write in progress. To detect
that a transfer to the destination register has taken place, the asynchronous status register – ASSR has been
implemented.
148
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
●
●
When entering power-save or ADC noise reduction mode after having written to TCNT2, OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the
user must wait until the written register has been updated if Timer/Counter2 is used to wake up the device. Otherwise,
the MCU will enter sleep mode before the changes are effective. This is particularly important if any of the output
compare2 interrupt is used to wake up the device, since the output compare function is disabled during writing to
OCR2x or TCNT2. If the write cycle is not finished, and the MCU enters sleep mode before the corresponding
OCR2xUB bit returns to zero, the device will never receive a compare match interrupt, and the MCU will not wake up.
If Timer/Counter2 is used to wake the device up from power-save or ADC noise reduction mode, precautions must be
taken if the user wants to re-enter one of these modes: If re-entering sleep mode within the TOSC1 cycle, the interrupt
will immediately occur and the device wake up again. The result is multiple interrupts and wake-ups within one
TOSC1 cycle from the first interrupt. If the user is in doubt whether the time before re-entering power-save or ADC
noise reduction mode is sufficient, the following algorithm can be used to ensure that one TOSC1 cycle has elapsed:
a. Write a value to TCCR2x, TCNT2, or OCR2x.
b. Wait until the corresponding update busy flag in ASSR returns to zero.
c. Enter power-save or ADC noise reduction mode.
●
When the asynchronous operation is selected, the 32.768kHz oscillator for Timer/Counter2 is always running, except
in power-down and standby modes. After a power-up reset or wake-up from power-down or standby mode, the user
should be aware of the fact that this oscillator might take as long as one second to stabilize. The user is advised to
wait for at least one second before using Timer/Counter2 after power-up or wake-up from power-down or standby
mode. The contents of all Timer/Counter2 registers must be considered lost after a wake-up from power-down or
standby mode due to unstable clock signal upon start-up, no matter whether the oscillator is in use or a clock signal is
applied to the TOSC1 pin.
●
●
Description of wake up from power-save or ADC noise reduction mode when the timer is clocked asynchronously:
When the interrupt condition is met, the wake up process is started on the following cycle of the timer clock, that is,
the timer is always advanced by at least one before the processor can read the counter value. After wake-up, the
MCU is halted for four cycles, it executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction following
SLEEP.
Reading of the TCNT2 register shortly after wake-up from power-save may give an incorrect result. Since TCNT2 is
clocked on the asynchronous TOSC clock, reading TCNT2 must be done through a register synchronized to the
internal I/O clock domain. Synchronization takes place for every rising TOSC1 edge. When waking up from power-
save mode, and the I/O clock (clkI/O) again becomes active, TCNT2 will read as the previous value (before entering
sleep) until the next rising TOSC1 edge. The phase of the TOSC clock after waking up from power-save mode is
essentially unpredictable, as it depends on the wake-up time. The recommended procedure for reading TCNT2 is
thus as follows:
a. Write any value to either of the registers OCR2x or TCCR2x.
b. Wait for the corresponding update busy flag to be cleared.
c. Read TCNT2.
During asynchronous operation, the synchronization of the interrupt flags for the asynchronous timer takes 3 processor
cycles plus one timer cycle. The timer is therefore advanced by at least one before the processor can read the timer value
causing the setting of the interrupt flag. The output compare pin is changed on the timer clock and is not synchronized to the
processor clock.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
149
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.17.10 Timer/Counter Prescaler
Figure 5-64. Prescaler for Timer/Counter2
clkI/O
clkT2S
10-bit T/C Prescaler
Clear
TOSC1
AS2
PSRASY
0
CS20
CS21
CS22
Timer/Counter2 Clock Source
clkT2
The clock source for Timer/Counter2 is named clkT2S. clkT2S is by default connected to the main system I/O clock clkIO. By
setting the AS2 bit in ASSR, Timer/Counter2 is asynchronously clocked from the TOSC1 pin. This enables use of
Timer/Counter2 as a real time counter (RTC). When AS2 is set, pins TOSC1 and TOSC2 are disconnected from Port C. A
crystal can then be connected between the TOSC1 and TOSC2 pins to serve as an independent clock source for
Timer/Counter2. The pscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768 kHz crystal.
For Timer/Counter2, the possible prescaled selections are: clkT2S/8, clkT2S/32, clkT2S/64, clkT2S/128, clkT2S/256, and
clkT2S/1024. Additionally, clkT2S as well as 0 (stop) may be selected. Setting the PSRASY bit in GTCCR resets the prescaler.
This allows the user to operate with a predictable prescaler.
5.17.11 Register Description
5.17.11.1 TCCR2A – Timer/Counter Control Register A
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
–
2
–
1
0
(0xB0)
COM2A1 COM2A0 COM2B1 COM2B0
WGM21 WGM20 TCCR2A
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R
0
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bits 7:6 – COM2A1:0: Compare Match Output A Mode
These bits control the output compare pin (OC2A) behavior. If one or both of the COM2A1:0 bits are set, the OC2A output
overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the data direction register (DDR)
bit corresponding to the OC2A pin must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC2A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2A1:0 bits depends on the WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 5-56
shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 5-56. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM2A1
COM2A0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
Toggle OC2A on compare match
Clear OC2A on compare match
Set OC2A on compare match
150
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-57 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM21:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode.
Table 5-57. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)
COM2A1
COM2A0
Description
0
0
Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected.
WGM22 = 0: Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on compare match.
0
1
1
1
0
1
Clear OC2A on compare match, set OC2A at BOTTOM, (non-inverting mode).
Set OC2A on compare match, clear OC2A at BOTTOM, (inverting mode).
Note:
1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the compare match is
ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See Section 5.17.7.3 “Fast PWM Mode” on page 145 for
more details.
Table 5-58 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to phase correct PWM mode.
Table 5-58. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM2A1
COM2A0
Description
0
0
Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected.
WGM22 = 0: Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected.
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on compare match.
0
1
1
1
0
1
Clear OC2A on compare match when up-counting. Set OC2A on compare match
when down-counting.
Set OC2A on compare match when up-counting. Clear OC2A on compare match
when down-counting.
Note:
1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the compare match is
ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See Section 5.17.7.4 “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 146 for
more details.
• Bits 5:4 – COM2B1:0: Compare Match Output B Mode
These bits control the output compare pin (OC2B) behavior. If one or both of the COM2B1:0 bits are set, the OC2B output
overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the data direction register (DDR)
bit corresponding to the OC2B pin must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC2B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2B1:0 bits depends on the WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 5-59
shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 5-59. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM2B1
COM2B0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected.
Toggle OC2B on compare match
Clear OC2B on compare match
Set OC2B on compare match
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
151
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-60 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode.
Table 5-60. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)
COM2B1
COM2B0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected.
Reserved
Clear OC2B on compare match, set OC2B at BOTTOM, (non-inverting mode).
Set OC2B on compare match, clear OC2B at BOTTOM, (inverting mode).
Note:
1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the compare match is
ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See Section 5.17.7.4 “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page
146 for more details.
Table 5-61 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to phase correct PWM mode.
Table 5-61. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM2B1
COM2B0
Description
0
0
0
1
Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected.
Reserved
Clear OC2B on compare match when up-counting. Set OC2B on compare match
when down-counting.
1
1
0
1
Set OC2B on compare match when up-counting. Clear OC2B on compare match
when down-counting.
Note:
1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the compare match is
ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See Section 5.17.7.4 “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 146 for
more details.
• Bits 3, 2 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega328P and will always read as zero.
• Bits 1:0 – WGM21:0: Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM22 bit found in the TCCR2B register, these bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the
source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used, see Table 5-62 on page 152.
Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), clear timer on compare match (CTC)
mode, and two types of pulse width modulation (PWM) modes (see Section 5.17.7 “Modes of Operation” on page 143).
Table 5-62. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description
Timer/Counter Mode
of Operation
Update of
OCRx at
TOV Flag
Set on(1)(2)
Mode
WGM2
WGM1
WGM0
TOP
0xFF
0xFF
OCRA
0xFF
–
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Normal
Immediate
TOP
MAX
BOTTOM
MAX
PWM, phase correct
CTC
Immediate
BOTTOM
–
Fast PWM
MAX
Reserved
–
PWM, phase correct
Reserved
OCRA
–
TOP
BOTTOM
–
–
Fast PWM
OCRA
BOTTOM
TOP
Notes: 1. MAX = 0xFF
2. BOTTOM = 0x00
152
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.17.11.2 TCCR2B – Timer/Counter Control Register B
Bit
7
FOC2A
W
6
FOC2B
W
5
–
4
–
3
2
CS22
R
1
CS21
R/W
0
0
CS20
R/W
0
(0xB1)
WGM22
TCCR2B
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
0
0
• Bit 7 – FOC2A: Force Output Compare A
The FOC2A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR2B is written when operating
in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2A bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the waveform
generation unit. The OC2A output is changed according to its COM2A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2A bit is
implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced
compare.
A FOC2A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR2A as TOP.
The FOC2A bit is always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC2B: Force Output Compare B
The FOC2B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR2B is written when operating
in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2B bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the waveform
generation unit. The OC2B output is changed according to its COM2B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2B bit is
implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced
compare.
A FOC2B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR2B as TOP.
The FOC2B bit is always read as zero.
• Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega328P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – WGM22: Waveform Generation Mode
See the description in Section 5.17.11.1 “TCCR2A – Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 150.
• Bit 2:0 – CS22:0: Clock Select
The three clock select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Table 5-63 on page 153.
Table 5-63. Clock Select Bit Description
CS22
CS21
CS20
Description
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped).
clkT2S/(no prescaling)
clkT2S/8 (from prescaler)
clkT2S/32 (from prescaler)
clkT2S/64 (from prescaler)
clkT2S/128 (from prescaler)
clkT S/256 (from prescaler)
2
clkT S/1024 (from prescaler)
2
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the counter even if the pin is
configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the counting.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
153
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.17.11.3 TCNT2 – Timer/Counter Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0xB2)
TCNT2[7:0]
R/W R/W
TCNT2
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
0
0
The Timer/Counter register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter.
Writing to the TCNT2 register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter
(TCNT2) while the counter is running, introduces a risk of missing a compare match between TCNT2 and the OCR2x
registers.
5.17.11.4 OCR2A – Output Compare Register A
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0xB3)
OCR2A[7:0]
R/W R/W
OCR2A
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
0
0
The output compare register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT2). A
match can be used to generate an output compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC2A pin.
5.17.11.5 OCR2B – Output Compare Register B
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0xB4)
OCR2B[7:0]
R/W R/W
OCR2B
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
0
0
The output compare register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT2). A
match can be used to generate an output compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC2B pin.
5.17.11.6 TIMSK2 – Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Mask Register
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
OCIE2B
R/W
0
1
OCIE2A
R/W
0
0
TOIE2
R/W
0
(0x70)
TIMSK2
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 2 – OCIE2B: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE2B bit is written to one and the I-bit in the status register is set (one), the Timer/Counter2 compare match B
interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the
OCF2B bit is set in the Timer/Counter 2 interrupt flag register – TIFR2.
• Bit 1 – OCIE2A: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE2A bit is written to one and the I-bit in the status register is set (one), the Timer/Counter2 compare match A
interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the
OCF2A bit is set in the Timer/Counter 2 interrupt flag register – TIFR2.
• Bit 0 – TOIE2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE2 bit is written to one and the I-bit in the status register is set (one), the Timer/Counter2 overflow interrupt is
enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the TOV2 bit is set in
the Timer/Counter2 interrupt flag register – TIFR2.
154
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.17.11.7 TIFR2 – Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
OCF2B
R/W
0
1
OCF2A
R/W
0
0
TOV2
R/W
0
0x17 (0x37)
Read/Write
Initial Value
TIFR2
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 2 – OCF2B: Output Compare Flag 2 B
The OCF2B bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the data in OCR2B – output
compare register2. OCF2B is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector.
Alternatively, OCF2B is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2B (Timer/Counter2 compare
match interrupt enable), and OCF2B are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 compare match interrupt is executed.
• Bit 1 – OCF2A: Output Compare Flag 2 A
The OCF2A bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the data in OCR2A – output
compare register2. OCF2A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector.
Alternatively, OCF2A is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2A (Timer/Counter2 compare
match Interrupt Enable), and OCF2A are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 compare match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 0 – TOV2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Flag
The TOV2 bit is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter2. TOV2 is cleared by hardware when executing the
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV2 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-
bit, TOIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV2 are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 overflow interrupt is
executed. In PWM mode, this bit is set when Timer/Counter2 changes counting direction at 0x00.
5.17.11.8 ASSR – Asynchronous Status Register
Bit
7
–
6
EXCLK
R/W
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0xB6)
AS2
R/W
0
TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB ASSR
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – RES: Reserved bit
This bit is reserved and will always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – EXCLK: Enable External Clock Input
When EXCLK is written to one, and asynchronous clock is selected, the external clock input buffer is enabled and an
external clock can be input on timer oscillator 1 (TOSC1) pin instead of a 32kHz crystal. Writing to EXCLK should be done
before asynchronous operation is selected. Note that the crystal Oscillator will only run when this bit is zero.
• Bit 5 – AS2: Asynchronous Timer/Counter2
When AS2 is written to zero, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the I/O clock, clkI/O. When AS2 is written to one,
Timer/Counter2 is clocked from a crystal oscillator connected to the timer oscillator 1 (TOSC1) pin. When the value of AS2 is
changed, the contents of TCNT2, OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B might be corrupted.
• Bit 4 – TCN2UB: Timer/Counter2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCNT2 is written, this bit becomes set. When TCNT2 has been
updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCNT2 is
ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 3 – OCR2AUB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2A is written, this bit becomes set. When OCR2A has been
updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2A is
ready to be updated with a new value.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
155
9240I–AUTO–03/16
• Bit 2 – OCR2BUB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2B is written, this bit becomes set. When OCR2B has been
updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2B is
ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 1 – TCR2AUB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2A is written, this bit becomes set. When TCCR2A has been
updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2A
is ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 0 – TCR2BUB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2B is written, this bit becomes set. When TCCR2B has been
updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2B
is ready to be updated with a new value.
If a write is performed to any of the five Timer/Counter2 registers while its update busy flag is set, the updated value might
get corrupted and cause an unintentional interrupt to occur.
The mechanisms for reading TCNT2, OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B are different. When reading TCNT2, the
actual timer value is read. When reading OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B the value in the temporary storage
register is read.
5.17.11.9 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PSRSYN
C
0x23 (0x43)
TSM
–
–
–
–
–
PSRASY
GTCCR
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 1 – PSRASY: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter2
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally cleared immediately by hardware. If the
bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating in asynchronous mode, the bit will remain one until the prescaler has been
reset. The bit will not be cleared by hardware if the TSM bit is set. Refer to the description of the Section • “Bit 7 – TSM:
Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode” on page 138 for a description of the Timer/Counter synchronization mode.
156
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.18 SPI – Serial Peripheral Interface
5.18.1 Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Full-duplex, three-wire synchronous data transfer
Master or slave operation
LSB first or MSB first data transfer
Seven programmable bit rates
End of transmission interrupt flag
Write collision flag protection
Wake-up from idle mode
Double speed (CK/2) master SPI mode
5.18.2 Overview
The serial peripheral interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer between the ATmega328P and peripheral
devices or between several AVR® devices.
The USART can also be used in master SPI mode, see Section 5.20 “USART in SPI Mode” on page 187. The PRSPI bit in
Section 5.9.10 “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 60 must be written to zero to enable SPI module.
Figure 5-65. SPI Block Diagram(1)
S
MISO
MOSI
M
M
XTAL
MSB
8-bit Shift Register
Read Data Buffer
LSB
S
Pin
Control
Logic
Divider
/2/4/8/16/32/64/128
Clock
SPI Clock (Master)
S
SCK
SS
Clock
Logic
Select
M
MSTR
SPE
SPI Control
8
SPI Status Register
SPI Control Register
8
8
SPI Interrupt
Request
Internal
Data Bus
Note:
1. Refer to Table 5-31 on page 89 for SPI pin placement.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
157
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The interconnection between master and slave CPUs with SPI is shown in Figure 5-66 on page 158. The system consists of
two shift registers, and a master clock generator. The SPI master initiates the communication cycle when pulling low the
slave select SS pin of the desired slave. master and slave prepare the data to be sent in their respective shift registers, and
the master generates the required clock pulses on the SCK line to interchange data. Data is always shifted from master to
slave on the master out – slave in, MOSI, line, and from slave to master on the master in – slave out, MISO, line. After each
data packet, the master will synchronize the slave by pulling high the slave select, SS, line.
When configured as a master, the SPI interface has no automatic control of the SS line. This must be handled by user
software before communication can start. When this is done, writing a byte to the SPI data register starts the SPI clock
generator, and the hardware shifts the eight bits into the slave. After shifting one byte, the SPI clock generator stops, setting
the end of transmission flag (SPIF). If the SPI interrupt enable bit (SPIE) in the SPCR register is set, an interrupt is
requested. The master may continue to shift the next byte by writing it into SPDR, or signal the end of packet by pulling high
the slave select, SS line. The last incoming byte will be kept in the buffer register for later use.
When configured as a slave, the SPI interface will remain sleeping with MISO tri-stated as long as the SS pin is driven high.
In this state, software may update the contents of the SPI data register, SPDR, but the data will not be shifted out by
incoming clock pulses on the SCK pin until the SS pin is driven low. As one byte has been completely shifted, the end of
transmission flag, SPIF is set. If the SPI interrupt enable bit, SPIE, in the SPCR register is set, an interrupt is requested. The
slave may continue to place new data to be sent into SPDR before reading the incoming data. The last incoming byte will be
kept in the buffer register for later use.
Figure 5-66. SPI Master-slave Interconnection
MSB MASTER
LSB
MISO
MOSI
MISO
MOSI
MSB
SLAVE
LSB
8 Bit Shift Register
8 Bit Shift Register
Shift
Enable
SCK
SS
SCK
SS
SPI
Clock Generator
The system is single buffered in the transmit direction and double buffered in the receive direction. This means that bytes to
be transmitted cannot be written to the SPI data register before the entire shift cycle is completed. When receiving data,
however, a received character must be read from the SPI data register before the next character has been completely
shifted in. Otherwise, the first byte is lost.
In SPI slave mode, the control logic will sample the incoming signal of the SCK pin. To ensure correct sampling of the clock
signal, the minimum low and high periods should be:
Low periods: Longer than 2 CPU clock cycles.
High periods: Longer than 2 CPU clock cycles.
When the SPI is enabled, the data direction of the MOSI, MISO, SCK, and SS pins is overridden according to Table 5-64 on
page 158. For more details on automatic port overrides, refer to Section 5.13.3 “Alternate Port Functions” on page 87.
Table 5-64. SPI Pin Overrides(1)
Pin
MOSI
MISO
SCK
SS
Direction, Master SPI
User Defined
Input
Direction, Slave SPI
Input
User Defined
Input
User Defined
User Defined
Input
Note:
1. See Section 5.13.3.1 “Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 89 for a detailed description of how to define the
direction of the user defined SPI pins.
158
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a master and how to perform a simple transmission.
DDR_SPI in the examples must be replaced by the actual data direction register controlling the SPI pins. DD_MOSI,
DD_MISO and DD_SCK must be replaced by the actual data direction bits for these pins. E.g. if MOSI is placed on pin PB5,
replace DD_MOSI with DDB5 and DDR_SPI with DDRB.
Assembly Code Example(1)
SPI_MasterInit:
; Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input
ldi
out
r17,(1<<DD_MOSI)|(1<<DD_SCK)
DDR_SPI,r17
; Enable SPI, Master, set clock rate fck/16
ldi
out
ret
r17,(1<<SPE)|(1<<MSTR)|(1<<SPR0)
SPCR,r17
SPI_MasterTransmit:
; Start transmission of data (r16)
out SPDR,r16
Wait_Transmit:
; Wait for transmission complete
in
r16, SPSR
sbrs
rjmp
ret
r16, SPIF
Wait_Transmit
C Code Example(1)
void SPI_MasterInit(void)
{
/* Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input */
DDR_SPI = (1<<DD_MOSI)|(1<<DD_SCK);
/* Enable SPI, Master, set clock rate fck/16 */
SPCR = (1<<SPE)|(1<<MSTR)|(1<<SPR0);
}
void SPI_MasterTransmit(char cData)
{
/* Start transmission */
SPDR = cData;
/* Wait for transmission complete */
while(!(SPSR & (1<<SPIF)))
;
}
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
159
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a Slave and how to perform a simple reception.
Assembly Code Example(1)
SPI_SlaveInit:
; Set MISO output, all others input
ldi
out
r17,(1<<DD_MISO)
DDR_SPI,r17
; Enable SPI
ldi
out
ret
r17,(1<<SPE)
SPCR,r17
SPI_SlaveReceive:
; Wait for reception complete
sbis
rjmp
SPSR,SPIF
SPI_SlaveReceive
; Read received data and return
in
r16,SPDR
ret
C Code Example(1)
void SPI_SlaveInit(void)
{
/* Set MISO output, all others input */
DDR_SPI = (1<<DD_MISO);
/* Enable SPI */
SPCR = (1<<SPE);
}
char SPI_SlaveReceive(void)
{
/* Wait for reception complete */
while(!(SPSR & (1<<SPIF)))
;
/* Return Data Register */
return SPDR;
}
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
160
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.18.3 SS Pin Functionality
5.18.3.1 Slave Mode
When the SPI is configured as a slave, the slave select (SS) pin is always input. When SS is held low, the SPI is activated,
and MISO becomes an output if configured so by the user. All other pins are inputs. When SS is driven high, all pins are
inputs, and the SPI is passive, which means that it will not receive incoming data. Note that the SPI logic will be reset once
the SS pin is driven high.
The SS pin is useful for packet/byte synchronization to keep the slave bit counter synchronous with the master clock
generator. When the SS pin is driven high, the SPI slave will immediately reset the send and receive logic, and drop any
partially received data in the shift register.
5.18.3.2Master Mode
When the SPI is configured as a master (MSTR in SPCR is set), the user can determine the direction of the SS pin.
If SS is configured as an output, the pin is a general output pin which does not affect the SPI system. Typically, the pin will be
driving the SS pin of the SPI slave.
If SS is configured as an input, it must be held high to ensure master SPI operation. If the SS pin is driven low by peripheral
circuitry when the SPI is configured as a master with the SS pin defined as an input, the SPI system interprets this as
another master selecting the SPI as a slave and starting to send data to it. To avoid bus contention, the SPI system takes the
following actions:
1. The MSTR bit in SPCR is cleared and the SPI system becomes a slave. As a result of the SPI becoming a slave,
the MOSI and SCK pins become inputs.
2. The SPIF flag in SPSR is set, and if the SPI interrupt is enabled, and the I-bit in SREG is set, the interrupt routine
will be executed.
Thus, when interrupt-driven SPI transmission is used in master mode, and there exists a possibility that SS is driven low, the
interrupt should always check that the MSTR bit is still set. If the MSTR bit has been cleared by a slave select, it must be set
by the user to re-enable SPI master mode.
5.18.4 Data Modes
There are four combinations of SCK phase and polarity with respect to serial data, which are determined by control bits
CPHA and CPOL. The SPI data transfer formats are shown in Figure 5-67 and Figure 5-68 on page 162. Data bits are
shifted out and latched in on opposite edges of the SCK signal, ensuring sufficient time for data signals to stabilize. This is
clearly seen by summarizing Table 5-66 on page 163 and Table 5-67 on page 163, as done in Table 5-65.
Table 5-65. SPI Modes
SPI Mode
Conditions
Leading Edge
Sample (rising)
Setup (rising)
Sample (falling)
Setup (falling)
Trailing eDge
Setup (falling)
Sample (falling)
Setup (rising)
Sample (rising)
0
1
2
3
CPOL=0, CPHA=0
CPOL=0, CPHA=1
CPOL=1, CPHA=0
CPOL=1, CPHA=1
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
161
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-67. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 0
SCK (CPOL = 0)
mode 0
SCK (CPOL = 1)
mode 2
SAMPLE I
MOSI/MISO
CHANGE 0
MOSI PIN
CHANGE 0
MISO PIN
SS
MSB first (DORD = 0) MSB
LSB first (DORD =1) LSB
Bit 6
Bit 1
Bit 5
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 1
Bit 6
LSB
MSB
Figure 5-68. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 1
SCK (CPOL = 0)
mode 1
SCK (CPOL = 1)
mode 3
SAMPLE I
MOSI/MISO
CHANGE 0
MOSI PIN
CHANGE 0
MISO PIN
SS
MSB first (DORD = 0)
LSB first (DORD =1)
MSB
LSB
Bit 6
Bit 1
Bit 5
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 1
Bit 6
LSB
MSB
162
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.18.5 Register Description
5.18.5.1 SPCR – SPI Control Register
Bit
7
SPIE
R/W
0
6
5
DORD
R/W
0
4
MSTR
R/W
0
3
CPOL
R/W
0
2
CPHA
R/W
0
1
SPR1
R/W
0
0
SPR0
R/W
0
0x2C (0x4C)
Read/Write
Initial Value
SPE
R/W
0
SPCR
• Bit 7 – SPIE: SPI Interrupt Enable
This bit causes the SPI interrupt to be executed if SPIF bit in the SPSR register is set and the if the global interrupt enable bit
in SREG is set.
• Bit 6 – SPE: SPI Enable
When the SPE bit is written to one, the SPI is enabled. This bit must be set to enable any SPI operations.
• Bit 5 – DORD: Data Order
When the DORD bit is written to one, the LSB of the data word is transmitted first.
When the DORD bit is written to zero, the MSB of the data word is transmitted first.
• Bit 4 – MSTR: Master/Slave Select
This bit selects master SPI mode when written to one, and Slave SPI mode when written logic zero. If SS is configured as an
input and is driven low while MSTR is set, MSTR will be cleared, and SPIF in SPSR will become set. The user will then have
to set MSTR to re-enable SPI Master mode.
• Bit 3 – CPOL: Clock Polarity
When this bit is written to one, SCK is high when idle. When CPOL is written to zero, SCK is low when idle. Refer to Figure
5-67 and Figure 5-68 for an example. The CPOL functionality is summarized below:
Table 5-66. CPOL Functionality
CPOL
Leading Edge
Rising
Trailing Edge
Falling
0
1
Falling
Rising
• Bit 2 – CPHA: Clock Phase
The settings of the clock phase bit (CPHA) determine if data is sampled on the leading (first) or trailing (last) edge of SCK.
Refer to Figure 5-67 and Figure 5-68 for an example. The CPOL functionality is summarized below:
Table 5-67. CPHA Functionality
CPHA
Leading Edge
Sample
Trailing Edge
Setup
0
1
Setup
Sample
• Bits 1, 0 – SPR1, SPR0: SPI Clock Rate Select 1 and 0
These two bits control the SCK rate of the device configured as a master. SPR1 and SPR0 have no effect on the slave.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
163
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The relationship between SCK and the Oscillator Clock frequency fosc is shown in the following table:
Table 5-68. Relationship Between SCK and the Oscillator Frequency
SPI2X
SPR1
SPR0
SCK Frequency
fosc/4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
fosc/16
fosc/64
fosc/128
fosc/2
fosc/8
fosc/32
fosc/64
5.18.5.2 SPSR – SPI Status Register
Bit
7
SPIF
R
6
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
SPI2X
R/W
0
0x2D (0x4D)
Read/Write
Initial Value
WCOL
SPSR
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
• Bit 7 – SPIF: SPI Interrupt Flag
When a serial transfer is complete, the SPIF flag is set. An interrupt is generated if SPIE in SPCR is set and global interrupts
are enabled. If SS is an input and is driven low when the SPI is in master mode, this will also set the SPIF flag. SPIF is
cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, the SPIF bit is cleared by
first reading the SPI status register with SPIF set, then accessing the SPI data register (SPDR).
• Bit 6 – WCOL: Write COLlision Flag
The WCOL bit is set if the SPI data register (SPDR) is written during a data transfer. The WCOL bit (and the SPIF bit) are
cleared by first reading the SPI status register with WCOL set, and then accessing the SPI data register.
• Bit 5..1 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega328P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 0 – SPI2X: Double SPI Speed Bit
When this bit is written logic one the SPI speed (SCK frequency) will be doubled when the SPI is in master mode (see
Table 5-68). This means that the minimum SCK period will be two CPU clock periods. When the SPI is configured as slave,
the SPI is only guaranteed to work at fosc/4 or lower.
The SPI interface on the ATmega328P is also used for program memory and EEPROM downloading or uploading. See
Section 5.27.8 “Serial Downloading” on page 274 for serial programming and verification.
5.18.5.3 SPDR – SPI Data Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x2E (0x4E)
Read/Write
Initial Value
MSB
R/W
X
LSB
R/W
X
SPDR
R/W
X
R/W
X
R/W
X
R/W
X
R/W
X
R/W
X
Undefined
The SPI data register is a read/write register used for data transfer between the register file and the SPI shift register. Writing
to the register initiates data transmission. Reading the register causes the shift register receive buffer to be read.
164
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19 USART0
5.19.1 Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Full duplex operation (independent serial receive and transmit registers)
Asynchronous or synchronous operation
Master or slave clocked synchronous operation
High resolution baud rate generator
Supports serial frames with 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 data bits and 1 or 2 stop bits
Odd or even parity generation and parity check supported by hardware
Data OverRun detection
Framing error detection
Noise filtering includes false start bit detection and digital low pass filter
Three separate interrupts on TX complete, TX data register empty and RX complete
Multi-processor communication mode
Double speed asynchronous communication mode
5.19.2 Overview
The universal synchronous and asynchronous serial receiver and transmitter (USART) is a highly flexible serial
communication device.
The USART0 can also be used in master SPI mode, see Section 5.20 “USART in SPI Mode” on page 187. The power
reduction USART bit, PRUSART0, in Section 5.9.10 “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 60 must be disabled by
writing a logical zero to it.
A simplified block diagram of the USART transmitter is shown in Figure 5-69 on page 166. CPU accessible I/O registers and
I/O pins are shown in bold.
The dashed boxes in the block diagram separate the three main parts of the USART (listed from the top): Clock generator,
transmitter and receiver. Control registers are shared by all units. The clock generation logic consists of synchronization
logic for external clock input used by synchronous slave operation, and the baud rate generator. The XCKn (transfer clock)
pin is only used by synchronous transfer mode. The transmitter consists of a single write buffer, a serial shift register, parity
generator and control logic for handling different serial frame formats. The write buffer allows a continuous transfer of data
without any delay between frames. The receiver is the most complex part of the USART module due to its clock and data
recovery units. The recovery units are used for asynchronous data reception. In addition to the recovery units, the receiver
includes a parity checker, control logic, a shift register and a two level receive buffer (UDRn). The receiver supports the
same frame formats as the transmitter, and can detect frame error, data OverRun and parity errors.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
165
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-69. USART Block Diagram(1)
Clock Generator
UBRRn[H:L]
OSC
Baud Rate Generator
Sync Logic
Pin
XCKn
TxDn
RxDn
Control
Transmitter
TX
Control
UDRn (Transmit)
Parity
Generator
Pin
Control
Transmit Shift Register
Receiver
Clock
Recovery
RX
Control
Data
Recovery
Pin
Control
Receive Shift Register
UDRn (Receive)
Parity
Checker
UCSRnA
UCSRnB
UCSRnC
Note:
1. Refer to Table 5-37 on page 94 for USART0 pin placement.
166
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.3 Clock Generation
The clock generation logic generates the base clock for the transmitter and receiver. The USART supports four modes of
clock operation: normal asynchronous, double speed asynchronous, master synchronous and slave synchronous mode.
The UMSELn bit in USART control and status register C (UCSRnC) selects between asynchronous and synchronous
operation. Double speed (asynchronous mode only) is controlled by the U2Xn found in the UCSRnA register. When using
synchronous mode (UMSELn = 1), the data direction register for the XCKn pin (DDR_XCKn) controls whether the clock
source is internal (master mode) or external (slave mode). The XCKn pin is only active when using synchronous mode.
Figure 5-70 shows a block diagram of the clock generation logic.
Figure 5-70. Clock Generation Logic, Block Diagram
UBRRn
U2Xn
foscn
UBRRn+1
Prescaling
Down-counter
/2
/4
/2
0
1
OSC
0
1
txclk
UMSELn
rxclk
DDR_XCKn
Sync
Register
Edge
Detector
xcki
0
1
XCKn
Pin
xcko
1
0
DDR_XCKn
UCPOLn
Signal description:
txclk
rxclk
xcki
Transmitter clock (internal signal).
Receiver base clock (internal signal).
Input from XCK pin (internal signal). Used for synchronous slave operation.
Clock output to XCK pin (internal signal). Used for synchronous master operation.
XTAL pin frequency (system clock).
xcko
fosc
5.19.3.1 Internal Clock Generation – The Baud Rate Generator
Internal clock generation is used for the asynchronous and the synchronous master modes of operation. The description in
this section refers to Figure 5-70.
The USART baud rate register (UBRRn) and the down-counter connected to it function as a programmable prescaler or
baud rate generator. The down-counter, running at system clock (fosc), is loaded with the UBRRn value each time the
counter has counted down to zero or when the UBRRnL register is written. A clock is generated each time the counter
reaches zero. This clock is the baud rate generator clock output (= fosc/(UBRRn+1)). The transmitter divides the baud rate
generator clock output by 2, 8 or 16 depending on mode. The baud rate generator output is used directly by the receiver’s
clock and data recovery units. However, the recovery units use a state machine that uses 2, 8 or 16 states depending on
mode set by the state of the UMSELn, U2Xn and DDR_XCKn bits.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
167
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-69 contains equations for calculating the baud rate (in bits per second) and for calculating the UBRRn value for each
mode of operation using an internally generated clock source.
Table 5-69. Equations for Calculating Baud Rate Register Setting
Equation for Calculating Baud
Rate(1)
Equation for Calculating UBRRn
Value
Operating Mode
Asynchronous Normal mode (U2Xn =
0)
f
f
OSC
OSC
----------------------------------------
----------------------
BAUD =
BAUD =
BAUD =
UBRRn =
UBRRn =
UBRRn =
– 1
16UBRRn + 1
16BAUD
Asynchronous Double Speed mode
(U2Xn = 1)
f
f
OSC
OSC
-------------------------------------
-------------------
– 1
8UBRRn + 1
8BAUD
f
f
OSC
OSC
Synchronous Master mode
-------------------------------------
-------------------
– 1
2UBRRn + 1
2BAUD
Note:
1. The baud rate is defined to be the transfer rate in bit per second (bps)
BAUD Baud rate (in bits per second, bps)
fOSC System oscillator clock frequency
UBRRn Contents of the UBRRnH and UBRRnL registers, (0-4095)
Some examples of UBRRn values for some system clock frequencies are found in Table 5-77 (see 185).
5.19.3.2 Double Speed Operation (U2Xn)
The transfer rate can be doubled by setting the U2Xn bit in UCSRnA. Setting this bit only has effect for the asynchronous
operation. Set this bit to zero when using synchronous operation.
Setting this bit will reduce the divisor of the baud rate divider from 16 to 8, effectively doubling the transfer rate for
asynchronous communication. Note however that the receiver will in this case only use half the number of samples (reduced
from 16 to 8) for data sampling and clock recovery, and therefore a more accurate baud rate setting and system clock are
required when this mode is used. For the transmitter, there are no downsides.
5.19.3.3 External Clock
External clocking is used by the synchronous slave modes of operation. The description in this section refers to Figure 5-70
for details.
External clock input from the XCKn pin is sampled by a synchronization register to minimize the chance of meta-stability.
The output from the synchronization register must then pass through an edge detector before it can be used by the
transmitter and receiver. This process introduces a two CPU clock period delay and therefore the maximum external XCKn
clock frequency is limited by the following equation:
f
OSC
-----------
f
XCK
4
Note that fosc depends on the stability of the system clock source. It is therefore recommended to add some margin to avoid
possible loss of data due to frequency variations.
168
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.3.4 Synchronous Clock Operation
When synchronous mode is used (UMSELn = 1), the XCKn pin will be used as either clock input (slave) or clock output
(master). The dependency between the clock edges and data sampling or data change is the same. The basic principle is
that data input (on RxDn) is sampled at the opposite XCKn clock edge of the edge the data output (TxDn) is changed.
Figure 5-71. Synchronous Mode XCKn Timing
UCPOL = 1
XCK
RxD/TxD
Sample
Sample
UCPOL = 0
XCK
RxD/TxD
The UCPOLn bit UCRSC selects which XCKn clock edge is used for data sampling and which is used for data change. As
Figure 5-71 shows, when UCPOLn is zero the data will be changed at rising XCKn edge and sampled at falling XCKn edge.
If UCPOLn is set, the data will be changed at falling XCKn edge and sampled at rising XCKn edge.
5.19.4 Frame Formats
A serial frame is defined to be one character of data bits with synchronization bits (start and stop bits), and optionally a parity
bit for error checking. The USART accepts all 30 combinations of the following as valid frame formats:
●
●
●
●
1 start bit
5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 data bits
no, even or odd parity bit
1 or 2 stop bits
A frame starts with the start bit followed by the least significant data bit. Then the next data bits, up to a total of nine, are
succeeding, ending with the most significant bit. If enabled, the parity bit is inserted after the data bits, before the stop bits.
When a complete frame is transmitted, it can be directly followed by a new frame, or the communication line can be set to an
idle (high) state. Figure 5-72 illustrates the possible combinations of the frame formats. Bits inside brackets are optional.
Figure 5-72. Frame Formats
FRAME
(IDLE)
ST
0
1
2
3
4
[5] [6] [7] [8] [P] Sp1 [Sp2] (St/IDLE)
St
Start bit, always low.
Data bits (0 to 8).
(n)
P
Parity bit. Can be odd or even.
Stop bit, always high.
Sp
IDLE
No transfers on the communication line (RxDn or TxDn). An IDLE line must be high.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
169
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The frame format used by the USART is set by the UCSZn2:0, UPMn1:0 and USBSn bits in UCSRnB and UCSRnC. The
receiver and transmitter use the same setting. Note that changing the setting of any of these bits will corrupt all ongoing
communication for both the receiver and transmitter.
The USART character SiZe (UCSZn2:0) bits select the number of data bits in the frame. The USART parity mode (UPMn1:0)
bits enable and set the type of parity bit. The selection between one or two stop bits is done by the USART stop bit select
(USBSn) bit. The receiver ignores the second stop bit. An FE (frame error) will therefore only be detected in the cases where
the first stop bit is zero.
5.19.4.1 Parity Bit Calculation
The parity bit is calculated by doing an exclusive-or of all the data bits. If odd parity is used, the result of the exclusive or is
inverted. The relation between the parity bit and data bits is as follows:
P
P
= d
= d
d d d d 0
3 2 1 0
even
n – 1
n – 1
d d d d 1
odd
3 2 1 0
Peven
Podd
dn
Parity bit using even parity
Parity bit using odd parity
Data bit n of the character
If used, the parity bit is located between the last data bit and first stop bit of a serial frame.
170
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.5 USART Initialization
The USART has to be initialized before any communication can take place. The initialization process normally consists of
setting the baud rate, setting frame format and enabling the transmitter or the receiver depending on the usage. For interrupt
driven USART operation, the global interrupt flag should be cleared (and interrupts globally disabled) when doing the
initialization.
Before doing a re-initialization with changed baud rate or frame format, be sure that there are no ongoing transmissions
during the period the registers are changed. The TXCn flag can be used to check that the transmitter has completed all
transfers, and the RXC flag can be used to check that there are no unread data in the receive buffer. Note that the TXCn flag
must be cleared before each transmission (before UDRn is written) if it is used for this purpose.
The following simple USART initialization code examples show one assembly and one C function that are equal in
functionality. The examples assume asynchronous operation using polling (no interrupts enabled) and a fixed frame format.
The baud rate is given as a function parameter. For the assembly code, the baud rate parameter is assumed to be stored in
the r17:r16 registers.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Init:
; Set baud rate
out
out
UBRRnH, r17
UBRRnL, r16
; Enable receiver and transmitter
ldi
out
r16, (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn)
UCSRnB,r16
; Set frame format: 8data, 2stop bit
ldi
out
ret
r16, (1<<USBSn)|(3<<UCSZn0)
UCSRnC,r16
C Code Example(1)
#define FOSC 1843200 // Clock Speed
#define BAUD 9600
#define MYUBRR FOSC/16/BAUD-1
void main( void )
{
...
USART_Init(MYUBRR)
...
}
void USART_Init( unsigned int ubrr)
{
/*Set baud rate */
UBRR0H = (unsigned char)(ubrr>>8);
UBRR0L = (unsigned char)ubrr;
Enable receiver and transmitter */
UCSR0B = (1<<RXEN0)|(1<<TXEN0);
/* Set frame format: 8data, 2stop bit */
UCSR0C = (1<<USBS0)|(3<<UCSZ00);
}
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
More advanced initialization routines can be made that include frame format as parameters, disable interrupts and so on.
However, many applications use a fixed setting of the baud and control registers, and for these types of applications the
initialization code can be placed directly in the main routine, or be combined with initialization code for other I/O modules.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
171
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.6 Data Transmission – The USART Transmitter
The USART transmitter is enabled by setting the Transmit Enable (TXEN) bit in the UCSRnB register. When the transmitter
is enabled, the normal port operation of the TxDn pin is overridden by the USART and given the function as the transmitter’s
serial output. The baud rate, mode of operation and frame format must be set up once before doing any transmissions. If
synchronous operation is used, the clock on the XCKn pin will be overridden and used as transmission clock.
5.19.6.1 Sending Frames with 5 to 8 Data Bit
A data transmission is initiated by loading the transmit buffer with the data to be transmitted. The CPU can load the transmit
buffer by writing to the UDRn I/O location. The buffered data in the transmit buffer will be moved to the shift register when the
Shift register is ready to send a new frame. The shift register is loaded with new data if it is in idle state (no ongoing
transmission) or immediately after the last stop bit of the previous frame is transmitted. When the shift register is loaded with
new data, it will transfer one complete frame at the rate given by the baud register, U2Xn bit or by XCKn depending on mode
of operation.
The following code examples show a simple USART transmit function based on polling of the Data Register Empty (UDREn)
flag. When using frames with less than eight bits, the most significant bits written to the UDRn are ignored. The USART has
to be initialized before the function can be used. For the assembly code, the data to be sent is assumed to be stored in
register R16.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Transmit:
; Wait for empty transmit buffer
sbis
rjmp
UCSRnA,UDREn
USART_Transmit
; Put data (r16) into buffer, sends the data
out
ret
UDRn,r16
C Code Example(1)
void USART_Transmit( unsigned char data )
{
/* Wait for empty transmit buffer */
while ( !( UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn)) )
;
/* Put data into buffer, sends the data */
UDRn = data;
}
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
The function simply waits for the transmit buffer to be empty by checking the UDREn Flag, before loading it with new data to
be transmitted. If the data register empty interrupt is utilized, the interrupt routine writes the data into the buffer.
172
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.6.2 Sending Frames with 9 Data Bit
If 9-bit characters are used (UCSZn = 7), the ninth bit must be written to the TXB8 bit in UCSRnB before the low byte of the
character is written to UDRn. The following code examples show a transmit function that handles 9-bit characters. For the
assembly code, the data to be sent is assumed to be stored in registers R17:R16.
Assembly Code Example(1)(2)
USART_Transmit:
; Wait for empty transmit buffer
sbis
rjmp
UCSRnA,UDREn
USART_Transmit
; Copy 9th bit from r17 to TXB8
cbi
sbrc
sbi
UCSRnB,TXB8
r17,0
UCSRnB,TXB8
; Put LSB data (r16) into buffer, sends the data
out
ret
UDRn,r16
C Code Example(1)(2)
void USART_Transmit( unsigned int data )
{
/* Wait for empty transmit buffer */
while ( !( UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn))) )
;
/* Copy 9th bit to TXB8 */
UCSRnB &= ~(1<<TXB8);
if ( data & 0x0100 )
UCSRnB |= (1<<TXB8);
/* Put data into buffer, sends the data */
UDRn = data;
}
Notes: 1. These transmit functions are written to be general functions. They can be optimized if the contents of the UCS-
RnB is static. For example, only the TXB8 bit of the UCSRnB register is used after initialization.
2. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
The ninth bit can be used for indicating an address frame when using multi processor communication mode or for other
protocol handling as for example synchronization.
5.19.6.3 Transmitter Flags and Interrupts
The USART transmitter has two flags that indicate its state: USART data register empty (UDREn) and transmit complete
(TXCn). Both flags can be used for generating interrupts.
The data register empty (UDREn) flag indicates whether the transmit buffer is ready to receive new data. This bit is set when
the transmit buffer is empty, and cleared when the transmit buffer contains data to be transmitted that has not yet been
moved into the shift register. For compatibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when writing the UCSRnA
register.
When the data register empty interrupt enable (UDRIEn) bit in UCSRnB is written to one, the USART data register empty
Interrupt will be executed as long as UDREn is set (provided that global interrupts are enabled). UDREn is cleared by writing
UDRn. When interrupt-driven data transmission is used, the data register empty interrupt routine must either write new data
to UDRn in order to clear UDREn or disable the data register empty interrupt, otherwise a new interrupt will occur once the
interrupt routine terminates.
The transmit complete (TXCn) flag bit is set one when the entire frame in the transmit shift register has been shifted out and
there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer. The TXCn flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit
complete interrupt is executed, or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXCn flag is useful in half-duplex
communication interfaces (like the RS-485 standard), where a transmitting application must enter receive mode and free the
communication bus immediately after completing the transmission.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
173
9240I–AUTO–03/16
When the transmit compete interrupt enable (TXCIEn) bit in UCSRnB is set, the USART transmit complete interrupt will be
executed when the TXCn flag becomes set (provided that global interrupts are enabled). When the transmit complete
interrupt is used, the interrupt handling routine does not have to clear the TXCn flag, this is done automatically when the
interrupt is executed.
5.19.6.4 Parity Generator
The parity generator calculates the parity bit for the serial frame data. When parity bit is enabled (UPMn1 = 1), the
transmitter control logic inserts the parity bit between the last data bit and the first stop bit of the frame that is sent.
5.19.6.5 Disabling the Transmitter
The disabling of the transmitter (setting the TXEN to zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending transmissions
are completed, i.e., when the transmit shift register and transmit buffer register do not contain data to be transmitted. When
disabled, the transmitter will no longer override the TxDn pin.
5.19.7 Data Reception – The USART Receiver
The USART receiver is enabled by writing the receive enable (RXENn) bit in the UCSRnB register to one. When the receiver
is enabled, the normal pin operation of the RxDn pin is overridden by the USART and given the function as the receiver’s
serial input. The baud rate, mode of operation and frame format must be set up once before any serial reception can be
done. If synchronous operation is used, the clock on the XCKn pin will be used as transfer clock.
5.19.7.1 Receiving Frames with 5 to 8 Data Bits
The receiver starts data reception when it detects a valid start bit. Each bit that follows the start bit will be sampled at the
baud rate or XCKn clock, and shifted into the receive shift register until the first stop bit of a frame is received. A second stop
bit will be ignored by the receiver. When the first stop bit is received, i.e., a complete serial frame is present in the receive
shift register, the contents of the shift register will be moved into the receive buffer. The receive buffer can then be read by
reading the UDRn I/O location.
The following code example shows a simple USART receive function based on polling of the Receive Complete (RXCn)
Flag. When using frames with less than eight bits the most significant bits of the data read from the UDRn will be masked to
zero. The USART has to be initialized before the function can be used.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Receive:
; Wait for data to be received
sbis
rjmp
UCSRnA, RXCn
USART_Receive
; Get and return received data from buffer
in
r16, UDRn
ret
C Code Example(1)
unsigned char USART_Receive( void )
{
/* Wait for data to be received */
while ( !(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)) )
;
/* Get and return received data from buffer */
return UDRn;
}
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
For I/O registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI” instructions must
be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically “LDS” and “STS” combined with
“SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
The function simply waits for data to be present in the receive buffer by checking the RXCn flag, before reading the buffer
and returning the value.
174
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.7.2 Receiving Frames with 9 Data Bits
If 9-bit characters are used (UCSZn=7) the ninth bit must be read from the RXB8n bit in UCSRnB before reading the low bits
from the UDRn. This rule applies to the FEn, DORn and UPEn status flags as well. Read status from UCSRnA, then data
from UDRn. Reading the UDRn I/O location will change the state of the receive buffer FIFO and consequently the TXB8n,
FEn, DORn and UPEn bits, which all are stored in the FIFO, will change.
The following code example shows a simple USART receive function that handles both nine bit characters and the status
bits.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Receive:
; Wait for data to be received
sbis
rjmp
UCSRnA, RXCn
USART_Receive
; Get status and 9th bit, then data from buffer
in
in
in
r18, UCSRnA
r17, UCSRnB
r16, UDRn
; If error, return -1
andi
breq
ldi
r18,(1<<FEn)|(1<<DORn)|(1<<UPEn)
USART_ReceiveNoError
r17, HIGH(-1)
ldi
r16, LOW(-1)
USART_ReceiveNoError:
; Filter the 9th bit, then return
lsr r17
andi r17, 0x01
ret
C Code Example(1)
unsigned int USART_Receive( void )
{
unsigned char status, resh, resl;
/* Wait for data to be received */
while ( !(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)) )
;
/* Get status and 9th bit, then data */
/* from buffer */
status = UCSRnA;
resh = UCSRnB;
resl = UDRn;
/* If error, return -1 */
if ( status & (1<<FEn)|(1<<DORn)|(1<<UPEn) )
return -1;
/* Filter the 9th bit, then return */
resh = (resh >> 1) & 0x01;
return ((resh << 8) | resl);
}
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
For I/O Registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI” instructions must
be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically “LDS” and “STS” combined with
“SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
The receive function example reads all the I/O registers into the register file before any computation is done. This gives an
optimal receive buffer utilization since the buffer location read will be free to accept new data as early as possible.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
175
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.7.3 Receive Compete Flag and Interrupt
The USART receiver has one flag that indicates the Receiver state.
The receive complete (RXCn) flag indicates if there are unread data present in the receive buffer. This flag is one when
unread data exist in the receive buffer, and zero when the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If
the receiver is disabled (RXENn = 0), the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero.
When the receive complete interrupt enable (RXCIEn) in UCSRnB is set, the USART receive complete interrupt will be
executed as long as the RXCn flag is set (provided that global interrupts are enabled). When interrupt-driven data reception
is used, the receive complete routine must read the received data from UDRn in order to clear the RXCn Flag, otherwise a
new interrupt will occur once the interrupt routine terminates.
5.19.7.4 Receiver Error Flags
The USART receiver has three error flags: frame error (FEn), data OverRun (DORn) and parity error (UPEn). All can be
accessed by reading UCSRnA. Common for the error flags is that they are located in the receive buffer together with the
frame for which they indicate the error status. Due to the buffering of the error flags, the UCSRnA must be read before the
receive buffer (UDRn), since reading the UDRn I/O location changes the buffer read location. Another equality for the error
flags is that they can not be altered by software doing a write to the flag location. However, all flags must be set to zero when
the UCSRnA is written for upward compatibility of future USART implementations. None of the error flags can generate
interrupts.
The frame error (FEn) flag indicates the state of the first stop bit of the next readable frame stored in the receive buffer. The
FEn flag is zero when the stop bit was correctly read (as one), and the FEn flag will be one when the stop bit was incorrect
(zero). This flag can be used for detecting out-of-sync conditions, detecting break conditions and protocol handling. The FEn
flag is not affected by the setting of the USBSn bit in UCSRnC since the receiver ignores all, except for the first, stop bits. For
compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA.
The data OverRun (DORn) flag indicates data loss due to a receiver buffer full condition. A data OverRun occurs when the
receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character waiting in the receive shift register, and a new start bit is detected.
If the DORn flag is set there was one or more serial frame lost between the frame last read from UDRn, and the next frame
read from UDRn. For compatibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. The DORn flag
is cleared when the frame received was successfully moved from the shift register to the receive buffer.
The parity error (UPEn) flag indicates that the next frame in the receive buffer had a parity error when received. If parity
check is not enabled the UPEn bit will always be read zero. For compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero
when writing to UCSRnA. For more details see Section 5.19.4.1 “Parity Bit Calculation” on page 170 and Section 5.19.7.5
“Parity Checker” on page 176.
5.19.7.5 Parity Checker
The parity checker is active when the high USART parity mode (UPMn1) bit is set. Type of parity check to be performed (odd
or even) is selected by the UPMn0 bit. When enabled, the parity checker calculates the parity of the data bits in incoming
frames and compares the result with the parity bit from the serial frame. The result of the check is stored in the receive buffer
together with the received data and stop bits. The parity error (UPEn) flag can then be read by software to check if the frame
had a parity error.
The UPEn bit is set if the next character that can be read from the receive buffer had a parity error when received and the
parity checking was enabled at that point (UPMn1 = 1). This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read.
5.19.7.6 Disabling the Receiver
In contrast to the transmitter, disabling of the receiver will be immediate. Data from ongoing receptions will therefore be lost.
When disabled (i.e., the RXENn is set to zero) the receiver will no longer override the normal function of the RxDn port pin.
The receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the receiver is disabled. Remaining data in the buffer will be lost.
176
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.7.7 Flushing the Receive Buffer
The receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the receiver is disabled, i.e., the buffer will be emptied of its contents. Unread
data will be lost. If the buffer has to be flushed during normal operation, due to for instance an error condition, read the UDRn
I/O location until the RXCn Flag is cleared. The following code example shows how to flush the receive buffer.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Flush:
sbis
ret
in
UCSRnA, RXCn
r16, UDRn
rjmp
USART_Flush
C Code Example(1)
void USART_Flush( void )
{
unsigned char dummy;
while ( UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn) ) dummy = UDRn;
}
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
For I/O registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI” instructions must
be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically “LDS” and “STS” combined with
“SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
5.19.8 Asynchronous Data Reception
The USART includes a clock recovery and a data recovery unit for handling asynchronous data reception. The clock
recovery logic is used for synchronizing the internally generated baud rate clock to the incoming asynchronous serial frames
at the RxDn pin. The data recovery logic samples and low pass filters each incoming bit, thereby improving the noise
immunity of the receiver. The asynchronous reception operational range depends on the accuracy of the internal baud rate
clock, the rate of the incoming frames, and the frame size in number of bits.
5.19.8.1 Asynchronous Clock Recovery
The clock recovery logic synchronizes internal clock to the incoming serial frames. Figure 5-73 illustrates the sampling
process of the start bit of an incoming frame. The sample rate is 16 times the baud rate for normal mode, and eight times the
baud rate for double speed mode. The horizontal arrows illustrate the synchronization variation due to the sampling process.
Note the larger time variation when using the double speed mode (U2Xn = 1) of operation. Samples denoted zero are
samples done when the RxDn line is idle (i.e., no communication activity).
Figure 5-73. Start Bit Sampling
RxD
IDLE
START
BIT 0
Sample
(U2X = 0)
0
0
0
1
1
2
3
2
4
5
3
6
7
4
8
9
5
10
11
6
12
13
7
14
15
8
16
1
1
2
3
Sample
(U2X = 1)
2
When the clock recovery logic detects a high (idle) to low (start) transition on the RxDn line, the start bit detection sequence
is initiated. Let sample 1 denote the first zero-sample as shown in the figure. The clock recovery logic then uses samples 8,
9, and 10 for normal mode, and samples 4, 5, and 6 for double speed mode (indicated with sample numbers inside boxes on
the figure), to decide if a valid start bit is received. If two or more of these three samples have logical high levels (the majority
wins), the start bit is rejected as a noise spike and the receiver starts looking for the next high to low-transition. If however, a
valid start bit is detected, the clock recovery logic is synchronized and the data recovery can begin. The synchronization
process is repeated for each start bit.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
177
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.8.2 Asynchronous Data Recovery
When the receiver clock is synchronized to the start bit, the data recovery can begin. The data recovery unit uses a state
machine that has 16 states for each bit in normal mode and eight states for each bit in double speed mode. Figure 5-74
shows the sampling of the data bits and the parity bit. Each of the samples is given a number that is equal to the state of the
recovery unit.
Figure 5-74. Sampling of Data and Parity Bit
RxD
Bit n
Sample
(U2X = 0)
1
1
2
3
2
4
5
3
6
7
4
8
9
10
11
6
12
13
7
14
15
8
16
1
1
Sample
(U2X = 1)
5
The decision of the logic level of the received bit is taken by doing a majority voting of the logic value to the three samples in
the center of the received bit. The center samples are emphasized on the figure by having the sample number inside boxes.
The majority voting process is done as follows: If two or all three samples have high levels, the received bit is registered to
be a logic 1. If two or all three samples have low levels, the received bit is registered to be a logic 0. This majority voting
process acts as a low pass filter for the incoming signal on the RxDn pin. The recovery process is then repeated until a
complete frame is received. Including the first stop bit. Note that the receiver only uses the first stop bit of a frame.
Figure 5-75 shows the sampling of the stop bit and the earliest possible beginning of the start bit of the next frame.
Figure 5-75. Stop Bit Sampling and Next Start Bit Sampling
RxD
(A)
(B)
(C)
STOP 1
Sample
(U2X = 0)
1
1
2
3
2
4
5
3
6
7
4
8
9
5
10
0/1 0/1 0/1
Sample
(U2X = 1)
6
0/1
The same majority voting is done to the stop bit as done for the other bits in the frame. If the stop bit is registered to have a
logic 0 value, the frame error (FEn) flag will be set.
A new high to low transition indicating the start bit of a new frame can come right after the last of the bits used for majority
voting. For normal speed mode, the first low level sample can be at point marked (A) in Figure 5-75. For double speed mode
the first low level must be delayed to (B). (C) marks a stop bit of full length. The early start bit detection influences the
operational range of the receiver.
5.19.8.3 Asynchronous Operational Range
The operational range of the receiver is dependent on the mismatch between the received bit rate and the internally
generated baud rate. If the transmitter is sending frames at too fast or too slow bit rates, or the internally generated baud rate
of the receiver does not have a similar (see Table 5-70 on page 179) base frequency, the receiver will not be able to
synchronize the frames to the start bit.
The following equations can be used to calculate the ratio of the incoming data rate and internal receiver baud rate.
D + 1S
S – 1 + D S + S
D + 2S
D + 1S + S
------------------------------------------
----------------------------------
R
=
R
=
fast
slow
F
M
178
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
D
Sum of character size and parity size (D = 5 to 10 bit)
S
Samples per bit. S = 16 for normal speed mode and S = 8 for double speed mode.
First sample number used for majority voting. SF = 8 for normal speed and SF = 4 for double speed mode.
Middle sample number used for majority voting. SM = 9 for normal speed and SM = 5 for double speed mode.
SF
SM
Rslow
is the ratio of the slowest incoming data rate that can be accepted in relation to the receiver baud rate. Rfast is
the ratio of the fastest incoming data rate that can be accepted in relation to the receiver baud rate.
Table 5-70 and Table 5-71 list the maximum receiver baud rate error that can be tolerated. Note that normal speed mode has
higher toleration of baud rate variations.
Table 5-70. Recommended Maximum Receiver Baud Rate Error for Normal Speed Mode (U2Xn = 0)
D
Recommended Max Receiver
Error (%)
# (Data+Parity Bit)
Rslow (%)
93.20
94.12
94.81
95.36
95.81
96.17
Rfast (%)
106.67
105.79
105.11
104.58
104.14
103.78
Max Total Error (%)
+6.67/-6.8
5
6
±3.0
±2.5
±2.0
±2.0
±1.5
±1.5
+5.79/-5.88
+5.11/-5.19
7
8
+4.58/-4.54
+4.14/-4.19
+3.78/-3.83
9
10
Table 5-71. Recommended Maximum Receiver Baud Rate Error for Double Speed Mode (U2Xn = 1)
D
Recommended Max Receiver
# (Data+Parity Bit)
Rslow (%)
94.12
94.92
95.52
96.00
96.39
96.70
Rfast (%)
105.66
104.92
104,35
103.90
103.53
103.23
Max Total Error (%)
+5.66/-5.88
Error (%)
5
6
±2.5
+4.92/-5.08
±2.0
7
+4.35/-4.48
±1.5
8
+3.90/-4.00
±1.5
9
+3.53/-3.61
±1.5
10
+3.23/-3.30
±1.0
The recommendations of the maximum receiver baud rate error was made under the assumption that the receiver and
transmitter equally divides the maximum total error.
There are two possible sources for the receivers baud rate error. The receiver’s system clock (XTAL) will always have some
minor instability over the supply voltage range and the temperature range. When using a crystal to generate the system
clock, this is rarely a problem, but for a resonator the system clock may differ more than 2% depending of the resonators
tolerance. The second source for the error is more controllable. The baud rate generator can not always do an exact division
of the system frequency to get the baud rate wanted. In this case an UBRRn value that gives an acceptable low error can be
used if possible.
5.19.9 Multi-processor Communication Mode
Setting the multi-processor communication mode (MPCMn) bit in UCSRnA enables a filtering function of incoming frames
received by the USART receiver. Frames that do not contain address information will be ignored and not put into the receive
buffer. This effectively reduces the number of incoming frames that has to be handled by the CPU, in a system with multiple
MCUs that communicate via the same serial bus. The transmitter is unaffected by the MPCMn setting, but has to be used
differently when it is a part of a system utilizing the multi-processor communication mode.
If the receiver is set up to receive frames that contain 5 to 8 data bits, then the first stop bit indicates if the frame contains
data or address information. If the receiver is set up for frames with nine data bits, then the ninth bit (RXB8n) is used for
identifying address and data frames. When the frame type bit (the first stop or the ninth bit) is one, the frame contains an
address. When the frame type bit is zero the frame is a data frame.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
179
9240I–AUTO–03/16
The multi-processor communication mode enables several slave MCUs to receive data from a master MCU. This is done by
first decoding an address frame to find out which MCU has been addressed. If a particular slave MCU has been addressed,
it will receive the following data frames as normal, while the other slave MCUs will ignore the received frames until another
address frame is received.
5.19.9.1 Using MPCMn
For an MCU to act as a master MCU, it can use a 9-bit character frame format (UCSZn = 7). The ninth bit (TXB8n) must be
set when an address frame (TXB8n = 1) or cleared when a data frame (TXB = 0) is being transmitted. The slave MCUs must
in this case be set to use a 9-bit character frame format.
The following procedure should be used to exchange data in multi-processor communication mode:
1. All slave MCUs are in multi-processor communication mode (MPCMn in
UCSRnA is set).
2. The master MCU sends an address frame, and all slaves receive and read this frame. In the Slave MCUs, the
RXCn flag in UCSRnA will be set as normal.
3. Each slave MCU reads the UDRn register and determines if it has been selected. If so, it clears the MPCMn bit in
UCSRnA, otherwise it waits for the next address byte and keeps the MPCMn setting.
4. The addressed MCU will receive all data frames until a new address frame is received. The other slave MCUs,
which still have the MPCMn bit set, will ignore the data frames.
5. When the last data frame is received by the addressed MCU, the addressed MCU sets the MPCMn bit and waits
for a new address frame from master. The process then repeats from 2.
Using any of the 5- to 8-bit character frame formats is possible, but impractical since the receiver must change between
using n and n+1 character frame formats. This makes full-duplex operation difficult since the transmitter and receiver uses
the same character size setting. If 5- to 8-bit character frames are used, the transmitter must be set to use two stop bit
(USBSn = 1) since the first stop bit is used for indicating the frame type.
Do not use read-modify-write instructions (SBI and CBI) to set or clear the MPCMn bit. The MPCMn bit shares the same I/O
location as the TXCn flag and this might accidentally be cleared when using SBI or CBI instructions.
5.19.10 Register Description
5.19.10.1 UDRn – USART I/O Data Register n
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXB[7:0]
TXB[7:0]
UDRn (Read)
UDRn (Write)
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
The USART transmit data buffer register and USART receive data buffer registers share the same I/O address referred to as
USART data register or UDRn. The transmit data buffer register (TXB) will be the destination for data written to the UDRn
register location. Reading the UDRn register location will return the contents of the receive data buffer register (RXB).
For 5-, 6-, or 7-bit characters the upper unused bits will be ignored by the transmitter and set to zero by the receiver.
The transmit buffer can only be written when the UDREn flag in the UCSRnA register is set. Data written to UDRn when the
UDREn flag is not set, will be ignored by the USART transmitter. When data is written to the transmit buffer, and the
transmitter is enabled, the transmitter will load the data into the transmit shift register when the shift register is empty. Then
the data will be serially transmitted on the TxDn pin.
The receive buffer consists of a two level FIFO. The FIFO will change its state whenever the receive buffer is accessed. Due
to this behavior of the receive buffer, do not use read-modify-write instructions (SBI and CBI) on this location. Be careful
when using bit test instructions (SBIC and SBIS), since these also will change the state of the FIFO.
180
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.10.2 UCSRnA – USART Control and Status Register n A
Bit
7
RXCn
R
6
TXCn
R/W
0
5
4
FEn
R
3
DORn
R
2
UPEn
R
1
U2Xn
R/W
0
0
UDREn
MPCMn UCSRnA
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
1
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
• Bit 7 – RXCn: USART Receive Complete
This flag bit is set when there are unread data in the receive buffer and cleared when the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does
not contain any unread data). If the receiver is disabled, the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will
become zero. The RXCn flag can be used to generate a receive complete interrupt (see description of the RXCIEn bit).
• Bit 6 – TXCn: USART Transmit Complete
This flag bit is set when the entire frame in the transmit shift register has been shifted out and there are no new data currently
present in the transmit buffer (UDRn). The TXCn flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is
executed, or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXCn flag can generate a transmit complete interrupt
(see description of the TXCIEn bit).
• Bit 5 – UDREn: USART Data Register Empty
The UDREn flag indicates if the transmit buffer (UDRn) is ready to receive new data. If UDREn is one, the buffer is empty,
and therefore ready to be written. The UDREn flag can generate a data register empty interrupt (see description of the
UDRIEn bit). UDREn is set after a reset to indicate that the transmitter is ready.
• Bit 4 – FEn: Frame Error
This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a frame error when received. I.e., when the first stop bit of the
next character in the receive buffer is zero. This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read. The FEn bit is zero when
the stop bit of received data is one. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA.
• Bit 3 – DORn: Data OverRun
This bit is set if a data OverRun condition is detected. A data OverRun occurs when the receive buffer is full (two characters),
it is a new character waiting in the receive shift register, and a new start bit is detected. This bit is valid until the receive buffer
(UDRn) is read. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA.
• Bit 2 – UPEn: USART Parity Error
This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a parity error when received and the parity checking was enabled
at that point (UPMn1 = 1). This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read. Always set this bit to zero when writing to
UCSRnA.
• Bit 1 – U2Xn: Double the USART Transmission Speed
This bit only has effect for the asynchronous operation. Write this bit to zero when using synchronous operation.
Writing this bit to one will reduce the divisor of the baud rate divider from 16 to 8 effectively doubling the transfer rate for
asynchronous communication.
• Bit 0 – MPCMn: Multi-processor Communication Mode
This bit enables the multi-processor communication mode. When the MPCMn bit is written to one, all the incoming frames
received by the USART receiver that do not contain address information will be ignored. The transmitter is unaffected by the
MPCMn setting. For more detailed information see Section 5.19.9 “Multi-processor Communication Mode” on page 179.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
181
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.10.3 UCSRnB – USART Control and Status Register n B
Bit
7
RXCIEn
R/W
0
6
TXCIEn
R/W
0
5
UDRIEn
R/W
0
4
RXENn
R/W
0
3
TXENn
R/W
0
2
UCSZn2
R/W
1
0
TXB8n
R/W
0
RXB8n
UCSRnB
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
0
• Bit 7 – RXCIEn: RX Complete Interrupt Enable n
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the RXCn flag. A USART receive complete interrupt will be generated only if the
RXCIEn bit is written to one, the global interrupt flag in SREG is written to one and the RXCn bit in UCSRnA is set.
• Bit 6 – TXCIEn: TX Complete Interrupt Enable n
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the TXCn flag. A USART transmit complete interrupt will be generated only if the
TXCIEn bit is written to one, the global interrupt flag in SREG is written to one and the TXCn bit in UCSRnA is set.
• Bit 5 – UDRIEn: USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable n
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the UDREn flag. A data register empty interrupt will be generated only if the
UDRIEn bit is written to one, the global interrupt flag in SREG is written to one and the UDREn bit in UCSRnA is set.
• Bit 4 – RXENn: Receiver Enable n
Writing this bit to one enables the USART receiver. The receiver will override normal port operation for the RxDn pin when
enabled. Disabling the receiver will flush the receive buffer invalidating the FEn, DORn, and UPEn flags.
• Bit 3 – TXENn: Transmitter Enable n
Writing this bit to one enables the USART transmitter. The transmitter will override normal port operation for the TxDn pin
when enabled. The disabling of the transmitter (writing TXENn to zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending
transmissions are completed, i.e., when the transmit shift register and transmit buffer register do not contain data to be
transmitted. When disabled, the transmitter will no longer override the TxDn port.
• Bit 2 – UCSZn2: Character Size n
The UCSZn2 bits combined with the UCSZn1:0 bit in UCSRnC sets the number of data bits (Character SiZe) in a frame the
receiver and transmitter use.
• Bit 1 – RXB8n: Receive Data Bit 8 n
RXB8n is the ninth data bit of the received character when operating with serial frames with nine data bits. Must be read
before reading the low bits from UDRn.
• Bit 0 – TXB8n: Transmit Data Bit 8 n
TXB8n is the ninth data bit in the character to be transmitted when operating with serial frames with nine data bits. Must be
written before writing the low bits to UDRn.
182
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.19.10.4 UCSRnC – USART Control and Status Register n C
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UMSELn1 UMSELn0 UPMn1 UPMn0 USBSn UCSZn1 UCSZn0 UCPOLn UCSRnC
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
0
• Bits 7:6 – UMSELn1:0 USART Mode Select
These bits select the mode of operation of the USARTn as shown in Table 5-72.
Table 5-72. UMSELn Bits Settings
UMSELn1
UMSELn0
Mode
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Asynchronous USART
Synchronous USART
(Reserved)
Master SPI (MSPIM)(1)
Note:
1. See Section 5.20 “USART in SPI Mode” on page 187 for full description of the master SPI mode (MSPIM)
operation.
• Bits 5:4 – UPMn1:0: Parity Mode
These bits enable and set type of parity generation and check. If enabled, the transmitter will automatically generate and
send the parity of the transmitted data bits within each frame. The receiver will generate a parity value for the incoming data
and compare it to the UPMn setting. If a mismatch is detected, the UPEn Flag in UCSRnA will be set.
Table 5-73. UPMn Bits Settings
UPMn1
UPMn0
Parity Mode
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Disabled
Reserved
Enabled, even parity
Enabled, odd parity
• Bit 3 – USBSn: Stop Bit Select
This bit selects the number of stop bits to be inserted by the transmitter. The receiver ignores this setting.
Table 5-74. USBS Bit Settings
USBSn
Stop Bit(s)
1-bit
0
1
2-bit
• Bit 2:1 – UCSZn1:0: Character Size
The UCSZn1:0 bits combined with the UCSZn2 bit in UCSRnB sets the number of data bits (character SiZe) in a frame the
receiver and transmitter use.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
183
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-75. UCSZn Bits Settings
UCSZn2
UCSZn1
UCSZn0
Character Size
5-bit
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
6-bit
7-bit
8-bit
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
9-bit
• Bit 0 – UCPOLn: Clock Polarity
This bit is used for synchronous mode only. Write this bit to zero when asynchronous mode is used. The UCPOLn bit sets
the relationship between data output change and data input sample, and the synchronous clock (XCKn).
Table 5-76. UCPOLn Bit Settings
UCPOLn
Transmitted Data Changed (Output of TxDn Pin) Received Data Sampled (Input on RxDn Pin)
0
1
Rising XCKn edge
Falling XCKn edge
Falling XCKn edge
Rising XCKn edge
5.19.10.5 UBRRnL and UBRRnH – USART Baud Rate Registers
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
UBRRn[11:8]
UBRRnH
UBRRnL
UBRRn[7:0]
7
R
6
R
5
R
4
R
3
R/W
R/W
0
2
R/W
R/W
0
1
R/W
R/W
0
0
R/W
R/W
0
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
• Bit 15:12 – Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices, these bit must be written to zero when UBRRnH
is written.
• Bit 11:0 – UBRR11:0: USART Baud Rate Register
This is a 12-bit register which contains the USART baud rate. The UBRRnH contains the four most significant bits, and the
UBRRnL contains the eight least significant bits of the USART baud rate. Ongoing transmissions by the transmitter and
receiver will be corrupted if the baud rate is changed. Writing UBRRnL will trigger an immediate update of the baud rate
prescaler.
5.19.10.6 Examples of Baud Rate Setting
For standard crystal and resonator frequencies, the most commonly used baud rates for asynchronous operation can be
generated by using the UBRRn settings in Table 5-77. UBRRn values which yield an actual baud rate differing less than
0.5% from the target baud rate, are bold in the table. Higher error ratings are acceptable, but the receiver will have less noise
resistance when the error ratings are high, especially for large serial frames (see Section 5.19.8.3 “Asynchronous
Operational Range” on page 178). The error values are calculated using the following equation:
BaudRateClosest Match
--------------------------------------------------
Error[%] =
– 1 100%
BaudRate
184
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-77. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies
fosc = 1.0000MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRRn UBRRn
fosc = 1.8432MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRRn Error UBRRn
fosc = 2.0000MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRRn Error
Baud
Rate
(bps)
Error
0.2%
0.2%
-7.0%
8.5%
8.5%
8.5%
-18.6%
8.5%
–
Error
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
-3.5%
-7.0%
8.5%
8.5%
8.5%
-18.6%
8.5%
–
UBRRn
Error
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
-25.0%
0.0%
–
Error
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
-3.5%
-7.0%
8.5%
8.5%
8.5%
-18.6%
8.5%
–
2400
4800
25
12
6
51
25
12
8
47
23
11
7
95
47
23
15
11
7
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
–
51
25
12
8
103
51
25
16
12
8
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
2.1%
0.2%
-3.5%
-7.0%
8.5%
8.5%
8.5%
–
9600
14.4k
19.2k
28.8k
38.4k
57.6k
76.8k
115.2k
230.4k
250k
3
2
6
5
6
1
3
3
3
1
2
2
5
2
6
0
1
1
3
1
3
–
1
1
2
1
2
–
–
0
0
1
0
1
–
–
–
–
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0
0.0%
Max.(1)
62.5kbps
125kbps
115.2kbps
230.4kbps
125kbps
250kbps
Notes: 1. UBRRn = 0, Error = 0.0%.
Table 5-78. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued)
fosc = 3.6864MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRRn UBRRn
fosc = 4.0000MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRRn UBRRn
fosc = 7.3728MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRRn
Baud
Rate
(bps)
Error
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
-7.8%
–
Error
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
-7.8%
-7.8%
–
Error
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
2.1%
0.2%
-3.5%
-7.0%
8.5%
8.5%
8.5%
8.5%
0.0%
–
Error
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
-0.8%
0.2%
2.1%
0.2%
-3.5%
-7.0%
8.5%
8.5%
0.0%
0.0%
–
Error
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
-7.8%
-7.8%
–
UBRRn
383
191
95
63
47
31
23
15
11
Error
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
-7.8%
-7.8%
-7.8%
2400
4800
9600
14.4k
19.2k
28.8k
38.4k
57.6k
76.8k
115.2k
230.4k
250k
95
47
23
15
11
7
191
95
47
31
23
15
11
7
103
51
25
16
12
8
207
103
51
34
25
16
12
8
191
95
47
31
23
15
11
7
5
6
3
3
2
5
2
6
5
1
3
1
3
3
7
0
1
0
1
1
3
0
1
0
1
1
3
0.5M
–
0
–
0
0
1
1M
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0
Max.(1)
Note:
230.4kbps
460.8kbps
250kbps
0.5Mbps
460.8kbps
921.6kbps
1. UBRRn = 0, Error = 0.0%
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
185
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-79. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued)
fosc = 8.0000MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRRn UBRRn
fosc = 11.0592MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRRn UBRRn
fosc = 14.7456MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRRn UBRRn
Baud
Rate
(bps)
Error
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
-0.8%
0.2%
2.1%
0.2%
-3.5%
-7.0%
8.5%
8.5%
0.0%
0.0%
–
Error
-0.1%
0.2%
0.2%
0.6%
0.2%
-0.8%
0.2%
2.1%
0.2%
-3.5%
8.5%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
Error
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
-7.8%
–
Error
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
-7.8%
-7.8%
–
Error
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
-7.8%
-7.8%
-7.8%
Error
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
5.3%
-7.8%
-7.8%
2400
4800
9600
14.4k
19.2k
28.8k
38.4k
57.6k
76.8k
115.2k
230.4k
250k
207
103
51
34
25
16
12
8
416
207
103
68
51
34
25
16
12
8
287
143
71
47
35
23
17
11
8
575
287
143
95
71
47
35
23
17
11
5
383
191
95
63
47
31
23
15
11
7
767
383
191
127
95
63
47
31
23
15
7
6
3
5
1
3
2
3
1
3
2
5
3
6
0.5M
0
1
–
2
1
3
1M
–
0
–
–
–
0
1
Max.(1)
Note:
0.5Mbps
1Mbps
691.2kbps
1.3824Mbps
921.6kbps
1.8432Mbps
1. UBRRn = 0, Error = 0.0%
Table 5-80. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued)
fosc = 16.0000MHz
U2Xn = 0
U2Xn = 1
Baud Rate (bps)
2400
UBRRn
416
207
103
68
51
34
25
16
12
8
Error
-0.1%
0.2%
0.2%
0.6%
0.2%
-0.8%
0.2%
2.1%
0.2%
-3.5%
8.5%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
UBRRn
832
416
207
138
103
68
Error
0.0%
-0.1%
0.2%
-0.1%
0.2%
0.6%
0.2%
-0.8%
0.2%
2.1%
-3.5%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
4800
9600
14.4k
19.2k
28.8k
38.4k
51
57.6k
34
76.8k
25
115.2k
230.4k
250k
16
3
8
3
7
0.5M
1
3
1M
0
1
Max.(1)
1Mbps
2Mbps
Note:
1. UBRRn = 0, Error = 0.0%
186
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.20 USART in SPI Mode
5.20.1 Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Full duplex, three-wire synchronous data transfer
Master operation
Supports all four SPI modes of operation (mode 0, 1, 2, and 3)
LSB first or MSB first data transfer (configurable data order)
Queued operation (double buffered)
High resolution baud rate generator
High speed operation (fXCKmax = fCK/2)
Flexible interrupt generation
5.20.2 Overview
The universal synchronous and asynchronous serial receiver and transmitter (USART) can be set to a master SPI compliant
mode of operation.
Setting both UMSELn1:0 bits to one enables the USART in MSPIM logic. In this mode of operation the SPI master control
logic takes direct control over the USART resources. These resources include the transmitter and receiver shift register and
buffers, and the baud rate generator. The parity generator and checker, the data and clock recovery logic, and the RX and
TX control logic is disabled. The USART RX and TX control logic is replaced by a common SPI transfer control logic.
However, the pin control logic and interrupt generation logic is identical in both modes of operation.
The I/O register locations are the same in both modes. However, some of the functionality of the control registers changes
when using MSPIM.
5.20.3 Clock Generation
The clock generation logic generates the base clock for the transmitter and receiver. For USART MSPIM mode of operation
only internal clock generation (i.e. master operation) is supported. The data direction register for the XCKn pin (DDR_XCKn)
must therefore be set to one (i.e. as output) for the USART in MSPIM to operate correctly. Preferably the DDR_XCKn should
be set up before the USART in MSPIM is enabled (i.e. TXENn and RXENn bit set to one).
The internal clock generation used in MSPIM mode is identical to the USART synchronous master mode. The baud rate or
UBRRn setting can therefore be calculated using the same equations, see Table 5-81:
Table 5-81. Equations for Calculating Baud Rate Register Setting
Operating Mode
Equation for Calculating Baud Rate(1)
Equation for Calculating UBRRn Value
f
f
OSC
OSC
Synchronous Master mode
-------------------------------------
-------------------
BAUD =
UBRRn =
– 1
2UBRRn + 1
2BAUD
Note:
1. The baud rate is defined to be the transfer rate in bit per second (bps)
BAUD
Baud rate (in bits per second, bps)
fOSC
System oscillator clock frequency
UBRRn
Contents of the UBRRnH and UBRRnL registers, (0-4095)
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
187
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.20.4 SPI Data Modes and Timing
There are four combinations of XCKn (SCK) phase and polarity with respect to serial data, which are determined by control
bits UCPHAn and UCPOLn. The data transfer timing diagrams are shown in Figure 5-76. Data bits are shifted out and
latched in on opposite edges of the XCKn signal, ensuring sufficient time for data signals to stabilize. The UCPOLn and
UCPHAn functionality is summarized in Table 5-82. Note that changing the setting of any of these bits will corrupt all ongoing
communication for both the receiver and transmitter.
Table 5-82. UCPOLn and UCPHAn Functionality-
UCPOLn
UCPHAn
SPI Mode
Leading Edge
Sample (rising)
Setup (rising)
Sample (falling)
Setup (falling)
Trailing Edge
Setup (falling)
Sample (falling)
Setup (rising)
Sample (rising)
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
Figure 5-76. UCPHAn and UCPOLn Data Transfer Timing Diagrams
UCPOL = 0
UCPOL = 1
XCK
XCK
Data setup (TXD)
Data setup (TXD)
Data sample (RXD)
Data sample (RXD)
XCK
Data setup (TXD)
Data sample (RXD)
XCK
Data setup (TXD)
Data sample (RXD)
5.20.5 Frame Formats
A serial frame for the MSPIM is defined to be one character of 8 data bits. The USART in MSPIM mode has two valid frame
formats:
●
●
8-bit data with MSB first
8-bit data with LSB first
A frame starts with the least or most significant data bit. Then the next data bits, up to a total of eight, are succeeding, ending
with the most or least significant bit accordingly. When a complete frame is transmitted, a new frame can directly follow it, or
the communication line can be set to an idle (high) state.
The UDORDn bit in UCSRnC sets the frame format used by the USART in MSPIM mode. The receiver and transmitter use
the same setting. Note that changing the setting of any of these bits will corrupt all ongoing communication for both the
receiver and Transmitter.
16-bit data transfer can be achieved by writing two data bytes to UDRn. A UART transmit complete interrupt will then signal
that the 16-bit value has been shifted out.
188
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.20.5.1 USART MSPIM Initialization
The USART in MSPIM mode has to be initialized before any communication can take place. The initialization process
normally consists of setting the baud rate, setting master mode of operation (by setting DDR_XCKn to one), setting frame
format and enabling the transmitter and the receiver. Only the transmitter can operate independently. For interrupt driven
USART operation, the global interrupt flag should be cleared (and thus interrupts globally disabled) when doing the
initialization.
Note:
To ensure immediate initialization of the XCKn output the baud-rate register (UBRRn) must be zero at the time
the transmitter is enabled. Contrary to the normal mode USART operation the UBRRn must then be written to
the desired value after the transmitter is enabled, but before the first transmission is started. Setting UBRRn to
zero before enabling the transmitter is not necessary if the initialization is done immediately after a reset since
UBRRn is reset to zero.
Before doing a re-initialization with changed baud rate, data mode, or frame format, be sure that there is no ongoing
transmissions during the period the registers are changed. The TXCn flag can be used to check that the transmitter has
completed all transfers, and the RXCn flag can be used to check that there are no unread data in the receive buffer. Note
that the TXCn flag must be cleared before each transmission (before UDRn is written) if it is used for this purpose.
The following simple USART initialization code examples show one assembly and one C function that are equal in
functionality. The examples assume polling (no interrupts enabled). The baud rate is given as a function parameter. For the
assembly code, the baud rate parameter is assumed to be stored in the r17:r16 registers.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Init:
clr r18
out UBRRnH,r18
out UBRRnL,r18
; Setting the XCKn port pin as output, enables master mode.
sbi XCKn_DDR, XCKn
; Set MSPI mode of operation and SPI data mode 0.
ldi r18, (1<<UMSELn1)|(1<<UMSELn0)|(0<<UCPHAn)|(0<<UCPOLn)
out UCSRnC,r18
; Enable receiver and transmitter.
ldi r18, (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn)
out UCSRnB,r18
; Set baud rate.
; IMPORTANT: The Baud Rate must be set after the transmitter is enabled!
out UBRRnH, r17
out UBRRnL, r18
ret
C Code Example(1)
void USART_Init(unsigned int baud)
{
UBRRn = 0;
/* Setting the XCKn port pin as output, enables master mode. */
XCKn_DDR |= (1<<XCKn);
/* Set MSPI mode of operation and SPI data mode 0. */
UCSRnC = (1<<UMSELn1)|(1<<UMSELn0)|(0<<UCPHAn)|(0<<UCPOLn);
/* Enable receiver and transmitter. */
UCSRnB = (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn);
/* Set baud rate. */
/* IMPORTANT: The Baud Rate must be set after the transmitter is enabled */
UBRRn = baud;
}
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
189
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.20.6 Data Transfer
Using the USART in MSPI mode requires the transmitter to be enabled, i.e. the TXENn bit in the UCSRnB register is set to
one. When the transmitter is enabled, the normal port operation of the TxDn pin is overridden and given the function as the
transmitter's serial output. Enabling the receiver is optional and is done by setting the RXENn bit in the UCSRnB register to
one. When the receiver is enabled, the normal pin operation of the RxDn pin is overridden and given the function as the
receiver's serial input. The XCKn will in both cases be used as the transfer clock.
After initialization the USART is ready for doing data transfers. A data transfer is initiated by writing to the UDRn I/O location.
This is the case for both sending and receiving data since the transmitter controls the transfer clock. The data written to
UDRn is moved from the transmit buffer to the shift register when the shift register is ready to send a new frame.
Note:
To keep the input buffer in sync with the number of data bytes transmitted, the UDRn register must be read
once for each byte transmitted. The input buffer operation is identical to normal USART mode, i.e. if an over-
flow occurs the character last received will be lost, not the first data in the buffer. This means that if four bytes
are transferred, byte 1 first, then byte 2, 3, and 4, and the UDRn is not read before all transfers are completed,
then byte 3 to be received will be lost, and not byte 1.
The following code examples show a simple USART in MSPIM mode transfer function based on polling of the data register
empty (UDREn) flag and the receive complete (RXCn) flag. The USART has to be initialized before the function can be used.
For the assembly code, the data to be sent is assumed to be stored in register R16 and the data received will be available in
the same register (R16) after the function returns.
The function simply waits for the transmit buffer to be empty by checking the UDREn flag, before loading it with new data to
be transmitted. The function then waits for data to be present in the receive buffer by checking the RXCn flag, before reading
the buffer and returning the value.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_MSPIM_Transfer:
; Wait for empty transmit buffer
sbis UCSRnA, UDREn
rjmp USART_MSPIM_Transfer
; Put data (r16) into buffer, sends the data
out UDRn,r16
; Wait for data to be received
USART_MSPIM_Wait_RXCn:
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
rjmp USART_MSPIM_Wait_RXCn
; Get and return received data from buffer
in r16, UDRn
ret
C Code Example(1)
unsigned char USART_Receive(void)
{
/* Wait for empty transmit buffer */
while (!(UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn)));
/* Put data into buffer, sends the data */
UDRn = data;
/* Wait for data to be received */
while (!(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)));
/* Get and return received data from buffer */
return UDRn;
}
Note:
1. See Section 5.5 “About Code Examples” on page 32.
190
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.20.6.1 Transmitter and Receiver Flags and Interrupts
The RXCn, TXCn, and UDREn flags and corresponding interrupts in USART in MSPIM mode are identical in function to the
normal USART operation. However, the receiver error status flags (FE, DOR, and PE) are not in use and is always read as
zero.
5.20.6.2 Disabling the Transmitter or Receiver
The disabling of the transmitter or receiver in USART in MSPIM mode is identical in function to the normal USART operation.
5.20.7 AVR USART MSPIM versus AVR SPI
The USART in MSPIM mode is fully compatible with the AVR® SPI regarding:
●
●
●
●
Master mode timing diagram.
The UCPOLn bit functionality is identical to the SPI CPOL bit.
The UCPHAn bit functionality is identical to the SPI CPHA bit.
The UDORDn bit functionality is identical to the SPI DORD bit.
However, since the USART in MSPIM mode reuses the USART resources, the use of the USART in MSPIM mode is
somewhat different compared to the SPI. In addition to differences of the control register bits, and that only master operation
is supported by the USART in MSPIM mode, the following features differ between the two modules:
●
●
●
●
The USART in MSPIM mode includes (double) buffering of the transmitter. The SPI has no buffer.
The USART in MSPIM mode receiver includes an additional buffer level.
The SPI WCOL (write collision) bit is not included in USART in MSPIM mode.
The SPI double speed mode (SPI2X) bit is not included. However, the same effect is achieved by setting UBRRn
accordingly.
●
●
Interrupt timing is not compatible.
Pin control differs due to the master only operation of the USART in MSPIM mode.
A comparison of the USART in MSPIM mode and the SPI pins is shown in Table 5-83.
Table 5-83. Comparison of USART in MSPIM Mode and SPI Pins
USART_MSPIM
TxDn
SPI
MOSI
MISO
SCK
SS
Comment
Master out only
RxDn
Master In only
XCKn
(Functionally identical)
Not supported by USART in MSPIM
(N/A)
5.20.8 Register Description
The following section describes the registers used for SPI operation using the USART.
5.20.8.1 UDRn – USART MSPIM I/O Data Register
The function and bit description of the USART data register (UDRn) in MSPI mode is identical to normal USART operation.
See Section 5.19.10.1 “UDRn – USART I/O Data Register n” on page 180.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
191
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.20.8.2 UCSRnA – USART MSPIM Control and Status Register n A
Bit
7
RXCn
R
6
TXCn
R/W
0
5
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
-
0
-
UDREn
UCSRnA
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
1
R
1
R
0
0
• Bit 7 - RXCn: USART Receive Complete
This flag bit is set when there are unread data in the receive buffer and cleared when the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does
not contain any unread data). If the receiver is disabled, the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will
become zero. The RXCn flag can be used to generate a receive complete interrupt (see description of the RXCIEn bit).
• Bit 6 - TXCn: USART Transmit Complete
This flag bit is set when the entire frame in the transmit shift register has been shifted out and there are no new data currently
present in the transmit buffer (UDRn). The TXCn flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is
executed, or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXCn flag can generate a transmit complete interrupt
(see description of the TXCIEn bit).
• Bit 5 - UDREn: USART Data Register Empty
The UDREn flag indicates if the transmit buffer (UDRn) is ready to receive new data. If UDREn is one, the buffer is empty,
and therefore ready to be written. The UDREn flag can generate a data register empty interrupt (see description of the
UDRIE bit). UDREn is set after a reset to indicate that the transmitter is ready.
• Bit 4:0 - Reserved Bits in MSPI mode
When in MSPI mode, these bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written
to zero when UCSRnA is written.
5.20.8.3 UCSRnB – USART MSPIM Control and Status Register n B
Bit
7
RXCIEn
R/W
0
6
TXCIEn
R/W
0
5
UDRIE
R/W
0
4
RXENn
R/W
0
3
TXENn
R/W
0
2
-
1
-
0
-
UCSRnB
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
1
R
1
R
0
• Bit 7 - RXCIEn: RX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the RXCn flag. A USART receive complete interrupt will be generated only if the
RXCIEn bit is written to one, the global interrupt flag in SREG is written to one and the RXCn bit in UCSRnA is set.
• Bit 6 - TXCIEn: TX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the TXCn flag. A USART transmit complete interrupt will be generated only if the
TXCIEn bit is written to one, the global interrupt flag in SREG is written to one and the TXCn bit in UCSRnA is set.
• Bit 5 - UDRIE: USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the UDREn flag. A data register empty interrupt will be generated only if the
UDRIE bit is written to one, the global interrupt flag in SREG is written to one and the UDREn bit in UCSRnA is set.
• Bit 4 - RXENn: Receiver Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART receiver in MSPIM mode. The receiver will override normal port operation for the
RxDn pin when enabled. Disabling the receiver will flush the receive buffer. Only enabling the receiver in MSPI mode (i.e.
setting RXENn=1 and TXENn=0) has no meaning since it is the transmitter that controls the transfer clock and since only
master mode is supported.
192
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
• Bit 3 - TXENn: Transmitter Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART transmitter. The transmitter will override normal port operation for the TxDn pin
when enabled. The disabling of the transmitter (writing TXENn to zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending
transmissions are completed, i.e., when the transmit shift register and transmit buffer register do not contain data to be
transmitted. When disabled, the transmitter will no longer override the TxDn port.
• Bit 2:0 - Reserved Bits in MSPI mode
When in MSPI mode, these bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written
to zero when UCSRnB is written.
5.20.8.4 UCSRnC – USART MSPIM Control and Status Register n C
Bit
7
6
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
1
0
UMSELn1 UMSELn0
UDORDn UCPHAn UCPOLn UCSRnC
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
0
• Bit 7:6 - UMSELn1:0: USART Mode Select
These bits select the mode of operation of the USART as shown in Table 5-84. See Section 5.19.10.4 “UCSRnC – USART
Control and Status Register n C” on page 183 for full description of the normal USART operation. The MSPIM is enabled
when both UMSELn bits are set to one. The UDORDn, UCPHAn, and UCPOLn can be set in the same write operation where
the MSPIM is enabled.
Table 5-84. UMSELn Bits Settings
UMSELn1
UMSELn0
Mode
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Asynchronous USART
Synchronous USART
Reserved
Master SPI (MSPIM)
• Bit 5:3 - Reserved Bits in MSPI mode
When in MSPI mode, these bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written
to zero when UCSRnC is written.
• Bit 2 - UDORDn: Data Order
When set to one the LSB of the data word is transmitted first. When set to zero the MSB of the data word is transmitted first.
Refer to the frame formats section page 4 for details.
• Bit 1 - UCPHAn: Clock Phase
The UCPHAn bit setting determine if data is sampled on the leasing edge (first) or tailing (last) edge of XCKn. Refer to the
SPI data modes and timing section page 4 for details.
• Bit 0 - UCPOLn: Clock Polarity
The UCPOLn bit sets the polarity of the XCKn clock. The combination of the UCPOLn and UCPHAn bit settings determine
the timing of the data transfer. Refer to the SPI data modes and timing section page 4 for details.
5.20.8.5 USART MSPIM Baud Rate Registers - UBRRnL and UBRRnH
The function and bit description of the baud rate registers in MSPI mode is identical to normal USART operation, see Section
5.19.10.5 “UBRRnL and UBRRnH – USART Baud Rate Registers” on page 184.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
193
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21 2-wire Serial Interface
5.21.1 Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Simple yet powerful and flexible communication interface, only two bus lines needed
Both master and slave operation supported
Device can operate as transmitter or receiver
7-bit address space allows up to 128 different slave addresses
Multi-master arbitration support
Up to 400kHz data transfer speed
Slew-rate limited output drivers
Noise suppression circuitry rejects spikes on bus lines
Fully programmable slave address with general call support
Address recognition causes wake-up when AVR® is in sleep mode
Compatible with Philips’ I2C protocol
5.21.2 2-wire Serial Interface Bus Definition
The 2-wire serial interface (TWI) is ideally suited for typical microcontroller applications. The TWI protocol allows the
systems designer to interconnect up to 128 different devices using only two bi-directional bus lines, one for clock (SCL) and
one for data (SDA). The only external hardware needed to implement the bus is a single pull-up resistor for each of the TWI
bus lines. All devices connected to the bus have individual addresses, and mechanisms for resolving bus contention are
inherent in the TWI protocol.
Figure 5-77. TWI Bus Interconnection
V
CC
Device 1
Device 2
Device 3 ........ Device n
R1
R2
SDA
SCL
194
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.2.1 TWI Terminology
The following definitions are frequently encountered in this section.
Table 5-85. TWI Terminology
Term
Description
Master
The device that initiates and terminates a transmission. The master also generates the SCL clock.
The device addressed by a master.
Slave
Transmitter
Receiver
The device placing data on the bus.
The device reading data from the bus.
The PRTWI bit in Section 5.9.10 “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 60 must be written to zero to enable the 2-wire
serial interface.
5.21.2.2 Electrical Interconnection
As depicted in Figure 5-77, both bus lines are connected to the positive supply voltage through pull-up resistors. The bus
drivers of all TWI-compliant devices are open-drain or open-collector. This implements a wired-AND function which is
essential to the operation of the interface. A low level on a TWI bus line is generated when one or more TWI devices output
a zero. A high level is output when all TWI devices tri-state their outputs, allowing the pull-up resistors to pull the line high.
Note that all AVR® devices connected to the TWI bus must be powered in order to allow any bus operation.
The number of devices that can be connected to the bus is only limited by the bus capacitance limit of 400pF and the 7-bit
slave address space. A detailed specification of the electrical characteristics of the TWI is given in Section 5.28.7 “2-wire
Serial Interface Characteristics” on page 283. Two different sets of specifications are presented there, one relevant for bus
speeds below 100 kHz, and one valid for bus speeds up to 400kHz.
5.21.3 Data Transfer and Frame Format
5.21.3.1 Transferring Bits
Each data bit transferred on the TWI bus is accompanied by a pulse on the clock line. The level of the data line must be
stable when the clock line is high. The only exception to this rule is for generating start and stop conditions.
Figure 5-78. Data Validity
SDA
SCL
Data Stable
Data Change
Data Stable
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
195
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.3.2 START and STOP Conditions
The master initiates and terminates a data transmission. The transmission is initiated when the Master issues a START
condition on the bus, and it is terminated when the master issues a STOP condition. Between a START and a STOP
condition, the bus is considered busy, and no other master should try to seize control of the bus. A special case occurs when
a new START condition is issued between a START and STOP condition. This is referred to as a REPEATED START
condition, and is used when the master wishes to initiate a new transfer without relinquishing control of the bus. After a
REPEATED START, the bus is considered busy until the next STOP. This is identical to the START behavior, and therefore
START is used to describe both START and REPEATED START for the remainder of this datasheet, unless otherwise
noted. As depicted below, START and STOP conditions are signalled by changing the level of the SDA line when the SCL
line is high.
Figure 5-79. START, REPEATED START and STOP Conditions
SDA
SCL
START
STOP START
REPEATED START
STOP
5.21.3.3 Address Packet Format
All address packets transmitted on the TWI bus are 9 bits long, consisting of 7 address bits, one READ/WRITE control bit
and an acknowledge bit. If the READ/WRITE bit is set, a read operation is to be performed, otherwise a write operation
should be performed. When a slave recognizes that it is being addressed, it should acknowledge by pulling SDA low in the
ninth SCL (ACK) cycle. If the addressed slave is busy, or for some other reason can not service the master’s request, the
SDA line should be left high in the ACK clock cycle. The master can then transmit a STOP condition, or a REPEATED
START condition to initiate a new transmission. An address packet consisting of a slave address and a READ or a WRITE
bit is called SLA+R or SLA+W, respectively.
The MSB of the address byte is transmitted first. Slave addresses can freely be allocated by the designer, but the address
0000 000 is reserved for a general call.
When a general call is issued, all slaves should respond by pulling the SDA line low in the ACK cycle. A general call is used
when a Master wishes to transmit the same message to several slaves in the system. When the general call address
followed by a write bit is transmitted on the bus, all slaves set up to acknowledge the general call will pull the SDA line low in
the ack cycle. The following data packets will then be received by all the slaves that acknowledged the general call. Note that
transmitting the general call address followed by a read bit is meaningless, as this would cause contention if several slaves
started transmitting different data.
All addresses of the format 1111 xxx should be reserved for future purposes.
Figure 5-80. Address Packet Format
Addr MSB
Addr LSB
R/W
ACK
SDA
SCL
1
2
7
8
9
START
196
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.3.4 Data Packet Format
All data packets transmitted on the TWI bus are nine bits long, consisting of one data byte and an acknowledge bit. During a
data transfer, the master generates the clock and the START and STOP conditions, while the receiver is responsible for
acknowledging the reception. An acknowledge (ACK) is signalled by the receiver pulling the SDA line low during the ninth
SCL cycle. If the receiver leaves the SDA line high, a NACK is signalled. When the receiver has received the last byte, or for
some reason cannot receive any more bytes, it should inform the transmitter by sending a NACK after the final byte. The
MSB of the data byte is transmitted first.
Figure 5-81. Data Packet Format
Data MSB
Data LSB
ACK
Aggregate
SDA
SDA from
Transmitter
SDA from
Receiver
SCL from
Master
1
2
7
8
9
STOP, REPEATED
START or next
Data Byte
SLA + R/W
Data Byte
5.21.3.5 Combining Address and Data Packets into a Transmission
A transmission basically consists of a START condition, a SLA+R/W, one or more data packets and a STOP condition. An
empty message, consisting of a START followed by a STOP condition, is illegal. Note that the Wired-ANDing of the SCL line
can be used to implement handshaking between the master and the slave. The slave can extend the SCL low period by
pulling the SCL line low. This is useful if the clock speed set up by the master is too fast for the slave, or the Slave needs
extra time for processing between the data transmissions. The slave extending the SCL low period will not affect the SCL
high period, which is determined by the master. As a consequence, the slave can reduce the TWI data transfer speed by
prolonging the SCL duty cycle.
Figure 5-82 shows a typical data transmission. Note that several data bytes can be transmitted between the SLA+R/W and
the STOP condition, depending on the software protocol implemented by the application software.
Figure 5-82. Typical Data Transmission
Addr MSB
Addr LSB
R/W
ACK
Data MSB
Data LSB ACK
SDA
SCL
1
2
7
8
9
1
2
7
8
9
START
SLA + R/W
Data Byte
STOP
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
197
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.4 Multi-master Bus Systems, Arbitration and Synchronization
The TWI protocol allows bus systems with several masters. Special concerns have been taken in order to ensure that
transmissions will proceed as normal, even if two or more masters initiate a transmission at the same time. Two problems
arise in multi-master systems:
●
An algorithm must be implemented allowing only one of the masters to complete the transmission. All other masters
should cease transmission when they discover that they have lost the selection process. This selection process is
called arbitration. When a contending master discovers that it has lost the arbitration process, it should immediately
switch to slave mode to check whether it is being addressed by the winning master. The fact that multiple masters
have started transmission at the same time should not be detectable to the slaves, i.e. the data being transferred on
the bus must not be corrupted.
●
Different masters may use different SCL frequencies. A scheme must be devised to synchronize the serial clocks
from all masters, in order to let the transmission proceed in a lockstep fashion. This will facilitate the arbitration
process.
The wired-ANDing of the bus lines is used to solve both these problems. The serial clocks from all masters will be wired-
ANDed, yielding a combined clock with a high period equal to the one from the master with the shortest high period. The low
period of the combined clock is equal to the low period of the master with the longest low period. Note that all masters listen
to the SCL line, effectively starting to count their SCL high and low time-out periods when the combined SCL line goes high
or low, respectively.
Figure 5-83. SCL Synchronization between Multiple Masters
TA
TA
high
low
SCL from
Master A
SCL from
Master B
SCL Bus
Line
TB
TB
high
low
Masters Start
Counting Low Period
Masters Start
Counting High Period
Arbitration is carried out by all masters continuously monitoring the SDA line after outputting data. If the value read from the
SDA line does not match the value the Master had output, it has lost the arbitration. Note that a master can only lose
arbitration when it outputs a high SDA value while another master outputs a low value. The losing master should
immediately go to slave mode, checking if it is being addressed by the winning master. The SDA line should be left high, but
losing masters are allowed to generate a clock signal until the end of the current data or address packet.
Arbitration will continue until only one master remains, and this may take many bits. If several masters are trying to address
the same slave, arbitration will continue into the data packet.
198
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-84. Arbitration between Two Masters
Master A Loses
Arbitration, SDA ≠ SDA
START
A
SDA from
Master A
SDA from
Master B
SDA Line
Synchronized
SCL Line
Note that arbitration is not allowed between:
●
●
●
A REPEATED START condition and a data bit.
A STOP condition and a data bit.
A REPEATED START and a STOP condition.
It is the user software’s responsibility to ensure that these illegal arbitration conditions never occur. This implies that in multi-
master systems, all data transfers must use the same composition of SLA+R/W and data packets. In other words: All
transmissions must contain the same number of data packets, otherwise the result of the arbitration is undefined.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
199
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.5 Overview of the TWI Module
The TWI module is comprised of several submodules, as shown in Figure 5-85. All registers drawn in a thick line are
accessible through the AVR® data bus.
Figure 5-85. Overview of the TWI Module
SCL
SDA
Slew-rate
Control
Spike
Filter
Slew-rate
Control
Spike
Filter
Bus Interface Unit
Bit Rate Generator
START/ STOP
Spike Suppression
Prescaler
Control
Address/ Data Shift
Register (TWDR)
Bit Rate Register
(TWBR)
Arbitration detection
Ack
Address Match Unit
Control Unit
Address Register
(TWAR)
Status Register
(TWSR)
Control Register
(TWCR)
State Machine and
Status control
Address Comparator
5.21.5.1 SCL and SDA Pins
These pins interface the AVR TWI with the rest of the MCU system. The output drivers contain a slew-rate limiter in order to
conform to the TWI specification. The input stages contain a spike suppression unit removing spikes shorter than 50ns. Note
that the internal pull-ups in the AVR pads can be enabled by setting the PORT bits corresponding to the SCL and SDA pins,
as explained in the I/O port section. The internal pull-ups can in some systems eliminate the need for external ones.
5.21.5.2 Bit Rate Generator Unit
This unit controls the period of SCL when operating in a master mode. The SCL period is controlled by settings in the TWI bit
rate register (TWBR) and the prescaler bits in the TWI status register (TWSR). Slave operation does not depend on bit rate
or prescaler settings, but the CPU clock frequency in the slave must be at least 16 times higher than the SCL frequency.
Note that slaves may prolong the SCL low period, thereby reducing the average TWI bus clock period. The SCL frequency is
generated according to the following equation:
CPU Clock frequency
16 + 2(TWBR) PrescalerValue
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SCL frequency =
●
●
TWBR = Value of the TWI bit rate register.
PrescalerValue = Value of the prescaler, see Table 5-92 on page 221.
Note:
Pull-up resistor values should be selected according to the SCL frequency and the capacitive bus line load.
See Table 5-134 on page 283 for value of pull-up resistor.
200
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.5.3 Bus Interface Unit
This unit contains the data and address shift register (TWDR), a START/STOP controller and arbitration detection hardware.
The TWDR contains the address or data bytes to be transmitted, or the address or data bytes received. In addition to the 8-
bit TWDR, the bus interface unit also contains a register containing the (N)ACK bit to be transmitted or received. This
(N)ACK register is not directly accessible by the application software. However, when receiving, it can be set or cleared by
manipulating the TWI control register (TWCR). When in Transmitter mode, the value of the received (N)ACK bit can be
determined by the value in the TWSR.
The START/STOP Controller is responsible for generation and detection of START, REPEATED START, and STOP
conditions. The START/STOP controller is able to detect START and STOP conditions even when the AVR® MCU is in one
of the sleep modes, enabling the MCU to wake up if addressed by a Master.
If the TWI has initiated a transmission as master, the arbitration detection hardware continuously monitors the transmission
trying to determine if arbitration is in process. If the TWI has lost an arbitration, the control unit is informed. Correct action
can then be taken and appropriate status codes generated.
5.21.5.4 Address Match Unit
The address match unit checks if received address bytes match the seven-bit address in the TWI address register (TWAR).
If the TWI general call recognition enable (TWGCE) bit in the TWAR is written to one, all incoming address bits will also be
compared against the general call address. Upon an address match, the control unit is informed, allowing correct action to
be taken. The TWI may or may not acknowledge its address, depending on settings in the TWCR. The address match unit is
able to compare addresses even when the AVR MCU is in sleep mode, enabling the MCU to wake up if addressed by a
master.
If another interrupt (e.g., INT0) occurs during TWI power-down address match and wakes up the CPU, the TWI aborts
operation and return to it’s idle state. If this cause any problems, ensure that TWI address match is the only enabled interrupt
when entering power-down.
5.21.5.5 Control Unit
The control unit monitors the TWI bus and generates responses corresponding to settings in the TWI control register
(TWCR). When an event requiring the attention of the application occurs on the TWI bus, the TWI interrupt flag (TWINT) is
asserted. In the next clock cycle, the TWI status register (TWSR) is updated with a status code identifying the event. The
TWSR only contains relevant status information when the TWI interrupt flag is asserted. At all other times, the TWSR
contains a special status code indicating that no relevant status information is available. As long as the TWINT flag is set, the
SCL line is held low. This allows the application software to complete its tasks before allowing the TWI transmission to
continue.
The TWINT flag is set in the following situations:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
After the TWI has transmitted a START/REPEATED START condition.
After the TWI has transmitted SLA+R/W.
After the TWI has transmitted an address byte.
After the TWI has lost arbitration.
After the TWI has been addressed by own slave address or general call.
After the TWI has received a data byte.
After a STOP or REPEATED START has been received while still addressed as a slave.
When a bus error has occurred due to an illegal START or STOP condition.
5.21.6 Using the TWI
The AVR TWI is byte-oriented and interrupt based. Interrupts are issued after all bus events, like reception of a byte or
transmission of a START condition. Because the TWI is interrupt-based, the application software is free to carry on other
operations during a TWI byte transfer. Note that the TWI interrupt enable (TWIE) bit in TWCR together with the global
interrupt enable bit in SREG allow the application to decide whether or not assertion of the TWINT flag should generate an
interrupt request. If the TWIE bit is cleared, the application must poll the TWINT flag in order to detect actions on the TWI
bus.
When the TWINT flag is asserted, the TWI has finished an operation and awaits application response. In this case, the TWI
status register (TWSR) contains a value indicating the current state of the TWI bus. The application software can then
decide how the TWI should behave in the next TWI bus cycle by manipulating the TWCR and TWDR registers.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
201
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-86 is a simple example of how the application can interface to the TWI hardware. In this example, a master wishes
to transmit a single data byte to a slave. This description is quite abstract, a more detailed explanation follows later in this
section. A simple code example implementing the desired behavior is also presented.
Figure 5-86. Interfacing the Application to the TWI in a Typical Transmission
3. Check TWSR to see if START was
sent. Application loads SLA + W into
TWDR, and loads appropriate control
signals into TWCR, makin sure that
TWINT is written to one,
5. Check TWSR to see if SLA + W was
sent and ACK received.
Application loads data intoTWDR, and
loads appropriate control signals into
TWCR, makin sure that TWINT is
written to one
7. Check TWSR to see if data was sent
and ACK received.
Application loads appropriate control
signals to send STOP into TWCR,
makin sure that TWINT is
written to one
1. Application
writes to TWCR to
initiate
transmission of
START
and TWSTA is written to zero.
TWI bus
START
SLA + W
A
Data
A
STOP
Indicates
TWINT set
4. TWINT set.
Status code indicates
SLA + W sent,
2. TWINT set.
Status code indicates
START condition sent
6. TWINT set.
Status code indicates
data sent, ACK received
ACK received
1. The first step in a TWI transmission is to transmit a START condition. This is done by writing a specific value into
TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit a START condition. Which value to write is described later on.
However, it is important that the TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The
TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the application has
cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the START condition.
2. When the START condition has been transmitted, the TWINT flag in TWCR is set, and TWSR is updated with a
status code indicating that the START condition has successfully been sent.
3. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that the START condition was
successfully transmitted. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the application software might take some special action,
like calling an error routine. Assuming that the status code is as expected, the application must load SLA+W into
TWDR. Remember that TWDR is used both for address and data. After TWDR has been loaded with the desired
SLA+W, a specific value must be written to TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit the SLA+W present in
TWDR. Which value to write is described later on. However, it is important that the TWINT bit is set in the value
written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in
TWCR is set. Immediately after the application has cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the
address packet.
4. When the address packet has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag in TWCR is set, and TWSR is updated with a
status code indicating that the address packet has successfully been sent. The status code will also reflect
whether a slave acknowledged the packet or not.
5. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that the address packet was suc-
cessfully transmitted, and that the value of the ACK bit was as expected. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the
application software might take some special action, like calling an error routine. Assuming that the status code is
as expected, the application must load a data packet into TWDR. Subsequently, a specific value must be written to
TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit the data packet present in TWDR. Which value to write is
described later on.
However, it is important that the TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The
TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the application has
cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the data packet.
6. When the data packet has been transmitted, the TWINT flag in TWCR is set, and TWSR is updated with a status
code indicating that the data packet has successfully been sent. The status code will also reflect whether a slave
acknowledged the packet or not.
202
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
7. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that the data packet was success-
fully transmitted, and that the value of the ACK bit was as expected. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the application
software might take some special action, like calling an error routine. Assuming that the status code is as
expected, the application must write a specific value to TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit a STOP
condition. Which value to write is described later on. However, it is important that the TWINT bit is set in the value
written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in
TWCR is set. Immediately after the application has cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the STOP
condition. Note that TWINT is NOT set after a STOP condition has been sent.
Even though this example is simple, it shows the principles involved in all TWI transmissions. These can be summarized as
follows:
●
●
●
When the TWI has finished an operation and expects application response, the TWINT flag is set. The SCL line is
pulled low until TWINT is cleared.
When the TWINT flag is set, the user must update all TWI registers with the value relevant for the next TWI bus cycle.
As an example, TWDR must be loaded with the value to be transmitted in the next bus cycle.
After all TWI register updates and other pending application software tasks have been completed, TWCR is written.
When writing TWCR, the TWINT bit should be set. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will then
commence executing whatever operation was specified by the TWCR setting.
In Table 5-86 an assembly and C implementation of the example is given. Note that the code below assumes that several
definitions have been made, for example by using include-files.
Table 5-86. Assembly and C Implementation
Assembly Code Example
ldi r16,
C Example
TWCR =
Comments
(1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWSTA)|
(1<<TWEN)
(1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWSTA)|
(1<<TWEN)
1
2
Send START condition
out
TWCR, r16
wait1:
in
sbrs
rjmp
in
andi
cpi
brne
while
Wait for TWINT flag set. This
indicates that the START
condition has been transmitted
r16,TWCR
r16,TWINT
wait1
r16,TWSR
r16, 0xF8
r16, START
ERROR
(!(TWCR & (1<<TWINT)))
;
if ((TWSR & 0xF8)!= START)
ERROR();
Check value of TWI status
register. Mask prescaler bits. If
status different from START go to
ERROR
3
4
5
ldi
out
ldi
(1<<TWEN)
out
wait2:
in
sbrs
rjmp
r16, SLA_W
TWDR, r16
r16, (1<<TWINT) |
TWDR = SLA_W;
TWCR = (1<<TWINT) |
(1<<TWEN);
Load SLA_W into TWDR
register. Clear TWINT bit in
TWCR to start transmission of
address
TWCR, r16
while
Wait for TWINT Flag set. This
indicates that the SLA+W has
been transmitted, and
r16,TWCR
r16,TWINT
wait2
(!(TWCR & (1<<TWINT)))
;
ACK/NACK has been received.
in
r16,TWSR
if ((TWSR & 0xF8)!=
MT_SLA_ACK)
ERROR();
Check value of TWI status
register. Mask prescaler bits. If
status different from
andi
cpi
brne
r16, 0xF8
r16, MT_SLA_ACK
ERROR
MT_SLA_ACK go to ERROR
ldi
out
ldi
r16, DATA
TWDR, r16
r16, (1<<TWINT) |
TWDR = DATA;
TWCR = (1<<TWINT) |
(1<<TWEN);
Load DATA into TWDR register.
Clear TWINT bit in TWCR to start
transmission of data
(1<<TWEN)
out TWCR, r16
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
203
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-86. Assembly and C Implementation (Continued)
Assembly Code Example
C Example
while
Comments
wait3:
Wait for TWINT flag set. This
indicates that the DATA has been
transmitted, and ACK/NACK has
been received.
in
sbrs
rjmp
r16,TWCR
r16,TWINT
wait3
(!(TWCR & (1<<TWINT)))
;
6
7
in
r16,TWSR
if ((TWSR & 0xF8)!=
MT_DATA_ACK)
ERROR();
Check value of TWI status
register. Mask prescaler bits. If
status different from
andi
cpi
brne
r16, 0xF8
r16, MT_DATA_ACK
ERROR
MT_DATA_ACK go to ERROR
ldi
r16,
TWCR =
(1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWEN)|
(1<<TWSTO)
(1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWEN)|
(1<<TWSTO);
Transmit STOP condition
out
TWCR, r16
5.21.7 Transmission Modes
The TWI can operate in one of four major modes. These are named master transmitter (MT), master receiver (MR), slave
transmitter (ST) and slave receiver (SR). several of these modes can be used in the same application. As an example, the
TWI can use MT mode to write data into a TWI EEPROM, MR mode to read the data back from the EEPROM. If other
masters are present in the system, some of these might transmit data to the TWI, and then SR mode would be used. It is the
application software that decides which modes are legal.
The following sections describe each of these modes. Possible status codes are described along with figures detailing data
transmission in each of the modes. These figures contain the following abbreviations:
S: START condition
Rs: REPEATED START condition
R: Read bit (high level at SDA)
W: Write bit (low level at SDA)
A: Acknowledge bit (low level at SDA)
A: Not acknowledge bit (high level at SDA)
Data: 8-bit data byte
P: STOP condition
SLA: Slave Address
In Figure 5-88 on page 207 to Figure 5-94 on page 217, circles are used to indicate that the TWINT flag is set. The numbers
in the circles show the status code held in TWSR, with the prescaler bits masked to zero. At these points, actions must be
taken by the application to continue or complete the TWI transfer. The TWI transfer is suspended until the TWINT flag is
cleared by software.
When the TWINT flag is set, the status code in TWSR is used to determine the appropriate software action. For each status
code, the required software action and details of the following serial transfer are given in Table 5-87 to Table 5-90. Note that
the prescaler bits are masked to zero in these tables.
204
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.7.1 Master Transmitter Mode
In the master transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a slave receiver (see Figure 5-87). In order to
enter a master mode, a START condition must be transmitted. The format of the following address packet determines
whether master transmitter or master receiver mode is to be entered. If SLA+W is transmitted, MT mode is entered, if SLA+R
is transmitted, MR mode is entered. All the status codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits are zero or
are masked to zero.
Figure 5-87. Data Transfer in Master Transmitter Mode
V
CC
Device 1
Master
Transmitter
Device 2
Slave
Receiver
Device 3 ........ Device n
R1
R2
SDA
SCL
A START condition is sent by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT
TWEA
TWSTA
TWSTO
TWWC
TWEN
–
TWIE
value
1
X
1
0
X
1
0
X
TWEN must be set to enable the 2-wire Serial Interface, TWSTA must be written to one to transmit a START condition and
TWINT must be written to one to clear the TWINT flag. The TWI will then test the 2-wire serial bus and generate a START
condition as soon as the bus becomes free. After a START condition has been transmitted, the TWINT flag is set by
hardware, and the status code in TWSR will be 0x08 (see Table 5-87). In order to enter MT mode, SLA+W must be
transmitted. This is done by writing SLA+W to TWDR. Thereafter the TWINT bit should be cleared (by writing it to one) to
continue the transfer. This is accomplished by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT
TWEA
TWSTA
TWSTO
TWWC
TWEN
–
TWIE
value
1
X
0
0
X
1
0
X
When SLA+W have been transmitted and an acknowledgement bit has been received, TWINT is set again and a number of
status codes in TWSR are possible. Possible status codes in master mode are 0x18, 0x20, or 0x38. The appropriate action
to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 5-87.
When SLA+W has been successfully transmitted, a data packet should be transmitted. This is done by writing the data byte
to TWDR. TWDR must only be written when TWINT is high. If not, the access will be discarded, and the write collision bit
(TWWC) will be set in the TWCR register. After updating TWDR, the TWINT bit should be cleared (by writing it to one) to
continue the transfer. This is accomplished by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT
TWEA
TWSTA
TWSTO
TWWC
TWEN
–
TWIE
value
1
X
0
0
X
1
0
X
This scheme is repeated until the last byte has been sent and the transfer is ended by generating a STOP condition or a
repeated START condition. A STOP condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT
TWEA
TWSTA
TWSTO
TWWC
TWEN
–
TWIE
value
1
X
0
1
X
1
0
X
A REPEATED START condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT
TWEA
TWSTA
TWSTO
TWWC
TWEN
–
TWIE
value
1
X
1
0
X
1
0
X
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
205
9240I–AUTO–03/16
After a repeated START condition (state 0x10) the 2-wire serial Interface can access the same slave again, or a new slave
without transmitting a STOP condition. Repeated START enables the master to switch between slaves, master transmitter
mode and master receiver mode without losing control of the bus.
Table 5-87. Status codes for Master Transmitter Mode
Status Code
(TWSR)
Application Software Response
To TWCR
Prescaler
Bits
are 0
Status of the 2-wire Serial
Bus and 2-wire Serial
Interface Hardware
To/from TWDR
STA
STO TWINT TWEA Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware
Load SLA+W
Load SLA+W or
Load SLA+R
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
SLA+W will be transmitted;
A START condition has
been transmitted
0x08
0x10
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
SLA+W will be transmitted;
0
0
0
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
SLA+R will be transmitted;
A repeated START condition
has been transmitted
Logic will switch to Master Receiver mode
Load data byte or
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT
ACK will be received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
SLA+W has been
transmitted;
0x18
0x20
0x28
ACK has been received
No TWDR action
Load data byte or
1
0
1
0
1
1
X
X
STOP condition followed by a START condition
will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT
ACK will be received
SLA+W has been
transmitted;
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
NOT ACK has been
received
No TWDR action
Load data byte or
1
0
1
0
1
1
X
X
STOP condition followed by a START condition
will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT
ACK will be received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
Data byte has been
transmitted;
ACK has been received
No TWDR action
Load data byte or
1
0
1
0
1
1
X
X
STOP condition followed by a START condition
will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT
ACK will be received
Data byte has been
transmitted;
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
0x30
0x38
NOT ACK has been
received
No TWDR action
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
X
STOP condition followed by a START condition
will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
2-wire Serial Bus will be released and not
addressed Slave mode entered
Arbitration lost in SLA+W or
data bytes
A START condition will be transmitted when the
bus becomes free
206
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-88. Formats and States in the Master Transmitter Mode
MT
Successfull
S
SLA
W
A
DATA
A
P
transmission
to a slave
receiver
$08
$18
$28
Next transfer
started with a
repeated start
condition
RS
SLA
W
$10
Not acknowledge
received after the
slave address
A
P
R
$20
MR
Not acknowledge
received after a
data byte
A
P
$30
Arbitration lost in slave
address or data byte
Other master
continues
Other master
continues
A or A
A or A
$38
A
$38
Arbitration lost and
addressed as slave
Other master
continues
To corresponding
states in slave mode
$68
$78
$B0
Any number of data bytes
From master to slave
From slave to master
DATA
A
and their associated acknowledge bits
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus.
The prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
n
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
207
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.7.2 Master Receiver Mode
In the master receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a slave transmitter (slave see Figure 5-89). In order
to enter a master mode, a START condition must be transmitted. The format of the following address packet determines
whether master transmitter or master receiver mode is to be entered. If SLA+W is transmitted, MT mode is entered, if SLA+R
is transmitted, MR mode is entered. All the status codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits are zero or
are masked to zero.
Figure 5-89. Data Transfer in Master Receiver Mode
V
CC
Device 1
Master
Receiver
Device 2
Slave
Transmitter
Device 3 ........ Device n
R1
R2
SDA
SCL
A START condition is sent by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT
TWEA
TWSTA
TWSTO
TWWC
TWEN
–
TWIE
value
1
X
1
0
X
1
0
X
TWEN must be written to one to enable the 2-wire serial interface, TWSTA must be written to one to transmit a START
condition and TWINT must be set to clear the TWINT flag. The TWI will then test the 2-wire serial bus and generate a
START condition as soon as the bus becomes free. After a START condition has been transmitted, the TWINT flag is set by
hardware, and the status code in TWSR will be 0x08 (See Table 5-87). In order to enter MR mode, SLA+R must be
transmitted. This is done by writing SLA+R to TWDR. Thereafter the TWINT bit should be cleared (by writing it to one) to
continue the transfer. This is accomplished by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT
TWEA
TWSTA
TWSTO
TWWC
TWEN
–
TWIE
value
1
X
0
0
X
1
0
X
When SLA+R have been transmitted and an acknowledgement bit has been received, TWINT is set again and a number of
status codes in TWSR are possible. Possible status codes in master mode are 0x38, 0x40, or 0x48. The appropriate action
to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 5-88. Received data can be read from the TWDR register
when the TWINT flag is set high by hardware. This scheme is repeated until the last byte has been received. After the last
byte has been received, the MR should inform the ST by sending a NACK after the last received data byte. The transfer is
ended by generating a STOP condition or a repeated START condition. A STOP condition is generated by writing the
following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT
TWEA
TWSTA
TWSTO
TWWC
TWEN
–
TWIE
value
1
X
0
1
X
1
0
X
A REPEATED START condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT
TWEA
TWSTA
TWSTO
TWWC
TWEN
–
TWIE
value
1
X
1
0
X
1
0
X
After a repeated START condition (state 0x10) the 2-wire serial interface can access the same slave again, or a new slave
without transmitting a STOP condition. Repeated START enables the master to switch between slaves, master transmitter
mode and master receiver mode without losing control over the bus.
208
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-88. Status codes for Master Receiver Mode
Status Code
(TWSR)
Application Software Response
To TWCR
Prescaler
Bits
are 0
Status of the 2-wire Serial
Bus and 2-wire Serial
Interface Hardware
To/from TWDR
Load SLA+R
STA
0
STO TWINT TWEA Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware
A START condition has
been transmitted
SLA+R will be transmitted
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
0x08
0x10
0
0
1
1
X
X
Load SLA+R or
0
SLA+R will be transmitted
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
SLA+W will be transmitted
A repeated START condition
has been transmitted
Load SLA+W
0
0
0
1
X
Logic will switch to master transmitter mode
No TWDR action
or
0
0
1
1
X
X
2-wire serial bus will be released and not
addressed slave mode will be entered
Arbitration lost in SLA+R or
NOT ACK bit
0x38
0x40
A START condition will be transmitted when the
bus becomes free
No TWDR action
1
0
0
No TWDR action
or
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
SLA+R has been
transmitted;
Data byte will be received and ACK will be
returned
ACK has been received
No TWDR action
No TWDR action
or
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
Repeated START will be transmitted
SLA+R has been
transmitted;
No TWDR action
or
STOP condition will be transmitted and TWSTO
Flag will be reset
0x48
NOT ACK has been
received
1
1
1
X
STOP condition followed by a START condition
will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
No TWDR action
Read data byte or
Read data byte
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte has been
received;
0x50
0x58
Data byte will be received and ACK will be
returned
ACK has been returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
Repeated START will be transmitted
Data byte has been
received;
STOP condition will be transmitted and TWSTO
Flag will be reset
NOT ACK has been
returned
Read data byte
1
1
1
X
STOP condition followed by a START condition
will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
209
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-90. Formats and States in the Master Receiver Mode
MR
Successfull
S
SLA
R
A
DATA
A
DATA
A
P
reception
from a slave
receiver
$08
$40
$50
$58
Next transfer
started with a
repeated start
condition
RS
SLA
R
$10
Not acknowledge
received after the
slave address
A
P
W
$48
MT
Arbitration lost in slave
address or data byte
Other master
continues
Other master
continues
A or A
A or A
$38
$38
A
Arbitration lost and
addressed as slave
Other master
continues
To corresponding
states in slave mode
$68
$78
$B0
Any number of data bytes
From master to slave
From slave to master
DATA
A
and their associated acknowledge bits
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus.
The prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
n
5.21.7.3 Slave Receiver Mode
In the slave receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a master transmitter (see Figure 5-91). All the status
codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits are zero or are masked to zero.
Figure 5-91. Data transfer in Slave Receiver Mode
VCC
Device 1
Slave
Receiver
Device 2
Master
Transmitter
Device 3 ........ Device n
R1
R2
SDA
SCL
210
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
To initiate the Slave Receiver mode, TWAR and TWCR must be initialized as follows:
TWAR
TWA6
TWA5
TWA4
TWA3
TWA2
TWA1
TWA0
TWGCE
value
Device’s Own Slave Address
The upper 7 bits are the address to which the 2-wire serial interface will respond when addressed by a master. If the LSB is
set, the TWI will respond to the general call address (0x00), otherwise it will ignore the general call address.
TWCR
TWINT
TWEA
TWSTA
TWSTO
TWWC
TWEN
–
TWIE
value
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
X
TWEN must be written to one to enable the TWI. The TWEA bit must be written to one to enable the acknowledgement of
the device’s own slave address or the general call address. TWSTA and TWSTO must be written to zero.
When TWAR and TWCR have been initialized, the TWI waits until it is addressed by its own slave address (or the general
call address if enabled) followed by the data direction bit. If the direction bit is “0” (write), the TWI will operate in SR mode,
otherwise ST mode is entered. After its own slave address and the write bit have been received, the TWINT flag is set and a
valid status code can be read from TWSR. The status code is used to determine the appropriate software action. The
appropriate action to be taken for each status code is detailed in Table 5-89. The slave receiver mode may also be entered if
arbitration is lost while the TWI is in the master mode (see states 0x68 and 0x78).
If the TWEA bit is reset during a transfer, the TWI will return a “Not Acknowledge” (“1”) to SDA after the next received data
byte. This can be used to indicate that the slave is not able to receive any more bytes. While TWEA is zero, the TWI does not
acknowledge its own slave address. However, the 2-wire Serial Bus is still monitored and address recognition may resume
at any time by setting TWEA. This implies that the TWEA bit may be used to temporarily isolate the TWI from the 2-wire
serial bus.
In all sleep modes other than Idle mode, the clock system to the TWI is turned off. If the TWEA bit is set, the interface can
still acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address by using the 2-wire serial bus clock as a clock source.
The part will then wake up from sleep and the TWI will hold the SCL clock low during the wake up and until the TWINT flag is
cleared (by writing it to one). Further data reception will be carried out as normal, with the AVR® clocks running as normal.
Observe that if the AVR is set up with a long start-up time, the SCL line may be held low for a long time, blocking other data
transmissions.
Note that the 2-wire serial interface data register – TWDR does not reflect the last byte present on the bus when waking up
from these sleep modes.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
211
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-89. Status Codes for Slave Receiver Mode
Status Code
(TWSR)
Application Software Response
To TWCR
Prescaler
Bits
are 0
Status of the 2-wire Serial
Bus and 2-wire Serial
Interface Hardware
To/from TWDR
STA STO TWINT TWEA Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware
Own SLA+W has been
received;
No TWDR action
or
X
0
1
0
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
0x60
0x68
ACK has been returned
No TWDR action
X
0
1
1
Data byte will be received and ACK will be
returned
No TWDR action
or
Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as
master; own SLA+W has
been received; ACK has been
returned
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be
returned
No TWDR action
No TWDR action
or
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
General call address has
been received; ACK has been
returned
0x70
Data byte will be received and ACK will be
returned
No TWDR action
No TWDR action
or
Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as
Master; General call address
has been received; ACK has
been returned
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be
returned
0x78
0x80
No TWDR action
Previously addressed with
own SLA+W; data has been
received; ACK has been
returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be
returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no
recognition of own SLA or GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be
recognized if TWGCE = “1”
Previously addressed with
own SLA+W; data has been
received; NOT ACK has been
returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no
recognition of own SLA or GCA; a START
condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
0x88
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be
recognized if TWGCE = “1”; a START condition
will be transmitted when the bus becomes free
212
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-89. Status Codes for Slave Receiver Mode (Continued)
Status Code
(TWSR)
Application Software Response
To TWCR
Prescaler
Bits
are 0
Status of the 2-wire Serial
Bus and 2-wire Serial
Interface Hardware
To/from TWDR
STA STO TWINT TWEA Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware
Previously addressed with
general call; data has been
received; ACK has been
returned
Read data byte or
X
0
1
0
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be
returned
0x90
Read data byte
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
X
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no
recognition of own SLA or GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be
recognized if TWGCE = “1”
Previously addressed with
general call; data has been
received; NOT ACK has been
returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no
recognition of own SLA or GCA; a START
condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
0x98
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be
recognized if TWGCE = “1”; a START condition
will be transmitted when the bus becomes free
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no
recognition of own SLA or GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be
recognized if TWGCE = “1”
A STOP condition or repeated
START condition has been
received while still addressed
as Slave
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode; no
recognition of own SLA or GCA; a START
condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
0xA0
No action
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized; GCA will be
recognized if TWGCE = “1”; a START condition
will be transmitted when the bus becomes free
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
213
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-92. Formats and States in the Slave Receiver Mode
Reception of the own
S
SLA
W
A
DATA
A
DATA
A
P or S
slave address and one or
more data bytes. All are
acknowledged
$60
$80
$80
A
$A0
Last data byte received
is not acknowledged
P or S
$88
Arbitration lost as master
and addressed as slave
A
$68
A
Reception of the general call
address and one or more
data bytes
General Call
DATA
A
DATA
A
P or S
$70
$90
$90
A
$A0
Last data byte received
is not acknowledged
P or S
$98
Arbitration lost as master
and as slave by general call
A
$78
Any number of data bytes
and their associated acknowledge bits
From master to slave
From slave to master
DATA
A
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus.
The prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
n
214
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.7.4 Slave Transmitter Mode
In the slave transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a master receiver (see Figure 5-93). All the status
codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits are zero or are masked to zero.
Figure 5-93. Data Transfer in Slave Transmitter Mode
VCC
Device 1
Slave
Transmitter
Device 2
Master
Receiver
Device 3 ........ Device n
R1
R2
SDA
SCL
To initiate the slave transmitter mode, TWAR and TWCR must be initialized as follows:
TWAR
TWA6
TWA5
TWA4
TWA3
TWA2
TWA1
TWA0
TWGCE
value
Device’s Own Slave Address
The upper seven bits are the address to which the 2-wire serial interface will respond when addressed by a master. If the
LSB is set, the TWI will respond to the general call address (0x00), otherwise it will ignore the general call address.
TWCR
TWINT
TWEA
TWSTA
TWSTO
TWWC
TWEN
–
TWIE
value
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
X
TWEN must be written to one to enable the TWI. The TWEA bit must be written to one to enable the acknowledgement of
the device’s own slave address or the general call address. TWSTA and TWSTO must be written to zero.
When TWAR and TWCR have been initialized, the TWI waits until it is addressed by its own slave address (or the general
call address if enabled) followed by the data direction bit. If the direction bit is “1” (read), the TWI will operate in ST mode,
otherwise SR mode is entered. After its own slave address and the write bit have been received, the TWINT flag is set and a
valid status code can be read from TWSR. The status code is used to determine the appropriate software action. The
appropriate action to be taken for each status code is detailed in Table 5-90. The slave transmitter mode may also be
entered if arbitration is lost while the TWI is in the master mode (see state 0xB0).
If the TWEA bit is written to zero during a transfer, the TWI will transmit the last byte of the transfer. State 0xC0 or state 0xC8
will be entered, depending on whether the master receiver transmits a NACK or ACK after the final byte. The TWI is
switched to the not addressed slave mode, and will ignore the master if it continues the transfer. Thus the master receiver
receives all “1” as serial data. State 0xC8 is entered if the master demands additional data bytes (by transmitting ACK), even
though the slave has transmitted the last byte (TWEA zero and expecting NACK from the master).
While TWEA is zero, the TWI does not respond to its own slave address. However, the 2-wire serial bus is still monitored
and address recognition may resume at any time by setting TWEA. This implies that the TWEA bit may be used to
temporarily isolate the TWI from the 2-wire serial bus.
In all sleep modes other than Idle mode, the clock system to the TWI is turned off. If the TWEA bit is set, the interface can
still acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address by using the 2-wire serial bus clock as a clock source.
The part will then wake up from sleep and the TWI will hold the SCL clock will low during the wake up and until the TWINT
flag is cleared (by writing it to one). Further data transmission will be carried out as normal, with the AVR® clocks running as
normal. Observe that if the AVR is set up with a long start-up time, the SCL line may be held low for a long time, blocking
other data transmissions.
Note that the 2-wire serial interface data register – TWDR does not reflect the last byte present on the bus when waking up
from these sleep modes.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
215
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-90. Status Codes for Slave Transmitter Mode
Status
Code
Application Software Response
To TWCR
(TWSR)
Prescaler
Bits
are 0
Status of the 2-wire Serial
Bus and 2-wire Serial
Interface Hardware
To/from TWDR
STA
STO TWINT TWEA Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware
Own SLA+R has been
received;
Load data byte or
X
0
1
0
Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK
should be received
0xA8
0xB0
0xB8
ACK has been returned
Load data byte
X
0
1
1
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be
received
Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as Load data byte or
master; own SLA+R has been
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK
should be received
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be
received
received; ACK has been
returned
Load data byte
Load data byte or
Load data byte
X
X
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK
should be received
Data byte in TWDR has been
transmitted; ACK has been
received
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be
received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
Switched to the not addressed slave mode; no
recognition of own SLA or GCA
Switched to the not addressed slave mode; own
SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized
if TWGCE = “1”
Data byte in TWDR has been
transmitted; NOT ACK has
been received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed slave mode; no
recognition of own SLA or GCA; a START
condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
0xC0
Switched to the not addressed slave mode; own
SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized
if TWGCE = “1”; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes free
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed slave mode; no
recognition of own SLA or GCA
Switched to the not addressed slave mode; own
SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized
if TWGCE = “1”
Last data byte in TWDR has
been transmitted
(TWEA = “0”);
ACK has been received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed slave mode; no
recognition of own SLA or GCA; a START
condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
0xC8
Switched to the not addressed slave mode; own
SLA will be recognized; GCA will be recognized
if TWGCE = “1”; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes free
216
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-94. Formats and States in the Slave Transmitter Mode
Reception of the own
slave address and one
or more data bytes
S
SLA
R
A
DATA
A
DATA
A
P or S
$A8
$B8
$C0
Arbitration lost as master
and addressed as slave
A
$B0
Last data byte transmitted.
Switched to not adressed
slave (TWEA = “0”
A
All 1’s
P or S
$C8
Any number of data bytes
and their associated acknowledge bits
From master to slave
From slave to master
DATA
A
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus.
The prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
n
5.21.7.5 Miscellaneous States
There are two status codes that do not correspond to a defined TWI state, see Table 5-91.
Status 0xF8 indicates that no relevant information is available because the TWINT flag is not set. This occurs between other
states, and when the TWI is not involved in a serial transfer.
Status 0x00 indicates that a bus error has occurred during a 2-wire serial bus transfer. A bus error occurs when a START or
STOP condition occurs at an illegal position in the format frame. Examples of such illegal positions are during the serial
transfer of an address byte, a data byte, or an acknowledge bit. When a bus error occurs, TWINT is set. To recover from a
bus error, the TWSTO flag must set and TWINT must be cleared by writing a logic one to it. This causes the TWI to enter the
not addressed slave mode and to clear the TWSTO flag (no other bits in TWCR are affected). The SDA and SCL lines are
released, and no STOP condition is transmitted.
Table 5-91. Miscellaneous States
Status Code
(TWSR)
Application Software Response
To TWCR
Status of the 2-wire
Serial Bus and 2-wire
Serial Interface
Hardware
Prescaler
Bits
are 0
To/from TWDR STA STO TWINT TWEA Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware
No relevant state
information available;
TWINT = “0”
0xF8
0x00
No TWDR action
No TWDR action
No TWCR action
Wait or proceed current transfer
Only the internal hardware is affected, no
STOP condition is sent on the bus. In all
cases, the bus is released and TWSTO is
cleared.
Bus error due to an illegal
START or STOP condition
0
1
1
X
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
217
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.7.6 Combining Several TWI Modes
In some cases, several TWI modes must be combined in order to complete the desired action. Consider for example reading
data from a serial EEPROM. Typically, such a transfer involves the following steps:
1. The transfer must be initiated.
2. The EEPROM must be instructed what location should be read.
3. The reading must be performed.
4. The transfer must be finished.
Note that data is transmitted both from master to slave and vice versa. The master must instruct the slave what location it
wants to read, requiring the use of the MT mode. Subsequently, data must be read from the slave, implying the use of the
MR mode. Thus, the transfer direction must be changed. The master must keep control of the bus during all these steps, and
the steps should be carried out as an atomical operation. If this principle is violated in a multi master system, another master
can alter the data pointer in the EEPROM between steps 2 and 3, and the master will read the wrong data location. Such a
change in transfer direction is accomplished by transmitting a REPEATED START between the transmission of the address
byte and reception of the data. After a REPEATED START, the master keeps ownership of the bus. The following figure
shows the flow in this transfer.
Figure 5-95. Combining Several TWI Modes to Access a Serial EEPROM
Master Transmitter
Master Receiver
DATA
S
SLA + W
S = START
Transmitted from master to slave
A
ADDRESS
A
RS
RS = REPEATED START
Transmitted from slave to master
SLA + R
A
A
P
P = STOP
5.21.8 Multi-master Systems and Arbitration
If multiple masters are connected to the same bus, transmissions may be initiated simultaneously by one or more of them.
The TWI standard ensures that such situations are handled in such a way that one of the masters will be allowed to proceed
with the transfer, and that no data will be lost in the process. An example of an arbitration situation is depicted below, where
two masters are trying to transmit data to a slave receiver.
Figure 5-96. An Arbitration Example
V
CC
Device 1
Master
Transmitter
Device 2
Master
Transmitter
Device 3
Slave
Receiver
........ Device n
R1
R2
SDA
SCL
Several different scenarios may arise during arbitration, as described below:
●
Two or more masters are performing identical communication with the same slave. In this case, neither the slave nor
any of the masters will know about the bus contention.
●
Two or more masters are accessing the same slave with different data or direction bit. In this case, arbitration will
occur, either in the READ/WRITE bit or in the data bits. The masters trying to output a one on SDA while another
master outputs a zero will lose the arbitration. Losing masters will switch to not addressed slave mode or wait until the
bus is free and transmit a new START condition, depending on application software action.
218
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
●
Two or more masters are accessing different slaves. In this case, arbitration will occur in the SLA bits. masters trying
to output a one on SDA while another master outputs a zero will lose the arbitration. Masters losing arbitration in SLA
will switch to slave mode to check if they are being addressed by the winning master. If addressed, they will switch to
SR or ST mode, depending on the value of the READ/WRITE bit. If they are not being addressed, they will switch to
not addressed slave mode or wait until the bus is free and transmit a new START condition, depending on application
software action.
This is summarized in Figure 5-97. Possible status values are given in circles.
Figure 5-97. Possible Status Codes Caused by Arbitration
START
SLA
DATA
STOP
Arbitration lost in SLA
Arbitration lost in DATA
Own
NO
TWI bus will be released and not addressed slave mode will be entered
A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free
38
Address/ General Call
received
YES
68/78
B0
Write
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned
Direction
Read
Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK should be received
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be received
5.21.9 Register Description
5.21.9.1 TWBR – TWI Bit Rate Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(0xB8)
TWBR7 TWBR6 TWBR5 TWBR4 TWBR3 TWBR2 TWBR1 TWBR0
TWBR
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bits 7..0 – TWI Bit Rate Register
TWBR selects the division factor for the bit rate generator. The bit rate generator is a frequency divider which generates the
SCL clock frequency in the Master modes. See Section 5.21.5.2 “Bit Rate Generator Unit” on page 200 for calculating bit
rates.
5.21.9.2 TWCR – TWI Control Register
Bit
7
TWINT
R/W
0
6
TWEA
R/W
0
5
4
3
2
TWEN
R/W
0
1
–
0
TWIE
R/W
0
(0xBC)
TWSTA TWSTO
TWWC
TWCR
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R
0
R
0
The TWCR is used to control the operation of the TWI. It is used to enable the TWI, to initiate a master access by applying a
START condition to the bus, to generate a receiver acknowledge, to generate a stop condition, and to control halting of the
bus while the data to be written to the bus are written to the TWDR. It also indicates a write collision if data is attempted
written to TWDR while the register is inaccessible.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
219
9240I–AUTO–03/16
• Bit 7 – TWINT: TWI Interrupt Flag
This bit is set by hardware when the TWI has finished its current job and expects application software response. If the I-bit in
SREG and TWIE in TWCR are set, the MCU will jump to the TWI interrupt vector. While the TWINT flag is set, the SCL low
period is stretched. The TWINT flag must be cleared by software by writing a logic one to it. Note that this flag is not
automatically cleared by hardware when executing the interrupt routine. Also note that clearing this flag starts the operation
of the TWI, so all accesses to the TWI address register (TWAR), TWI status register (TWSR), and TWI data register (TWDR)
must be complete before clearing this flag.
• Bit 6 – TWEA: TWI Enable Acknowledge Bit
The TWEA bit controls the generation of the acknowledge pulse. If the TWEA bit is written to one, the ACK pulse is
generated on the TWI bus if the following conditions are met:
1. The device’s own slave address has been received.
2. A general call has been received, while the TWGCE bit in the TWAR is set.
3. A data byte has been received in Master Receiver or Slave Receiver mode.
By writing the TWEA bit to zero, the device can be virtually disconnected from the 2-wire serial bus temporarily. Address
recognition can then be resumed by writing the TWEA bit to one again.
• Bit 5 – TWSTA: TWI START Condition Bit
The application writes the TWSTA bit to one when it desires to become a master on the 2-wire serial bus. The TWI hardware
checks if the bus is available, and generates a START condition on the bus if it is free. However, if the bus is not free, the
TWI waits until a STOP condition is detected, and then generates a new START condition to claim the bus master status.
TWSTA must be cleared by software when the START condition has been transmitted.
• Bit 4 – TWSTO: TWI STOP Condition Bit
Writing the TWSTO bit to one in master mode will generate a STOP condition on the 2-wire serial bus. When the STOP
condition is executed on the bus, the TWSTO bit is cleared automatically. In slave mode, setting the TWSTO bit can be used
to recover from an error condition. This will not generate a STOP condition, but the TWI returns to a well-defined
unaddressed Slave mode and releases the SCL and SDA lines to a high impedance state.
• Bit 3 – TWWC: TWI Write Collision Flag
The TWWC bit is set when attempting to write to the TWI data register – TWDR when TWINT is low. This flag is cleared by
writing the TWDR register when TWINT is high.
• Bit 2 – TWEN: TWI Enable Bit
The TWEN bit enables TWI operation and activates the TWI interface. When TWEN is written to one, the TWI takes control
over the I/O pins connected to the SCL and SDA pins, enabling the slew-rate limiters and spike filters. If this bit is written to
zero, the TWI is switched off and all TWI transmissions are terminated, regardless of any ongoing operation.
• Bit 1 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit and will always read as zero.
• Bit 0 – TWIE: TWI Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-bit in SREG is set, the TWI interrupt request will be activated for as long as the
TWINT Flag is high.
220
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.9.3 TWSR – TWI Status Register
Bit
7
TWS7
R
6
TWS6
R
5
TWS5
R
4
TWS4
R
3
TWS3
R
2
–
1
TWPS1
R/W
0
0
TWPS0
R/W
0
(0xB9)
TWSR
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
1
1
1
1
1
• Bits 7..3 – TWS: TWI Status
These 5 bits reflect the status of the TWI logic and the 2-wire serial bus. The different status codes are described later in this
section. Note that the value read from TWSR contains both the 5-bit status value and the 2-bit prescaler value. The
application designer should mask the prescaler bits to zero when checking the status bits. This makes status checking
independent of prescaler setting. This approach is used in this datasheet, unless otherwise noted.
• Bit 2 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved and will always read as zero.
• Bits 1..0 – TWPS: TWI Prescaler Bits
These bits can be read and written, and control the bit rate prescaler.
Table 5-92. TWI Bit Rate Prescaler
TWPS1
TWPS0
Prescaler Value
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
4
16
64
To calculate bit rates, see Section 5.21.5.2 “Bit Rate Generator Unit” on page 200. The value of TWPS1..0 is used in the
equation.
5.21.9.4 TWDR – TWI Data Register
Bit
7
TWD7
R/W
1
6
TWD6
R/W
1
5
TWD5
R/W
1
4
TWD4
R/W
1
3
TWD3
R/W
1
2
TWD2
R/W
1
1
TWD1
R/W
1
0
TWD0
R/W
1
(0xBB)
TWDR
Read/Write
Initial Value
In transmit mode, TWDR contains the next byte to be transmitted. In receive mode, the TWDR contains the last byte
received. It is writable while the TWI is not in the process of shifting a byte. This occurs when the TWI interrupt flag (TWINT)
is set by hardware. Note that the data register cannot be initialized by the user before the first interrupt occurs. The data in
TWDR remains stable as long as TWINT is set. While data is shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously shifted in. TWDR
always contains the last byte present on the bus, except after a wake up from a sleep mode by the TWI interrupt. In this
case, the contents of TWDR is undefined.
In the case of a lost bus arbitration, no data is lost in the transition from master to slave. Handling of the ACK bit is controlled
automatically by the TWI logic, the CPU cannot access the ACK bit directly.
• Bits 7..0 – TWD: TWI Data Register
These eight bits constitute the next data byte to be transmitted, or the latest data byte received on the 2-wire serial bus.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
221
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.21.9.5 TWAR – TWI (Slave) Address Register
Bit
7
TWA6
R/W
1
6
TWA5
R/W
1
5
TWA4
R/W
1
4
TWA3
R/W
1
3
TWA2
R/W
1
2
TWA1
R/W
1
1
TWA0
R/W
1
0
TWGCE
R/W
0
(0xBA)
TWAR
Read/Write
Initial Value
The TWAR should be loaded with the 7-bit Slave address (in the seven most significant bits of TWAR) to which the TWI will
respond when programmed as a slave transmitter or receiver, and not needed in the Master modes. In multi master
systems, TWAR must be set in masters which can be addressed as slaves by other masters.
The LSB of TWAR is used to enable recognition of the general call address (0x00). There is an associated address
comparator that looks for the slave address (or general call address if enabled) in the received serial address. If a match is
found, an interrupt request is generated.
• Bits 7..1 – TWA: TWI (Slave) Address Register
These seven bits constitute the slave address of the TWI unit.
• Bit 0 – TWGCE: TWI General Call Recognition Enable Bit
If set, this bit enables the recognition of a general call given over the 2-wire serial bus.
5.21.9.6 TWAMR – TWI (Slave) Address Mask Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
TWAM[6:0]
R/W
3
2
1
0
–
(0xBD)
TWAMR
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R
0
0
• Bits 7..1 – TWAM: TWI Address Mask
The TWAMR can be loaded with a 7-bit slave address mask. Each of the bits in TWAMR can mask (disable) the
corresponding address bits in the TWI address register (TWAR). If the mask bit is set to one then the address match logic
ignores the compare between the incoming address bit and the corresponding bit in TWAR. Figure 5-98 shown the address
match logic in detail.
Figure 5-98. TWI Address Match Logic, Block Diagram
TWAR0
Address
Match
Address
Bit 0
TWAMR0
Address Bit Comparator 0
Address Bit Comparator 6 to 1
• Bit 0 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is an unused bit in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
222
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.22 Analog Comparator
5.22.1 Overview
The analog comparator compares the input values on the positive pin AIN0 and negative pin AIN1. When the voltage on the
positive pin AIN0 is higher than the voltage on the negative pin AIN1, the analog comparator output, ACO, is set. The
comparator’s output can be set to trigger the Timer/Counter1 input capture function. In addition, the comparator can trigger a
separate interrupt, exclusive to the analog comparator. The user can select Interrupt triggering on comparator output rise,
fall or toggle. A block diagram of the comparator and its surrounding logic is shown in Figure 5-99.
The power reduction ADC bit, PRADC, in Section 5.9.10 “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 60 must be disabled by
writing a logical zero to be able to use the ADC input MUX.
Figure 5-99. Analog Comparator Block Diagram(2)
VCC
Bandgap
Reference
ACBG
ACD
ACIE
AIN0
AIN1
Analog
Comparator
IRQ
+
Interrupt
Select
-
ACI
ACIS1
ACIS0
ACIC
ACO
ACME
ADEN
To T/C1 Capture
Trigger MUX
ADC Multiplexer
Output(1)
Notes: 1. See Table 5-93 on page 223.
2. Refer to Table 5-37 on page 94 for Analog Comparator pin placement.
5.22.2 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input
It is possible to select any of the ADC7..0 pins to replace the negative input to the analog comparator. The ADC multiplexer
is used to select this input, and consequently, the ADC must be switched off to utilize this feature. If the analog comparator
multiplexer enable bit (ACME in ADCSRB) is set and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), MUX2..0 in
ADMUX select the input pin to replace the negative input to the analog comparator, as shown in Table 5-93. If ACME is
cleared or ADEN is set, AIN1 is applied to the negative input to the analog comparator.
Table 5-93. Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input
ACME
ADEN
MUX2..0
xxx
Analog Comparator Negative Input
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
AIN1
AIN1
xxx
000
001
010
011
ADC0
ADC1
ADC2
ADC3
ADC4
ADC5
ADC6
ADC7
100
101
110
111
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
223
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.22.3 Register Description
5.22.3.1 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B
Bit
7
–
6
ACME
R/W
0
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
ADTS2
R/W
0
1
ADTS1
R/W
0
0
ADTS0
R/W
0
(0x7B)
ADCSRB
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 6 – ACME: Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable
When this bit is written logic one and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), the ADC multiplexer selects the
negative input to the analog comparator. When this bit is written logic zero, AIN1 is applied to the negative input of the
analog comparator. For a detailed description of this bit, see Section 5.22.2 “Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input” on page
223.
5.22.3.2 ACSR – Analog Comparator Control and Status Register
Bit
7
6
ACBG
R/W
0
5
ACO
R
4
ACI
R/W
0
3
ACIE
R/W
0
2
ACIC
R/W
0
1
ACIS1
R/W
0
0
ACIS0
R/W
0
0x30 (0x50)
Read/Write
Initial Value
ACD
R/W
0
ACSR
N/A
• Bit 7 – ACD: Analog Comparator Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the power to the analog comparator is switched off. This bit can be set at any time to turn
off the analog comparator. This will reduce power consumption in active and idle mode. When changing the ACD bit, the
analog comparator interrupt must be disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the
bit is changed.
• Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select
When this bit is set, a fixed bandgap reference voltage replaces the positive input to the analog comparator. When this bit is
cleared, AIN0 is applied to the positive input of the analog comparator. When the bandgap reference is used as input to the
analog comparator, it will take a certain time for the voltage to stabilize. If not stabilized, the first conversion may give a
wrong value. See Section 5.10.7 “Internal Voltage Reference” on page 67.
• Bit 5 – ACO: Analog Comparator Output
The output of the analog comparator is synchronized and then directly connected to ACO. The synchronization introduces a
delay of 1 - 2 clock cycles.
• Bit 4 – ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag
This bit is set by hardware when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined by ACIS1 and ACIS0. The
analog comparator interrupt routine is executed if the ACIE bit is set and the I-bit in SREG is set. ACI is cleared by hardware
when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag.
• Bit 3 – ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable
When the ACIE bit is written logic one and the I-bit in the status register is set, the analog comparator interrupt is activated.
When written logic zero, the interrupt is disabled.
• Bit 2 – ACIC: Analog Comparator Input Capture Enable
When written logic one, this bit enables the input capture function in Timer/Counter1 to be triggered by the analog
comparator. The comparator output is in this case directly connected to the input capture front-end logic, making the
comparator utilize the noise canceler and edge select features of the Timer/Counter1 input capture interrupt. When written
logic zero, no connection between the analog comparator and the input capture function exists. To make the comparator
trigger the Timer/Counter1 input capture interrupt, the ICIE1 bit in the timer interrupt mask register (TIMSK1) must be set.
224
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
• Bits 1, 0 – ACIS1, ACIS0: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select
These bits determine which comparator events that trigger the analog comparator interrupt. The different settings are shown
in Table 5-94.
Table 5-94. ACIS1/ACIS0 Settings
ACIS1
ACIS0
Interrupt Mode
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Comparator interrupt on output toggle.
Reserved
Comparator interrupt on falling output edge.
Comparator interrupt on rising output edge.
When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the analog comparator interrupt must be disabled by clearing its interrupt enable bit in
the ACSR register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed.
5.22.3.3 DIDR1 – Digital Input Disable Register 1
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
AIN1D
R/W
0
0
AIN0D
R/W
0
(0x7F)
DIDR1
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7..2 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 1, 0 – AIN1D, AIN0D: AIN1, AIN0 Digital Input Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the AIN1/0 pin is disabled. The corresponding PIN register bit will
always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is applied to the AIN1/0 pin and the digital input from this pin
is not needed, this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
225
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.23 Analog-to-Digital Converter
5.23.1 Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
10-bit resolution
0.5 LSB integral non-linearity
±2 LSB absolute accuracy
65µs to 260µs conversion time
Up to 15kSPS
6 multiplexed single ended input channels
2 additional multiplexed single ended input channels
Temperature sensor input channel
Optional left adjustment for ADC result readout
0 to VCC ADC input voltage range
Selectable 1.1V ADC reference voltage
Free running or single conversion mode
Interrupt on ADC conversion complete
Sleep mode noise canceler
5.23.2 Overview
The ATmega328P features a 10-bit successive approximation ADC. The ADC is connected to an 8-channel analog
multiplexer which allows eight single-ended voltage inputs constructed from the pins of Port A. The single-ended voltage
inputs refer to 0V (GND).
The ADC contains a sample and hold circuit which ensures that the input voltage to the ADC is held at a constant level
during conversion. A block diagram of the ADC is shown in Figure 5-100 on page 227.
The ADC has a separate analog supply voltage pin, AVCC. AVCC must not differ more than ±0.3V from VCC. See the
paragraph Section 5.23.6 “ADC Noise Canceler” on page 232 on how to connect this pin.
Internal reference voltages of nominally 1.1V or AVCC are provided on-chip. The voltage reference may be externally
decoupled at the AREF pin by a capacitor for better noise performance.
The power reduction ADC bit, PRADC, in Section 5.9.10 “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 60 must be disabled by
writing a logical zero to enable the ADC.
The ADC converts an analog input voltage to a 10-bit digital value through successive approximation. The minimum value
represents GND and the maximum value represents the voltage on the AREF pin minus 1 LSB. Optionally, AVCC or an
internal 1.1V reference voltage may be connected to the AREF pin by writing to the REFSn bits in the ADMUX register. The
internal voltage reference may thus be decoupled by an external capacitor at the AREF pin to improve noise immunity.
226
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-100. Analog to Digital Converter Block Schematic Operation
ADC Conversion
Complete IRQ
8-Bit Data Bus
15
0
ADC Multiplexer
Select (ADMUX)
ADC CTRL and Status
Register (ADCSRA)
ADC Data Register
(ADCH/ADCL)
MUX Decoder
Prescaler
Conversion Logic
AVCC
AREF
Internal 1.1V
Reference
Sample and Hold
Comparator
-
10-Bit DAC
+
Temperature
Sensor
GND
Bandgap
Reference
ADC7
ADC6
ADC5
ADC4
ADC3
ADC2
ADC1
ADC0
ADC
Multiplexer
Output
Input
MUX
The analog input channel is selected by writing to the MUX bits in ADMUX. Any of the ADC input pins, as well as GND and a
fixed bandgap voltage reference, can be selected as single ended inputs to the ADC. The ADC is enabled by setting the
ADC Enable bit, ADEN in ADCSRA. Voltage reference and input channel selections will not go into effect until ADEN is set.
The ADC does not consume power when ADEN is cleared, so it is recommended to switch off the ADC before entering
power saving sleep modes.
The ADC generates a 10-bit result which is presented in the ADC data registers, ADCH and ADCL. By default, the result is
presented right adjusted, but can optionally be presented left adjusted by setting the ADLAR bit in ADMUX.
If the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must
be read first, then ADCH, to ensure that the content of the data registers belongs to the same conversion. Once ADCL is
read, ADC access to data registers is blocked.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
227
9240I–AUTO–03/16
This means that if ADCL has been read, and a conversion completes before ADCH is read, neither register is updated and
the result from the conversion is lost. When ADCH is read, ADC access to the ADCH and ADCL registers is re-enabled.
The ADC has its own interrupt which can be triggered when a conversion completes. When ADC access to the data registers
is prohibited between reading of ADCH and ADCL, the interrupt will trigger even if the result is lost.
5.23.3 Starting a Conversion
A single conversion is started by disabling the power reduction ADC bit, PRADC, in Section 5.9.10 “Minimizing Power
Consumption” on page 60 by writing a logical zero to it and writing a logical one to the ADC start conversion bit, ADSC. This
bit stays high as long as the conversion is in progress and will be cleared by hardware when the conversion is completed. If
a different data channel is selected while a conversion is in progress, the ADC will finish the current conversion before
performing the channel change.
Alternatively, a conversion can be triggered automatically by various sources. Auto triggering is enabled by setting the ADC
auto trigger enable bit, ADATE in ADCSRA. The trigger source is selected by setting the ADC trigger select bits, ADTS in
ADCSRB (See description of the ADTS bits for a list of the trigger sources). When a positive edge occurs on the selected
trigger signal, the ADC prescaler is reset and a conversion is started. This provides a method of starting conversions at fixed
intervals. If the trigger signal still is set when the conversion completes, a new conversion will not be started. If another
positive edge occurs on the trigger signal during conversion, the edge will be ignored. Note that an Interrupt flag will be set
even if the specific interrupt is disabled or the global interrupt enable bit in SREG is cleared. A conversion can thus be
triggered without causing an interrupt. However, the interrupt flag must be cleared in order to trigger a new conversion at the
next interrupt event.
Figure 5-101. ADC Auto Trigger Logic
ADTS[2:0]
Prescaler
START
CLKADC
ADIF
ADATE
SOURCE 1
.
.
.
.
Conversion
Logic
Edge
Detector
SOURCE n
ADSC
Using the ADC interrupt flag as a trigger source makes the ADC start a new conversion as soon as the ongoing conversion
has finished. The ADC then operates in free running mode, constantly sampling and updating the ADC data register. The
first conversion must be started by writing a logical one to the ADSC bit in ADCSRA. In this mode the ADC will perform
successive conversions independently of whether the ADC Interrupt Flag, ADIF is cleared or not.
If auto triggering is enabled, single conversions can be started by writing ADSC in ADCSRA to one. ADSC can also be used
to determine if a conversion is in progress. The ADSC bit will be read as one during a conversion, independently of how the
conversion was started.
228
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.23.4 Prescaling and Conversion Timing
Figure 5-102. ADC Prescaler
ADEN
START
Reset
7-Bit ADC Prescaler
CK
ADPS0
ADPS1
ADPS2
ADC Clock Source
By default, the successive approximation circuitry requires an input clock frequency between 50kHz and 200kHz to get
maximum resolution. If a lower resolution than 10 bits is needed, the input clock frequency to the ADC can be higher than
200kHz to get a higher sample rate.
The ADC module contains a prescaler, which generates an acceptable ADC clock frequency from any CPU frequency above
100kHz. The prescaling is set by the ADPS bits in ADCSRA. The prescaler starts counting from the moment the ADC is
switched on by setting the ADEN bit in ADCSRA. The prescaler keeps running for as long as the ADEN bit is set, and is
continuously reset when ADEN is low.
When initiating a single ended conversion by setting the ADSC bit in ADCSRA, the conversion starts at the following rising
edge of the ADC clock cycle.
A normal conversion takes 13 ADC clock cycles. The first conversion after the ADC is switched on (ADEN in ADCSRA is set)
takes 25 ADC clock cycles in order to initialize the analog circuitry.
When the bandgap reference voltage is used as input to the ADC, it will take a certain time for the voltage to stabilize. If not
stabilized, the first value read after the first conversion may be wrong.
The actual sample-and-hold takes place 1.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of a normal conversion and 13.5 ADC clock
cycles after the start of an first conversion. When a conversion is complete, the result is written to the ADC data registers,
and ADIF is set. In single conversion mode, ADSC is cleared simultaneously. The software may then set ADSC again, and a
new conversion will be initiated on the first rising ADC clock edge.
When auto triggering is used, the prescaler is reset when the trigger event occurs. This assures a fixed delay from the trigger
event to the start of conversion. In this mode, the sample-and-hold takes place two ADC clock cycles after the rising edge on
the trigger source signal. Three additional CPU clock cycles are used for synchronization logic.
In free running mode, a new conversion will be started immediately after the conversion completes, while ADSC remains
high. For a summary of conversion times, see Table 5-95 on page 231.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
229
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-103. ADC Timing Diagram, First Conversion (Single Conversion Mode)
Next
Conversion
First Conversion
Cycle Number
ADC Clock
ADEN
1
2
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1
2
3
ADSC
ADIF
ADCH
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
ADCL
MUX and REFS
Update
Conversion
Complete
Sample and Hold
MUX and REFS
Update
Figure 5-104. ADC Timing Diagram, Single Conversion
One Conversion
Next Conversion
Cycle Number
ADC Clock
ADSC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
ADIF
ADCH
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
ADCL
Sample and Hold
MUX and REFS
Update
Conversion
Complete
MUX and REFS
Update
230
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-105. ADC Timing Diagram, Auto Triggered Conversion
One Conversion
Next Conversion
Cycle Number
ADC Clock
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
Trigger
Source
ADATE
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
Prescaler
Reset
Sample and Hold
MUX and REFS
Update
Conversion
Complete
Prescaler
Reset
Figure 5-106. ADC Timing Diagram, Free Running Conversion
One Conversion
Next Conversion
Cycle Number
ADC Clock
ADSC
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
ADIF
ADCH
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
ADCL
Sample and Hold
MUX and REFS
Update
Conversion
Complete
Table 5-95. ADC Conversion Time
Sample and Hold
Conversion Time
Condition
(Cycles from Start of Conversion)
(Cycles)
First conversion
13.5
1.5
2
25
Normal conversions, single ended
Auto Triggered conversions
13
13.5
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
231
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.23.5 Changing Channel or Reference Selection
The MUXn and REFS1:0 bits in the ADMUX register are single buffered through a temporary register to which the CPU has
random access. This ensures that the channels and reference selection only takes place at a safe point during the
conversion. The channel and reference selection is continuously updated until a conversion is started. Once the conversion
starts, the channel and reference selection is locked to ensure a sufficient sampling time for the ADC. Continuous updating
resumes in the last ADC clock cycle before the conversion completes (ADIF in ADCSRA is set). Note that the conversion
starts on the following rising ADC clock edge after ADSC is written. The user is thus advised not to write new channel or
reference selection values to ADMUX until one ADC clock cycle after ADSC is written.
If auto triggering is used, the exact time of the triggering event can be indeterministic. Special care must be taken when
updating the ADMUX register, in order to control which conversion will be affected by the new settings.
If both ADATE and ADEN is written to one, an interrupt event can occur at any time. If the ADMUX register is changed in this
period, the user cannot tell if the next conversion is based on the old or the new settings. ADMUX can be safely updated in
the following ways:
a. When ADATE or ADEN is cleared.
b. During conversion, minimum one ADC clock cycle after the trigger event.
c. After a conversion, before the Interrupt Flag used as trigger source is cleared.
When updating ADMUX in one of these conditions, the new settings will affect the next ADC conversion.
5.23.5.1 ADC Input Channels
When changing channel selections, the user should observe the following guidelines to ensure that the correct channel is
selected:
In single conversion mode, always select the channel before starting the conversion. The channel selection may be changed
one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the simplest method is to wait for the conversion to complete
before changing the channel selection.
In free running mode, always select the channel before starting the first conversion. The channel selection may be changed
one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the simplest method is to wait for the first conversion to complete,
and then change the channel selection. Since the next conversion has already started automatically, the next result will
reflect the previous channel selection. Subsequent conversions will reflect the new channel selection.
5.23.5.2 ADC Voltage Reference
The reference voltage for the ADC (VREF) indicates the conversion range for the ADC. Single ended channels that exceed
VREF will result in codes close to 0x3FF. VREF can be selected as either AVCC, internal 1.1V reference, or external AREF pin.
AVCC is connected to the ADC through a passive switch. The internal 1.1V reference is generated from the internal bandgap
reference (VBG) through an internal amplifier. In either case, the external AREF pin is directly connected to the ADC, and the
reference voltage can be made more immune to noise by connecting a capacitor between the AREF pin and ground. VREF
can also be measured at the AREF pin with a high impedance voltmeter. Note that VREF is a high impedance source, and
only a capacitive load should be connected in a system.
If the user has a fixed voltage source connected to the AREF pin, the user may not use the other reference voltage options
in the application, as they will be shorted to the external voltage. If no external voltage is applied to the AREF pin, the user
may switch between AVCC and 1.1V as reference selection. The first ADC conversion result after switching reference voltage
source may be inaccurate, and the user is advised to discard this result.
5.23.6 ADC Noise Canceler
The ADC features a noise canceler that enables conversion during sleep mode to reduce noise induced from the CPU core
and other I/O peripherals. The noise canceler can be used with ADC Noise Reduction and Idle mode. To make use of this
feature, the following procedure should be used:
a. Make sure that the ADC is enabled and is not busy converting. Single conversion mode must be selected and the
ADC conversion complete interrupt must be enabled.
b. Enter ADC noise reduction mode (or Idle mode). The ADC will start a conversion once the CPU has been halted.
232
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
c. If no other interrupts occur before the ADC conversion completes, the ADC interrupt will wake up the CPU and
execute the ADC conversion complete interrupt routine. If another interrupt wakes up the CPU before the ADC
conversion is complete, that interrupt will be executed, and an ADC conversion complete interrupt request will be
generated when the ADC conversion completes. The CPU will remain in active mode until a new sleep command
is executed.
Note that the ADC will not be automatically turned off when entering other sleep modes than Idle mode and ADC noise
reduction mode. The user is advised to write zero to ADEN before entering such sleep modes to avoid excessive power
consumption.
5.23.6.1 Analog Input Circuitry
The analog input circuitry for single ended channels is illustrated in Figure 5-107 on page 233 An analog source applied to
ADCn is subjected to the pin capacitance and input leakage of that pin, regardless of whether that channel is selected as
input for the ADC. When the channel is selected, the source must drive the S/H capacitor through the series resistance
(combined resistance in the input path).
The ADC is optimized for analog signals with an output impedance of approximately 10k or less. If such a source is used,
the sampling time will be negligible. If a source with higher impedance is used, the sampling time will depend on how long
time the source needs to charge the S/H capacitor, with can vary widely. The user is recommended to only use low
impedance sources with slowly varying signals, since this minimizes the required charge transfer to the S/H capacitor.
Signal components higher than the Nyquist frequency (fADC/2) should not be present for either kind of channels, to avoid
distortion from unpredictable signal convolution. The user is advised to remove high frequency components with a low-pass
filter before applying the signals as inputs to the ADC.
Figure 5-107. Analog Input Circuitry
IIH
ADCn
1 to 100kΩ
IIL
CS/H = 14pF
VCC/2
5.23.6.2 Analog Noise Canceling Techniques
Digital circuitry inside and outside the device generates EMI which might affect the accuracy of analog measurements. If
conversion accuracy is critical, the noise level can be reduced by applying the following techniques:
a. Keep analog signal paths as short as possible. Make sure analog tracks run over the analog ground plane, and
keep them well away from high-speed switching digital tracks.
b. The AVCC pin on the device should be connected to the digital VCC supply voltage via an LC network as shown in
Figure 5-108.
c. Use the ADC noise canceler function to reduce induced noise from the CPU.
d. If any ADC [3..0] port pins are used as digital outputs, it is essential that these do not switch while a conversion is
in progress. However, using the 2-wire Interface (ADC4 and ADC5) will only affect the conversion on ADC4 and
ADC5 and not the other ADC channels.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
233
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-108. ADC Power Connections
PC1 (ADC1)
PC0 (ADC0)
ADC7
GND
AREF
ADC8
AVCC
PB5
5.23.6.3 ADC Accuracy Definitions
An n-bit single-ended ADC converts a voltage linearly between GND and VREF in 2n steps (LSBs). The lowest code is read
as 0, and the highest code is read as 2n-1.
Several parameters describe the deviation from the ideal behavior:
●
Offset: The deviation of the first transition (0x000 to 0x001) compared to the ideal transition (at 0.5 LSB). Ideal value:
0 LSB.
Figure 5-109. Offset Error
Output Code
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
Offset
Error
VREF Input Voltage
234
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
●
Gain error: After adjusting for offset, the gain error is found as the deviation of the last transition (0x3FE to 0x3FF)
compared to the ideal transition (at 1.5 LSB below maximum). Ideal value: 0 LSB
Figure 5-110. Gain Error
Output Code
Gain
Error
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
VREF Input Voltage
●
Integral non-linearity (INL): After adjusting for offset and gain error, the INL is the maximum deviation of an actual
transition compared to an ideal transition for any code. Ideal value: 0 LSB.
Figure 5-111. Integral Non-linearity (INL)
Output Code
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
VREF Input Voltage
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
235
9240I–AUTO–03/16
●
Differential non-linearity (DNL): The maximum deviation of the actual code width (the interval between two adjacent
transitions) from the ideal code width (1 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB.
Figure 5-112. Differential Non-linearity (DNL)
Output Code
0x3FF
1 LSB
DNL
0x000
0
VREF Input Voltage
●
●
Quantization error: Due to the quantization of the input voltage into a finite number of codes, a range of input voltages
(1 LSB wide) will code to the same value. Always ±0.5 LSB.
Absolute accuracy: The maximum deviation of an actual (unadjusted) transition compared to an ideal transition for
any code. This is the compound effect of offset, gain error, differential error, non-linearity, and quantization error. Ideal
value: ±0.5 LSB.
5.23.7 ADC Conversion Result
After the conversion is complete (ADIF is high), the conversion result can be found in the ADC result registers (ADCL,
ADCH).
For single ended conversion, the result is
V
1024
IN
------------------------
ADC =
V
REF
where VIN is the voltage on the selected input pin and VREF the selected voltage reference (see Table 5-97 on page 238 and
Table 5-98 on page 238). 0x000 represents analog ground, and 0x3FF represents the selected reference voltage minus one
LSB.
5.23.8 Temperature Measurement
The temperature measurement is based on an on-chip temperature sensor that is coupled to a single ended ADC input.
MUX[4..0] bits in ADMUX register enables the temperature sensor. The internal 1.1V voltage reference must also be
selected for the ADC voltage reference source in the temperature sensor measurement. When the temperature sensor is
enabled, the ADC converter can be used in single conversion mode to measure the voltage over the temperature sensor.
The measured voltage has a linear relationship to the temperature as described in Table 5-96 on page 236.
The voltage sensitivity is approximately 1LSB/°C and the accuracy of the temperature measurement is ±10°C using
manufacturing calibration values (TS_GAIN, TS_OFFSET).
The values described in Table 5-96 on page 236 are typical values. However, due to the process variation the temperature
sensor output varies from one chip to another.
Table 5-96. Sensor output code vs Temperature (typical values)
Temperature / °C
-40°C
+25 °C
+125 °C
0x010D
0x0160
0x01E0
236
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.23.8.1 Manufacturing Calibration
Calibration values determined during test are available in the signature row.
The temperature in degrees Celsius can be calculated using the formula:
ADCH « 8 + ADCL 273 + 100 – TS_OFFSET 128
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TS_GAIN
+ 25
Where:.
a.
b.
c.
ADCH & ADCL are the ADC data registers,
is the temperature sensor gain
TS_OFFSET is the temperature sensor offset correction term
TS_GAIN is the unsigned fixed point 8-bit temperature sensor gain factor in
1/128th units stored in the signature row.
TS_OFFSET is the signed twos complement temperature sensor offset reading
stored in the signature row. See Table 5-106 on page 257 for signature row
parameter address
The following code example allows to read Signature Row data
.equ TS_GAIN = 0x0003
.equ TS_OFFSET = 0x0002
LDI R30,LOW(TS_GAIN)
LDI R31,HIGH (TS_GAIN)
RCALL Read_signature_row
MOV R17,R16 ; Save R16 result
LDI R30,LOW(TS_OFFSET)
LDI R31,HIGH (TS_OFFSET)
RCALL Read_signature_row
; R16 holds TS_OFFSET and R17 holds TS_GAIN
Read_signature_row:
IN R16,SPMCSR ; Wait for SPMEN ready
SBRC R16,SPMEN ; Exit loop here when SPMCSR is free
RJMP Read_signature_row
LDI R16,((1<<SIGRD)|(1<<SPMEN)) ; We need to set SIGRD and SPMEN together
OUT SPMCSR,R16 ; and execute the LPM within 3 cycles
LPM R16,Z
RET
5.23.9 Register Description
5.23.9.1 ADMUX – ADC Multiplexer Selection Register
Bit
7
REFS1
R/W
0
6
REFS0
R/W
0
5
ADLAR
R/W
0
4
–
3
MUX3
R/W
0
2
MUX2
R/W
0
1
MUX1
R/W
0
0
MUX0
R/W
0
(0x7C)
ADMUX
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
• Bit 7:6 – REFS1:0: Reference Selection Bits
These bits select the voltage reference for the ADC, as shown in Table 5-97. If these bits are changed during a conversion,
the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in ADCSRA is set). The internal voltage reference
options may not be used if an external reference voltage is being applied to the AREF pin.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
237
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-97. Voltage Reference Selections for ADC
REFS1
REFS0
Voltage Reference Selection
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
AREF, Internal Vref turned off
AVCC with external capacitor at AREF pin
Reserved
Internal 1.1V voltage reference with external capacitor at AREF pin
• Bit 5 – ADLAR: ADC Left Adjust Result
The ADLAR bit affects the presentation of the ADC conversion result in the ADC data register. Write one to ADLAR to left
adjust the result. Otherwise, the result is right adjusted. Changing the ADLAR bit will affect the ADC data register
immediately, regardless of any ongoing conversions. For a complete description of this bit, see Section 5.23.9.3 “ADCL and
ADCH – The ADC Data Register” on page 240.
• Bit 4 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is an unused bit in the ATmega328P, and will always read as zero.
• Bits 3:0 – MUX3:0: Analog Channel Selection Bits
The value of these bits selects which analog inputs are connected to the ADC. See Table 5-98 for details. If these bits are
changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in ADCSRA is set).
Table 5-98. Input Channel Selections
MUX3..0
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
Single Ended Input
ADC0
ADC1
ADC2
ADC3
ADC4
ADC5
ADC6
ADC7
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
ADC8(1)
(reserved)
(reserved)
(reserved)
(reserved)
(reserved)
1.1V (VBG
)
1111
0V (GND)
Note:
1. For temperature sensor.
238
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.23.9.2 ADCSRA – ADC Control and Status Register A
Bit
7
ADEN
R/W
0
6
ADSC
R/W
0
5
ADATE
R/W
0
4
ADIF
R/W
0
3
ADIE
R/W
0
2
ADPS2
R/W
0
1
ADPS1
R/W
0
0
ADPS0
R/W
0
(0x7A)
ADCSRA
Read/Write
Initial Value
• Bit 7 – ADEN: ADC Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the ADC. By writing it to zero, the ADC is turned off. Turning the ADC off while a conversion is
in progress, will terminate this conversion.
• Bit 6 – ADSC: ADC Start Conversion
In single conversion mode, write this bit to one to start each conversion. In free running mode, write this bit to one to start the
first conversion. The first conversion after ADSC has been written after the ADC has been enabled, or if ADSC is written at
the same time as the ADC is enabled, will take 25 ADC clock cycles instead of the normal 13. This first conversion performs
initialization of the ADC.
ADSC will read as one as long as a conversion is in progress. When the conversion is complete, it returns to zero. Writing
zero to this bit has no effect.
• Bit 5 – ADATE: ADC Auto Trigger Enable
When this bit is written to one, auto triggering of the ADC is enabled. The ADC will start a conversion on a positive edge of
the selected trigger signal. The trigger source is selected by setting the ADC trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB.
• Bit 4 – ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag
This bit is set when an ADC conversion completes and the data registers are updated. The ADC conversion complete
interrupt is executed if the ADIE bit and the I-bit in SREG are set. ADIF is cleared by hardware when executing the
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ADIF is cleared by writing a logical one to the flag. Beware that if
doing a read-modify-write on ADCSRA, a pending interrupt can be disabled. This also applies if the SBI and CBI instructions
are used.
• Bit 3 – ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in SREG is set, the ADC conversion complete interrupt is activated.
• Bits 2:0 – ADPS2:0: ADC Prescaler Select Bits
These bits determine the division factor between the system clock frequency and the input clock to the ADC.
Table 5-99. ADC Prescaler Selections
ADPS2
ADPS1
ADPS0
Division Factor
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
239
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.23.9.3 ADCL and ADCH – The ADC Data Register
5.23.9.4 ADLAR = 0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
(0x79)
(0x78)
–
–
–
–
–
–
ADC9
ADC8
ADCH
ADCL
ADC7
ADC6
ADC5
ADC4
ADC3
ADC2
ADC1
ADC0
7
R
R
0
6
R
R
0
5
R
R
0
4
R
R
0
3
R
R
0
2
R
R
0
1
R
R
0
0
R
R
0
Read/Write
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5.23.9.5 ADLAR = 1
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
(0x79)
(0x78)
ADC9
ADC8
ADC7
ADC6
ADC5
ADC4
ADC3
ADC2
ADCH
ADCL
ADC1
ADC0
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
7
R
R
0
6
R
R
0
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
When an ADC conversion is complete, the result is found in these two registers.
When ADCL is read, the ADC data register is not updated until ADCH is read. Consequently, if the result is left adjusted and
no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH.
The ADLAR bit in ADMUX, and the MUXn bits in ADMUX affect the way the result is read from the registers. If ADLAR is set,
the result is left adjusted. If ADLAR is cleared (default), the result is right adjusted.
• ADC9:0: ADC Conversion Result
These bits represent the result from the conversion, as detailed in Section 5.23.7 “ADC Conversion Result” on page 236.
240
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.23.9.6 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B
Bit
7
–
6
ACME
R/W
0
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
ADTS2
R/W
0
1
ADTS1
R/W
0
0
ADTS0
R/W
0
(0x7B)
ADCSRB
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7, 5:3 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved for future use. To ensure compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written to zero when
ADCSRB is written.
• Bit 2:0 – ADTS2:0: ADC Auto Trigger Source
If ADATE in ADCSRA is written to one, the value of these bits selects which source will trigger an ADC conversion. If ADATE
is cleared, the ADTS2:0 settings will have no effect. A conversion will be triggered by the rising edge of the selected interrupt
flag. Note that switching from a trigger source that is cleared to a trigger source that is set, will generate a positive edge on
the trigger signal. If ADEN in ADCSRA is set, this will start a conversion. Switching to free running mode (ADTS[2:0]=0) will
not cause a trigger event, even if the ADC interrupt flag is set.
Table 5-100. ADC Auto Trigger Source Selections
ADTS2
ADTS1
ADTS0
Trigger Source
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Free running mode
Analog comparator
External interrupt request 0
Timer/Counter0 compare match A
Timer/Counter0 overflow
Timer/Counter1 compare match B
Timer/Counter1 overflow
Timer/Counter1 capture event
5.23.9.7 DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0
Bit
7
–
6
–
5
ADC5D
R/W
0
4
ADC4D
R/W
0
3
ADC3D
R/W
0
2
ADC2D
R/W
0
1
ADC1D
R/W
0
0
ADC0D
R/W
0
(0x7E)
DIDR0
Read/Write
Initial Value
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:6 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved for future use. To ensure compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written to zero when
DIDR0 is written.
• Bit 5:0 – ADC5D..ADC0D: ADC5..0 Digital Input Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the corresponding ADC pin is disabled. The corresponding PIN
register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is applied to the ADC5..0 pin and the digital
input from this pin is not needed, this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.
Note that ADC pins ADC7 and ADC6 do not have digital input buffers, and therefore do not require digital input disable bits.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
241
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.24 debugWIRE On-chip Debug System
5.24.1 Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Complete program flow control
Emulates all on-chip functions, both digital and analog, except RESET pin
Real-time operation
Symbolic debugging support (both at C and assembler source level, or for other HLLs)
Unlimited number of program break points (using software break points)
Non-intrusive operation
Electrical characteristics identical to real device
Automatic configuration system
High-speed operation
Programming of non-volatile memories
5.24.2 Overview
The debugWIRE on-chip debug system uses a one-wire, bi-directional interface to control the program flow, execute AVR®
instructions in the CPU and to program the different non-volatile memories.
5.24.3 Physical Interface
When the debugWIRE Enable (DWEN) Fuse is programmed and lock bits are unprogrammed, the debugWIRE system
within the target device is activated. The RESET port pin is configured as a wire-AND (open-drain) bi-directional I/O pin with
pull-up enabled and becomes the communication gateway between target and emulator.
Figure 5-113. The debugWIRE Setup
1.8 - 5.5V
VCC
dw
dw(RESET)
GND
Figure 5-113 shows the schematic of a target MCU, with debugWIRE enabled, and the emulator connector. The system
clock is not affected by debugWIRE and will always be the clock source selected by the CKSEL fuses.
When designing a system where debugWIRE will be used, the following observations must be made for correct operation:
●
Pull-up resistors on the dW/(RESET) line must not be smaller than 10k. The pull-up resistor is not required for
debugWIRE functionality.
●
●
●
Connecting the RESET pin directly to VCC will not work.
Capacitors connected to the RESET pin must be disconnected when using debugWire.
All external reset sources must be disconnected.
242
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.24.4 Software Break Points
debugWIRE supports program memory break points by the AVR® Break instruction. Setting a Break Point in AVR Studio®
will insert a BREAK instruction in the program memory. The instruction replaced by the BREAK instruction will be stored.
When program execution is continued, the stored instruction will be executed before continuing from the program memory. A
break can be inserted manually by putting the BREAK instruction in the program.
The flash must be re-programmed each time a break point is changed. This is automatically handled by AVR Studio through
the debugWIRE interface. The use of break points will therefore reduce the flash data retention. Devices used for debugging
purposes should not be shipped to end customers.
5.24.5 Limitations of debugWIRE
The debugWIRE communication pin (dW) is physically located on the same pin as external reset (RESET). An external reset
source is therefore not supported when the debugWIRE is enabled.
A programmed DWEN Fuse enables some parts of the clock system to be running in all sleep modes. This will increase the
power consumption while in sleep. Thus, the DWEN Fuse should be disabled when debugWire is not used.
5.24.6 Register Description
The following section describes the registers used with the debugWire.
5.24.6.1 DWDR – debugWire Data Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DWDR[7:0]
DWDR
Read/Write
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/W
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
0
The DWDR register provides a communication channel from the running program in the MCU to the debugger. This register
is only accessible by the debugWIRE and can therefore not be used as a general purpose register in the normal operations.
5.25 Self-programming the Flash, ATmega328P
5.25.1 Overview
In ATmega328P, there is no read-while-write support, and no separate boot loader section. The SPM instruction can be
executed from the entire flash.
The device provides a self-programming mechanism for downloading and uploading program code by the MCU itself. The
self-programming can use any available data interface and associated protocol to read code and write (program) that code
into the program memory.
The program memory is updated in a page by page fashion. Before programming a page with the data stored in the
temporary page buffer, the page must be erased. The temporary page buffer is filled one word at a time using SPM and the
buffer can be filled either before the page erase command or between a page erase and a page write operation:
Alternative 1, fill the buffer before a page erase
●
●
●
Fill temporary page buffer
Perform a page erase
Perform a page write
Alternative 2, fill the buffer after page erase
●
●
●
Perform a page erase
Fill temporary page buffer
Perform a page Write
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
243
9240I–AUTO–03/16
If only a part of the page needs to be changed, the rest of the page must be stored (for example in the temporary page
buffer) before the erase, and then be re-written. When using alternative 1, the boot loader provides an effective read-modify-
write feature which allows the user software to first read the page, do the necessary changes, and then write back the
modified data. If alternative 2 is used, it is not possible to read the old data while loading since the page is already erased.
The temporary page buffer can be accessed in a random sequence. It is essential that the page address used in both the
page erase and page write operation is addressing the same page.
5.25.1.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM
To execute page erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “00000011” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four
clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored. The page address must be written to PCPAGE in the
Z-register. Other bits in the Z-pointer will be ignored during this operation.
●
The CPU is halted during the page erase operation.
5.25.1.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading)
To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0, write “00000001” to SPMCSR and
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The content of PCWORD in the Z-register is used to address
the data in the temporary buffer. The temporary buffer will auto-erase after a Page Write operation or by writing the
RWWSRE bit in SPMCSR. It is also erased after a system reset. Note that it is not possible to write more than one time to
each address without erasing the temporary buffer. If the EEPROM is written in the middle of an SPM Page Load operation,
all data loaded will be lost.
5.25.1.3 Performing a Page Write
To execute page write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “00000101” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock
cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored. The page address must be written to PCPAGE. Other bits
in the Z-pointer must be written to zero during this operation.
●
The CPU is halted during the page write operation.
5.25.2 Addressing the Flash During Self-programming
The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands.
Bit
15
Z15
Z7
7
14
Z14
Z6
6
13
Z13
Z5
5
12
Z12
Z4
4
11
Z11
Z3
3
10
Z10
Z2
2
9
Z9
Z1
1
8
Z8
Z0
0
ZH (R31)
ZL (R30)
Since the flash is organized in pages (see Table 5-119 on page 265), the program counter can be treated as having two
different sections. One section, consisting of the least significant bits, is addressing the words within a page, while the most
significant bits are addressing the pages. This is shown in Figure 5-117 on page 254. Note that the page erase and page
write operations are addressed independently. Therefore it is of major importance that the software addresses the same
page in both the page erase and page write operation.
The LPM instruction uses the Z-pointer to store the address. Since this instruction addresses the flash byte-by-byte, also the
LSB (bit Z0) of the Z-pointer is used.
244
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-114. Addressing the Flash During SPM(1)
BIT
15
ZPCMSB
ZPAGEMSB 1 0
0
Z-REGISTER
PCMSB
PAGEMSB
PCWORD
PROGRAM
COUNTER
PCPAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN PAGE
Program Memory
Page
Page
Instructions Word
PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]
00
01
02
PAGEEND
Note:
1. The different variables used in Figure 5-117 are listed in Table 5-119 on page 265.
5.25.2.1 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR
Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to flash. Reading the fuses and lock bits from
software will also be prevented during the EEPROM write operation. It is recommended that the user checks the status bit
(EEPE) in the EECR register and verifies that the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCSR register.
5.25.2.2 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software
It is possible to read both the fuse and lock bits from software. To read the lock bits, load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 and set
the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the
BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in SPMCSR, the value of the lock bits will be loaded in the destination register. The
BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the lock bits or if no LPM instruction is executed
within three CPU cycles or no SPM instruction is executed within four CPU cycles. When BLBSET and SELFPRGEN are
cleared, LPM will work as described in the instruction set manual.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Rd
–
–
–
–
–
–
LB2
LB1
The algorithm for reading the fuse low byte is similar to the one described above for reading the lock bits. To read the fuse
low byte, load the Z-pointer with 0x0000 and set the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruction
is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the fuse low
byte (FLB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown below.See Table 5-115 on page 264 for a detailed description
and mapping of the fuse low byte.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Rd
FLB7
FLB6
FLB5
FLB4
FLB3
FLB2
FLB1
FLB0
Similarly, when reading the fuse high byte (FHB), load 0x0003 in the Z-pointer. When an LPM instruction is executed within
three cycles after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the fuse high byte will be loaded
in the destination register as shown below. See Table 5-114 on page 263 for detailed description and mapping of the
extended fuse byte.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Rd
FHB7
FHB6
FHB5
FHB4
FHB3
FHB2
FHB1
FHB0
Similarly, when reading the extended fuse byte (EFB), load 0x0002 in the Z-pointer. When an LPM instruction is executed
within three cycles after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the extended fuse byte will
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
245
9240I–AUTO–03/16
be loaded in the destination register as shown below. See Table 5-115 on page 264 for detailed description and mapping of
the extended fuse byte.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Rd
FHB7
FHB6
FHB5
FHB4
FHB3
FHB2
FHB1
FHB0
Fuse and lock bits that are programmed, will be read as zero. Fuse and Lock bits that are unprogrammed, will be read as
one.
5.25.2.3 Preventing Flash Corruption
During periods of low VCC, the flash program can be corrupted because the supply voltage is too low for the CPU and the
flash to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board level systems using the flash, and the same design
solutions should be applied.
A flash program corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a regular write sequence to
the flash requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the
supply voltage for executing instructions is too low.
Flash corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations (one is sufficient):
1. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can be done by
enabling the internal brown-out detector (BOD) if the operating voltage matches the detection level. If not, an
external low VCC reset protection circuit can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the
write operation will be completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.
2. Keep the AVR core in power-down sleep mode during periods of low VCC. This will prevent the CPU from attempt-
ing to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting the SPMCSR register and thus the flash from
unintentional writes.
5.25.2.4 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM
The calibrated RC oscillator is used to time flash accesses. Table 5-107 shows the typical programming time for flash
accesses from the CPU.
Table 5-101. SPM Programming Time(1)
Symbol
Min Programming Time
Max Programming Time
Flash write (page erase, page write, and write lock
bits by SPM)
3.7ms
4.5ms
Note:
1. Minimum and maximum programming time is per individual operation.
246
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.25.2.5 Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader
Note that the RWWSB bit will always be read as zero in ATmega328P. Nevertheless, it is recommended to check this bit as
shown in the code example, to ensure compatibility with devices supporting read-while-write.
;-the routine writes one page of data from RAM to Flash
; the first data location in RAM is pointed to by the Y pointer
; the first data location in Flash is pointed to by the Z-pointer
;-error handling is not included
;-the routine must be placed inside the Boot space
; (at least the Do_spm sub routine). Only code inside NRWW section can
; be read during Self-programming (Page Erase and Page Write).
;-registers used: r0, r1, temp1 (r16), temp2 (r17), looplo (r24),
; loophi (r25), spmcrval (r20)
; storing and restoring of registers is not included in the routine
; register usage can be optimized at the expense of code size
;-It is assumed that either the interrupt table is moved to the Boot
; loader section or that the interrupts are disabled.
.equ
PAGESIZEB = PAGESIZE*2;PAGESIZEB is page size in BYTES, not words
.org SMALLBOOTSTART
Write_page:
;
Page Erase
ldi
spmcrval, (1<<PGERS) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
;
ldi
re-enable the RWW section
spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
;
transfer data from RAM to Flash page buffer
ldi
ldi
looplo, low(PAGESIZEB)
loophi, high(PAGESIZEB)
;init loop variable
;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256
Wrloop:
ld
r0, Y+
ld
r1, Y+
ldi
spmcrval, (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
adiw
sbiw
brne
ZH:ZL, 2
loophi:looplo, 2
Wrloop
;use subi for PAGESIZEB<=256
;
execute Page Write
ZL, low(PAGESIZEB)
ZH, high(PAGESIZEB)
subi
sbci
ldi
;restore pointer
;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256
spmcrval, (1<<PGWRT) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
;
ldi
re-enable the RWW section
spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
;
read back and check, optional
ldi
ldi
subi
sbci
looplo, low(PAGESIZEB)
loophi, high(PAGESIZEB)
YL, low(PAGESIZEB)
;init loop variable
;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256
;restore pointer
YH, high(PAGESIZEB)
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
247
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Rdloop:
lpm
r0, Z+
ld
r1, Y+
cpse
rjmp
sbiw
brne
r0, r1
Error
loophi:looplo, 1
Rdloop
;use subi for PAGESIZEB<=256
;
;
return to RWW section
verify that RWW section is safe to read
Return:
in
temp1, SPMCSR
sbrs
temp1, RWWSB
; If RWWSB is set, the RWW section is not
yet
ready
ret
;
re-enable the RWW section
ldi
spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
rjmp
Do_spm:
Return
;
check for previous SPM complete
Wait_spm:
in
temp1, SPMCSR
sbrc
temp1, SELFPRGEN
rjmp
;
;
in
cli
;
Wait_spm
input: spmcrval determines SPM action
disable interrupts if enabled, store status
temp2, SREG
check that no EEPROM write access is present
Wait_ee:
sbic
rjmp
;
out
spm
;
EECR, EEPE
Wait_ee
SPM timed sequence
SPMCSR, spmcrval
restore SREG (to enable interrupts if originally enabled)
SREG, temp2
out
ret
248
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.25.3 Register Description
5.25.3.1 SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register
The Store Program Memory Control and Status Register contains the control bits needed to control the Program memory
operations.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x37 (0x57)
Read/Write
Initial Value
SPMIE RWWSB
–
RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SELFPRGEN SPMCSR
R/W
0
R
0
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 7 – SPMIE: SPM Interrupt Enable
When the SPMIE bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the status register is set (one), the SPM ready interrupt will be enabled.
The SPM ready Interrupt will be executed as long as the SELFPRGEN bit in the SPMCSR register is cleared. The interrupt
will not be generated during EEPROM write or SPM.
• Bit 6 – RWWSB: Read-While-Write Section Busy
This bit is for compatibility with devices supporting read-while-write. It will always read as zero in ATmega328P.
• Bit 5 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATmega328P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 4 – RWWSRE: Read-While-Write Section Read Enable
If the RWWSRE bit is written while filling the temporary page buffer, the temporary page buffer will be cleared and the data
will be lost.
• Bit 3 – BLBSET: Boot Lock Bit Set
An LPM instruction within three cycles after BLBSET and SELFPRGEN are set in the SPMCSR register, will read either the
lock bits or the fuse bits (depending on Z0 in the Z-pointer) into the destination register. See Section 5.25.2.2 “Reading the
Fuse and Lock Bits from Software” on page 245 for details.
• Bit 2 – PGWRT: Page Write
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes page
Write, with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in
R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a page write, or if no SPM instruction is executed
within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire page write operation.
• Bit 1 – PGERS: Page Erase
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes page
erase. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will
auto-clear upon completion of a page erase, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted
during the entire page write operation.
• Bit 0 – SELFPRGEN: Self Programming Enable
This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If written to one together with either RWWSRE, BLBSET,
PGWRT, or PGERS, the following SPM instruction will have a special meaning, see description above. If only SELFPRGEN
is written, the following SPM instruction will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z-
pointer. The LSB of the Z-pointer is ignored. The SELFPRGEN bit will auto-clear upon completion of an SPM instruction, or
if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. During page erase and page write, the SELFPRGEN bit remains
high until the operation is completed.
Writing any other combination than “10001”, “01001”, “00101”, “00011” or “00001” in the lower five bits will have no effect.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
249
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.26 Boot Loader Support – Read-while-write Self-programming
5.26.1 Features
●
●
Read-while-write self-programming
Flexible boot memory size
●
High security (separate boot lock bits for a flexible protection)
Separate fuse to select reset vector
Optimized page(1) size
●
●
●
Code efficient algorithm
●
Efficient read-modify-write support
Note:
1. A page is a section in the flash consisting of several bytes (see Table 5-119 on page 265) used during program-
ming. The page organization does not affect normal operation.
5.26.2 Overview
The boot loader support provides a real read-while-write self-programming mechanism for downloading and uploading
program code by the MCU itself. This feature allows flexible application software updates controlled by the MCU using a
flash-resident boot loader program. The boot loader program can use any available data interface and associated protocol to
read code and write (program) that code into the flash memory, or read the code from the program memory. The program
code within the boot loader section has the capability to write into the entire flash, including the boot loader memory. The
boot loader can thus even modify itself, and it can also erase itself from the code if the feature is not needed anymore. The
size of the Boot Loader memory is configurable with fuses and the boot loader has two separate sets of boot lock bits which
can be set independently. This gives the user a unique flexibility to select different levels of protection.
5.26.3 Application and Boot Loader Flash Sections
The flash memory is organized in two main sections, the application section and the boot loader section (see Figure 5-116).
The size of the different sections is configured by the BOOTSZ Fuses as shown in Figure 5-116. These two sections can
have different level of protection since they have different sets of lock bits.
5.26.3.1 Application Section
The application section is the section of the flash that is used for storing the application code. The protection level for the
application section can be selected by the application boot lock bits (boot lock bits 0), see Table 5-103 on page 253. The
application section can never store any boot loader code since the SPM instruction is disabled when executed from the
application section.
5.26.3.2 BLS – Boot Loader Section
While the application section is used for storing the application code, the The boot loader software must be located in the
BLS since the SPM instruction can initiate a programming when executing from the BLS only. The SPM instruction can
access the entire flash, including the BLS itself. The protection level for the boot loader section can be selected by the boot
loader lock bits (boot lock bits 1), see Table 5-104 on page 253.
5.26.4 Read-While-Write and No Read-While-Write Flash Sections
Whether the CPU supports read-while-write or if the CPU is halted during a Boot Loader software update is dependent on
which address that is being programmed. In addition to the two sections that are configurable by the BOOTSZ Fuses as
described above, the flash is also divided into two fixed sections, the read-while-write (RWW) section and the no read-while-
write (NRWW) section. The limit between the RWW- and NRWW sections is given in Figure 5-116 on page 252. The main
difference between the two sections is:
●
When erasing or writing a page located inside the RWW section, the NRWW section can be read during the
operation.
●
When erasing or writing a page located inside the NRWW section, the CPU is halted during the entire operation.
Note that the user software can never read any code that is located inside the RWW section during a boot loader software
operation. The syntax “Read-While-Write section” refers to which section that is being programmed (erased or written), not
which section that actually is being read during a boot loader software update.
250
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.26.4.1 RWW – Read-while-write Section
If a boot loader software update is programming a page inside the RWW section, it is possible to read code from the flash,
but only code that is located in the NRWW section. During an on-going programming, the software must ensure that the
RWW section never is being read. If the user software is trying to read code that is located inside the RWW section (i.e., by
a call/jmp/lpm or an interrupt) during programming, the software might end up in an unknown state. To avoid this, the
interrupts should either be disabled or moved to the boot loader section. The boot loader section is always located in the
NRWW section. The RWW section busy bit (RWWSB) in the store program memory control and status register (SPMCSR)
will be read as logical one as long as the RWW section is blocked for reading. After a programming is completed, the
RWWSB must be cleared by software before reading code located in the RWW section. See Section 5.26.9.1 “SPMCSR –
Store Program Memory Control and Status Register” on page 261 for details on how to clear RWWSB.
5.26.4.2 NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section
The code located in the NRWW section can be read when the boot loader software is updating a page in the RWW section.
When the boot loader code updates the NRWW section, the CPU is halted during the entire page erase or page write
operation.
Table 5-102. Read-while-write Features
Which Section does the
Z-pointer Address during the
Programming?
Which Section can be read
during Programming?
Read-while-write
Supported?
CPU Halted?
RWW Section
NRWW Section
None
No
Yes
No
NRWW Section
Yes
Figure 5-115. Read-while-write versus No Read-while-write
Read-while-write
(RWW) Section
Z-pointer
Addresses NRWW
Section
Z-pointer
Addresses RWW
Section
No Read-while-write
(RWW) Section
CPU is Halted During
the Operation
Code located in
NRWW Section
can be Read During
the Operation
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
251
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-116. Memory Sections
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = ’11’
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = ’10’
0x0000
0x0000
Application Flash Section
Application Flash Section
End RWW
End RWW
Start NRWW
Start NRWW
Application Flash Section
Boot Loader Flash Section
Application Flash Section
Boot Loader Flash Section
End Application
Start Boot Loader
End Application
Start Boot Loader
Flashend
Flashend
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = ’01’
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = ’00’
0x0000
0x0000
Application Flash Section
Application Flash Section
End RWW, End
Application
End RWW
Start NRWW
Start RWW,
Start Boot Loader
Application Flash Section
Boot Loader Flash Section
End Application
Start Boot Loader
Boot Loader Flash Section
Flashend
Flashend
5.26.5 Boot Loader Lock Bits
If no boot loader capability is needed, the entire flash is available for application code. The boot loader has two separate sets
of boot lock bits which can be set independently. This gives the user a unique flexibility to select different levels of protection.
The user can select:
●
●
●
●
To protect the entire flash from a software update by the MCU.
To protect only the boot loader flash section from a software update by the MCU.
To protect only the application flash section from a software update by the MCU.
Allow software update in the entire flash.
See Table 5-103 and Table 5-104 for further details. The boot lock bits can be set in software and in serial or parallel
programming mode, but they can be cleared by a chip erase command only. The general write lock (lock bit mode 2) does
not control the programming of the flash memory by SPM instruction. Similarly, the general read/write lock (lock bit mode 1)
does not control reading nor writing by LPM/SPM, if it is attempted.
252
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-103. Boot Lock Bit0 Protection Modes (Application Section)(1)
BLB0 Mode
BLB02
BLB01
Protection
1
2
1
1
1
0
No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the application section.
SPM is not allowed to write to the application section.
SPM is not allowed to write to the application section, and LPM executing
from the boot loader section is not allowed to read from the application
section. If interrupt vectors are placed in the boot loader section, interrupts
are disabled while executing from the application section.
3
0
0
LPM executing from the boot loader section is not allowed to read from the
application section. If interrupt vectors are placed in the boot loader section,
interrupts are disabled while executing from the application section.
4
0
1
Note:
1. “s unpr1” unprogrammed, “0” means programmed.
Table 5-104. Boot Lock Bit1 Protection Modes (Boot Loader Section)(1)
BLB1 Mode
BLB12
BLB11
Protection
1
2
1
1
1
0
No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the boot loader section.
SPM is not allowed to write to the boot loader section.
SPM is not allowed to write to the boot loader section, and LPM executing
from the application section is not allowed to read from the boot loader
section. If interrupt vectors are placed in the application section, interrupts
are disabled while executing from the boot loader section.
3
0
0
LPM executing from the application section is not allowed to read from the
boot loader section. If interrupt vectors are placed in the application section,
interrupts are disabled while executing from the boot loader section.
4
0
1
Note:
1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
5.26.6 Entering the Boot Loader Program
Entering the boot loader takes place by a jump or call from the application program. This may be initiated by a trigger such
as a command received via USART, or SPI interface. Alternatively, the boot reset fuse can be programmed so that the reset
vector is pointing to the boot flash start address after a reset. In this case, the boot loader is started after a reset. After the
application code is loaded, the program can start executing the application code. Note that the fuses cannot be changed by
the MCU itself. This means that once the boot reset fuse is programmed, the reset vector will always point to the boot loader
reset and the fuse can only be changed through the serial or parallel programming interface.
Table 5-105. Boot Reset Fuse(1)
BOOTRST
Reset Address
1
0
Reset vector = Application reset (address 0x0000)
Reset vector = Boot loader reset
Note:
1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
253
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.26.7 Addressing the Flash During Self-programming
The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands.
Bit
15
Z15
Z7
7
14
Z14
Z6
6
13
Z13
Z5
5
12
Z12
Z4
4
11
Z11
Z3
3
10
Z10
Z2
2
9
Z9
Z1
1
8
Z8
Z0
0
ZH (R31)
ZL (R30)
Since the flash is organized in pages (see Table 5-119 on page 265), the program counter can be treated as having two
different sections. One section, consisting of the least significant bits, is addressing the words within a page, while the most
significant bits are addressing the pages. This is1 shown in Figure 5-117. Note that the page erase and page write
operations are addressed independently. Therefore it is of major importance that the boot loader software addresses the
same page in both the page erase and page write operation. Once a programming operation is initiated, the address is
latched and the Z-pointer can be used for other operations.
The only SPM operation that does not use the Z-pointer is setting the boot loader lock bits. The content of the Z-pointer is
ignored and will have no effect on the operation. The LPM instruction does also use the Z-pointer to store the address. Since
this instruction addresses the Flash byte-by-byte, also the LSB (bit Z0) of the Z-pointer is used.
Figure 5-117. Addressing the Flash During SPM
BIT
15
ZPCMSB
ZPAGEMSB 1 0
0
Z-REGISTER
PCMSB
PAGEMSB
PCWORD
PROGRAM
COUNTER
PCPAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN PAGE
Program Memory
Page
Instructions Word
PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]
00
Page
01
02
PAGEEND
254
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.26.8 Self-programming the Flash
The program memory is updated in a page by page fashion. Before programming a page with the data stored in the
temporary page buffer, the page must be erased. The temporary page buffer is filled one word at a time using SPM and the
buffer can be filled either before the page erase command or between a page erase and a page write operation:
Alternative 1, fill the buffer before a page erase
●
●
●
Fill temporary page buffer
Perform a page erase
Perform a page write
Alternative 2, fill the buffer after page erase
●
●
●
Perform a page erase
Fill temporary page buffer
Perform a page write
If only a part of the page needs to be changed, the rest of the page must be stored (for example in the temporary page
buffer) before the erase, and then be rewritten. When using alternative 1, the boot loader provides an effective read-modify-
write feature which allows the user software to first read the page, do the necessary changes, and then write back the
modified data. If alternative 2 is used, it is not possible to read the old data while loading since the page is already erased.
The temporary page buffer can be accessed in a random sequence. It is essential that the page address used in both the
page erase and page write operation is addressing the same page. See Section 5.26.8.13 “Simple Assembly Code Example
for a Boot Loader” on page 258 for an assembly code example.
5.26.8.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM
To execute page erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000011” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four
clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored. The page address must be written to PCPAGE in the
Z-register. Other bits in the Z-pointer will be ignored during this operation.
●
●
Page erase to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the page erase.
Page erase to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation.
5.26.8.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading)
To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0, write “00000001” to SPMCSR and
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The content of PCWORD in the Z-register is used to address
the data in the temporary buffer. The temporary buffer will auto-erase after a page write operation or by writing the
RWWSRE bit in SPMCSR. It is also erased after a system reset. Note that it is not possible to write more than one time to
each address without erasing the temporary buffer.
If the EEPROM is written in the middle of an SPM page load operation, all data loaded will be lost.
5.26.8.3 Performing a Page Write
To execute page write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000101” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock
cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored. The page address must be written to PCPAGE. Other bits
in the Z-pointer must be written to zero during this operation.
●
●
Page write to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the page write.
Page write to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation.
5.26.8.4 Using the SPM Interrupt
If the SPM interrupt is enabled, the SPM interrupt will generate a constant interrupt when the SELFPRGEN bit in SPMCSR is
cleared. This means that the interrupt can be used instead of polling the SPMCSR register in software. When using the SPM
interrupt, the Interrupt Vectors should be moved to the BLS section to avoid that an interrupt is accessing the RWW section
when it is blocked for reading. How to move the interrupts is described in Section 5.11 “Interrupts” on page 73.
5.26.8.5 Consideration While Updating BLS
Special care must be taken if the user allows the boot loader section to be updated by leaving boot lock bit11
unprogrammed. An accidental write to the boot loader itself can corrupt the entire boot loader, and further software updates
might be impossible. If it is not necessary to change the boot loader software itself, it is recommended to program the boot
lock bit11 to protect the boot loader software from any internal software changes.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
255
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.26.8.6 Prevent Reading the RWW Section During Self-programming
During self-programming (either page erase or page write), the RWW section is always blocked for reading. The user
software itself must prevent that this section is addressed during the self programming operation. The RWWSB in the
SPMCSR will be set as long as the RWW section is busy. During self-programming the interrupt vector table should be
moved to the BLS as described in Section 5.10.8 “Watchdog Timer” on page 68, or the interrupts must be disabled. Before
addressing the RWW section after the programming is completed, the user software must clear the RWWSB by writing the
RWWSRE. See Section 5.26.8.13 “Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader” on page 258 for an example.
5.26.8.7 Setting the Boot Loader Lock Bits by SPM
To set the boot loader lock bits and general lock bits, write the desired data to R0, write “X0001001” to SPMCSR and
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R0
1
1
BLB12
BLB11
BLB02
BLB01
LB2
LB1
See Table 5-103 and Table 5-104 for how the different settings of the boot loader bits affect the flash access.
If bits 5..0 in R0 are cleared (zero), the corresponding lock bit will be programmed if an SPM instruction is executed within
four cycles after BLBSET and SELFPRGEN are set in SPMCSR. The Z-pointer is don’t care during this operation, but for
future compatibility it is recommended to load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 (same as used for reading the lOck bits). For future
compatibility it is also recommended to set bits 7 and 6 in R0 to “1” when writing the lock bits. When programming the lock
bits the entire flash can be read during the operation.
5.26.8.8 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR
Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to flash. Reading the fuses and lock bits from
software will also be prevented during the EEPROM write operation. It is recommended that the user checks the status bit
(EEPE) in the EECR register and verifies that the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCSR register.
5.26.8.9 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software
It is possible to read both the fuse and lock bits from software. To read the lock bits, load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 and set
the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the
BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in SPMCSR, the value of the lock bits will be loaded in the destination register. The
BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the lock bits or if no LPM instruction is executed
within three CPU cycles or no SPM instruction is executed within four CPU cycles. When BLBSET and SELFPRGEN are
cleared, LPM will work as described in the instruction set manual.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Rd
–
–
BLB12
BLB11
BLB02
BLB01
LB2
LB1
The algorithm for reading the fuse low byte is similar to the one described above for reading the lock bits. To read the fuse
low byte, load the Z-pointer with 0x0000 and set the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruction
is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the fuse low
byte (FLB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 5-115 on page 264 for a detailed
description and mapping of the fuse low byte.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Rd
FLB7
FLB6
FLB5
FLB4
FLB3
FLB2
FLB1
FLB0
Similarly, when reading the fuse high byte, load 0x0003 in the Z-pointer. When an LPM instruction is executed within three
cycles after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the fuse high byte (FHB) will be loaded
in the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 5-117 on page 265 for detailed description and mapping of the
fuse high byte.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Rd
FHB7
FHB6
FHB5
FHB4
FHB3
FHB2
FHB1
FHB0
256
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
When reading the extended fuse byte, load 0x0002 in the Z-pointer. When an LPM instruction is executed within three cycles
after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the extended fuse byte (EFB) will be loaded in
the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 5-114 on page 263 for detailed description and mapping of the
extended fuse byte.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Rd
–
–
–
–
EFB3
EFB2
EFB1
EFB0
Fuse and lock bits that are programmed, will be read as zero. Fuse and lock bits that are unprogrammed, will be read as
one.
5.26.8.10 Reading the Signature Row from Software
To read the signature row from software, load the Z-pointer with the signature byte address given in Table 5-106 on page
257 and set the SIGRD and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after
the SIGRD and SPMEN bits are set in SPMCSR, the signature byte value will be loaded in the destination register. The
SIGRD and SPMEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the signature row lock bits or if no LPM instruction is
executed within three CPU cycles. When SIGRD and SPMEN are cleared, LPM will work as described in the instruction set
manual.
Table 5-106. Signature Row Addressing
Signature Byte
Z-Pointer Address
0x0000
Device signature byte 1
Device signature byte 2
Device signature byte 3
RC oscillator calibration byte
TSOFFSET - Temp sensor offset
TSGAIN - Temp sensor gain
0x0002
0x0004
0x0001
0x0002
0x0003
Note:
All other addresses are reserved for future use.
5.26.8.11 Preventing Flash Corruption
During periods of low VCC, the flash program can be corrupted because the supply voltage is too low for the CPU and the
flash to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board level systems using the flash, and the same design
solutions should be applied.
A flash program corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a regular write sequence to
the flash requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the
supply voltage for executing instructions is too low.
Flash corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations (one is sufficient):
1. If there is no need for a boot loader update in the system, program the boot loader lock bits to prevent any boot
loader software updates.
2. Keep the AVR® RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can be done by
enabling the internal brown-out detector (BOD) if the operating voltage matches the detection level. If not, an
external low VCC reset protection circuit can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the
write operation will be completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.
3. Keep the AVR core in power-down sleep mode during periods of low VCC. This will prevent the CPU from attempt-
ing to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting the SPMCSR register and thus the flash from
unintentional writes.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
257
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.26.8.12 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM
The calibrated RC oscillator is used to time flash accesses. Table 5-107 shows the typical programming time for flash
accesses from the CPU.
Table 5-107. SPM Programming Time(1)
Symbol
Min Programming Time
Max Programming Time
Flash write (page erase, page write, and write
lock bits by SPM)
3.7ms
4.5ms
Note:
1. Minimum and maximum programming time is per individual operation.
5.26.8.13 Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader
;-the routine writes one page of data from RAM to Flash
; the first data location in RAM is pointed to by the Y pointer
; the first data location in Flash is pointed to by the Z-pointer
;-error handling is not included
;-the routine must be placed inside the Boot space
; (at least the Do_spm sub routine). Only code inside NRWW section can
; be read during Self-programming (Page Erase and Page Write).
;-registers used: r0, r1, temp1 (r16), temp2 (r17), looplo (r24),
; loophi (r25), spmcrval (r20)
; storing and restoring of registers is not included in the routine
; register usage can be optimized at the expense of code size
;-It is assumed that either the interrupt table is moved to the Boot
; loader section or that the interrupts are disabled.
PAGESIZEB = PAGESIZE*2;PAGESIZEB is page size in BYTES, not words
.equ
.org SMALLBOOTSTART
Write_page:
;
Page Erase
ldi
call
spmcrval, (1<<PGERS) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
Do_spm
;
ldi
call
re-enable the RWW section
spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
Do_spm
;
transfer data from RAM to Flash page buffer
ldi
ldi
looplo, low(PAGESIZEB)
loophi, high(PAGESIZEB)
;init loop variable
;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256
Wrloop:
ld
r0, Y+
ld
r1, Y+
ldi
call
adiw
sbiw
brne
spmcrval, (1<<SELFPRGEN)
Do_spm
ZH:ZL, 2
loophi:looplo, 2
Wrloop
;use subi for PAGESIZEB<=256
;
execute Page Write
ZL, low(PAGESIZEB)
ZH, high(PAGESIZEB)
spmcrval, (1<<PGWRT) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
Do_spm
subi
sbci
ldi
call
;restore pointer
;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256
;
ldi
call
re-enable the RWW section
spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
Do_spm
258
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
;
read back and check, optional
ldi
ldi
subi
sbci
looplo, low(PAGESIZEB)
loophi, high(PAGESIZEB)
YL, low(PAGESIZEB)
;init loop variable
;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256
;restore pointer
YH, high(PAGESIZEB)
Rdloop:
lpm
r0, Z+
ld
r1, Y+
cpse
jmp
r0, r1
Error
sbiw
brne
loophi:looplo, 1
Rdloop
;use subi for PAGESIZEB<=256
;
;
return to RWW section
verify that RWW section is safe to read
Return:
in
temp1, SPMCSR
sbrs
temp1, RWWSB
If RWWSB is set, the RWW section is not
ready yet
ret
;
re-enable the RWW section
ldi
call
rjmp
spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
Do_spm
Return
Do_spm:
;
Wait_spm:
in
check for previous SPM complete
temp1, SPMCSR
sbrc
temp1, SELFPRGEN
rjmp
;
;
in
cli
;
Wait_spm
input: spmcrval determines SPM action
disable interrupts if enabled, store status
temp2, SREG
check that no EEPROM write access is present
Wait_ee:
sbic
rjmp
;
out
spm
;
EECR, EEPE
Wait_ee
SPM timed sequence
SPMCSR, spmcrval
restore SREG (to enable interrupts if originally enabled)
SREG, temp2
out
ret
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
259
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.26.8.14 ATmega328P Boot Loader Parameters
In Table 5-108 through Table 5-110, the parameters used in the description of the self programming are given.
Table 5-108. Boot Size Configuration, ATmega328P
Boot
Application
Flash
Section
Loader
Flash
Section
End
Application
Section
Boot
Size
Boot Reset Address (Start Boot
Loader Section)
BOOTSZ1 BOOTSZ0
Pages
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
256 words
512 words
1024 words
2048 words
4
8
0x0000 - 0x3EFF 0x3F00 - 0x3FFF
0x0000 - 0x3DFF 0x3E00 - 0x3FFF
0x0000 - 0x3BFF 0x3C00 - 0x3FFF
0x3EFF
0x3DFF
0x3BFF
0x37FF
0x3F00
0x3E00
0x3C00
0x3800
16
32
0
0x0000 - 0x37FF
0x3800 - 0x3FFF
Note:
The different BOOTSZ fuse configurations are shown in Figure 5-116 on page 252.
Table 5-109. Read-While-Write Limit, ATmega328P
Section
Pages
224
Address
Read-while-write section (RWW)
No read-while-write section (NRWW)
0x0000 - 0x37FF
0x3800 - 0x3FFF
32
For details about these two section, see Section 5.26.4.2 “NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section” on page 251 and Section
5.26.4.1 “RWW – Read-while-write Section” on page 251
Table 5-110. Explanation of Different Variables used in Figure 5-117 and the Mapping to the Z-pointer, ATmega328P
Corresponding
Variable
Z-value(1)
Description
Most significant bit in the program counter. (the program counter is
14 bits PC[13:0])
PCMSB
13
5
Most significant bit which is used to address the words within one
page (64 words in a page requires 6 bits PC [5:0])
PAGEMSB
ZPCMSB
Bit in Z-register that is mapped to PCMSB. Because Z0 is not
used, the ZPCMSB equals PCMSB + 1.
Z14
Z6
Bit in Z-register that is mapped to PAGEMSB. Because Z0 is not
used, the ZPAGEMSB equals PAGEMSB + 1.
ZPAGEMSB
PCPAGE
Program counter page address: Page select, for page erase and
page write
PC[13:6]
PC[5:0]
Z14:Z7
Z6:Z1
Program counter word address: Word select, for filling temporary
buffer (must be zero during page write operation)
PCWORD
Note:
1. Z15: always ignored
Z0: should be zero for all SPM commands, byte select for the LPM instruction.
See Section 5.26.7 “Addressing the Flash During Self-programming” on page 254 for details about the use of Z-pointer
during self-programming.
260
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.26.9 Register Description
5.26.9.1 SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register
The store program memory control and status register contains the control bits needed to control the boot loader operations.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x37 (0x57)
Read/Write
Initial Value
SPMIE RWWSB
–
RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SELFPRGEN SPMCSR
R/W
0
R
0
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
• Bit 7 – SPMIE: SPM Interrupt Enable
When the SPMIE bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the status register is set (one), the SPM ready interrupt will be enabled.
The SPM ready Interrupt will be executed as long as the SELFPRGEN bit in the SPMCSR register is cleared.
• Bit 6 – RWWSB: Read-While-Write Section Busy
When a self-programming (page erase or page write) operation to the RWW section is initiated, the RWWSB will be set
(one) by hardware. When the RWWSB bit is set, the RWW section cannot be accessed. The RWWSB bit will be cleared if
the RWWSRE bit is written to one after a self-programming operation is completed. Alternatively the RWWSB bit will
automatically be cleared if a page load operation is initiated.
• Bit 5 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATmega328P and always read as zero.
• Bit 4 – RWWSRE: Read-While-Write Section Read Enable
When programming (page erase or page write) to the RWW section, the RWW section is blocked for reading (the RWWSB
will be set by hardware). To re-enable the RWW section, the user software must wait until the programming is completed
(SELFPRGEN will be cleared). Then, if the RWWSRE bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM
instruction within four clock cycles re-enables the RWW section. The RWW section cannot be re-enabled while the flash is
busy with a page erase or a page write (SELFPRGEN is set). If the RWWSRE bit is written while the flash is being loaded,
the flash load operation will abort and the data loaded will be lost.
• Bit 3 – BLBSET: Boot Lock Bit Set
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles sets boot lock
bits and memory lock bits, according to the data in R0. The data in R1 and the address in the Z-pointer are ignored. The
BLBSET bit will automatically be cleared upon completion of the lock bit set, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four
clock cycles.
An LPM instruction within three cycles after BLBSET and SELFPRGEN are set in the SPMCSR register, will read either the
lock bits or the fuse bits (depending on Z0 in the Z-pointer) into the destination register. See Section 5.26.8.9 “Reading the
Fuse and Lock Bits from Software” on page 256 for details.
• Bit 2 – PGWRT: Page Write
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes page
write, with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in
R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a page write, or if no SPM instruction is executed
within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire page write operation if the NRWW section is addressed.
• Bit 1 – PGERS: Page Erase
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes page
erase. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will
auto-clear upon completion of a page erase, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted
during the entire page write operation if the NRWW section is addressed.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
261
9240I–AUTO–03/16
• Bit 0 – SELFPRGEN: Self Programming Enable
This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If written to one together with either RWWSRE, BLBSET,
PGWRT or PGERS, the following SPM instruction will have a special meaning, see description above. If only SELFPRGEN
is written, the following SPM instruction will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z-
pointer. The LSB of the Z-pointer is ignored. The SELFPRGEN bit will auto-clear upon completion of an SPM instruction, or
if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. During Page Erase and Page Write, the SELFPRGEN bit remains
high until the operation is completed.
Writing any other combination than “10001”, “01001”, “00101”, “00011” or “00001” in the lower five bits will have no effect.
5.27 Memory Programming
5.27.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits
The ATmega328P provides six lock bits which can be left unprogrammed (“1”) or can be programmed (“0”) to obtain the
additional features listed in Table 5-112. The Lock bits can only be erased to “1” with the chip erase command.The
ATmega328P has no separate boot loader section. The SPM instruction is enabled for the whole flash if the SELFPRGEN
fuse is programmed (“0”), otherwise it is disabled.
Table 5-111. Lock Bit Byte(1)
Lock Bit Byte
Bit No
Description
–
Default Value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 (unprogrammed)
1 (unprogrammed)
1 (unprogrammed)
1 (unprogrammed)
1 (unprogrammed)
1 (unprogrammed)
1 (unprogrammed)
1 (unprogrammed)
–
BLB12(2)
BLB11(2)
BLB02(2)
BLB01(2)
LB2
Boot lock bit
Boot lock bit
Boot lock bit
Boot lock bit
Lock bit
LB1
Lock bit
Notes: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
2. Only on ATmega328P
Table 5-112. Lock Bit Protection Modes(1)(2)
Memory Lock Bits
Protection Type
LB Mode
LB2
LB1
1
1
1
No memory lock features enabled.
Further programming of the flash and EEPROM is disabled in parallel and
serial programming mode. The fuse bits are locked in both serial and
parallel programming mode(1).
2
1
0
0
0
Further programming and verification of the flash and EEPROM is disabled
in Parallel and serial programming mode. The boot lock bits and fuse bits
are locked in both serial and parallel programming mode(1).
3
Notes: 1. Program the Fuse bits and Boot Lock bits before programming the LB1 and LB2.
2. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
262
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-113. Lock Bit Protection Modes(1)(2)
BLB0 Mode
BLB02
BLB01
1
2
1
1
1
0
No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the application section.
SPM is not allowed to write to the application section.
SPM is not allowed to write to the application section, and LPM executing
from the boot loader section is not allowed to read from the application
section. If interrupt vectors are placed in the boot loader section, interrupts
are disabled while executing from the application section.
3
4
0
0
0
1
LPM executing from the boot loader section is not allowed to read from the
application section. If interrupt vectors are placed in the boot loader section,
interrupts are disabled while executing from the application section.
BLB1 Mode
BLB12
BLB11
1
2
1
1
1
0
No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the boot loader section.
SPM is not allowed to write to the boot loader section.
SPM is not allowed to write to the boot loader section, and LPM executing
from the application section is not allowed to read from the boot loader
section. If interrupt vectors are placed in the application section, interrupts
are disabled while executing from the boot loader section.
3
0
0
LPM executing from the application section is not allowed to read from the
boot loader section. If interrupt vectors are placed in the application section,
interrupts are disabled while executing from the boot loader section.
4
0
1
Notes: 1. Program the fuse bits and boot lock bits before programming the LB1 and LB2.
2. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
5.27.2 Fuse Bits
The ATmega328P has three fuse bytes. Table 5-114 - Table 5-117 describe briefly the functionality of all the fuses and how
they are mapped into the Fuse bytes. Note that the fuses are read as logical zero, “0”, if they are programmed.
Table 5-114. Extended Fuse Byte for ATmega328P
Extended Fuse Byte
Bit No
Description
Default Value
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
1
–
–
1
–
–
1
–
–
1
–
–
1
–
–
1
–
–
1
SELFPRGEN
Self Programming Enable
1 (unprogrammed)
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
263
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-115. Extended Fuse Byte for ATmega328P
Extended Fuse Byte
Bit No
Description
Default Value
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
1
–
–
1
–
–
1
–
–
1
–
–
1
BODLEVEL2(1)
BODLEVEL1(1)
BODLEVEL0(1)
Brown-out detector trigger level
Brown-out detector trigger level
Brown-out detector trigger level
1 (unprogrammed)
1 (unprogrammed)
1 (unprogrammed)
Note:
1. See Table 5-132 on page 281 for BODLEVEL Fuse decoding.
Table 5-116. Fuse High Byte for ATmega328P
High Fuse Byte
RSTDISBL(1)
DWEN
Bit No
Description
Default Value
7
6
External reset disable
debugWIRE enable
1 (unprogrammed)
1 (unprogrammed)
Enable serial program and data
downloading
0 (programmed, SPI programming
enabled)
SPIEN(2)
WDTON(3)
EESAVE
5
4
3
Watchdog timer always on
1 (unprogrammed)
EEPROM memory is preserved
through the chip erase
1 (unprogrammed), EEPROM not
reserved
Select boot size (see Table 5-108
on page 260 for details)
BOOTSZ1
2
0 (programmed)(4)
Select boot size (see Table 5-108
on page 260 for details)
BOOTSZ0
BOOTRST
1
0
0 (programmed)(4)
1 (unprogrammed)
Select reset vector
Notes: 1. See Section 5.13.3.2 “Alternate Functions of Port C” on page 92 for description of RSTDISBL fuse.
2. The SPIEN Fuse is not accessible in serial programming mode.
3. See Section 5.10.9.2 “WDTCSR – Watchdog Timer Control Register” on page 71 for details.
4. The default value of BOOTSZ[1:0] results in maximum boot size. See Section 5-121 “Pin Name Mapping” on
page 266.
264
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-117. Fuse Low Byte
Low Fuse Byte
CKDIV8(4)
CKOUT(3)
SUT1
Bit No
Description
Default Value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Divide clock by 8
Clock output
0 (programmed)
1 (unprogrammed)
1 (unprogrammed)(1)
0 (programmed)(1)
0 (programmed)(2)
0 (programmed)(2)
1 (unprogrammed)(2)
0 (programmed)(2)
Select start-up time
Select start-up time
Select clock source
Select clock source
Select clock source
Select clock source
SUT0
CKSEL3
CKSEL2
CKSEL1
CKSEL0
Note:
1. The default value of SUT1..0 results in maximum start-up time for the default clock source. See Table 5-14 on
page 54 for details.
2. The default setting of CKSEL3..0 results in internal RC oscillator at 8MHz. See Table 5-13 on page 54 for
details.
3. The CKOUT fuse allows the system clock to be output on PORTB0. See Section 5.8.9 “Clock Output Buffer”
on page 56 for details.
4. See Section 5.8.11 “System Clock Prescaler” on page 56 for details.
The status of the fuse bits is not affected by chip erase. Note that the fuse bits are locked if Lock bit1 (LB1) is programmed.
Program the fuse bits before programming the lock bits.
5.27.2.1 Latching of Fuses
The fuse values are latched when the device enters programming mode and changes of the fuse values will have no effect
until the part leaves programming mode. This does not apply to the EESAVE Fuse which will take effect once it is
programmed. The fuses are also latched on power-up in normal mode.
5.27.3 Signature Bytes
All Atmel® microcontrollers have a three-byte signature code which identifies the device. This code can be read in both serial
and parallel mode, also when the device is locked. The three bytes reside in a separate address space. For the
ATmega328P the signature bytes are given in Table 5-118.
Table 5-118. Device ID
Signature Bytes Address
Part
0x000
0x001
0x002
ATmega328P
0x1E
0x95
0x0F
5.27.4 Calibration Byte
The ATmega328P has a byte calibration value for the Internal RC oscillator. This byte resides in the high byte of address
0x000 in the signature address space. During reset, this byte is automatically written into the OSCCAL register to ensure
correct frequency of the calibrated RC oscillator.
5.27.5 Page Size
Table 5-119. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the Flash
Device
Flash Size
Page Size
PCWORD
No. of Pages
PCPAGE
PCMSB
16K words
(32K bytes)
ATmega328P
64 words
PC[5:0]
256
PC[13:6]
13
Table 5-120. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the EEPROM
Device
EEPROM Size
Page Size
PCWORD
No. of Pages
PCPAGE
EEAMSB
ATmega328P
1K bytes
4 bytes
EEA[1:0]
256
EEA[9:2]
9
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
265
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.27.6 Parallel Programming Parameters, Pin Mapping, and Commands
This section describes how to parallel program and verify flash program memory, EEPROM data memory, memory lock bits,
and fuse bits in the ATmega328P. Pulses are assumed to be at least 250ns unless otherwise noted.
5.27.6.1 Signal Names
In this section, some pins of the ATmega328P are referenced by signal names describing their functionality during parallel
programming, see Figure 5-118 and Table 5-121. Pins not described in the following table are referenced by pin names.
The XA1/XA0 pins determine the action executed when the XTAL1 pin is given a positive pulse. The bit coding is shown in
Table 5-123.
When pulsing WR or OE, the command loaded determines the action executed. The different commands are shown in Table
5-124.
Figure 5-118. Parallel Programming
+4.5 to 5.5V
RDY/BSY
OE
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
VCC
+4.5 to 5.5V
WR
AVCC
BS1
PC[1:0]:PB[5:0]
DATA
XA0
XA1
PAGEL
+12V
BS2
RESET
PC2
XTAL1
GND
Note:
VCC – 0.3V < AVCC < VCC + 0.3V, however, AVCC should always be within 4.5 to 5.5V
Table 5-121. Pin Name Mapping
Signal Name in
Programming Mode
Pin Name
I/O Function
0: Device is busy programming, 1: Device is ready for
new command
RDY/BSY
PD1
O
OE
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
I
I
I
I
I
I
Output enable (active low)
Write pulse (active low)
WR
BS1
XA0
XA1
PAGEL
Byte select 1 (“0” selects low byte, “1” selects high byte)
XTAL action bit 0
XTAL action bit 1
Program memory and EEPROM data page load
Byte select 2 (“0” selects low byte, “1” selects 2’nd high
byte)
BS2
PC2
I
DATA
{PC[1:0]: PB[5:0]}
I/O Bi-directional data bus (output when OE is low)
266
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-122. Pin Values Used to Enter Programming Mode
Pin
PAGEL
XA1
Symbol
Value
Prog_enable[3]
Prog_enable[2]
Prog_enable[1]
Prog_enable[0]
0
0
0
0
XA0
BS1
Table 5-123. XA1 and XA0 Coding
XA1
XA0
Action when XTAL1 is Pulsed
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Load flash or EEPROM address (High or low address byte determined by BS1).
Load data (high or low data byte for flash determined by BS1).
Load command
No action, idle
Table 5-124. Command Byte Bit Coding
Command Byte
1000 0000
0100 0000
0010 0000
0001 0000
0001 0001
0000 1000
0000 0100
0000 0010
0000 0011
Command Executed
Chip erase
Write fuse bits
Write lock bits
Write flash
Write EEPROM
Read signature bytes and calibration byte
Read fuse and lock bits
Read flash
Read EEPROM
5.27.7 Parallel Programming
5.27.7.1 Enter Programming Mode
The following algorithm puts the device in parallel (high-voltage) programming mode:
1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 5-122 on page 267 to “0000”, RESET pin to 0V and VCC to 0V.
2. Apply 4.5 to 5.5V between VCC and GND.
Ensure that VCC reaches at least àpçV within the next 20µs.
3. Wait 20 to 60µs, and apply 11.5 to 12.5V to RESET.
4. Keep the Prog_enable pins unchanged for at least 10µs after the high-voltage has been applied to ensure the
Prog_enable signature has been latched.
5. Wait at least 300µs before giving any parallel programming commands.
6. Exit programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V.
If the rise time of the VCC is unable to fulfill the requirements listed above, the following alternative algorithm can be used.
1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 5-122 on page 267 to “0000”, RESET pin to 0V and VCC to 0V.
2. Apply 4.5 to 5.5V between VCC and GND.
3. Monitor VCC, and as soon as VCC reaches 0.9 - 1.1V, apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET.
4. Keep the Prog_enable pins unchanged for at least 10µs after the high-voltage has been applied to ensure the
Prog_enable signature has been latched.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
267
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5. Wait until VCC actually reaches 4.5 to 5.5V before giving any parallel programming commands.
6. Exit programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V.
5.27.7.2 Considerations for Efficient Programming
The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For efficient programming, the following
should be considered.
●
●
The command needs only be loaded once when writing or reading multiple memory locations.
Skip writing the data value 0xFF, that is the contents of the entire EEPROM (unless the EESAVE Fuse is
programmed) and flash after a chip erase.
●
Address high byte needs only be loaded before programming or reading a new 256 word window in flash or 256 byte
EEPROM. This consideration also applies to signature bytes reading.
5.27.7.3 Chip Erase
The chip erase will erase the flash and EEPROM(1) memories plus lock bits. The lock bits are not reset until the program
memory has been completely erased. The fuse bits are not changed. A chip erase must be performed before the flash
and/or EEPROM are reprogrammed.
Note:
1. The EEPRPOM memory is preserved during chip erase if the EESAVE fuse is programmed.
Load command “Chip Erase”
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.
2. Set BS1 to “0”.
3. Set DATA to “1000 0000”. This is the command for chip erase.
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command.
5. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts the chip erase. RDY/BSY goes low.
6. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high before loading a new command.
5.27.7.4 Programming the Flash
The flash is organized in pages, see Table 5-119 on page 265. When programming the flash, the program data is latched into
a page buffer. This allows one page of program data to be programmed simultaneously. The following procedure describes
how to program the entire Flash memory:
A. Load command “Write Flash”
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.
2. Set BS1 to “0”.
3. Set DATA to “0001 0000”. This is the command for write flash.
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command.
B. Load address low byte
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading.
2. Set BS1 to “0”. This selects low address.
3. Set DATA = Address low byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address low byte.
C. Load data low byte
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading.
2. Set DATA = Data low byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.
D. Load data high byte
1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte.
2. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading.
3. Set DATA = Data high byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.
268
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
E. Latch Data
1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte.
2. Give PAGEL a positive pulse. This latches the data bytes. (See Figure 5-120 for signal waveforms)
F. Repeat B through E until the entire buffer is filled or until all data within the page is loaded.
While the lower bits in the address are mapped to words within the page, the higher bits address the pages within the
FLASH. This is illustrated in Figure 5-119 on page 269. Note that if less than eight bits are required to address words in the
page (pagesize < 256), the most significant bit(s) in the address low byte are used to address the page when performing a
page write.
G. Load address high byte
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading.
2. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high address.
3. Set DATA = Address high byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address high byte.
H. Program Page
1. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the entire page of data. RDY/BSY goes low.
2. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high (See Figure 5-120 for signal waveforms).
I. Repeat B through H until the entire flash is programmed or until all data has been programmed.
J. End page programming
1. 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.
2. Set DATA to “0000 0000”. This is the command for no operation.
3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command, and the internal write signals are reset.
Figure 5-119. Addressing the Flash Which is Organized in Pages(1)
PCMSB
PAGEMSB
PCWORD
PROGRAM
COUNTER
PCPAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN PAGE
Program Memory
Page
Page
Instructions Word
PCWORD [PAGEMSB : 0]
00
01
02
PAGEEND
Note:
1. PCPAGE and PCWORD are listed in Table 5-119 on page 265.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
269
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-120. Programming the Flash Waveforms(1)
F
A
B
C
D
E
B
C
D
E
G
H
I
0x10
ADDR. LOW DATA LOW DATA HIGH
XX
ADDR. LOW DATA LOW DATA HIGH
XX
ADDR. HIGH ADDR.EXT.H
XX
DATA
XA1
XA0
BS1
XTAL1
WR
RDY/BSY
RESET +12V
OE
PAGEL
BS2
Note:
1. “XX” is don’t care. The letters refer to the programming description above.
5.27.7.5 Programming the EEPROM
The EEPROM is organized in pages, see Table 5-120 on page 265. When programming the EEPROM, the program data is
latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of data to be programmed simultaneously. The programming algorithm for
the EEPROM data memory is as follows (refer to Section 5.27.7.4 “Programming the Flash” on page 268 for details on
Command, Address and Data loading):
1. A: Load command “0001 0001”.
2. G: Load address high byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. B: Load address low byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. C: Load data (0x00 - 0xFF).
5. E: Latch data (give PAGEL a positive pulse).
K: Repeat 3 through 5 until the entire buffer is filled.
L: Program EEPROM page
1. Set BS1 to “0”.
2. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the EEPROM page. RDY/BSY goes low.
3. Wait until to RDY/BSY goes high before programming the next page (See Figure 5-121 on page 271 for signal
waveforms).
270
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-121. Programming the EEPROM Waveforms
K
A
G
B
C
E
B
C
E
L
DATA
XA1
0x11
ADDR. HIGH ADDR. LOW
DATA
XX
ADDR. LOW
DATA
XX
XA0
BS1
XTAL1
WR
RDY/BSY
RESET +12V
OE
PAGEL
BS2
5.27.7.6 Reading the Flash
The algorithm for reading the flash memory is as follows (refer to Section 5.27.7.4 “Programming the Flash” on page 268 for
details on command and address loading):
1. A: Load command “0000 0010”.
2. G: Load address high byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. B: Load address low byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The flash word low byte can now be read at DATA.
5. Set BS1 to “1”. The flash word high byte can now be read at DATA.
6. Set OE to “1”.
5.27.7.7 Reading the EEPROM
The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to Section 5.27.7.4 “Programming the Flash” on page
268 for details on command and address loading):
1. A: Load command “0000 0011”.
2. G: Load address high byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. B: Load address low byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The EEPROM data byte can now be read at DATA.
5. Set OE to “1”.
5.27.7.8 Programming the Fuse Low Bits
The algorithm for programming the fuse low bits is as follows (refer to Section 5.27.7.4 “Programming the Flash” on page
268 for details on command and data loading):
1. A: Load command “0100 0000”.
2. C: Load data low byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the fuse bit.
3. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
271
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.27.7.9 Programming the Fuse High Bits
The algorithm for programming the fuse high bits is as follows (refer to Section 5.27.7.4 “Programming the Flash” on page
268 for details on command and data loading):
1. A: Load command “0100 0000”.
2. C: Load data low byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit.
3. Set BS1 to “1” and BS2 to “0”. This selects high data byte.
4. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.
5. Set BS1 to “0”. This selects low data byte.
5.27.7.10 Programming the Extended Fuse Bits
The algorithm for programming the extended fuse bits is as follows (refer to Section 5.27.7.4 “Programming the Flash” on
page 268 for details on command and data loading):
1. A: Load command “0100 0000”.
2. C: Load data low byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the fuse bit.
3. Set BS1 to “0” and BS2 to “1”. This selects extended data byte.
4. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.
5. Set BS2 to “0”. This selects low data byte.
Figure 5-122. Programming the FUSES Waveforms
Write Fuse Low byte
Write Fuse High byte
XX
Write Extended Fuse byte
XX
A
C
A
C
A
C
DATA
XA1
XA0
BS1
0x40
DATA
XX
0x40
DATA
0x40
DATA
BS2
XTAL1
WR
RDY/BSY
RESET +12V
OE
PAGEL
5.27.7.11 Programming the Lock Bits
The algorithm for programming the lock bits is as follows (refer to Section 5.27.7.4 “Programming the Flash” on page 268 for
details on command and data loading):
1. A: Load command “0010 0000”.
2. C: Load data low byte. Bit n = “0” programs the lock bit. If LB mode 3 is programmed (LB1 and LB2 is pro-
grammed), it is not possible to program the boot lock bits by any external programming mode.
3. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.
The lock bits can only be cleared by executing chip erase.
272
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.27.7.12 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits
The algorithm for reading the fuse and lock bits is as follows (refer to Section 5.27.7.4 “Programming the Flash” on page 268
for details on command loading):
1. A: Load command “0000 0100”.
2. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “0” and BS1 to “0”. The status of the fuse low bits can now be read at DATA (“0” means
programmed).
3. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “1” and BS1 to “1”. The status of the fuse high bits can now be read at DATA (“0” means
programmed).
4. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “1”, and BS1 to “0”. The status of the extended fuse bits can now be read at DATA (“0”
means programmed).
5. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “0” and BS1 to “1”. The status of the lock bits can now be read at DATA (“0” means
programmed).
6. Set OE to “1”.
Figure 5-123. Mapping between BS1, BS2 and the Fuse and Lock Bits During Read
Fuse Low Byte
0
0
1
Extended Fuse Byte
Lock Bits
1
0
DATA
BS2
BS1
Fuse High Byte
1
BS2
5.27.7.13 Reading the Signature Bytes
The algorithm for reading the signature bytes is as follows (refer to Section 5.27.7.4 “Programming the Flash” on page 268
for details on command and address loading):
1. A: Load command “0000 1000”.
2. B: Load address low byte (0x00 - 0x02).
3. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The selected signature byte can now be read at DATA.
4. Set OE to “1”.
5.27.7.14 Reading the Calibration Byte
The algorithm for reading the calibration byte is as follows (refer to Section 5.27.7.4 “Programming the Flash” on page 268
for details on command and address loading):
1. A: Load command “0000 1000”.
2. B: Load address Low Byte, 0x00.
3. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “1”. The calibration byte can now be read at DATA.
4. Set OE to “1”.
5.27.7.15 Parallel Programming Characteristics
For characteristics of the parallel programming, see Section 5.28.9 “Parallel Programming Characteristics” on page 285.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
273
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.27.8 Serial Downloading
Both the flash and EEPROM memory arrays can be programmed using the serial SPI bus while RESET is pulled to GND.
The serial interface consists of pins SCK, MOSI (input) and MISO (output). After RESET is set low, the programming enable
instruction needs to be executed first before program/erase operations can be executed. NOTE, in Table 5-125 on page 274,
the pin mapping for SPI programming is listed. Not all parts use the SPI pins dedicated for the internal SPI interface.
Figure 5-124. Serial Programming and Verify(1)
+1.8V to 5.5V
VCC
+1.8V to 5.5V(2)
MOSI
MISO
AVCC
SCK
XTAL1
RESET
GND
Notes: 1. If the device is clocked by the internal oscillator, it is no need to connect a clock source to the XTAL1 pin.
2.
VCC - 0.3V < AVCC < VCC + 0.3V, however, AVCC should always be within 2.7 - 5.5V
When programming the EEPROM, an auto-erase cycle is built into the self-timed programming operation (in the serial mode
ONLY) and there is no need to first execute the chip erase instruction. The chip erase operation turns the content of every
memory location in both the program and EEPROM arrays into 0xFF.
Depending on CKSEL fuses, a valid clock must be present. The minimum low and high periods for the serial clock (SCK)
input are defined as follows:
Low: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck ≥ 12MHz
High: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck ≥ 12MHz
5.27.8.1 Serial Programming Pin Mapping
Table 5-125. Pin Mapping Serial Programming
Symbol
MOSI
MISO
SCK
Pins
PB3
PB4
PB5
I/O
Description
Serial data in
Serial data out
Serial clock
I
O
I
274
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.27.8.2 Serial Programming Algorithm
When writing serial data to the ATmega328P, data is clocked on the rising edge of SCK.
When reading data from the ATmega328P, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK. See Figure 5-126 for timing details.
To program and verify the ATmega328P in the serial programming mode, the following sequence is recommended (See
serial programming instruction set in Table 5-127 on page 276):
1. Power-up sequence:
Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. In some systems, the programmer can
not guarantee that SCK is held low during power-up. In this case, RESET must be given a positive pulse of at
least two CPU clock cycles duration after SCK has been set to “0”.
2. Wait for at least 20ms and enable serial programming by sending the programming enable serial instruction to pin
MOSI.
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of synchronization. When in sync.
the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing the third byte of the programming enable instruction. Whether
the echo is correct or not, all four bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the 0x53 did not echo back, give
RESET a positive pulse and issue a new programming enable command.
4. The flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at a time by supplying the 6
LSB of the address and data together with the load program memory page instruction. To ensure correct loading
of the page, the data low byte must be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given address. The program
memory page is stored by loading the write program memory page instruction with the 7 MSB of the address. If
polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH before issuing the next page (See Table 5-
126). Accessing the serial programming interface before the flash write operation completes can result in incorrect
programming.
5. A: The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and data together with the
appropriate write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is first automatically erased before new data is writ-
ten. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte (See
Table 5-126). In a chip erased device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed.
B: The EEPROM array is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at a time by sup-
plying the 6 LSB of the address and data together with the Load EEPROM memory page instruction. The
EEPROM memory page is stored by loading the Write EEPROM memory page Instruction with the 7 MSB of the
address. When using EEPROM page access only byte locations loaded with the load EEPROM memory page
instruction is altered. The remaining locations remain unchanged. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the used must
wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte (See Table 5-126). In a chip erased device, no 0xFF in the
data file(s) need to be programmed.
6. Any memory location can be verified by using the read instruction which returns the content at the selected
address at serial output MISO.
7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal operation.
8. Power-off sequence (if needed):
Set RESET to “1”.
Turn VCC power off.
Table 5-126. Typical Wait Delay Before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location
Symbol
tWD_FLASH
tWD_EEPROM
tWD_ERASE
Minimum Wait Delay
4.5ms
3.6ms
9.0ms
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
275
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.27.8.3 Serial Programming Instruction set
Table 5-127 on page 276 and Figure 5-125 on page 277 describes the Instruction set.
Table 5-127. Serial Programming Instruction Set (Hexadecimal Values)
Instruction Format
Instruction/Operation
Programming enable
Byte 1
$AC
Byte 2
Byte 3
$00
Byte4
$00
$53
$80
$00
Chip erase (program memory/EEPROM)
Poll RDY/BSY
$AC
$00
$00
$F0
$00
data byte out
Load Instructions
Load extended address byte(1)
Load program memory page, high byte
Load program memory page, low byte
Load EEPROM memory page (page access)
Read Instructions
$4D
$48
$40
$C1
$00
$00
$00
$00
Extended adr
adr LSB
$00
high data byte in
low data byte in
data byte in
adr LSB
0000 000aa
Read program memory, high byte
Read program memory, low byte
Read EEPROM memory
Read lock bits
$28
$20
$A0
$58
$30
$50
$58
$50
$38
adr MSB
adr MSB
0000 00aa
$00
adr LSB
adr LSB
aaaa aaaa
$00
high data byte out
low data byte out
data byte out
data byte out
data byte out
data byte out
data byte out
data byte out
data byte out
Read signature byte
$00
0000 000aa
$00
Read fuse bits
$00
Read fuse high bits
$08
$00
Read extended fuse bits
$08
$00
Read calibration byte
$00
$00
Write Instructions(6)
Write program memory page
Write EEPROM memory
Write EEPROM memory page (page access)
Write lock bits
$4C
$C0
$C2
$AC
$AC
$AC
$AC
adr MSB
0000 00aa
0000 00aa
$E0
adr LSB
aaaa aaaa
aaaa aa00
$00
$00
data byte in
$00
data byte in
data byte in
data byte in
data byte in
Write fuse bits
$A0
$00
Write fuse high bits
$A8
$00
Write extended fuse bits
$A4
$00
Notes: 1. Not all instructions are applicable for all parts.
2. a = address.
3. Bits are programmed ‘0’, unprogrammed ‘1’.
4. To ensure future compatibility, unused fuses and lock bits should be unprogrammed (‘1’).
5. Refer to the corresponding section for fuse and lock bits, calibration and signature bytes and page size.
6. Instructions accessing program memory use a word address. This address may be random within the page range.
7. See http://www.atmel.com/avr for application notes regarding programming and programmers.
If the LSB in RDY/BSY data byte out is ‘1’, a programming operation is still pending. Wait until this bit returns ‘0’ before the
next instruction is carried out.
Within the same page, the low data byte must be loaded prior to the high data byte.
After data is loaded to the page buffer, program the EEPROM page, see Figure 5-125 on page 277.
276
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-125. Serial Programming Instruction Example
Serial Programming Instruction
Load Program Memory Page (High/Low Byte)/
Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access)
Write Program Memory Page /
Write EEPROM Memory Page
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Adr MBS
Adr LBS
Adr MBS
Adr LBS
Bit 15 B
0
Bit 15 B
0
Page Buffer
Page Offset
Page 0
Page 1
Page 2
Page Number
Page N-1
Program Memory /
EEPROM Memory
5.27.8.4 SPI Serial Programming Characteristics
Figure 5-126. Serial Programming Waveforms
SERIAL DATA INPUT
MSB
LSB
LSB
(MOSI)
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT
MSB
(MISO)
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT
(SCK)
SAMPLE
For characteristics of the SPI module see Section 5.28.6 “SPI Timing Characteristics” on page 281.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
277
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.28 Electrical Characteristics
All DC/AC characteristics contained in this datasheet are based on characterization of ATmega328P AVR® microcontroller
manufactured in an automotive process technology.
5.28.1 DC Characteristics
Tcase = –40°C to 125°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)
Parameter
Condition
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Input low voltage, except
XTAL1 and RESET pin
(1)
VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V
VIL
–0.5
0.3VCC
V
Input high voltage, except
XTAL1 and RESET pins
(2)
(2)
(2)
VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V
VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V
VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V
VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V
VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V
VIH
VIL1
VIH1
VIL2
VIH2
VOL
VOH
IIL
0.6VCC
–0.5
VCC + 0.5
V
V
Input low voltage,
XTAL1 pin
(1)
0.1VCC
Input high voltage,
XTAL1 pin
0.7VCC
–0.5
VCC + 0.5
V
Input low voltage,
RESET pin
(1)
0.1VCC
V
Input high voltage,
RESET pin
0.9VCC
VCC + 0.5
V
IOL = 20mA, VCC = 5V
IOL = 5mA, VCC = 3V
0.8
0.5
Output low voltage(3)
V
IOH = –20mA, VCC = 5V
IOH = –10mA, VCC = 3V
4.1
2.3
Output high voltage(4)
V
VCC = 5.5V, pin low
(absolute value)
Input leakage current I/O pin
Input leakage current I/O pin
1
1
µA
µA
VCC = 5.5V, pin high
(absolute value)
IIH
Reset pull-up resistor
I/O pin pull-up resistor
RRST
RPU
30
20
60
50
k
k
0.4V < Vin < VCC – 0.5
(absolute value)
Analog comparator input
offset voltage
VACIO
10
40
50
mV
nA
Analog comparator input
leakage current
VCC = 5V
Vin = VCC/2
IACLK
–50
Notes: 1. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low
2. “Min” means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high
3. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (20mA at VCC = 5V, 10 mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
ATmega328P:
1] The sum of all IOL, for ports C0 - C5, should not exceed 100mA.
2] The sum of all IOL, for ports B0 - B5, D5 - D7, XTAL1, XTAL2 should not exceed 100mA.
3] The sum of all IOL, for ports D0 - D4, should not exceed 100mA.
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current
greater than the listed test condition.
4. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (20mA at VCC = 5V, 10mA at VCC = 3V) under steady
state conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
ATmega328P:
1] The sum of all IOH, for ports C0 - C5, D0- D4, should not exceed 150mA.
2] The sum of all IOH, for ports B0 - B5, D5 - D7, XTAL1, XTAL2 should not exceed 150mA.
If IIOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to source current
greater than the listed test condition.
278
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.28.2 DC Characteristics
Tcase = –40°C to 125°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)
Symbol Parameter
Condition
Min.
Typ.(2)
1.5
Max.
2.4
10
Unit
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
µA
Active 4MHz, VCC = 3V
Active 8MHz, VCC = 5V
Active 16MHz, VCC = 5V
Idle 4MHz, VCC = 3V
Idle 8MHz, VCC = 5V
Idle 16MHz, VCC = 5V
WDT enabled, VCC = 3V
WDT enabled, VCC = 5V
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V
WDT disabled, VCC = 5V
5.2
9.2
14
Power Supply Current(1)
0.25
1.0
0.6
1.6
2.8
44
ICC
1.9
66
µA
Power-down mode(3)
40
µA
60
µA
Notes: 1. Values with “Minimizing Power Consumption” enabled (0xFF).
2. Typical values at 25°C.
3. The current consumption values include input leakage current.
5.28.3 Speed Grades
Figure 5-127. Maximum Frequency
16MHz
8MHz
Safe Operating Area
2.7V
4.5V
5.5V
5.28.4 Clock Characteristics
5.28.4.1 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator Accuracy
Table 5-128. Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator
Frequency
VCC
3V
2.7V - 5.5V
Temperature
25°C
Calibration Accuracy
±2%
Factory
8.0MHz
Calibration
–40°C - 125°C
±14%
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
279
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.28.4.2 Watchdog Oscillator Accuracy
Table 5-129. Accuracy of Watchdog Oscillator
Parameter
Condition
VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Watchdog oscillator frequency
Fwdt
76
128
180
kHz
5.28.4.3 External Clock Drive Waveforms
Figure 5-128. External Clock Drive Waveforms
tCHCX
tCHCX
tCLCH
tCHCL
VIH1
VIL1
tCLCX
tCLCL
5.28.4.4 External Clock Drive
Table 5-130. External Clock Drive
VCC = 2.7-5.5V
VCC = 4.5-5.5V
Min. Max.
Parameter
Oscillator frequency
High time
Symbol
1/tCLCL
tCHCX
Min.
Max.
Unit
MHz
ns
0
8
0
20
50
50
25
25
Low time
tCLCX
ns
Rise time
tCLCH
1.6
1.6
0.5
0.5
ns
Fall time
tCHCL
ns
Change in period from one clock
cycle to the next
tCLCL
2
2
%
Note:
All DC/AC characteristics contained in this datasheet are based on characterization of ATmega328P AVR® microcon-
troller manufactured in an automotive process technology.
5.28.5 System and Reset Characteristics
Table 5-131. Reset, Brown-out and Internal Voltage Characteristics
Parameter
Condition
Symbol
VHYST
VBG
Min
Typ
80
Max
Unit
mV
V
Brown-out detector hysteresis
Bandgap reference voltage
VCC = 5V
1.0
1.1
1.2
280
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Table 5-132. BODLEVEL Fuse Coding(1)
BODLEVEL 2:0 Fuses
Min VBOT
Typ VBOT
BOD Disabled
Max VBOT
Unit
111
110
101
100
011
010
001
000
Reserved
2.7
2.5
4.0
2.9
4.6
V
4.3
Reserved
Notes: 1. VBOT may be below nominal minimum operating voltage for some devices. For devices where this is the case, the
device is tested down to VCC = VBOT during the production test. This guarantees that a brown-out reset will occur before
VCC drops to a voltage where correct operation of the microcontroller is no longer guaranteed. The test is performed
using BODLEVEL = 100 and BODLEVEL = 101 for ATmega328P.
5.28.6 SPI Timing Characteristics
See Figure 5-129 and Figure 5-130 for details.
Table 5-133. SPI Timing Parameters
No.
1
Description
SCK period
SCK high/low
Rise/Fall time
Setup
Mode
Master
Master
Master
Master
Master
Master
Master
Master
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
See Table 5-68
2
50% duty cycle
3
3.6
10
4
5
Hold
10
6
Out to SCK
SCK to out
SCK to out high
SS low to out
SCK period
SCK high/low(1)
Rise/Fall time
Setup
0.5 tsck
10
7
8
10
9
15
ns
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
4 tck
2 tck
1600
10
tck
Hold
SCK to out
SCK to SS high
SS high to tri-state
SS low to SCK
15
10
20
18
20
Note:
1. In SPI Programming mode the minimum SCK high/low period is:
- 2 tCLCL for fCK < 12MHz
- 3 tCLCL for fCK > 12MHz
All AC/AC characteristics contained in this datasheet are based on characterization of ATmega328P AVR® microcontroller manufac-
tured in an automotive process technology.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
281
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-129. SPI Interface Timing Requirements (Master Mode)
SS
6
1
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
2
2
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
4
5
3
MISO
MSB
...
...
LSB
(Data Input)
8
7
MOSI
(Data Output)
MSB
LSB
Figure 5-130. SPI Interface Timing Requirements (Slave Mode)
SS
16
9
10
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
11
11
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
13
14
12
MOSI
MSB
...
...
LSB
(Data Input)
17
15
MISO
(Data Output)
MSB
LSB
X
282
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.28.7 2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics
Table 5-134 describes the requirements for devices connected to the 2-wire serial bus. The ATmega328P 2-wire serial
interface meets or exceeds these requirements under the noted conditions.
Timing symbols refer to Figure 5-131.
Table 5-134. 2-wire Serial Bus Requirements
Parameter
Condition
Symbol
VIL
Min
-0.5
Max
0.3 VCC
VCC + 0.5
–
Unit
V
Input low-voltage
Input high-voltage
VIH
0.7 VCC
V
(1)
(2)
Hysteresis of Schmitt trigger inputs
Output low-voltage
Vhys
0.05 VCC
V
(1)
3 mA sink current
10pF < Cb < 400pF(3)
0.1VCC < Vi < 0.9VCC
VOL
tr(1)
0
0.4
V
(2)(3)
(2)(3)
Rise time for both SDA and SCL
Output fall time from VIHmin to VILmax
Spikes suppressed by input filter
Input current each I/O pin
Capacitance for each I/O pin
SCL clock frequency
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
ns
ns
µA
pF
kHz
(1)
tof
20 + 0.1Cb
250
50(2)
(1)
tSP
Ii
Ci(1)
0
-10
–
10
10
fCK(4) > max(16fSCL, 250kHz)(5) fSCL
0
400
VCC – 0,4V
---------------------------
3mA
1000ns
----------------
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
Cb
Value of pull-up resistor
Rp
VCC – 0,4V
---------------------------
3mA
300ns
-------------
fSCL > 100kHz
Cb
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
4.0
0.6
4.7
1.3
4.0
0.6
4.7
0.6
0
–
–
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
ns
ns
µs
µs
µs
µs
Hold time (repeated) START condition
Low period of the SCL clock
High period of the SCL clock
Set-up time for a repeated START condition
Data hold time
tHD;STA
fSCL > 100kHz
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
fSCL > 100kHz
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
fSCL > 100kHz
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
fSCL > 100kHz
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
fSCL > 100kHz
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
fSCL > 100kHz
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
fSCL > 100kHz
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
fSCL > 100kHz
–
tLOW
–
–
tHIGH
–
–
tSU;STA
tHD;DAT
tSU;DAT
tSU;STO
tBUF
–
3.45
0.9
–
0
250
100
4.0
0.6
4.7
1.3
Data setup time
–
–
Setup time for STOP condition
–
–
Bus free time between a STOP and START
condition
–
Notes: 1. In ATmega328P, this parameter is characterized and not 100% tested.
2. Required only for fSCL > 10 kHz.
3. Cb = capacitance of one bus line in pF.
4.
fCK = CPU clock frequency
5. This requirement applies to all ATmega328P 2-wire serial interface operation. Other devices connected to the 2-wire
serial bus need only obey the general fSCL requirement.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
283
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-131. 2-wire Serial Bus Timing
tof
tHIGH
tr
tLOW
tLOW
SCL
SDA
tHD,STA
tHD,DAT
tSU,DAT
tHD,STA
tSU,STA
tBUF
5.28.8 ADC Characteristics
Table 5-135. ADC Characteristics
Parameter
Condition
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
–40°C +125°C / 2.70 - 5.50V
ADC clock = 200kHz
Resolution
10
bits
Absolute accuracy
Integral non linearity
Differential non linearity
Gain error
VCC = 4.0V, VRef = 4.0V
VCC = 4.0V, VRef = 4.0V
VCC = 4.0V, VRef = 4.0V
VCC = 4.0V, VRef = 4.0V
VCC = 4.0V, VRef = 4.0V
TUE
INL
2.2
0.6
0.3
3.5
1.5
0.7
3.5
3.5
200
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
kHz
V
DNL
–3.5
–3.5
Offset error
Clock frequency
50
Analog supply voltage
Reference voltage
Input voltage
AVCC
VRef
Vin
VCC – 0.3
1.0
VCC +0.3
AVCC
VRef
V
GND
1.0
V
Internal voltage reference
Reference input resistance
Analog input resistance
VCC = 5v
Vint
1.1
32
1.2
V
Rref
Rain
22.4
41.6
k
M
100
284
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.28.9 Parallel Programming Characteristics
Table 5-136. Parallel Programming Characteristics, VCC = 5V ±10%
Parameter
Symbol
VPP
Min
Typ
Max
12.5
250
Unit
V
Programming enable voltage
Programming enable current
Data and control valid before XTAL1 high
XTAL1 low to XTAL1 high
XTAL1 pulse width high
11.5
IPP
µA
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
µs
ms
ms
ns
ns
ns
ns
tDVXH
tXLXH
tXHXL
tXLDX
tXLWL
tXLPH
tPLXH
tBVPH
tPHPL
tPLBX
tWLBX
tPLWL
tBVWL
tWLWH
tWLRL
tWLRH
tWLRH_CE
tXLOL
tBVDV
tOLDV
tOHDZ
67
200
150
67
0
Data and control hold after XTAL1 low
XTAL1 low to WR low
XTAL1 low to PAGEL high
PAGEL low to XTAL1 high
BS1 valid before PAGEL high
PAGEL pulse width high
BS1 hold after PAGEL low
BS2/1 hold after WR Low
PAGEL low to WR low
0
150
67
150
67
67
67
67
150
0
BS1 valid to WR low
WR pulse width low
WR low to RDY/BSY low
WR low to RDY/BSY high(1)
WR low to RDY/BSY high for chip erase(2)
XTAL1 low to OE low
1
4.5
9
3.7
7.5
0
BS1 valid to DATA valid
0
250
250
250
OE low to DATA valid
OE high to DATA tri-stated
Notes: 1. tWLRH is valid for the write flash, write EEPROM, write fuse bits and write lock bits commands.
2. WLRH_CE is valid for the chip erase command.
t
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
285
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-132. Parallel Programming Timing, Including some General Timing Requirements
tXLWL
XTAL1
tXHXL
tDVXH
tXLDX
Data and Control
(DATA, XA0/1, BS1, BS2)
tBVPH
tPLBX
tBVWL
tWLBX
PAGEL
WR
tPHPL
tWLWH
tPLWL
tWLRL
RDY/BSY
tWLRH
Figure 5-133. Parallel Programming Timing, Loading Sequence with Timing Requirements(1)
Load Address
(Low Byte)
Load Data
(Low Byte)
Load Data
(High Byte)
Load Address
(Low Byte)
Load Data
tXLPH
tXLXH
tPLXH
XTAL1
BS1
PAGEL
DATA
ADDR0 (Low Byte)
DATA (Low Byte)
DATA (High Byte)
ADDR1 (Low Byte)
XA0
XA1
Note:
1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 5-132 (i.e., tDVXH, tXHXL, and tXLDX) also apply to loading operation.
Figure 5-134. Parallel Programming Timing, Reading Sequence (within the Same Page) with Timing
Requirements(1)
Load Address
(Low Byte)
Read Data
(Low Byte)
Read Data
(High Byte)
Load Address
(Low Byte)
tXLOL
XTAL1
BS1
tBVDV
tOLDV
OE
tOHDZ
DATA
ADDR0 (Low Byte)
DATA (Low Byte)
DATA (High Byte)
ADDR1 (Low Byte)
XA0
XA1
Note:
1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 5-132 (i.e., tDVXH, tXHXL, and tXLDX) also apply to reading operation.
286
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.29 Typical Characteristics
The data contained in this section are characterized values of actual automotive silicon. Unless otherwise specified, the data
contained in this chapter are for –40° to 125°C.
The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing. All current consumption
measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and with internal pull-ups enabled. A square wave
generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock source.
All active- and idle current consumption measurements are done with all bits in the PRR register set and thus, the
corresponding I/O modules are turned off. Also the analog comparator is disabled during these measurements. The “Supply
Current of IO Modules” shows the additional current consumption compared to ICC active and ICC idle for every I/O module
controlled by the power reduction register. See Section 5.9.9 “Power Reduction Register” on page 60 for details.
The power consumption in power-down mode is independent of clock selection.
The current consumption is a function of several factors such as: operating voltage, operating frequency, loading of I/O pins,
switching rate of I/O pins, code executed and ambient temperature. The dominating factors are operating voltage and
frequency.
The current drawn from capacitive loaded pins may be estimated (for one pin) as CL*VCC*f where CL = load capacitance,
VCC = operating voltage and f = average switching frequency of I/O pin.
The parts are characterized at frequencies higher than test limits. Parts are not guaranteed to function properly at
frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates.
The difference between current consumption in power-down mode with watchdog timer enabled and power-down mode with
watchdog timer disabled represents the differential current drawn by the watchdog timer.
5.29.1 ATmega328P Typical Characteristics
5.29.1.1 Active Supply Current
Figure 5-135. Active Supply Current versus Frequency
16
14
12
10
5.5
5.0
8
4.5
3.6
3.3
3.0
2.7
6
4
2
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Frequency (MHz)
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
287
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-136. Idle Supply Current versus Frequency
4
3.5
3
2.5
2
5.5
5.0
4.5
3.6
3.3
3.0
2.7
1.5
1
0.5
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Frequency (MHz)
5.29.1.2 Power-down Supply Current
Figure 5-137. Power-down Supply Current versus VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled)
25
20
15
10
5
125
85
25
-45
0
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
VCC (V)
Figure 5-138. Power-down Supply Current versus VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled)
35
30
25
125
85
20
25
-45
15
10
5
0
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
VCC (V)
288
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.29.1.3 Pin Pull-Up
Figure 5-139. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current versus Input Voltage (VCC = 5V)
160
140
120
100
80
125
85
25
-45
60
40
20
0
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
VOP (V)
Figure 5-140. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current versus Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 5V)
120
100
80
125
85
60
25
-45
40
20
40
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
VRESET (V)
5.29.1.4 Pin Driver Strength
Figure 5-141. I/O Pin Output Voltage versus Sink Current (VCC = 3V)
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
125
85
25
-45
0.4
0.2
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
IOL (mA)
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
289
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-142. I/O Pin Output Voltage versus Sink Current (VCC = 5V)
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
125
85
25
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
-45
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
IOL (mA)
Figure 5-143. I/O Pin Output Voltage versus Source Current (VCC = 3V)
3.5
3
2.5
2
125
85
25
1.5
1
-45
0.5
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
IOH (mA)
Figure 5-144. I/O Pin Output Voltage versus Source Current (VCC = 5V)
5.1
5.0
4.9
4.8
4.7
125
85
25
4.6
-45
4.5
4.4
4.3
4.2
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
IOH (mA)
290
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.29.1.5 Pin Threshold and Hysteresis
Figure 5-145. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage versus VCC (VIH, I/O Pin read as ‘1’)
3.5
3
2.5
125
85
2
25
1.5
-45
1
0.5
0
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
VCC (V)
Figure 5-146. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage versus VCC (VIL, I/O Pin read as ‘0’)
2.5
2
1.5
1
125
85
25
-45
0.5
0
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
VCC (V)
Figure 5-147. Reset Input Threshold Voltage versus VCC (VIH, I/O Pin read as ‘1’)
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
291
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 5-148. Reset Input Threshold Voltage versus VCC (VIL, I/O Pin read as ‘0’)
2.5
2
1.5
1
125
85
25
-45
0.5
0
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
VCC (V)
5.29.1.6 BOD Threshold
Figure 5-149. BOD Thresholds versus Temperature (BODLEVEL is 2.7V)
3.0
2.9
2.8
2.7
2.6
2.5
2.4
1
0
-60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
Temperature (°C)
Figure 5-150. BOD Thresholds versus Temperature (BODLEVEL is 4.3V)
4.6
4.5
4.4
4.3
4.2
4.1
4
1
0
-60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
Temperature (°C)
292
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.29.1.7 Internal Oscillator Speed
Figure 5-151. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency versus Temperature
160
150
140
130
5.5
5.0
4.5
3.3
3.0
2.7
120
110
100
90
80
-40 -30 -20 -10
0
10
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Temperature (°C)
Figure 5-152. Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency versus Temperature
8.4
8.3
8.2
8.1
5.5
5.0
4.5
3.3
3.0
2.7
8.0
7.9
7.8
7.7
7.6
-45 -35 -25 -15
-5
5
15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 115 125
Temperature (°C)
Figure 5-153. Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency versus OSCCAL Value
16
14
12
10
125
85
25
8
6
-45
4
2
0
0
50
100
150
200
250
OSCCAL (X1)
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
293
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.30 Register Summary
Address
(0xFF)
(0xFE)
(0xFD)
(0xFC)
(0xFB)
(0xFA)
(0xF9)
(0xF8)
(0xF7)
(0xF6)
(0xF5)
(0xF4)
(0xF3)
(0xF2)
(0xF1)
(0xF0)
(0xEF)
(0xEE)
(0xED)
(0xEC)
(0xEB)
(0xEA)
(0xE9)
(0xE8)
(0xE7)
(0xE6)
(0xE5)
(0xE4)
(0xE3)
(0xE2)
(0xE1)
(0xE0)
(0xDF)
(0xDE)
(0xDD)
(0xDC)
(0xDB)
Name
Bit 7
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit 6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit 5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit 4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit 3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit 2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit 1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit 0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Page
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory
addresses should never be written.
2. I/O registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVR®s, the CBI and
SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such status
flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O
registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The ATmega328P is a
complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for
the IN and OUT instructions. For the extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and
LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
294
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.30 Register Summary (Continued)
Address
(0xDA)
(0xD9)
(0xD8)
(0xD7)
(0xD6)
(0xD5)
(0xD4)
(0xD3)
(0xD2)
(0xD1)
(0xD0)
(0xCF)
(0xCE)
(0xCD)
(0xCC)
(0xCB)
(0xCA)
(0xC9)
(0xC8)
(0xC7)
(0xC6)
(0xC5)
(0xC4)
(0xC3)
Name
Bit 7
–
Bit 6
–
Bit 5
–
Bit 4
–
Bit 3
–
Bit 2
–
Bit 1
–
Bit 0
–
Page
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
UDR0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
USART I/O data register
USART baud rate register high
USART baud rate register low
180
184
184
UBRR0H
UBRR0L
Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UCSZ01
/UDORD0 UCPHA0
UCSZ00 /
(0xC2)
UCSR0C UMSEL01 UMSEL00
UPM01
UPM00
USBS0
UCPOL0
183/193
(0xC1)
(0xC0)
(0xBF)
(0xBE)
(0xBD)
(0xBC)
(0xBB)
(0xBA)
(0xB9)
(0xB8)
(0xB7)
(0xB6)
UCSR0B
UCSR0A
Reserved
Reserved
TWAMR
TWCR
RXCIE0
RXC0
–
TXCIE0
TXC0
–
UDRIE0
UDRE0
–
RXEN0
FE0
TXEN0
DOR0
–
UCSZ02
UPE0
–
RXB80
TXB80
182
181
U2X0
MPCM0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
TWAM0
–
TWAM6
TWINT
TWAM5
TWEA
TWAM4
TWSTA
TWAM3
TWSTO
TWAM2
TWWC
TWAM1
TWEN
–
222
219
221
222
221
219
TWIE
TWDR
2-wire serial interface data register
TWAR
TWA6
TWS7
TWA5
TWS6
TWA4
TWS5
TWA3
TWS4
TWA2
TWS3
TWA1
–
TWA0
TWGCE
TWPS0
TWSR
TWPS1
TWBR
2-wire serial interface bit rate register
Reserved
ASSR
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
EXCLK
AS2
TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB
155
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory
addresses should never be written.
2. I/O registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVR®s, the CBI and
SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such status
flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O
registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The ATmega328P is a
complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for
the IN and OUT instructions. For the extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and
LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
295
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.30 Register Summary (Continued)
Address
(0xB5)
(0xB4)
(0xB3)
(0xB2)
(0xB1)
(0xB0)
(0xAF)
(0xAE)
(0xAD)
(0xAC)
(0xAB)
(0xAA)
(0xA9)
(0xA8)
(0xA7)
(0xA6)
(0xA5)
(0xA4)
(0xA3)
(0xA2)
(0xA1)
(0xA0)
(0x9F)
(0x9E)
(0x9D)
(0x9C)
(0x9B)
(0x9A)
(0x99)
(0x98)
(0x97)
(0x96)
(0x95)
(0x94)
(0x93)
(0x92)
(0x91)
(0x90)
Name
Reserved
OCR2B
OCR2A
TCNT2
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Page
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Timer/Counter2 output compare register B
Timer/Counter2 output compare register A
Timer/Counter2 (8-bit)
154
154
154
153
150
TCCR2B
FOC2A
FOC2B
–
–
WGM22
CS22
–
CS21
CS20
TCCR2A COM2A1 COM2A0
COM2B1
COM2B0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
WGM21
WGM20
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory
addresses should never be written.
2. I/O registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVR®s, the CBI and
SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such status
flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O
registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The ATmega328P is a
complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for
the IN and OUT instructions. For the extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and
LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
296
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.30 Register Summary (Continued)
Address
(0x8F)
(0x8E)
(0x8D)
(0x8C)
(0x8B)
(0x8A)
(0x89)
(0x88)
(0x87)
(0x86)
(0x85)
(0x84)
(0x83)
(0x82)
(0x81)
(0x80)
(0x7F)
(0x7E)
(0x7D)
(0x7C)
(0x7B)
(0x7A)
(0x79)
(0x78)
(0x77)
(0x76)
(0x75)
(0x74)
(0x73)
(0x72)
(0x71)
(0x70)
(0x6F)
(0x6E)
(0x6D)
(0x6C)
(0x6B)
(0x6A)
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Page
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
OCR1BH
OCR1BL
OCR1AH
OCR1AL
ICR1H
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Timer/Counter1 - Output compare register B high byte
Timer/Counter1 - Output compare register B low byte
Timer/Counter1 - Output compare register A high byte
Timer/Counter1 - Output compare register A low byte
Timer/Counter1 - Input capture register high byte
Timer/Counter1 - Input capture register low byte
Timer/Counter1 - Counter register high byte
134
134
134
134
135
135
134
134
ICR1L
TCNT1H
TCNT1L
Reserved
TCCR1C
TCCR1B
Timer/Counter1 - Counter register low byte
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FOC1A
ICNC1
FOC1B
ICES1
–
–
–
–
–
134
133
131
225
241
–
COM1B1
–
WGM13
WGM12
CS12
–
CS11
WGM11
AIN1D
ADC1D
–
CS10
WGM10
AIN0D
ADC0D
–
TCCR1A COM1A1 COM1A0
COM1B0
–
–
DIDR1
DIDR0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ADC5D
–
ADC4D
ADC3D
–
ADC2D
–
Reserved
ADMUX
ADCSRB
ADCSRA
ADCH
–
–
–
REFS1
–
REFS0
ACME
ADSC
ADLAR
–
MUX3
–
MUX2
ADTS2
ADPS2
MUX1
ADTS1
ADPS1
MUX0
ADTS0
ADPS0
237
241
239
240
240
–
ADEN
ADATE
ADIF
ADIE
ADC data register high byte
ADC data register low byte
ADCL
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
TIMSK2
TIMSK1
TIMSK0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
OCIE2B
OCIE1B
OCIE0B
OCIE2A
OCIE1A
OCIE0A
PCINT17
PCINT9
PCINT1
–
TOIE2
TOIE1
TOIE0
PCINT16
PCINT8
PCINT0
–
154
135
111
81
ICIE1
–
–
–
PCMSK2 PCINT23 PCINT22
PCINT21
PCINT13
PCINT5
–
PCINT20
PCINT12
PCINT4
–
PCINT19 PCINT18
PCMSK1
PCMSK0
Reserved
–
PCINT7
–
PCINT14
PCINT6
–
PCINT11
PCINT3
–
PCINT10
PCINT2
–
81
81
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory
addresses should never be written.
2. I/O registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVR®s, the CBI and
SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such status
flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O
registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The ATmega328P is a
complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for
the IN and OUT instructions. For the extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and
LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
297
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.30 Register Summary (Continued)
Address
(0x69)
Name
EICRA
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
ISC11
–
Bit 2
ISC10
PCIE2
–
Bit 1
ISC01
PCIE1
–
Bit 0
ISC00
PCIE0
–
Page
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
78
(0x68)
PCICR
Reserved
OSCCAL
Reserved
PRR
(0x67)
–
(0x66)
Oscillator calibration register
57
60
(0x65)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(0x64)
PRTWI
PRTIM2
PRTIM0
–
PRTIM1
PRSPI
PRUSART0
PRADC
(0x63)
Reserved
Reserved
CLKPR
WDTCSR
SREG
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(0x62)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(0x61)
CLKPCE
–
–
–
CLKPS3
CLKPS2
CLKPS1
CLKPS0
57
71
34
37
37
(0x60)
WDIF
WDIE
WDP3
WDCE
WDE
WDP2
WDP1
WDP0
0x3F (0x5F)
0x3E (0x5E)
0x3D (0x5D)
I
T
H
S
–
V
–
N
Z
SP9
SP1
–
C
SP8
SP0
–
SPH
–
–
–
(SP10)
SPL
SP7
SP6
SP5
SP4
–
SP3
–
SP2
0x3C (0x5C) Reserved
0x3B (0x5B) Reserved
0x3A (0x5A) Reserved
0x39 (0x59) Reserved
0x38 (0x58) Reserved
0x37 (0x57) SPMCSR
0x36 (0x56) Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SPMIE
(RWWSB)
–
(RWWSRE) BLBSET
PGWRT
PGERS SELFPRGEN
261
–
–
–
–
–
PUD
–
–
–
–
–
–
IVSEL
EXTRF
SM0
–
–
IVCE
PORF
SE
0x35 (0x55)
0x34 (0x54)
0x33 (0x53)
MCUCR
MCUSR
SMCR
BODS
BODSE
62/76/96
71
–
–
–
–
WDRF
SM2
–
BORF
SM1
–
–
–
–
59
0x32 (0x52) Reserved
0x31 (0x51) Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ACBG
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0x30 (0x50)
ACSR
ACD
–
ACO
–
ACI
–
ACIE
–
ACIC
–
ACIS1
–
ACIS0
–
224
0x2F (0x4F) Reserved
0x2E (0x4E)
0x2D (0x4D)
0x2C (0x4C)
SPDR
SPSR
SPCR
SPI Data Register
164
164
163
47
SPIF
SPIE
WCOL
SPE
–
–
–
–
–
SPI2X
SPR0
DORD
MSTR
CPOL
CPHA
SPR1
0x2B (0x4B) GPIOR2
0x2A (0x4A) GPIOR1
0x29 (0x49) Reserved
General purpose I/O register 2
General purpose I/O register 1
47
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0x28 (0x48)
0x27 (0x47)
0x26 (0x46)
OCR0B
OCR0A
TCNT0
Timer/Counter0 output compare register B
Timer/Counter0 output compare register A
Timer/Counter0 (8-bit)
0x25 (0x45) TCCR0B
FOC0A
FOC0B
–
–
WGM02
–
CS02
–
CS01
CS00
0x24 (0x44) TCCR0A COM0A1 COM0A0
COM0B1
COM0B0
WGM01
WGM00
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory
addresses should never be written.
2. I/O registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVR®s, the CBI and
SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such status
flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O
registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The ATmega328P is a
complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for
the IN and OUT instructions. For the extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and
LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
298
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.30 Register Summary (Continued)
Address
Name
GTCCR
EEARH
EEARL
EEDR
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Page
138/156
43
0x23 (0x43)
0x22 (0x42)
0x21 (0x41)
0x20 (0x40)
0x1F (0x3F)
TSM
–
–
–
–
–
PSRASY
PSRSYNC
(EEPROM address register high byte)
EEPROM address register low byte
EEPROM data register
43
44
EECR
–
–
EEPM1
EEPM0
EERIE
EEMPE
EEPE
EERE
44
0x1E (0x3E) GPIOR0
General purpose I/O register 0
47
0x1D (0x3D)
0x1C (0x3C)
0x1B (0x3B)
EIMSK
EIFR
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
INT1
INT0
79
–
–
–
–
INTF1
INTF0
79
PCIFR
–
–
–
PCIF2
PCIF1
PCIF0
0x1A (0x3A) Reserved
0x19 (0x39) Reserved
0x18 (0x38) Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0x17 (0x37)
0x16 (0x36)
0x15 (0x35)
TIFR2
TIFR1
TIFR0
–
–
–
OCF2B
OCF2A
TOV2
155
136
ICF1
–
–
OCF1B
OCF1A
TOV1
–
–
–
OCF0B
OCF0A
TOV0
0x14 (0x34) Reserved
0x13 (0x33) Reserved
0x12 (0x32) Reserved
0x11 (0x31) Reserved
0x10 (0x30) Reserved
0x0F (0x2F) Reserved
0x0E (0x2E) Reserved
0x0D (0x2D) Reserved
0x0C (0x2C) Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0x0B (0x2B)
0x0A (0x2A)
0x09 (0x29)
0x08 (0x28)
0x07 (0x27)
0x06 (0x26)
0x05 (0x25)
0x04 (0x24)
0x03 (0x23)
PORTD
DDRD
PIND
PORTD7 PORTD6
PORTD5
DDD5
PIND5
PORTC5
DDC5
PINC5
PORTB5
DDB5
PINB5
–
PORTD4
DDD4
PIND4
PORTC4
DDC4
PINC4
PORTB4
DDB4
PINB4
–
PORTD3
DDD3
PIND3
PORTC3
DDC3
PINC3
PORTB3
DDB3
PINB3
–
PORTD2
DDD2
PIND2
PORTC2
DDC2
PINC2
PORTB2
DDB2
PINB2
–
PORTD1
DDD1
PIND1
PORTC1
DDC1
PINC1
PORTB1
DDB1
PINB1
–
PORTD0
DDD0
PIND0
PORTC0
DDC0
PINC0
PORTB0
DDB0
PINB0
–
97
97
97
97
97
97
96
96
97
DDD7
DDD6
PIND6
PORTC6
DDC6
PINC6
PORTB6
DDB6
PINB6
–
PIND7
PORTC
DDRC
PINC
–
–
–
PORTB
DDRB
PINB
PORTB7
DDB7
PINB7
0x02 (0x22) Reserved
0x01 (0x21) Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0x0 (0x20)
Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory
addresses should never be written.
2. I/O registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVR®s, the CBI and
SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such status
flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O
registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The ATmega328P is a
complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for
the IN and OUT instructions. For the extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and
LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
299
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.31 Instruction Set Summary
Mnemonics
Operands
Description
Operation
Flags
#Clocks
Arithmetic and Logic Instructions
ADD
ADC
Rd, Rr
Rd, Rr
Rdl,K
Rd, Rr
Rd, K
Rd, Rr
Rd, K
Rdl,K
Rd, Rr
Rd, K
Rd, Rr
Rd, K
Rd, Rr
Rd
Add two registers
Add with carry two registers
Add immediate to word
Subtract two registers
Subtract constant from register
Subtract with carry two registers
Subtract with carry constant from reg.
Subtract immediate from word
Logical AND registers
Logical AND register and constant
Logical OR registers
Rd Rd + Rr
Rd Rd + Rr + C
Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl + K
Rd Rd - Rr
Z,C,N,V,H
Z,C,N,V,H
Z,C,N,V,S
Z,C,N,V,H
Z,C,N,V,H
Z,C,N,V,H
Z,C,N,V,H
Z,C,N,V,S
Z,N,V
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
ADIW
SUB
SUBI
SBC
Rd Rd - K
Rd Rd - Rr - C
Rd Rd - K - C
Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl - K
Rd Rd Rr
SBCI
SBIW
AND
ANDI
OR
Rd Rd K
Z,N,V
Rd Rd v Rr
Z,N,V
ORI
Logical OR register and constant
Exclusive OR registers
One’s complement
Rd Rd v K
Z,N,V
EOR
Rd Rd Rr
Z,N,V
COM
NEG
Rd 0xFF Rd
Rd 0x00 Rd
Rd Rd v K
Z,C,N,V
Z,C,N,V,H
Z,N,V
Rd
Two’s complement
SBR
Rd,K
Rd,K
Rd
Set Bit(s) in register
CBR
Clear Bit(s) in register
Increment
Rd Rd (0xFF - K)
Rd Rd + 1
Z,N,V
INC
Z,N,V
DEC
Rd
Decrement
Rd Rd 1
Z,N,V
TST
Rd
Test for zero or minus
Clear register
Rd Rd Rd
Z,N,V
CLR
Rd
Rd Rd Rd
Rd 0xFF
Z,N,V
SER
Rd
Set register
None
MUL
Rd, Rr
Rd, Rr
Rd, Rr
Rd, Rr
Rd, Rr
Rd, Rr
Multiply unsigned
R1:R0 Rd x Rr
R1:R0 Rd x Rr
R1:R0 Rd x Rr
R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1
R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1
R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1
Z,C
MULS
MULSU
FMUL
FMULS
FMULSU
Branch Instructions
RJMP
IJMP
Multiply signed
Z,C
Multiply signed with unsigned
Fractional multiply unsigned
Fractional multiply signed
Fractional multiply signed with unsigned
Z,C
Z,C
Z,C
Z,C
k
Relative jump
Indirect jump to (Z)
PC PC + k + 1
PC Z
None
None
2
2
JMP
k
k
Direct jump
PC k
None
3
3
RCALL
ICALL
CALL
RET
Relative subroutine call
Indirect call to (Z)
PC PC + k + 1
PC Z
None
None
3
k
Direct subroutine call
Subroutine return
PC k
None
4
PC STACK
None
4
RETI
Interrupt return
PC STACK
I
4
CPSE
CP
Rd,Rr
Rd,Rr
Rd,Rr
Rd,K
Rr, b
Rr, b
P, b
Compare, skip if equal
Compare
if (Rd = Rr) PC PC + 2 or 3
Rd Rr
None
1/2/3
1
Z, N,V,C,H
Z, N,V,C,H
Z, N,V,C,H
None
CPC
Compare with carry
Rd Rr C
1
CPI
Compare register with immediate
Skip if Bit in register cleared
Skip if Bit in register is set
Skip if Bit in I/O register cleared
Skip if Bit in I/O register is set
Rd K
1
SBRC
SBRS
SBIC
SBIS
if (Rr(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3
if (Rr(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3
if (P(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3
if (P(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3
1/2/3
1/2/3
1/2/3
1/2/3
None
None
P, b
None
300
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.31 Instruction Set Summary (Continued)
Mnemonics
BRBS
BRBC
BREQ
BRNE
BRCS
BRCC
BRSH
BRLO
BRMI
Operands
Description
Branch if status flag set
Branch if status flag cleared
Branch if equal
Operation
Flags
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
#Clocks
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
s, k
s, k
k
if (SREG(s) = 1) then PCPC+k + 1
if (SREG(s) = 0) then PCPC+k + 1
if (Z = 1) then PC PC + k + 1
if (Z = 0) then PC PC + k + 1
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1
if (N = 1) then PC PC + k + 1
if (N = 0) then PC PC + k + 1
if (N V= 0) then PC PC + k + 1
if (N V= 1) then PC PC + k + 1
if (H = 1) then PC PC + k + 1
if (H = 0) then PC PC + k + 1
if (T = 1) then PC PC + k + 1
if (T = 0) then PC PC + k + 1
if (V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1
if (V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1
if ( I = 1) then PC PC + k + 1
if ( I = 0) then PC PC + k + 1
k
Branch if not equal
k
Branch if carry set
k
Branch if carry cleared
Branch if same or higher
Branch if lower
k
k
k
Branch if minus
BRPL
BRGE
BRLT
k
Branch if plus
k
Branch if greater or equal, signed
Branch if less than zero, signed
Branch if half carry flag set
Branch if half carry flag cleared
Branch if T flag set
k
BRHS
BRHC
BRTS
BRTC
BRVS
BRVC
BRIE
k
k
k
k
Branch if T flag cleared
Branch if overflow flag is set
Branch if overflow flag is cleared
Branch if interrupt enabled
Branch if interrupt disabled
k
k
k
BRID
k
Bit and Bit-test Instructions
SBI
CBI
P,b
P,b
Rd
Rd
Rd
Rd
Rd
Rd
s
Set Bit in I/O register
Clear Bit in I/O register
Logical shift left
I/O(P,b) 1
None
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I/O(P,b) 0
None
LSL
Rd(n+1) Rd(n), Rd(0) 0
Z,C,N,V
LSR
ROL
ROR
ASR
SWAP
BSET
BCLR
BST
BLD
SEC
CLC
SEN
CLN
SEZ
CLZ
SEI
Logical shift right
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), Rd(7) 0
Z,C,N,V
Rotate left through carry
Rotate right through carry
Arithmetic shift right
Swap nibbles
Rd(0)C,Rd(n+1) Rd(n),CRd(7)
Z,C,N,V
Rd(7)C,Rd(n) Rd(n+1),CRd(0)
Z,C,N,V
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), n=0..6
Z,C,N,V
Rd(3..0)Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)Rd(3..0)
None
Flag set
SREG(s) 1
SREG(s) 0
T Rr(b)
Rd(b) T
C 1
SREG(s)
s
Flag clear
SREG(s)
Rr, b
Rd, b
Bit store from register to T
Bit load from T to register
Set carry
T
None
C
C
N
N
Z
Clear carry
C 0
Set negative flag
N 1
Clear negative flag
Set zero flag
N 0
Z 1
Clear zero flag
Z 0
Z
Global interrupt enable
Global interrupt disable
Set signed test flag
Clear signed test flag
Set twos complement overflow.
Clear twos complement overflow
Set T in SREG
I 1
I
CLI
I 0
I
SES
CLS
SEV
CLV
SET
S 1
S
S 0
S
V 1
V
V 0
V
T 1
T
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
301
9240I–AUTO–03/16
5.31 Instruction Set Summary (Continued)
Mnemonics
CLT
Operands
Description
Operation
T 0
Flags
#Clocks
Clear T in SREG
T
H
H
1
1
1
SEH
Set half carry flag in SREG
Clear half carry flag in SREG
H 1
CLH
H 0
Data Transfer Instructions
MOV
MOVW
LDI
LD
Rd, Rr
Rd, Rr
Rd, K
Move between registers
Copy register word
Rd Rr
Rd+1:Rd Rr+1:Rr
Rd K
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
-
Load immediate
Rd, X
Load indirect
Rd (X)
LD
Rd, X+
Rd, - X
Rd, Y
Load indirect and post-inc.
Load indirect and pre-dec.
Load indirect
Rd (X), X X + 1
X X - 1, Rd (X)
Rd (Y)
LD
LD
LD
Rd, Y+
Rd, - Y
Rd,Y+q
Rd, Z
Load indirect and post-inc.
Load indirect and pre-dec.
Load indirect with displacement
Load indirect
Rd (Y), Y Y + 1
Y Y - 1, Rd (Y)
Rd (Y + q)
Rd (Z)
LD
LDD
LD
LD
Rd, Z+
Rd, -Z
Rd, Z+q
Rd, k
Load indirect and post-inc.
Load indirect and pre-dec.
Load indirect with displacement
Load direct from SRAM
Store indirect
Rd (Z), Z Z+1
Z Z - 1, Rd (Z)
Rd (Z + q)
Rd (k)
LD
LDD
LDS
ST
X, Rr
(X) Rr
ST
X+, Rr
- X, Rr
Y, Rr
Store indirect and post-inc.
Store indirect and pre-dec.
Store indirect
(X) Rr, X X + 1
X X - 1, (X) Rr
(Y) Rr
ST
ST
ST
Y+, Rr
- Y, Rr
Y+q,Rr
Z, Rr
Store indirect and post-inc.
Store indirect and pre-dec.
Store indirect with displacement
Store indirect
(Y) Rr, Y Y + 1
Y Y - 1, (Y) Rr
(Y + q) Rr
ST
STD
ST
(Z) Rr
ST
Z+, Rr
-Z, Rr
Z+q,Rr
k, Rr
Store indirect and post-inc.
Store indirect and pre-dec.
Store indirect with displacement
Store direct to SRAM
Load program memory
Load program memory
Load program memory and post-inc
Store program memory
In port
(Z) Rr, Z Z + 1
Z Z - 1, (Z) Rr
(Z + q) Rr
ST
STD
STS
LPM
LPM
LPM
SPM
IN
(k) Rr
R0 (Z)
Rd, Z
Rd (Z)
Rd, Z+
Rd (Z), Z Z+1
(Z) R1:R0
Rd, P
P, Rr
Rr
Rd P
1
1
2
2
OUT
PUSH
POP
Out port
P Rr
Push register on stack
Pop register from stack
STACK Rr
Rd STACK
Rd
MCU Control Instructions
NOP
SLEEP
WDR
No operation
Sleep
None
None
None
None
1
1
(see specific descr. for Sleep function)
(see specific descr. for WDR/timer)
For On-chip Debug Only
Watchdog reset
Break
1
BREAK
N/A
302
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
6.
Application
Figure 6-1. Typical LIN Slave Application
C1
100nF
PB4 PB3
PB5
1
2
36
100nF
PB5
MCUVCC
C2
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
100nF
MCUAVCC
ADC6
AREF
GND4
ADC7
PC0
GND1
PD4
220pF
3
4
PD3
LIN
5
LIN
6
Atmel
ATA6614Q
GND
WAKE
NTRIG
EN
7
8
PC1
9
PC2
VBAT
GND
10
11
12
PC3
VS
PC4
VCC
PVCC
PC5
PVCC
+
100nF
22μF
+
100nF 100nF
10μF
PC6
10kΩ
47kΩ
KL_15
INH
1
*
MODE
PB4
PB5
PVCC
PB3
*
10kΩ
51kΩ
PC6
ISP
*
The MODE pin can be connected directly to GND, if it is not needed to disable the Watchdog
Note:
All open pins of the SiP can be used for application-specific purposes.
AVR®: Internal clock, no ADC application, TXD, RXD, NRES, EN and NTRIG connected for LIN slave. The
connection between the LIN-SBC and the AVR requires the software being programmed correspondingly.
SBC: LIN slave operation with watchdog, 5V regulator and KL15 wake up
RF emissions: Best results for RF emissions will be achieved by connecting the blocking capacitors of the
microcontroller supply (C1 and C2) between the microcontroller pins and the GND/PVCC line. See also Figure
6-1.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
303
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 6-2. Typical LIN Master Application
1
PB4
PB5
PC6
PVCC
PB3
22pF
22pF
XTAL
C1
100nF
ISP
PB4 PB3
PB5
1
2
36
100nF
PB5
MCUVCC
C2
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
100nF
MCUAVCC
ADC6
AREF
GND4
ADC7
PC0
GND1
PD4
560pF
3
4
PD3
LIN
5
LIN
6
Atmel
ATA6614Q
GND
WAKE
NTRIG
EN
2.7kΩ
WAKE
7
8
PC1
9
10kΩ
PC2
VBAT
GND
10
11
12
PC3
VS
PC4
VCC
PVCC
PVCC
100nF
PC5
1kΩ
+
+
100nF
MODE
10μF
22μF
51kΩ
*
*
PC6
10kΩ
10kΩ
*
The MODE pin can be connected directly to GND, if it is not needed to disable the Watchdog
Note:
All open pins of the SiP can be used for application-specific purposes.
AVR®: TXD, RXD, NRES and EN connected for LIN master. The connection between the LIN-SBC and the
AVR requires the software being programmed correspondingly. Analog digital converter not active; system
clock from external crystal.
LIN-SBC: Master application with 5V regulator and watchdog, 1k Master resistance connected via diode to
VBAT, local wake up via pin WAKE.
RF emissions: Best results for RF emissions will be achieved by connecting the blocking capacitors of the
microcontroller supply (C1 and C2) between the microcontroller pins and the GND/PVCC line. See also Figure
6-2.
304
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 6-3. Typical LIN Master Application
LIN Master Pull-up Switched Off during Sleep Mode
1
PB4
PB5
PC6
PVCC
PB3
22pF
22pF
XTAL
C1
100nF
ISP
PB4 PB3
PB5
1
2
36
100nF
PB5
MCUVCC
C2
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
100nF
MCUAVCC
ADC6
AREF
GND4
ADC7
PC0
GND1
PD4
560pF
3
10kΩ
4
PD3
LIN
5
LIN
6
Atmel
ATA6614Q
GND
WAKE
NTRIG
EN
2.7kΩ
WAKE
7
8
PC1
9
10kΩ
PC2
VBAT
GND
10
11
12
PC3
VS
PC4
VCC
PVCC
PVCC
100nF
PC5
1kΩ
+
22μF
+
51kΩ
100nF
MODE
10μF
*
PC6
*
10kΩ
10kΩ
*
The MODE pin can be connected directly to GND, if it is not needed to disable the Watchdog
Note:
All open pins of the SiP can be used for application-specific purposes.
AVR®: TXD, RXD, NRES and EN connected for LIN master. The connection between the LIN-SBC and the
AVR requires the software being programmed correspondingly. Analog digital converter not active; system
clock from external crystal.
LIN-SBC: Master application with 5V regulator and watchdog, 1k Master resistance connected via diode and
INH output to VBAT, local wake up via pin WAKE.
RF emissions: Best results for RF emissions will be achieved by connecting the blocking capacitors of the
microcontroller supply (C1 and C2) between the microcontroller pins and the GND/PVCC line. See also Figure
6-3.
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
305
9240I–AUTO–03/16
Figure 6-4. LIN Slave Application with Minimum External Components
C1
100nF
PB4 PB3
PB5
1
2
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
100nF
PB5
MCUVCC
GND1
PD4
C2
MCUAVCC
ADC6
AREF
GND4
ADC7
PC0
100nF
220pF
3
4
PD3
LIN
5
LIN
6
Atmel
ATA6614Q
GND
WAKE
NTRIG
EN
7
8
PC1
9
PC2
VBAT
GND
10
11
12
PC3
VS
PC4
VCC
PVCC
PC5
PVCC
+
100nF
22μF
+
100nF
10μF
10kΩ
PC6
1
PB4
PB5
PVCC
PB3
PC6
ISP
Note:
All open pins of the SiP can be used for application-specific purposes.
AVR®: Internal clock, no ADC application, TXD, RXD, NRES and EN connected for LIN slave. The connection
between the LIN-SBC and the AVR requires the software being programmed correspondingly.
SBC: LIN slave operation with 5V regulator, no watchdog, no local wake-up.
RF emissions: Best results for RF emissions will be achieved by connecting the blocking capacitors of the
microcontroller supply (C1 and C2) between the microcontroller pins and the GND/PVCC line. See also Figure
6-4.
306
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
7.
8.
Ordering Information
Extended Type Number
Program Memory
Package
MOQ
ATA6614Q-PLQW-1
32kB flash
QFN48, 77
4,000 pieces
Package Information
Top View
D
48
1
PIN 1 ID
technical drawings
according to DIN
specifications
Dimensions in mm
12
Side View
Bottom View
D2
13
24
25
12
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
Symbol MIN
NOM
0.85
0.035
0.21
7
MAX NOTE
A
A1
A3
D
0.8
0.9
0.05
0.26
7.1
1
0
36
0.16
6.9
5.5
6.9
5.5
0.35
0.2
A
48
37
e
D2
E
5.6
5.7
7
7.1
E2
L
5.6
5.7
A (10:1)
0.4
0.45
0.3
b
0.25
0.5
e
b
05/20/14
TITLE
DRAWING NO.
REV.
GPC
Package Drawing Contact:
packagedrawings@atmel.com
Package: QFN_7x7_48L
Exposed pad 5.6x5.6
6.543-5188.03-4
1
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
307
9240I–AUTO–03/16
9.
Revision History
Please note that the following page numbers referred to in this section refer to the specific revision mentioned, not to this
document.
Revision No.
History
Fixed typo to correct value to match with PPAP in Table 3-1 “Maximum Ratings of the
SiP” on page 5
9240I-AUTO-03/16
Section 2 “Pin Configuration” on pages 3 to 4 updated
Section 3 “Absolute Maximum Ratings” on pages 5 to 6 added
Section 4.4.2 “Silent Mode” on page 12 updated
Section 6 “Application” on pages 303 to 306 updated
Section 7 “Ordering Information” on page 307 updated
Section 8 “Package Information” on page 307 updated
Section 8 “Ordering Information” on page 364 updated
Set datasheet from Preliminary to Standard
9240H-AUTO-10/14
9240G-AUTO-11/12
9240F-AUTO-10/12
ATmega88P and ATmega168P references removed
Section 4 “Absolute Maximum Ratings” on page 24 updated
Section 6.1 “Features” on page 31 updated
9240E-AUTO-07/12
9240D-AUTO-06/12
Section 4 “Absolute Maximum Ratings” on page 24 updated
Section 6 “Microcontroller Block” on pages 31 to 359 updated
Section 6.28.1 “Absolute Maximum Ratings” on page 340 changed
Section 6.28.2 “DC Characteristics” on page 340 changed
ATA6614P renamed to ATA6614Q on all pages
9240C-AUTO-05/12
General Features on page 1 changed
Table 2-1 “Pin Description” on page 3 changed
9240B-AUTO-02/12
Section 3.4.6 “Unpowered Mode” on pages 17 to 18 changed
Section 3.6 “Voltage Regulator” on page 21 changed
Section 7 “Application” on page 456 added
308
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
10. Table of Contents
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
LIN System-basis-chip Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Wake-up Scenarios from Silent or Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
5.
Microcontroller Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Data Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
About Code Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
AVR CPU Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
AVR Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
System Clock and Clock Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Power Management and Sleep Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10 System Control and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.11 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.12 External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.13 I/O-Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.14 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.15 16-bit Timer/Counter1 with PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.16 Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 Prescalers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
5.17 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
5.18 SPI – Serial Peripheral Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
5.19 USART0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
5.20 USART in SPI Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5.21 2-wire Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
5.22 Analog Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
5.23 Analog-to-Digital Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5.24 debugWIRE On-chip Debug System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.25 Self-programming the Flash, ATmega328P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
5.26 Boot Loader Support – Read-while-write Self-programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.27 Memory Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
5.28 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
5.29 Typical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5.30 Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
5.31 Instruction Set Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
6.
7.
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
309
9240I–AUTO–03/16
8.
9.
Package Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
10. Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
310
ATA6614Q [DATASHEET]
9240I–AUTO–03/16
X
X X X X
X
Atmel Corporation
1600 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 USA
T: (+1)(408) 441.0311
F: (+1)(408) 436.4200
|
www.atmel.com
© 2016 Atmel Corporation. / Rev.: 9240I–AUTO–03/16
Atmel®, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, Enabling Unlimited Possibilities®, AVR®, and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel Corporation in U.S.
and other countries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others.
DISCLAIMER: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property right
is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE ATMEL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALES LOCATED ON THE
ATMEL WEBSITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS AND PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this
document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and products descriptions at any time without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information
contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel products are not intended,
authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.
SAFETY-CRITICAL, MILITARY, AND AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS DISCLAIMER: Atmel products are not designed for and will not be used in connection with any applications where
the failure of such products would reasonably be expected to result in significant personal injury or death (“Safety-Critical Applications”) without an Atmel officer's specific written
consent. Safety-Critical Applications include, without limitation, life support devices and systems, equipment or systems for the operation of nuclear facilities and weapons systems.
Atmel products are not designed nor intended for use in military or aerospace applications or environments unless specifically designated by Atmel as military-grade. Atmel products are
not designed nor intended for use in automotive applications unless specifically designated by Atmel as automotive-grade.
相关型号：
ATA6616C-P3QW
RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, AVR RISC CPU, 16MHz, CMOS, 5 X 7 MM, VQFN-38
ATMEL
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明